initial commit of ebook 36314HEADmain

12 files changed, 22957 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/36314-0.txt b/36314-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3ccb95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6610 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+Author: Gerald Breckenridge
+
+Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: “What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40]
+
+
+
+
+                             THE RADIO BOYS
+                               RESCUE THE
+                         LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+
+                         By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+                               AUTHOR OF
+
+           “The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio
+             Boys on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys
+               with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’
+                    Search for the Inca’s Treasure.”
+
+
+                           A. L. BURT COMPANY
+                          Publishers—New York
+
+
+
+
+                         THE RADIO BOYS SERIES
+
+                A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages
+
+                         By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+                  The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border
+                 The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty
+                 The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards
+             The Radio Boys’ Search for the Inca’s Treasure
+            The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+                            Copyright, 1922
+                         By A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+            THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+
+                           Made in “U. S. A.”
+
+
+
+
+The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.—THE LOST EXPEDITION.
+
+
+“Strange that you boys should be talking about the ‘Lost Expedition.’”
+
+“Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?”
+
+“Because I have just come from a conference with a man who knows all
+there is to know about it. And he was telling me——.”
+
+Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into the sitting room, and looked
+at the faces of the three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and the
+latter’s chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who together had gone
+through many adventures related in other books of “The Radio Boys”
+series.
+
+It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here the four,
+arriving from South America, after finding and losing “The Enchanted
+City of the Incas” as told of in “The Radio Boys Search for the Incas’
+Treasure,” were ensconced on their way to their Long Island homes.
+
+“Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?”
+
+“Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” added Frank “We’re curious.”
+
+“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’” countered Mr. Hampton.
+“I stood in the doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing
+it.”
+
+“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper tells,” said big Bob,
+grumblingly, “And the fellow that wrote this yarn didn’t know very much.
+It’s mostly talk.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“Speculation, I suppose,” he said. “Well, that’s the best the writer
+could do. The facts aren’t generally known. However, wait a minute until
+I get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. It’s raining
+again.”
+
+“Raining again?” said Jack. “Doesn’t it ever stop here?”
+
+“Oh, that’s just the Seattle Winter,” said his father. “The rains are
+necessary, and, really, they are so mild one doesn’t mind them after a
+time.”
+
+“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these people would grow web feet.”
+
+“Look here,” said Mr. Hampton, after getting into his smoking jacket and
+slippers. “What I learned today ought to interest you boys.”
+
+“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward eagerly.
+
+“Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it,” said his father. “Then
+you’ll see.”
+
+Then, while the three young fellows paid close attention, Mr. Hampton
+proceeded to relate the story of the “Lost Expedition” so-called, the
+expedition headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer,
+which had outfitted at Seattle the previous Spring, set out for an
+unnamed destination in the Far North, and had never been heard of since.
+
+A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had attended the departure of
+this expedition in its sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses
+and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers and among the
+hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. Some said confidently that the
+expedition was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by airplane, for
+an airplane was carried dismantled on the schooner. Others declared the
+object sought was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors of vast
+gold fields found in the past by this or that old-time prospector who
+died without making his secret public, were brought to light and
+furbished up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to bear out the
+contention.
+
+“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr. Hampton, “was correct. The
+real object of the expedition never was made public, for the very good
+reason that none of those in the know—and their numbers are few—ever
+betrayed a word, or hint, of the secret.”
+
+“And you know it?” asked Jack, with quickened interest.
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly.
+
+“Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” said Frank.
+
+“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with curiosity,” advised big
+Bob. “Show that boy a secret and he’s not content until he takes it
+apart.”
+
+“How about yourself?” said Frank, indignantly. “I suppose you don’t care
+to hear, hey? Oh, no.”
+
+Mr. Hampton interrupted.
+
+“Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. I know all you boys
+are eager to know the answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’
+Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is——”
+
+He paused. Then added:
+
+“Oil.”
+
+“Oil?”
+
+All three listeners asked the question as if in one breath. Big Bob was
+no less inquisitive than the others, despite his twigging of Frank for
+his curiosity.
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“Yes,” he said. “Oil.”
+
+For a moment he was silent, collecting his thoughts. Then he leaned
+forward, cleared his throat and continued:
+
+“Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. The Northland for you,
+probably, is invested in a mysterious glamor. It means either men
+struggling through incalculable hardships to win their way to the North
+Pole, to the top of the world, or else fighting against all the mighty
+forces of Nature in a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden
+wealth from the bosom of the Earth.
+
+“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I know how you feel.
+Whenever our preconceived and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense
+of disappointment. But, consider for a moment, the meaning of this
+matter. Here, far away in the Northland, in a remote district to which
+so far as known only two white men have ever penetrated, lies a mighty
+river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean, along the banks of which are
+such vast deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into the
+river to such an extent that the river in reality is a river of oil and
+never freezes.”
+
+“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” said Jack. “Do you expect us
+to believe that?”
+
+“And flowing north, too?” said Frank, whose quick mind had seized upon
+that point of contrariety in Nature.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled.
+
+“Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he said. “Yet that this
+river does flow north is undoubted. That it never freezes, however, is
+an exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots so much oil seeps
+into the water that soft spots are formed.
+
+“Hitherto,” he continued, “there have been only two rivers known that
+flow north into the Arctic in that region—the MacKenzie and the
+Coppermine, along the shores of which are vast deposits of copper that
+some day, undoubtedly, will be opened up to exploitation. However, this
+other northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil field must now
+be added to the list, if the word of the lone explorer is to believed,
+of the one man who has been there and lived to return with the tale.”
+
+“But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?”
+objected Jack.
+
+“So I did. So I did,” declared his father. “And two there were—Cameron
+and Farrell. But Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell
+alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally reach Edmonton with
+the tale. Now he, too, is gone—for he was a member of Thorwaldsson’s
+‘Lost Expedition.’
+
+“When he reached Edmonton, a thriving Canadian city, Farrell, an
+adventurous fellow who at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil
+fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent operators which
+once employed me there as superintendent, realized the value of his
+discovery and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with Anderson,
+the big man of the syndicate. Anderson saw at once the importance of the
+find. But he also saw that Farrell’s marvelous oil field would virtually
+have to be rediscovered before steps to develop it could be taken. For,
+in struggling through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss of
+his compass, had been turned about in Winter fogs, had lain delirious
+for a long period in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic
+Circle and, in general, had suffered so many hardships that his mind was
+clouded and he had no clear idea of where lay this oil field.
+
+“Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell’s report that he
+decided to outfit an expedition to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and
+Cameron into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming upon the
+oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone in through Alaska, that was the way
+which Thorwaldsson’s expedition took.”
+
+Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing his father closely, now
+put a hand on his arm.
+
+“And now what, Dad?” he asked.
+
+“Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after the ‘Lost Expedition’ and
+try to relocate the oil fields as well as find some trace of
+Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton.
+
+“I thought so,” said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. “When do we
+start?”
+
+“We?” Mr. Hampton chuckled. “I like that. Just as cool as you please
+about it, too. We? Well, well.”
+
+“Do we leave at once?” asked Jack, imperturbably, not one whit disturbed
+by his father’s pleasantry.
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+“Whether I take you at all is questionable,” he said. “Certainly, I have
+no intention of going at once. If I go at all, it will not be until the
+Arctic Summer begins.”
+
+“Meantime, I suppose, I’m to return to Yale.”
+
+“Yes, you’ve missed a half year, thanks to our adventures in search of
+the Incas’ treasure in South America, but that is no reason why you
+should miss the balance of the term. I’ll tell you what,” he added,
+taking pity on the three, “if you fellows go back to college and study
+hard to make up for lost time until Summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’
+is still lost at that time, why, I’ll see what can be done.”
+
+“Hurray,” cried Jack. “That’s a promise.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.—SETTING OUT FROM NOME.
+
+
+“Well, boys, where do we go from here?”
+
+It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a heap of luggage on
+the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at
+the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. Hampton deep in
+conversation with a short sturdy figure of a man, clad in khaki
+breeches, high leather boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away.
+The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the independent oil
+interests at Nome.
+
+It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the boys were beginning to
+realize meant hot weather, indeed. All had their coats off, and were
+perspiring. Only an hour before they had been put ashore by the steamer
+from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their
+luggage while he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed to meet
+them at the landing as they had expected.
+
+“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated Frank’s question. “Well, if
+you ask me, almost any place would be better than Nome.”
+
+He looked with disfavor at the little town sprawling at the base of the
+mountain.
+
+“Not just what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard of Nome all my life, it
+seems, and now, just look at it. Why, it’s hardly a spot on the map.”
+
+“But what a history it has had, Jack,” said Frank. “Don’t judge by
+appearances too much. Remember this town has seen the Gold Rush.”
+
+“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” said Jack, ignoring Frank’s
+remark.
+
+“Probably discussing how soon we can get away,” said big Bob, speaking
+for the first time. “At any rate,” he added, “I see your father and his
+companion pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore.”
+
+At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for Mr. Hampton and his
+companion ended their conversation and approached the boys.
+
+“Well, boys, we’ll soon be under way,” said Mr. Hampton. Whereupon he
+introduced Farnum all around. The latter was a prepossessing man with a
+weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, above which jutted a
+promontory of a nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes.
+
+“That is our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton continued, indicating the
+boat to which Bob earlier had drawn attention. “Mr. Farnum,” he added,
+“has stated casually around Nome that he is taking a party of hunters up
+the MacKenzie. We’ll get away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a
+stay in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid inquiries into our
+aims. The story Farnum has told will do well enough.”
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+“Just a white lie,” he said, grinning. “No use letting the curious know
+all your secrets.”
+
+Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end of which period the
+luggage was safely stowed aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw
+began to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and draw away from
+Nome, the boys leaned overside and watched the prospect dwindle in the
+distance until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside like a
+painted backdrop in the theater.
+
+“Hurray,” cried Bob, at last, “we’re off for the Great Unknown.”
+
+“Yes,” agreed Frank, “I really feel that way, too. All the way up from
+Seattle, I felt as if I were nothing more than a tourist, traveling a
+beaten route. But this, well, this is different.”
+
+After that they were silent a long time, while the schooner shook and
+throbbed and steadily pushed its way up the coast, each boy busy with
+his thoughts. Yet those thoughts were much the same.
+
+Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on their return from
+South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the
+Incas, they had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost
+time in the first half of the term. All three were clever and had the
+knack of concentrating at their tasks, and all as a consequence had
+succeeded in making up back work in classroom and lecture. As a result
+they had entered the succeeding term, or at least were prepared to do
+so, without conditions. This was a matter for congratulation, indeed,
+and deserving of especial reward.
+
+That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both decided
+that their respective sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be
+permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip to attempt to find some
+trace of the “Lost Expedition” and of the reputed oil field in search of
+which Thorwaldsson had set out.
+
+“Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of the Northland,” Mr. Hampton
+had explained to Mr. Temple, “and, as a consequence, I do not consider
+that we will run any danger. Our greatest danger, of course, would be to
+become trapped in the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the
+rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For I do not intend to
+spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by
+the early Fall.
+
+“That,” he added, “will give us plenty of opportunity to seek traces of
+the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I have been in communication with Farnum. His
+plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and
+then strike eastward. We will leave the gasoline schooner to make its
+way back to Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our journey on
+rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding the River of Oil flowing north.
+
+“If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings of approaching
+Winter come, we will turn to the southeast and come out in northern
+Canada.
+
+“The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will be of inestimable value
+for them. It will make them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon
+themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to be youths of that
+sort already,” he added, smiling. “If you could have seen them in South
+America, George, it would have done your heart good.”
+
+“I know, I know,” said Mr. Temple, shaking his head slightly, and
+smiling. “Several years ago, that time when you were captive in Mexico
+and they set out to rescue you—”
+
+“Yes, and did,” supplied Mr. Hampton.
+
+“And did,” agreed Mr. Temple. “Well, they showed the stuff that was in
+them then. And the very same Summer, when I took them to San Francisco
+on what I considered was going to be a little pleasure trip combining a
+bit of business with sight-seeing, and—”
+
+“And you became involved with the Chinese smugglers, and imprisoned, and
+ended up by busting up their show—”
+
+“Yes,” resumed Mr. Temple, “and ended up by bringing the whole outfit
+into the hands of Uncle Sam’s men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly
+showed their calibre.”
+
+“So, I reckon it will be all right to take them along on this trip,”
+said Mr. Hampton.
+
+“I suppose so,” agreed Mr. Temple. “But innocent as it looks now, I have
+my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, there
+you can look for things to move fast. Trouble courts them, it seems to
+me.”
+
+Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on the trip into
+the Far North. And wildly excited they had gone about their
+preparations. Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing up
+radio field equipment of every sort right at home. But his father had
+dissuaded him, pointing out that Seattle was a large city and there
+everything necessary in the way of an outfit could be purchased, thus
+saving the trouble and expense of transporting overland to the Pacific
+port.
+
+“All right, Dad,” Jack had agreed. “But, remember, the selection of the
+radio equipment is to be left to the fellows and me. We’ve had a lot of
+experience with the value of radio when in a tight place, especially in
+South America, and we want to put that experience to use and be prepared
+for every contingency this time.”
+
+To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with the result that in Seattle
+the three boys had revelled in the radio equipment stores, which they
+found well stocked, as the use of radio had developed greatly on the
+Pacific.
+
+In consequence, their outfit included radio field equipment of the most
+powerful, yet most compact, designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully
+realized the value of having the very best yet he had issued a solemn
+warning that bulk must be considered.
+
+“We will have to travel as lightly as consistent with safety and the
+purpose of our expedition,” he had said. “So don’t pile up anything too
+heavy or bulky, or it will have to be discarded.”
+
+Jack knew well that the distance which can be covered with a radiophone
+transmitter is only about one-fourth as great as that of a wireless
+telegraph transmitter having the same input of initial current.
+Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly for aid, over long
+distances, the wireless telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as
+equipment for it would be less bulky to transport than equipment for
+transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, he was reluctant to place
+their sole dependence upon the wireless telegraph.
+
+“You see, Dad,” he had pointed out to his father, when the outfit was
+being assembled, “to reach the outside we shall have to depend upon
+wireless telegraph. But we will also need the radiophone for this
+reason: that each one of us ought to have a means of calling the main
+party in case we become separated through going on scouting or hunting
+expeditions, or for any reason.”
+
+“Well, that sounds sensible,” his father had agreed. “Go ahead with your
+plans, but, remember, hold down the bulk.”
+
+The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing five hundred miles
+was assembled, but also Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one
+for each of their party and for Farnum, which the user could pack in his
+clothing and which had a radius up to twenty-five miles. The instrument
+was Jack’s now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a setting
+only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Formerly an umbrella as aerial
+had been employed but Jack had done entirely away with that in his
+improved set.
+
+“Well, fellows,” said Jack, at last, as Nome faded entirely from view,
+“I wonder what lies ahead. I wonder whether Thorwaldsson’s expedition
+was stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly likely, as in that
+case surely somebody would have managed to get word to the outside by
+wireless or airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise attack by
+Indians at night, as I understand from Dad that Farnum believes.”
+
+“Is that so,” said Frank, in surprise. “That’s the first I heard of
+that.”
+
+“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad told me of it when we were coming aboard this
+schooner. He said it was the first intimation Farnum had given him that
+such might be the case, and also his first intimation that there were
+hostile Indians in this country into which we are going. If it weren’t
+too late, he told me, he would have turned back rather than imperil us,
+as it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear of the
+hostile Indian country.”
+
+“Whew,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, hey, what?”
+
+His eyes began to shine.
+
+“Old Bob. Always ready for a fight,” said Frank. “Well, let’s give him
+one.”
+
+And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big fellow and a tussle
+followed that ended only when they almost fell overboard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.—IN THE WILDERNESS.
+
+
+“Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner.”
+
+It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner which was eaten
+on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River,
+one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. How long it was since
+they had left Nome none could tell, for in that land of perpetual
+daylight it was hard to keep track of time.
+
+“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “when is tomorrow?”
+
+He looked at the sun which was still high, despite the lateness of the
+hour, and would make only an ineffectual attempt to dip below the
+horizon at midnight, before resuming its upward climb.
+
+Everybody laughed.
+
+“What a topsy turvy land,” said Jack. “Well, I, for one, will be glad to
+go ashore and stretch my legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far,
+I’m eager to get started.”
+
+“Same here,” agreed Frank.
+
+Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the monotony of the trip up
+the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American
+continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of course, occasional ice floes
+had been encountered and the little schooner had been compelled to make
+wide detours. But that was to be expected in that Far Northern latitude.
+
+In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice
+was only recently dissipated from the great river. There, at a dock
+where a little sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in Summer
+was tied up for repairs, they had replenished their stock of gasoline
+and then continued the ascent, passing between willowed banks, where
+huddled occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, with the
+snow-capped mountain peaks always in the distance.
+
+Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon had
+put beyond them all appearance of the presence of man.
+
+“This is the way Thorwaldsson’s party expected to go,” Farnum had said.
+“For it was this route which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors,
+followed on their way in. They were prospecting for gold, you know, had
+no idea of finding oil. It was their original intention to strike
+northeast across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare Indian in
+search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he reached the outside, that
+he had found traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold.”
+
+Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian a number of days until, in
+fact, the extra supplies of gasoline which had been taken aboard on
+leaving the MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became advisable
+for the party to go ashore in order that the schooner might turn about
+and have sufficient fuel to make its way downstream to the supply depot.
+
+It was a period of time that, in fact, however, could hardly be
+considered in terms of days. So far north had the party come that the
+sun shone perpetually. It was only at midnight, for a brief space, that
+it dipped to the horizon.
+
+And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for all concerned, but
+especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner forged ahead,
+there was not a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise.
+Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, probably an escape from some
+Eskimo herd, which would be surprised standing in the water, and
+breaking for the timber on the bank at their approach. Again brown bear
+would be seen on the bank, or beaver swimming strongly across the
+stream. As for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All Bob, Frank
+and Jack did for hours on end was to lean overside with hooks baited
+with bacon rind dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled
+beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on wild duck or geese, picked
+off with a light rifle.
+
+Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay ashore
+on the morrow. And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they
+lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an awning shading them from
+the sun.
+
+Early the next morning they went ashore with their outfit, and then
+watched the gasoline schooner throb off downstream, around the last
+bend, and out of sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came
+to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation natural to their
+situation. The last settlement was two hundred miles behind them. They
+were going into the great unknown, into the regions marked “Unexplored”
+on the maps of that great northern rim of the North American continent.
+
+True, the weather was fine now and the country green and pleasant about
+them. But how long would that endure? What if they were beset by
+oncoming Winter before they could make their way to the outside? What if
+they were attacked by hostile Indians? What obscure fate had met the
+Thorwaldsson expedition, traces of which they sought?
+
+Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as they stood in unwonted
+silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them.
+
+“No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his job.”
+
+With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted men. They hailed from Nome,
+but were old-timers who had been up and down Alaska for many years. Both
+were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who would be useful in helping
+distribute the burden of packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable
+value in keeping the party supplied with game as well as in almost any
+situation that might arise. They were grizzled, weather-beaten men of
+medium height, both with stout frames, and because of their long
+existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. Their names
+were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to
+each other and the other members of the party. The boys had taken a
+liking to both.
+
+Two light canoes had been brought along from Nome, lashed to the deck of
+the schooner, and in these the seven set out. The boys with Dick
+occupied one canoe, the other three men with a larger portion of the
+luggage the other.
+
+When everything was in readiness, following a light breakfast on the
+bank, the two canoes set out, that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and
+Art taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids was encountered,
+and around this the first portage was made. Then once more they took to
+the water.
+
+Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed steadily forward,
+until almost a week had elapsed. On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a
+whoop of joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the stream at a
+little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had detected a small cairn of
+stones on the edge of the brush, and when the others came up with him
+and stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing the stones
+comprising the mound.
+
+“A marker,” was the only explanation he vouchsafed. “Must have been left
+by Thorwaldsson. Ah.”
+
+At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a small metal box in his
+hand. The lid was rusted on, and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a
+knife and gouged it off while the others crowded around him. Inside was
+a fold of oilskin, which he ripped open. A folded paper was revealed,
+which he opened. Then he read aloud the message thereon.
+
+“It’s from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen,” he said, and read:
+
+  “Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, Wash., that
+  I passed here July 2. Party intact with exception of crew sent as he
+  ordered. Farrell says we are on right track.
+
+                                                       “Thorwaldsson.”
+
+“What does he mean by that reference to the crew?” asked Jack.
+
+“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, “as your father knows,
+that is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation, that
+about the ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard the ship
+and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But of ship or crew, we have
+found no trace. Search for the ship was prosecuted at the first
+opportunity this Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the
+MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could gather was an
+occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had gone by, on its
+way out, at night. A ship that might have been the Viking,
+Thorwaldsson’s craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, the skeleton crew
+feared to winter in the MacKenzie and started for the outside, and was
+caught in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to weather. Only
+three or four men were to be left aboard. That is the only explanation I
+could think of.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“As I said before,” he stated, “that seems a reasonable explanation.
+Three or four men, left alone, might have feared to face the Winter iced
+in, or might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason that
+appeared good enough to them, might have decided to violate orders and
+start out. As to the disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned
+vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a trace.”
+
+“But, Dad, you’ve said nothing about this,” protested Jack.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly.
+
+“There are a lot of things which I know I have never told you, Jack,” he
+said. “If I really have neglected to speak of this, however, it has been
+through an oversight. I’ve had a lot of things on my mind. But, come. We
+know this is the way Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. So
+let us push on. We have still four hours of travel to do before making
+camp.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.—STRIKING GOLD.
+
+
+Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the boys, during the weeks
+that followed. They were so far north that the sun shone constantly, and
+never a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to drive them to
+take shelter. When they camped it was usually in the dim cool recesses
+of a forest of firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found the
+only semblance of night.
+
+Never before had they known the delights of camp life, as they were now
+living it. It was like being on one continuous picnic. For a
+considerable period of time they found themselves in a mesh or network
+of streams and lakes, through which Tom Farnum guided them steadily
+northeastward, with never a sign of doubt as to the course to take.
+
+They wondered about this, asked why they took certain forks of river or
+stream, why avoided others. Tom answered readily enough. From Mr.
+Anderson he had received a minute report containing every scrap of data
+Farrell had been able to furnish as to the course taken by him and
+Cameron on going into the wild country.
+
+“So you see,” he added, “while I may not be following in the exact
+footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet I am going over the same general route.
+Sooner or later we will cover the same ground which he covered again,
+and then I expect we shall find some other record which he has left
+behind, just as in the case of that note on the Hare Indian.”
+
+This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They
+dismissed, or practically so, from their minds all worry as to the “Lost
+Expedition.” They were too busy enjoying life as they found it each
+waiting moment.
+
+Around each bend in a stream that their paddles took them, on the shore
+of each deep, silent lake, was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear
+grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a runaway from some Eskimo
+herd on Summer pasture as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, and
+starting with a snort into the timber at their approach. Occasionally a
+gray wolf could be seen loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver
+cut across stream.
+
+With their light rifles the boys occasionally were permitted to pick off
+some game, usually wild ducks or geese, of which there were numbers
+along the watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. Many a time,
+youthful fingers itched on the trigger, only to be restrained by the
+thought of the cruel uselessness of shooting merely for sport.
+
+Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, none were
+encountered. And at this the boys marvelled. It was as if they had the
+world to themselves. They could not understand it. To them it was a
+paradise.
+
+“Wait till you see this in Winter,” said Farnum grimly. “Or rather, pray
+that you never do. It is a land of perpetual night, and the temperature
+is so low that when you stop moving you must have a fire or you will
+freeze to death. And it isn’t every day that you can travel. For this
+isn’t a land of tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north comes
+storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. Even the creatures of the
+wild cannot stand it, in many cases, and drift to the south.”
+
+“But how about the Eskimo?” asked Jack. “This is their country, isn’t
+it? How do they stand it?”
+
+“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When the hunting is poor and
+famine stalks through the Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive.”
+
+“Where do they live, anyway?” struck in Frank. “Why aren’t they around
+here? Why haven’t we seen any?”
+
+“They may have seen us,” said Farnum, “and are avoiding us. They are a
+timorous people, know the white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo,
+the white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo of all this
+country north of us. Back along the coast of Alaska, of course, some
+sort of contact has been made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with
+the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer they range far and
+wide on the hunt. In the Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic
+Ocean.”
+
+“But why?” asked Bob, in surprise. “I should think that would be the
+very place for them to steer away from.”
+
+“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all game goes far to the south in
+Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because it is the home of the
+only game left—the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps
+near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air.
+Occasionally he slays a polar bear, too.”
+
+“I confess I know very little about the Eskimo,” said Jack. “What are
+his weapons?”
+
+“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and
+wooden knives edged with copper,” said Farnum.
+
+“But, a bear,” cried Bob, incredulously. “How could an Eskimo kill a
+great polar bear with such weapons?”
+
+“Single-handed, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But when the bear is hunted,
+the whole tribe of hunters go together. They attack in a circle. Their
+spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into
+the body of the bear, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges
+on his tormenters. Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they have him so
+surrounded that he cannot move. Then one dashes in and administers the
+death blow.”
+
+“Then necessity forces them to live in tribal groups?” asked Jack.
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+“In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging far, for they are great
+travelers. But in Winter, the hunters are all back with the tribe.”
+
+“And the Indians?” asked Frank.
+
+Farnum’s face darkened.
+
+“There are not many,” he said. “I wish there were less. You may say all
+you please about the ‘noble red man.’ But all I ever heard about the
+Indians of the Far North doesn’t predispose me in their favor. They are
+cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually they hunt somewhat to the south
+of us, and make their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements
+as Winter approaches. Let’s hope we encounter none of them.”
+
+The boys wondered as they went along whether this were gold-producing
+country into which they were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick,
+their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was usually, at every
+mention of gold his eyes brightened, and he became almost voluble.
+
+“Never been this far north,” he said on one occasion, “no white man ever
+has been in here, reckon. But I’d like to stop at the foot o’ some of
+these rapids and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like to.”
+
+“Let’s do it the next rapids we come to,” suggested Frank, with eager
+interest. “It wouldn’t take long, would it?”
+
+“Orders is not to waste time.”
+
+“Well, I’ll speak to father,” said Jack. “I’m sure he’d let us try it
+just once.”
+
+In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt happened to be at the
+foot of a rapids that would necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art
+reported the graveled bank showed signs of “color.” Even Farnum, his
+mind concentrated on the task of getting his party along and on the job
+in hand, showed interest when addressed on the subject. With pick and
+pan, therefore, the two men got busy, while the boys watched with
+breathless interest the process of rocking the pan and washing out the
+gravel.
+
+“Whoopee,” cried Dick, suddenly. “Thar she is. Color in the pan.”
+
+“Sure as I’m born,” ejaculated his partner. “Strong, too.”
+
+All the boys could discern, however, were some dully gleaming particles
+at the bottom of the pan, out of which most of the gravel had been
+washed with the water. They had half expected to spy nuggets. Farnum and
+Mr. Hampton, however, were as eagerly interested as the two old-timers.
+
+“Try another pan, men,” suggested Mr. Hampton. “Let us go a little
+farther upstream.”
+
+Once more the process was repeated. This time the pan was rich in “pay”
+and the excitement of the four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing
+dull beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers especially.
+
+Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a clump of rocks in the
+edge of the stream at the very foot of the rapids, standing in his boots
+almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried
+and finally, with a shout of delight, turned to his audience behind him
+on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up
+dripping.
+
+“Look,” was all he said.
+
+They gazed, all eyes.
+
+“Well! Well!” cried Art.
+
+A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick’s outstretched palm.
+
+“What luck,” cried Jack. “You certainly looked in the right place.”
+
+“Bet there’s more gold around here,” cried Frank. “Maybe a bonanza. Who
+knows?”
+
+“You ought to stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob. “I don’t know much
+about the process. But that’s the thing to do, isn’t it?”
+
+“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “Belongs to you boys well as me. You
+thought of it.”
+
+“Oughter work it,” spoke up Art. “Might take out a good poke this
+Summer.”
+
+This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object of his expedition.
+
+“No, no, men,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get bitten with the gold fever
+now. We’ve got work ahead of us, work that we contracted to do.”
+
+“Right,” said Dick.
+
+Art’s face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement.
+
+“Just the same,” said Farnum, softening, “there’s nothing to prevent you
+two from staking a claim. Some day you may come back to work it.”
+
+“Belongs to us no more’n the rest o’ you,” said Dick, sturdily. “The
+young fellers wanted us to make a try at it here just for luck, an’ we
+did.”
+
+A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they were not entitled to
+any part in the find. Finally Dick capitulated.
+
+“Tell you what,” he said. “Art an’ me’ll stake this claim an’ file on
+it. But if we ever come back to work her an’ she pays, we’ll declare you
+in.”
+
+“Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition,” said Jack,
+turning for confirmation to his comrades. “Isn’t that right, fellows.”
+
+Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the discussion.
+
+“Good enough,” he said. “Let it go at that. Now we must buckle into the
+job. Do you realize we’ve spent more than two hours here, when we should
+have stopped only a half hour? We’ve got to make this portage and push
+on. Come on. Everybody to his task.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.—A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR
+
+
+Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with Mr. Hampton and Tom
+Farnum it was a different matter. They were worried, that became
+increasingly plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely refrained
+from saying anything to disturb the boys, Jack took note of his father’s
+perturbation and questioned him about it.
+
+“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been weeks on the trail. We can’t
+proceed much farther, without being compelled to start out. And yet so
+far we have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson’s party. When we
+entered the MacKenzie, which flows north, we were going to the south.
+Going up the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into the streams,
+rivers and lakes we have been going east. Shortly we shall strike the
+Coppermine, Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by Farrell.
+
+“So far we have made good time. With luck, we shall be able to reach
+that territory before having to turn back or, rather, for we shall not
+retrace our steps, turn south. And we should have struck some other
+trace of Thorwaldsson’s party long ere this, if we are on the right
+track. However, you boys need not worry about this, so let’s talk of
+something else.”
+
+Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his rare periods when he
+wished to be alone with his meditations and did not welcome intrusion
+even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades.
+
+“Dad’s plainly worried,” he said. And he explained the circumstances.
+“Wish I could find some way to make him forget his troubles,” he said.
+
+“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music. We’re camping for the night.
+Although”—with a look at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there?
+Well, anyhow, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting
+station was set up last Spring. Let’s rig up our radio and see if we
+can’t pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you say?”
+
+“I say, good,” declared Jack.
+
+“Edmonton’s long way off,” objected Bob.
+
+“That’s nothing,” said Jack. “I believe we can pick it up all right.”
+
+“In this northern country we have no static problem, anyway,” said
+Frank. “We couldn’t send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I’ll bet we
+can catch.”
+
+While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads together in low-whispered
+conversation, poring over a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched
+under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the three boys quietly
+got out the necessary equipment from among the luggage and set to work.
+
+“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I saw two firs taller
+than most, standing alone. They’re a pretty good distance apart, too. We
+can climb up those trees and string the aerial between them.”
+
+They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, and found them exactly
+suited to the purpose. Jack and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns
+climbing the trees, and the wires were strung without any great
+difficulty. They worked busily, and when everything was all connected
+up, Bob looked at his watch.
+
+“Allowing for the difference in time,” he said, “they’re about ready to
+begin their concert. On what meter wave length does the Edmonton station
+send, Frank?”
+
+“I don’t recall. About three hundred and fifty, I suppose. We’ll tune up
+and try, anyway.”
+
+“What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought of this before,” said
+Jack.
+
+“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never did interest me much,
+anyway. I like to do the sending myself, we’ve always been dog-tired
+when we made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly as Art and
+Dick. If it hadn’t been for your thought of bringing some relaxation and
+amusement to your father tonight, Jack, we’d have been asleep already.”
+
+“I guess that’s right, old thing,” Jack replied. “You would have been
+asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she
+say, Frank? Any luck yet?”
+
+Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, looked up mirthfully.
+
+“What do you think of your musical program, Jack?” he replied. “Listen
+in a minute will you? They’re sending out a crop and weather report.”
+
+Jack’s face fell, then he, too, laughed.
+
+“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just a preliminary. The concert will
+follow.”
+
+“No,” answered Frank, who had resumed his headpiece, “now it’s a
+bulletin report on the day’s news events. Listen. Why, great—”
+
+His voice died. Over his face came an expression of surprise.
+
+Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces attached to the box.
+Over their features also spread amazement and even consternation. They
+listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore off the receivers
+and looked at each other.
+
+“Whew, what do you know about that?” said Bob, in an awed tone.
+
+“And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too,” said
+Frank.
+
+“It seems like the hand of fate,” declared Jack. “Say, we must get
+father and Tom Farnum.”
+
+“Thorwaldsson’s airship found wrecked on land near the mouth of the
+MacKenzie,” said Bob. “And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat
+it?” he ejaculated again.
+
+“Hey, Jack, wait a minute,” cried Frank, running after his companion,
+who already had started for camp. “Discovered by Indians who were
+bringing out furs, did you get that?”
+
+Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued to run. Frank fell in
+beside him, Bob pounding at his heels.
+
+In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the graveled beach by the
+river, where camp had been made for the night. Dick and Art lay
+outstretched in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and apparently had not even
+been aware of the absence of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as
+the latter approached.
+
+“What is it, Jack? What’s the matter?” demanded Mr. Hampton, rising to
+his feet in alarm, as he noted his son’s excitement.
+
+Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing their setting up of
+the radio, their picking-up of the Edmonton station’s nightly program,
+and their discovery that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been found far
+behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie.
+
+“It was only a bulletin news report, Dad,” Jack explained, “yet I
+suppose it contains all the facts. Evidently the discovery of the
+airship had been made weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the
+MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, of course, it took a
+long time for the news to reach civilization. It was just made public
+today. The very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. It
+certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn’t it, Dad? If we had waited
+until tomorrow, or set up the radio yesterday, probably we would not
+have known of this discovery.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his mind was busy with the
+problem.
+
+“Did the report state any message or papers of any sort were found on
+the body of the aviator?”
+
+“No. Only that the body had been there a long time, as nothing but the
+skeleton remained.”
+
+“And that was all?”
+
+“That was all the definite information,” said Frank. “Of course, there
+was a word or two of speculation as to what had occurred. The theory was
+advanced that the aviator was flying to summon aid for Thorwaldsson, who
+was in some predicament, but that some accident occurred to his engine
+while flying, and he fell to his death.”
+
+“A plausible enough theory,” said Farnum. “But, in that case, I can’t
+understand why the aviator did not bear some message from Thorwaldsson.
+Can you, Mr. Hampton?”
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+“That’s not the only puzzling thing,” he said. “The disappearance from
+the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson’s ship, the death of the aviator, the lack
+of message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson and his party,
+Thorwaldsson’s failure to send any radio messages—all these need
+explaining.
+
+“We must face the fact,” he continued, “that some disaster of a totally
+unexpected nature has befallen Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And I mean by
+that a disaster of man’s agency. They were prepared for practically all
+eventualities in their grapple with nature. Although the Winter was
+severe, yet they were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the
+country, and were prepared in every way for a lengthy stay. Even if
+worst came to worst, and Winter proved too much for them, some would
+have survived and brought out word of what had befallen.”
+
+“Then you think, Dad—”
+
+Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed.
+
+“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it is time to take you
+boys into our complete confidence, Farnum and I have been talking this
+matter over. We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or group of
+men has knowledge of Farrell’s discovery of the river of oil, and is
+working against us. How to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do
+not know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson’s employ, somebody high
+in his confidence, got some word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an
+unguarded moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you know, is a
+vital necessity of the world. Discovery of a vast new field would make
+great fortunes.
+
+“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery, would realize that
+the only way to come upon it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson
+expedition, dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, strike. In
+other words, when the field was rediscovered by Farrell, wipe out the
+Thorwaldsson expedition, and claim possession.
+
+“Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with this theory. The
+disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it
+traveled only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading posts on
+the great river. It has never been heard of since. It might very easily
+have been scuttled and sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in
+some little bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would
+mean that the crew was bought up, but that is not an impossibility, for
+men I am sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, the
+aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, may have sought to make
+his escape to the outside when Thorwaldsson was captured—as I believe
+likely—and may have paid with his life for his devotion, through some
+unforeseen accident to his machine.”
+
+The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke silence.
+
+“But, Dad, how terrible,” he said in a shocked tone. “To think of men
+being so unscrupulous.”
+
+“Not all men, Jack,” said his father. “Remember that.”
+
+“Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “What do you intend to do?”
+
+“Frankly, I don’t know,” said the latter. “Now that we are within
+striking distance of our objective—the river of oil—I do not want to
+give up. If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it before
+necessity compels us to flee south to escape oncoming Winter. That will
+mean that we can map the route for future operation. I had at one time,
+too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some hope that we would
+be able to follow the river out into the Arctic and discover a route of
+approach by water. But we may not have time for that. However, once we
+do locate the river by land approach, we will have a pretty accurate
+idea of whether it can be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in
+Summer.
+
+“But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and the rest of us, in the
+light of what we suspect lies ahead, I do not know. We shall have to
+sleep over it.”
+
+After some further conversation, all returned to where the boys had
+rigged up the radio. Dick and Art were childishly delighted at the
+concert, the first in their experience. Farnum was almost equally
+stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot his worries in
+enjoyment of the music. As showmen, the boys were in the element.
+
+More than an hour passed, and the concert was still in progress, when
+Frank, who had been absent unnoted suddenly approached from the thick
+forest of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with a face so
+pale that Jack, who first caught sight of him, became alarmed.
+
+“What is it, Frank?” he asked, seizing his comrade by an arm.
+
+For a moment Frank was speechless. He swallowed convulsively, but was
+unable to make a reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, and
+all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing number of the
+concert, as they stared at him.
+
+With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards the point of land, making a
+bend in the stream, beyond which lay their camp.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.—INDIANS!
+
+
+“Indians.”
+
+That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over the faces of Mr.
+Hampton, Farnum and the two men, Dick and Art, came looks of alarm.
+
+“In camp,” asked Jack, a sudden thought striking him. “Maybe they’re
+just visitors.”
+
+But Farnum shook his head decisively, before Frank could reply.
+
+“The only Indians in this country hate the white man,” he said. “They
+have had some cause, goodness knows. But the point is, they hate us.”
+Turning abruptly to Frank, he said:
+
+“Do they know where we are? Were you seen?”
+
+“I was approaching our camp from this side,” said Frank, who had
+recovered his speech. “I was in search of a handkerchief, for I’ve got a
+little cold, and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, my feet made
+no sound on the pine needles, and I was screened from the camp by the
+trees. Suddenly, as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians or
+more steal out of the trees on the other side of the clearing. They fell
+upon our belongings and started going through them. I hurried away to
+warn you.”
+
+“Quick,” said Farnum, “there is no time to lose. We are seven and all
+armed. They saw us depart and probably thought this was a grand chance
+to rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were coming back at once.
+I imagine they are just thieves. Well, we’ll give them a lesson. Come
+on.”
+
+Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum’s arm.
+
+“Even if they are thieves,” he said. “We want no bloodshed. Shoot over
+their heads, if shooting is necessary.”
+
+Farnum’s face fell.
+
+“All right, sir,” he said. “Just as you say. But we’ll have to hurry, or
+they’ll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we would
+be out of luck, indeed.”
+
+With beating hearts, the party stole back through the trees, spread out
+with intervals of several yards between each. Dick and Art, who never
+stirred anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers who
+knew what it meant to be separated from their weapons in this wild land,
+were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, as
+had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his, and held the middle
+position. The other four were armed with their revolvers.
+
+As they neared the fringe of trees forming the last rampart between them
+and camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could
+see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered luggage, which
+had been opened and tossed about near the fire. Another group was at the
+water’s edge, loading the canoes which had been drawn up on the sand.
+
+“Just in time,” thought Jack.
+
+Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure of a man emerging from
+the little tent which Mr. Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer
+from rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off night chills in case
+they were late in getting out of the country, but which at present
+frequently was not set up on their halts. The present occasion, however,
+a whim to sleep under canvas rather than the fir trees had possessed
+him, and the tent had been set up.
+
+The man who caught Jack’s attention differed little in dress from Dick
+and Art, but about his head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in
+piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased by his long,
+drooping black mustaches. Jack could see him clearly, and thought that
+seldom had he looked upon a more villainous countenance. The fellow held
+a piece of paper in his hand, and was reading it with evident
+satisfaction.
+
+A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on his left, drew Jack’s
+attention. He looked at the latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum’s
+eyes were ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it at the man
+before the tent. The next moment there was a report, the paper fell from
+the fellow’s hand, and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain.
+
+“Just the hand,” Jack overheard Farnum say in a tone of vexation, as he
+prepared to fire again. But the other, seizing his wounded hand in the
+unwounded one, did not wait for the attack. Running low and in zigzag
+fashion, he darted for the cover of the trees on the other side of the
+camp, at the same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his
+companions.
+
+“Fire,” shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot after the fleeing man,
+that kicked up the dirt at his heels. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to
+kill.”
+
+Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his father’s exhortation fired
+high. The volley was general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum
+came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from the four revolvers of the
+others poured a succession of shots. It sounded as if an army were
+opening fire from the woods.
+
+The Indians did not stay upon the order of their going. Those grouped
+about the luggage ran after the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo
+the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed away along the
+graveled bank of the stream. One, however, sought to launch the canoes
+into the swift current before departing, but his first effort was
+ineffectual, and any further attempt was stopped by a bullet from Mr.
+Hampton’s revolver, which winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying
+after his fellows.
+
+“Dick, Art, here,” cried Farnum, peremptorily.
+
+The two ran to his side.
+
+“That was Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum explained rapidly, his voice betraying
+his excitement. “You can guess what that means?”
+
+The others nodded, with compressed lips.
+
+“I want you to trail them. Don’t run into danger, but see if their camp
+is nearby.”
+
+With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen were off at the run,
+not crossing the open camp, but circling it amongst the trees. Then
+Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at his heels.
+
+“That wasn’t just an attack from Indian thieves,” he said. “Mr.
+Hampton”—and his voice took on a solemn tone—“that was a blow from the
+enemy.”
+
+“What do you mean?”
+
+“They were desperadoes under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf.”
+
+“And he?”
+
+“He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and the most notorious
+bad man in the north. He is known not only throughout the length and
+breadth of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, too. From
+Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he has gambled,
+fought, knifed, murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, you
+consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To a certain extent, the
+towns and mining camps have grown more orderly and there are sheriffs
+‘north of 54.’ But might still rules in the camps.”
+
+Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on his rifle. As it was
+evident, however, that he had not yet finished, the others did not
+interrupt. Presently he resumed.
+
+“Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men of the lowest type come
+there in Summer, in droves, lured by the high wages. They form temporary
+alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, they depart. You can
+guess what the children of such lawless unions are like. They are
+cross-breeds, inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics of
+the human race. It is from them Lupo recruits his following.”
+
+“But why should they be away over here, in this unpeopled wilderness?”
+asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—” He paused and looked questioningly at
+Farnum.
+
+The latter nodded.
+
+“That’s it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you will let me finish for you,
+Lupo is on our trail. And that I believe to be the case. When Frank here
+first came with word of Indians in camp, I considered them merely
+raiders from some passing body of hunters. But when I found Lupo at
+their head, I knew better. The wonder to me is,” he said, growing
+thoughtful, “that he did not send men to trail us and kill us or take us
+prisoner.”
+
+Mr. Hampton shrugged.
+
+“Even the cunningest slip up now and then,” he said. “Perhaps his men
+wanted to loot first. And, anyway, they had only been here a few moments
+when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise them. Well, thanks to
+our good angel, we came off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our
+canoes still here, nobody hurt.”
+
+“Ah,” said Farnum, darkly, “we’re not out of the woods yet. If Lupo the
+Wolf is after us, well—there is trouble ahead.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.—A MAN OF THE “MOUNTED.”
+
+
+While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to take inventory to discover
+what, if anything, had been stolen, the boys went back to take down and
+pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite direction from that
+taken by the Indians who, moreover, were being tracked by Dick and Art
+and could not double back without warning being given, it was considered
+safe for the boys.
+
+When they returned to camp, they found the two frontiersmen ahead of
+them. These reported the Indian camp pitched some two miles in their
+rear and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken
+canoe on the back track.
+
+“Now what does that mean?” asked Farnum, thoughtfully. “It is probable
+that Lupo has been behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true,
+namely that they have been trailing us. But why should they be fleeing
+now?”
+
+“They can’t have been close to us all the time, Mr. Farnum,” said Bob,
+“or why weren’t we attacked before?”
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+“That’s true enough,” he said. “It may be that Lupo started late and has
+been all this time catching up with us.”
+
+Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said:
+
+“As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable explanation. The
+other side, Farnum, probably has a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware.
+But the spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us into the
+wilderness to hunt may have deceived this spy. But then, later, word
+would reach him from Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly
+known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is trading on Farrell’s
+secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially as
+several years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in New Mexico. So
+words would reach Nome to watch me. Then someone would start out on our
+trail.”
+
+“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum. “A fine cutthroat.”
+
+An earnest discussion followed. What did this turning back of Lupo the
+Wolf mean? Did he intend to stick to their trail, but at a greater
+distance in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and lie in ambush
+ahead? That his retreat was other than momentary, and meant he intended
+giving up their pursuit, nobody believed.
+
+“Look here, Dad,” said Jack, during the course of this discussion,
+“don’t you consider it quite likely that Lupo intends to take us by
+surprise and attack us, rather than to retreat?”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“I do, indeed, Jack,” he said. “A cutthroat such as Lupo would have
+brought his band of desperadoes here for only one purpose, and that is,
+to dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason of the fact that
+they came upon our camp first, and stopped to loot. But from now on we
+shall have to be continually on our guard.”
+
+“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when
+daylight never fails,” said Frank. “That makes it easier to guard
+against a surprise attack.”
+
+“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it easier. But from now on, we
+shall have to be on the watch continually.”
+
+He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of
+the party, Farnum, Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as the
+boys, preparatory to the launching of the canoes, which were ready
+loaded.
+
+“Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows out of sight?” he
+asked. “Would it be better to set Dick and Art to watch them, and
+appoint a rendezvous where we can come together later?”
+
+The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, showed approval of
+the plan. Farnum struck his forehead with clenched fist in a
+characteristic gesture.
+
+“Just what I would have proposed myself, if I had been awake,” he
+confessed. “Dick, Art, do you think you could pick up their trail?”
+
+The two nodded.
+
+“They won’t back track far,” said Dick. “Art an’ me can follow ’em
+afoot. That last portage is only four miles back, an’ we can catch up
+with ’em there. Now about where to meet up with you again?”
+
+“None of us know this country,” said Farnum, “and so it will be
+difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly
+intends to continue our pursuit, and won’t let our trail go cold.
+Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best plan will be to
+report to us at every camp. One of you can keep watch on Lupo while the
+other brings in a report.”
+
+“Good enough,” said Dick, the more loquacious of the pair. “Look for us
+at tomorrow’s camp.”
+
+Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient for a meal or two,
+guns at the trail, the pair struck swiftly on the back trail,
+disappeared among the trees at the bend and were gone from sight.
+
+“All right, boys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get going. Can you manage your
+canoe all right by yourselves?”
+
+Mr. Hampton laughed.
+
+“I think they can scrape along, Farnum,” he said. “Probably we’ll be
+asking one of them to help us before long. Well, come on.”
+
+Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the canoes shot away, and,
+with Farnum leading to set the course, the boys fell in behind. In the
+leading canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a low-voiced
+conversation began that lasted a long time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum
+were saying could not be heard, for the gap between the two canoes,
+though not great, was considerable. Moreover, they spoke in low tones.
+But the boys sensed an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older
+men. As for themselves, however, they were not worried. On the contrary,
+the excitement of finding themselves trailed had brightened them
+wonderfully.
+
+“Old expedition was getting too monotonous, anyway,” said Bob presently.
+
+“Oh, I suppose you’ll want to challenge the best Indian wrestler now,
+won’t you?” said Jack, in a tone of mock seriousness.
+
+“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and Art and send in your
+challenge?” asked Frank, in the same jollying manner. “You know you
+haven’t been in a match with anybody for some time. Here was your
+chance, and you went and let it slip away from you. But, don’t worry,
+perhaps the Indians will return. Who knows? You may even have a chance
+to exchange courtesies with no less a personage than Lupo the Wolf
+himself.”
+
+The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And so the two canoes swept
+on between the low banks of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the
+other filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not simpletons. They
+realized, indeed, that they were in a precarious situation. They were
+deep in the far northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers dogged
+their heels. In all that vast country, was none to whom they could look
+for help. But, for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It was not
+the first time in which they found themselves in a ticklish situation.
+They had come unscathed out of other perils, even winning some honor in
+the encounter. They would do the same again. Thus they put the matter to
+themselves.
+
+Hour after hour passed, during which period they twice encountered
+slight rapids, up which they waded with the canoes instead of portaging.
+All were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number reduced by the
+absence of Dick and Art, and the work made correspondingly heavy, but in
+addition they were traveling now on reserve strength, as prior to making
+the last camp they already had done a big day’s work.
+
+Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end of four hours of travel
+they came to the shore of a small lake. Here, in a secluded cove,
+convenient to the stream on which they had been traveling, they were
+about to make camp, when Frank approached Mr. Hampton and Farnum and
+indicated an island a half mile away.
+
+“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing.
+
+Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes confirmed Frank’s
+observation. Mr. Hampton put up the field glasses which he always
+carried strapped to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something
+more—a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of the island.
+
+“Hard to tell from that what sort of man is camping out there,” said
+Farnum, when informed of the kayak. “Everybody uses ’em in this
+country—Indian, Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That smoke
+doesn’t indicate a big fire. Must be only one man, or maybe, two. Let’s
+investigate. If we decide to make camp out there, well, that island
+would be a good place and it would be hard to surprise us there if we
+kept guard.”
+
+Once more, paddles were plied, and the two canoes cut diagonally across
+the waters of the lake towards the island. As they approached, Farnum
+raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an answering shout came back.
+Then a figure stepped from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon
+which the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their approach, hand
+shading eyes against the glare of the sun, head bare.
+
+“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” exclaimed Farnum in a low voice, turning his
+head slightly to address Mr. Hampton, “it’s a policeman.”
+
+“What?”
+
+“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian Mounted Police.”
+
+“What’s he doing here?”
+
+“I don’t know. But we’ll soon find out.”
+
+“Welcome, strangers,” said the other, a tall bronzed man, as they
+approached. “Just in time for a snack.”
+
+He advanced to the water’s edge, and stood ready to help. Farnum’s
+appraising eye took in the approach. Shoal water and a sandy beach! He
+decided to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping his paddle, he
+leaped from the bow into the water, as the forefoot of the canoe grated
+lightly. Relieved of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at
+the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, Farnum ran it up on the
+beach, the uniformed man lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was
+in the bow of the boy’s canoe, repeated the maneuver. The two craft were
+drawn up side by side.
+
+“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian simply.
+
+“Know Arkell of Dawson?” asked Farnum.
+
+“Know him well,” said the other. “One o’ the best on the Force.”
+
+“Friend of mine,” said Farnum.
+
+The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the
+boys. MacDonald led the way to a sheltered spot among the trees, where a
+fire burned.
+
+“Just about to broil some fish,” he said. “Lucky there’s plenty. I’m
+crazy about fishing,” he continued, “and when they bit here I pulled out
+mor’n I could use. Was wonderin’ what to do with ’em when I heard your
+hail. Guess I don’t need to worry about that any longer.”
+
+As he spoke he busied himself about preparations for dinner, and soon an
+appetizing odor of frying fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of
+the hungry boys.
+
+“Suppose I get another pan and help, sir,” proffered Bob.
+
+His comrades laughed, for the big fellow’s appetite was proverbial among
+them. MacDonald nodded with a grin of understanding. Bob tore back to
+the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. In a short time the
+fish were fried, and all hands fell to right heartily.
+
+“Long way off your beat, aren’t you?” asked Farnum, of MacDonald, as
+they ate.
+
+The other nodded. Then he regarded them sharply.
+
+“Same to you,” he said. “First white men I’ve seen in many days.”
+
+Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight blue eyes under the
+grizzled brows, and met it promptly.
+
+“Yes, and I’ll tell you why we are here,” he said. “I think our meeting
+with you was providential. If you have been in this country long, you
+may have heard something that will help us. At any rate, here’s our
+story.”
+
+Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for their presence. He made
+a clean breast of it, keeping back nothing, telling MacDonald of the
+alleged oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s death, Farrell’s
+return as guide to Thorwaldsson’s expedition, and their presence now in
+an attempt to trace the missing men.
+
+“So that’s that,” said MacDonald. “So that’s the reason for
+Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ And it was into this country he come!
+Well, well.”
+
+In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent adventure with Lupo the
+Wolf. MacDonald manifested keen interest. His hand, as he poured tobacco
+into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a little of the precious
+tobacco.
+
+“You ain’t heard of it likely,” he said. “You wouldn’t. But this Lupo
+killed my partner on the Force, an’ I asked the Inspector to let me go
+after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an’ lost his trail
+several days ago. Now, well—”
+
+MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked down towards the lake shore,
+and the others respected his evident desire to be alone and did not
+follow.
+
+“Out after Lupo single-handed,” whispered Frank. “And the desperado
+surrounded by all his men, too.”
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+“That means nothing to the Mounted,” said he.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.—FIRST BLOOD.
+
+
+So tired were all members of the party after their unexpected exertions
+of moving camp and trekking on, coming at the end of a day filled with
+fatiguing labor, that now a haven had been reached and they had relaxed
+from their tension, they were ready to go to sleep at once. First,
+however, preparations had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep
+watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter did not know
+definitely, of course, where they were encamped, yet it would not be
+difficult for them to follow the trail at least to the shore of the
+lake.
+
+“Look here,” said MacDonald, returning to join the conference, “I’m not
+near as tired as the rest of you. I’ll keep watch for your friends for a
+couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.”
+
+“All right,” said Farnum, gratefully, “that is, if you promise to wake
+me at the end of two hours. I can use a little sleep right now.”
+
+“Turn in, then,” said MacDonald. “These spruces give you enough shade.
+And, anyway, I guess you don’t need much inducement to go to sleep.”
+
+“I could sleep right out in the open sun with my face turned up to the
+sky,” said big Bob, yawning. “Well, nighty night, folks.”
+
+Nothing occurred during MacDonald’s watch, and at the end of the
+two-hour period he awakened Farnum, in keeping with the agreement.
+
+“Thought some of letting you sleep on,” he said. “But, to tell you the
+truth, I been travelin’ hard myself, and need a little sleep, too.”
+
+“Right,” said Farnum. “I’d have been peeved if you hadn’t waked me.”
+
+Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil among the bushes by the
+lake shore, descried a canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down
+which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. At first, as only the
+bow of the canoe appeared, he was startled, believing Lupo’s Indians
+already were on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and yet
+surprise to see them there, he made out the two figures in the boat as
+those of Dick and Art.
+
+The pair rested on their paddles a moment, scanning the shore and also,
+Farnum noted, apparently casting anxious glances behind them. He was too
+far away, however, to see whether that were really the case. Farnum
+realized that, with the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn
+safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their own canoes, Dick and
+Art would not have the same indications pointing to the island that had
+he on arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and was just about
+to set his cupped hand to his mouth and call when the unexpected
+occurred.
+
+Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles into the water again and
+were making a wide swing with the evident intention of bringing the
+canoe parallel to the shore but some distance out, when Farnum’s
+startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive at the mouth of the stream
+behind them.
+
+Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art evidently had managed to
+obtain one of Lupo’s canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely,
+moreover, apparently they did not know. He must warn them, not only of
+his presence and of help close at hand, but also of the danger behind
+them. The course they were taking would bear them away from the island
+and, unless changed at once, would make it possible for Lupo to cut them
+off from their friends.
+
+Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep
+filling his eyes and dulling his brain, Farnum had his automatic
+swinging in the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot three
+times in rapid succession.
+
+At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the island where Farnum,
+stepping into the open, was vigorously waving his hat to attract their
+attention. Lupo’s men also set up a shout, as they churned the water
+racing to cut off their quarry.
+
+“What is it?” cried Frank, first of the aroused camp to gain Farnum’s
+side.
+
+Then his glance took in the situation.
+
+“Look here, those fellows might pick off Art and Dick before they can
+gain safety, even if they don’t succeed in cutting them off,” he said.
+“Let’s get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, but they’re
+coming closer.”
+
+“Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns,” said Farnum. “Tell you
+what, you boys run and get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch
+one of our canoes. We’ll go out to help Dick and Art, if those fellows
+keep closing in on them.”
+
+The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but when they returned they
+found Farnum’s plan unnecessary. As the two canoes had swept along,
+Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown down his paddle, and
+taken up his rifle, while Art had swung the canoe about with one
+dexterous stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art had followed
+suit.
+
+The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards the shore. When they
+reached the sand they found Lupo’s men already had faced about and were
+hurrying towards the mainland. One of their number evidently was hit.
+
+“Main good shootin’ at long range a’ so quick after paddlin’,” commented
+MacDonald appreciatively.
+
+Content with having beaten off their enemies, the two desisted, resumed
+their paddles and soon were within hailing distance. Greetings and
+congratulations were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their canoe on
+shore. As soon as the first hubbub of exclamations died away, Mr.
+Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the
+fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid Dick told their
+story.
+
+After leaving the previous camp, they had gone back to where they seen
+Lupo break camp and start on the back trail. The meaning of this move,
+they had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe Lupo was
+relinquishing the chase. They believed he would suspect Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum would spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them off guard
+by creating the impression that he was abandoning the chase. Therefore,
+they had gone warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal
+Lupo would call a halt and prepare to ’bout face.
+
+This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles farther on they discerned
+the four canoes of the half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued
+their occupants.
+
+“We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he was a-sayin’,” explained
+Dick. “But we couldn’t get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near
+’em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, quite a ways
+off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin’ our ears but without any luck when
+suddenly somethin’ happens. Most of ’em was on shore, listenin’ to Lupo
+but in one canoe was one man a-huntin’ around like he’d lost somethin’.
+
+“What it was we never did know. But suddenly, this fellow shoves off
+with a shout to Lupo. Lupo answers like he was agreein’. So then this
+fellow comes a-paddlin’ down stream like mad. As he goes by where we’re
+a-layin’ low, Art whispers to me: ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang
+around. That’s sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it back an’ warn
+our crowd. An’ my legs is tired. I’d like to let my arms work for me.
+Let’s go.’
+
+“I nods, and without any more words we backed out and started down
+stream after that canoe. The fellow is goin’ like mad, which means he
+ain’t intendin’ to go far. He’s lost somethin’ or other and thinks it
+may be floatin’ on the water or, maybe is layin’ on shore where he
+touched. Anyway, that’s what we thought. We never did get to know. For
+after we’d made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo
+and us, we decided it was no use runnin’ any farther.
+
+“‘Here goes,’ said Art. And he let fly over the Indian’s head. That
+fellow didn’t wait for more. He just jumped out of the canoe an’ started
+swimmin’ for the other shore. So then Art give me his rifle an’ he swims
+out and brings in the canoe. Last we seen of that Indian he was
+streaking it back on the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.”
+
+MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly interrupted:
+
+“How many men has Lupo got with him?”
+
+“A dozen.”
+
+MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton.
+
+“You know why I want him,” he said. “For murder. And then there’s this
+raid on you. There are eight of us, includin’ these husky young fellows
+of yours. Will you help me capture him an’ his gang?”
+
+Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful.
+
+“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can’t turn aside from
+our own object long? We couldn’t help you guard them. And you couldn’t
+get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, especially
+if any of them are wounded.”
+
+MacDonald’s face fell.
+
+“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think o’ that skunk—murderin’
+the best pal a man ever had—well, I see red, that’s all.” His head sank
+to his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring moodily at
+the ground between his feet.
+
+“Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, slowly. “If we don’t
+do something, Lupo will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a
+constant danger.”
+
+“I know,” said Mr. Hampton. “Let me think.”
+
+He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the ground.
+
+The boys had been listening with interest. Now Frank nudged Jack, with
+whom he was standing by the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack’s face
+brightened and he nodded.
+
+“I’ll bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.”
+
+Frank turned to the ranger.
+
+“Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?” he inquired.
+
+MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered readily enough.
+
+“A good four hundred miles to the South.”
+
+“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted to know.
+
+“Just a minute, sir, please,” begged Frank, once more turning to
+MacDonald. “And how many men are at the Post?”
+
+“Captain and five men.”
+
+“Oh, is that all?”
+
+Frank’s tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald smiled slightly.
+
+“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as many as an army,” he said.
+“Well, we keep this wilderness clean with a handful. O’ course, when
+necessary, too, we can swear in deputies.”
+
+“Have you got wireless at the Post?” asked Frank.
+
+MacDonald nodded.
+
+“Captain equipped us some time back,” he said. “All posts or forts, as
+we call them sometimes, have wireless now.”
+
+“Good for you, Frank. I see what you’re driving at now,” said Mr.
+Hampton. “You—”
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald capture Lupo and his
+gang, we could call his Post by wireless and have them send men to help
+him take his prisoners in.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.—A CALL TO THE FORT.
+
+
+“Now,” said Jack, “is the time that I wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio
+tube that I have been working on so long.”
+
+Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. An enthusiast on
+radio, Jack had developed a number of new appliances. The latest of
+these was not yet completed. He had worked on it in the laboratories at
+Yale during the Winter and Spring. The lateness of his return to his
+classes, however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college until after
+Christmas, due to the delay occasioned by his adventures in South
+America in search of “The Enchanted City of the Incas,” compelled him to
+devote most his time to catching up in his studies. He did not,
+therefore, have as much time to devote to laboratory experiments as he
+desired. As a consequence, the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been
+perfected, when time came for him to depart for Alaska with his father.
+
+Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would be the most powerful in
+the world, and he expected, moreover, to construct others of greater
+kilo-wattage. A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, it is
+true, but it had not been found practicable. Jack’s tube was to be
+steel-jacketed and equipped with a water-cooling device, due to the heat
+produced when in operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used
+as an amplifier in conjunction with an alternator, would make
+trans-atlantic telephonic communication as common as cabling or wireless
+telegraphing.
+
+“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now,” he mourned, “we would
+be able to talk not only with Mr. MacDonald’s Post but with Dawson or
+even Nome.”
+
+“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “it’s too bad. Just the same, let’s get busy.
+For, with our 50-watt oscillator tube set we will be able to communicate
+by telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only 400 miles away,
+we can reach it easily.”
+
+For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they could use either three
+or four 5-watt oscillator tubes in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator
+tube. They had decided on the latter method, in making their
+preparations for departure in faraway Seattle. For one thing, and the
+biggest, transportation was the most important item. And the 50-watt
+tube set was the more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton helping,
+they got out the various parts from their baggage and made the
+connections.
+
+Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched
+with puzzled interest and even awe as the four, working in unison, put
+together the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid
+condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key
+circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power
+circuit, the storage battery and the motor generator.
+
+Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although Dick and Art were content
+to sit silent and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work progressed.
+Several times, too, Dick arose and went to the water’s edge to keep
+watch against surprise. That any would be attempted for the time being,
+nobody believed, as they figured the enemy would consider them on guard.
+
+As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of the others. His
+description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery
+flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drives it as a
+motor thus generating higher voltage in the other winding both puzzled
+and interested them. By the time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who
+was something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair understanding of
+the set, but MacDonald, though interested, was bewildered.
+
+“I’m fair beat,” he confessed. “Anyhow, just so you boys can make it
+work!”
+
+“Oh, we’ll make it work, all right,” Frank assured him. “Well, now, to
+try to call the Post. What’s its call, Mr. MacDonald?”
+
+“I happen to remember,” said MacDonald. “We were all so interested when
+wireless was put in that Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it.
+He said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his name. We were to
+remember it, in case of need, when we were able to get to a wireless
+station. Well, this is a case of need.”
+
+“I’ll say it is,” said big Bob. “Well, come on, fellows, who’s going to
+call?”
+
+It was an honor or distinction that each was eager to have, yet each
+wanted to force it on the others. A friendly argument developed, to
+which Mr. Hampton, smiling, put an end.
+
+“Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose you draw straws for the
+privilege. You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no
+question of ability involved. Here—” breaking three matchsticks into
+varying lengths and offering them—“take your choice. Longest wins.”
+
+Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, clapped him on the
+back, and without more ado he began pressing the key and sending out the
+signal.
+
+“Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless station, do you think,
+MacDonald?” asked Mr. Hampton.
+
+“Somebody there all the time,” the latter replied. “Captain Jameson has
+found wireless so useful in policing his vast district that he wonders
+how he ever got along without it.”
+
+“Hurray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re answering.”
+
+To those who understood the code, the answer was plain:
+
+“JSN answering. Who are you?”
+
+“MacDonald,” tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously.
+
+The receptor sounded almost angry.
+
+“Quit your kidding.”
+
+“No, I mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald of the Mounted.”
+
+“Prove it.”
+
+“That’ll stump old Frank,” chuckled Bob, in an aside. But he was
+mistaken.
+
+“All right,” replied Frank, confidently. “Do you know what my assignment
+is?”
+
+“Yes,” answered JSN, impudently. “Do you?”
+
+“I’m after Lupo the Wolf,” tapped Frank. “Now call Captain Jameson.”
+
+“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because he doesn’t know the code.
+But you must be speaking for him, for that’s right about his assignment.
+I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.”
+
+“All right,” tapped Frank.
+
+Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was itching to inquire what
+was occurring, but had restrained himself until he should be appealed to
+by Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with
+telegraphy, whether wireless or by wire, he stood in awe of an operator,
+and believed it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior
+being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as well as on that of
+Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding behind him, and explained what had
+happened.
+
+“And you actually got the Post?” asked MacDonald, doubt in his voice.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of the weeks I spent toiling up
+here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without the
+loss of a minute’s time. Wonderful, well I reckon.”
+
+“When Captain Jameson arrives,” said Frank, smiling, “I want you to
+stand close and I’ll translate what he says, and you help me with the
+replies, will you?”
+
+“Won’t I be interrupting you?”
+
+“Oh, no,” smiled Frank. “You just come close and wait until I speak.
+It’ll be all right. Well”—as the receptor began to click—“I guess this
+is Captain Jameson now. Yes,” with a nod, “it’s he, all right. He’s
+asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.”
+
+“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and close on Lupo. Tell him about
+yourselves and the fight, and that we’re going to round up Lupo’s gang
+and ask him how soon he can send men to help me out with any prisoners
+we take, and if he can send any at all, and—”
+
+“One minute,” said Frank. “I understand. Just wait a bit now, while I
+telegraph.”
+
+To explain at length the details of that telegraphic conversation is
+unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that the situation was fully explained
+to Captain Jameson, and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen
+deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald’s aid, as soon as he should hear
+again as to the outcome of the expedition against Lupo.
+
+“It’ll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald,” said Captain
+Jameson. “But with game plentiful and the season open, he can camp until
+they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, providing he makes
+any. You people go ahead with your rounding up of Lupo’s gang, and then
+let me hear from you again.”
+
+On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, as there was
+nothing further to be said.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.—THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND.
+
+
+“MacDonald, I’ll agree to help you round up Lupo and his gang,” said Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, about the camp fire,
+over which Dick was busy broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had
+just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor made the nostrils of
+the three hungry boys twitch with anticipatory delight.
+
+“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s the way I like to hear you talk.”
+
+“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, “I’ve got a very good reason why
+we should cast in our lot and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and
+draws us off our course.”
+
+“What’s that?”
+
+“Well, it’s an easy enough one to guess. Lupo evidently is after us.
+That means that he is being paid by somebody to do us in, or at least
+thwart us in our search. I want to know who that somebody is. And the
+only way to find out is to make Lupo prisoner and question him.
+Moreover, it is possible we may be able to learn something about the
+mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.”
+
+Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded with satisfaction.
+
+“Just what I was thinking myself.”
+
+“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” said MacDonald. “But such being the case,
+we’ll have to be mighty careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, as then your
+prospective source of information would vanish.”
+
+“True enough, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton. “We’ll all have to be on
+guard against that misfortune, for misfortune it would be.”
+
+He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick and Art to him. Then he
+explained how matters stood.
+
+“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll start, and you must
+all be very careful not to shoot Lupo, if it comes to a battle.”
+
+As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke but always to the point,
+raised a question which had been puzzling him.
+
+“Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?” he asked. “And with
+our radio transmitter, especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take
+all our outfit along?”
+
+“It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after our trouble in getting
+it erected,” said Mr. Hampton. “And to take all our outfit with us would
+be to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we can’t very well leave
+everything here, for some of Lupo’s men might slip away from the main
+body, in fact, they may already have done so, and they would put us in a
+terrible plight if they raided the camp, in our absence.”
+
+There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke.
+
+“We can certainly travel faster without your outfit to hold us back,” he
+said, “especially if Lupo tries to run away. For then we could gain on
+him at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. Hampton, this
+island is easily defended. We’ve been going to the shore to keep watch
+on the mainland against surprise. But just a little ways through the
+trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which you can see the waters all
+around the island. One man alone could keep guard here.”
+
+“But one man couldn’t keep off an attack in numbers,” objected Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+“I don’t know,” said MacDonald. “With them high-powered rifles of yours,
+it might be done. They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo’s Indians
+and breeds will have. Anyway, two men certainly could manage to hold
+this place against all comers.”
+
+“And three,” added Farnum, with a significant look at Mr. Hampton,
+“could do it even better.”
+
+The boys again were at the fire some distance away, helping Dick broil
+more fish. Mr. Hampton looked at them. He understood the significance in
+Farnum’s tone.
+
+“You don’t think they would be in danger here?”
+
+“Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, lowering
+his voice as the other had done.
+
+Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted by Farnum, namely, that the
+boys should be left at camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true
+that they would be in far less danger than if they accompanied him
+against Lupo. And that appealed to him, appealed powerfully. He was
+grateful to Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the boys’
+welfare.
+
+On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful in an emergency, and
+good fighters. And since the idea that information might be obtained
+from Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession of his thoughts.
+Lupo must be captured. Would it not be folly to weaken their force by
+leaving three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was a fine rifle
+shot, behind?
+
+Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, he could command and
+they would obey. But Mr. Hampton was not one to exercise his authority
+dictatorially.
+
+“I confess I don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he said finally.
+
+At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys announced the completion
+of the second batch of food, and their imminent return.
+
+“Make it a post of honor and danger,” whispered Farnum, urgently. “Tell
+them the radio must be guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take
+these things along our movements will be so hampered that Lupo might
+escape. Tell them there is a big possibility, too, that some of Lupo’s
+gang may attempt to raid the camp while we are absent.”
+
+The boys were so close at hand that Farnum desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded.
+As they ate, he broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp.
+
+“Three of us ought to stay behind,” he added. “That will give sufficient
+protection for each other, and provide a sure safeguard against
+surprise. Also, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can
+go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without any baggage. It carried
+three of us, with baggage, so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So we
+can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the portages, if any are
+necessary.”
+
+“Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?” asked Jack quietly.
+
+Mr. Hampton realized from his son’s tone that Jack understood his
+thoughts.
+
+“Well, you three boys would be the natural ones to be selected,” he
+said.
+
+“Oh, I say,” protested Bob.
+
+“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” cried Frank.
+
+Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close association of the motherless
+boy with the older man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He
+understood how troubled his father was over the possibility of running
+them into danger. And he decided he would not add to his difficulties,
+but would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed at the prospect
+of “missing the fun.”
+
+“You see how it is, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton, and he proceeded to
+elaborate on the theme furnished him by Farnum. “It’s a post of honor
+and danger combined.”
+
+Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. They started anew to protest
+But Jack silenced them.
+
+“All right, fellows, let’s be sports,” he said. “If the older heads
+decide they don’t need us, we won’t force ourselves on them.”
+
+“But, Jack,” cried Bob and Frank in chorus.
+
+“No, I mean it, fellows,” said Jack. “Come over here with me, and I’ll
+tell you something.”
+
+Drawing them out of earshot, he added:
+
+“Don’t let us make it hard for Dad. He’s got troubles enough. He’ll feel
+a lot easier if we aren’t along. I know how you feel. I feel the same
+way about it. But let’s make it as easy for Dad as we can. Besides,
+there is something in what he said, after all. There is no guarantee
+that some of Lupo’s men won’t attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe
+some of them must be watching this island right now, and the minute they
+see the others safely out of sight, they’ll attack us. For they know our
+numbers, and they will realize the three of us are here alone.”
+
+“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Have it your own way, let’s get some more to
+eat. I haven’t filled up yet.”
+
+“This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too,” agreed Frank. “And I used to
+be such a dainty eater. Why, I just pecked at my food.”
+
+“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob. “For a little guy, you’re
+the heftiest eater I ever saw.”
+
+“Little guy, is it?” cried Frank. “I like that.”
+
+And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, his arms locking about
+Bob’s knees. The big fellow came down in the brush and Frank piled on
+top of him with a shout of glee.
+
+“Come on, Jack. We haven’t had a good rough-house for a long time.”
+
+Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went rolling and threshing about
+the bushes like a trio of young bears.
+
+At the fireside, Mr. Hampton’s worried look relaxed, and he grinned with
+enjoyment.
+
+“It’s all right, now,” he said contentedly. “They’ll take their
+disappointment out in a grand wrestling jamboree. Well, let’s pack up a
+little grub and get ready to go.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.—BOB FALLS ASLEEP.
+
+
+In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party were ready to set out. Of
+one thing they were reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets
+constructed along his own lines, the instrument of which was so small
+and compact it was contained in the panel of a ring.
+
+“Only trouble with these,” Jack said, “is that you can receive but can’t
+transmit. However—”
+
+“However,” his father interrupted, “that is all that will be necessary.”
+
+“Why?” asked Farnum.
+
+“It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into such a
+predicament that we shall fail to return,” explained Mr. Hampton. “But
+the boys may be attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a bad
+position. Then they can call for us.”
+
+“At least we could send out a hurry up call over those sets,” said Jack.
+“As for your calling us, well, that will be a little more complicated,
+Dad, but it can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking that army
+field set. It came in mighty handy in South America. It is no great job
+to set it up. And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment,
+and you can afford to take it along. It won’t be in your way. Here it
+is, you see, all boxed up complete, handle on the box and everything.”
+
+“Right, Jack,” said his father. “Now we can communicate with each other
+easily enough. Well”—looking about him—“are we ready?”
+
+The others nodded.
+
+“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I propose that we bring our canoes back
+through the trees, cross the island and make for the mainland on the
+other side.”
+
+Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement.
+
+“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald, “and it will screen our
+departure on the other side, in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as
+a matter of fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo’s party has not shown
+itself since we beat off that canoe, and probably is somewhere back up
+that stream out of which your party came.”
+
+“You think they cannot see the mainland on the other side of this island
+from there, Dad?”
+
+“I don’t believe so,” said Mr. Hampton.
+
+“Even if they do catch a glimpse of us,” suggested Farnum, “isn’t it
+probable they’ll believe we are pushing on? As a matter of fact,
+however, we’ll land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland and
+then up along the lake till we are out of sight, when we can cross
+again, I suppose that’s your idea, Mr. Hampton?”
+
+“My idea exactly,” answered the other. “Well, let’s get the canoe and
+MacDonald’s kayak. They have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we
+can bring them across the island without detection easily enough.”
+
+“Wait a minute, Dad,” said Jack, laying a detaining hand on his arm. “If
+they do see you crossing the channel to the mainland, on the other side
+of the island, they’ll know the whole party isn’t along, and will
+realize you aren’t leaving, but merely carrying out some maneuver.”
+
+“Maybe, that’s what they will think, Jack. On the other hand, they might
+figure some of the canoes got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the
+back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. The channel to
+the mainland on the other side is only a narrow one, and the
+probabilities of our escaping detection are all in our favor.”
+
+The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald’s kayak were dragged
+back through the underbrush and carried across the island to be launched
+on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the compact field
+transmitting set in the canoe, as the party pushed off. Then, amid
+farewells from both sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the
+mainland.
+
+Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with something of a sinking
+of the heart. The same feeling, he suspected, possessed his father.
+Neither, however, presented other than a brave and cheerful front. As
+for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over their disappointment at not
+being permitted to accompany the expedition, to a certain extent, and,
+cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on their own
+resources were beginning to enjoy the situation.
+
+“First thing, fellows,” said Frank, as the party reached the mainland,
+hauled up canoe and kayak and struck into the trees, “first thing is to
+go to this knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a view of the
+field.”
+
+“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s divide up into watches, so that the
+pair of us not drawn for the first watch can get some rest.”
+
+“You certainly were born in the Land o’ Nod, Bob,” scoffed Frank.
+
+“Yes,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re as sleepy as all that, we’ll
+count you out right away. Frank and I will draw for the first watch, and
+you can hit the hay.”
+
+“Not so fast,” said Bob. “I’ll take my chance with the rest of you.”
+
+Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered hill to which
+MacDonald had referred and now, reaching the top, found that, despite
+its low elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest of the
+island and than the shores of the lake as well, that they commanded a
+sweeping view not only of the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone
+but also of the farther one whence they had come.
+
+Not a sign of human occupation, however, was anywhere apparent.
+Eastward, although they knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not
+have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake shore were
+sufficiently dense to hide any sign of movement. Westward, toward the
+farther shore, was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the stream,
+thinning out farther along the shore in both directions. Neither among
+the trees nor on the glades, could they discern anybody although Jack,
+who had been thoughtful enough to bring along their field glasses,
+scanned the prospect through them a long time before passing them on to
+the others, who did likewise.
+
+“Well, so far so good,” said Jack, with a sigh of relief. “Evidently, or
+so far as we can see, anyway, Dad and the rest got across undiscovered
+and now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther up undetected.”
+
+“Maybe so,” said Frank. “Maybe, too, Lupo got discouraged and quit.”
+
+“Retreated you mean?” asked Jack.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+“Oh, you fellows are full of prunes,” said Bob. “Why should he quit now,
+just because we have added one more man to our forces? He’s hung to our
+trail a long time. That means he’s not going to quit in a hurry. No,
+we’ve got to keep our eyes open.”
+
+“That’s right,” said Jack, thoughtfully, “It won’t do to get
+overconfident and relax our guard.”
+
+“Just the same there’s no sign of trouble now,” said Frank. “And I’ve
+got a suggestion.”
+
+“Don’t lose the idea,” said Bob, anxiously. “Hold on to it. Ideas are
+rare.”
+
+“With some people yes,” said Frank, grinning. “Not with me.”
+
+“Huh.”
+
+Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out of his grasp.
+
+“My idea,” he said, “is to take a plunge in the channel your father
+crossed, Jack. I’m hot and sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine
+just before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do you say?”
+
+“So I’m to have the first watch, hey?” said Bob. “It’s been all decided,
+has it? Well, well. All right, run along, Frankie, me lad. I’m not so
+anxious for a swim. I’ll just start my watch here and now.”
+
+“Bob, you’re a good sport,” said Frank, throwing an arm over the
+shoulders of his big chum, between whom and himself was a depth of
+feeling which seldom was expressed in words.
+
+“Oh, run along and take your swim.”
+
+Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the hill. Laughing, they
+obeyed. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the
+base of a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the glasses in
+his lap and his eyes on the westward shore of the lake, where Lupo’s
+half-breeds had last been seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was
+against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as comfortable as
+possible.
+
+It was a really comfortable position and, when one is tired and sitting
+idle, a comfortable position is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with
+Bob. He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He had worked
+hard. The air was warm and drowsy, as only the air of the short hot
+Summer of the north country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently
+his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in his ears as of the
+drowsy hum of bees. He caught himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his
+eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree
+trunk again, and again began to nod. This time, the jerk with which he
+awakened was longer in coming.
+
+Bob got up and stretched.
+
+“Mustn’t go to sleep,” he reflected. “Nothing in sight, though. Not much
+use to worry. Ho, hum.”
+
+He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes drifted shut. He sat
+through the transition period between sleeping and waking, unaware that
+he was yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of relaxed limbs
+and thoughts. Before he was aware his head nodded, his eyes closed, his
+chin touched his chest, and he slept.
+
+Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying their plunge. The
+water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to
+their heart’s content. Neither realized the passage of time until Frank,
+suddenly filled with compunction at their long absence, while Bob kept
+watch, scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out on top of his
+clothes.
+
+“Great guns, Jack,” he announced, “we’ve been gone an hour. Good old
+Bob. He was mighty nice about sending us off to swim while he kept
+watch, but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll be thinking it’s a low
+trick on our part to stay so long. Maybe he’ll want to come and take a
+plunge himself, when one of us gets back to relieve him.”
+
+Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way with most of us,
+attempted to make excuses.
+
+“He might just as well have come along,” he said. “Nothing’s going to
+happen.”
+
+They were pulling on their clothes.
+
+Suddenly they heard Bob’s voice raised in a distant shout, calling their
+names. Then followed a brisk outbreak of rifle shots.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.—THE SURPRISE ATTACK.
+
+
+“An attack,” gasped Jack.
+
+“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” cried Frank, in an agony of
+apprehension. “Come on. Don’t stop to finish dressing.”
+
+Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, Frank frantically
+buckled on his revolver and cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started
+on a dead run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they ran, they
+heard the shots continuing intermittently, and then once more—clearer
+and closer at hand, as they neared the knoll—came Bob’s voice:
+
+“Frank, Jack, they’re rushing me. Look out for yourselves.”
+
+There was a crashing in the brush ahead.
+
+“Down, Jack, some of them coming.”
+
+The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce whose low branches swept
+the ground. The sounds were off to their left. A moment later the forms
+of four men, hurrying towards the channel whence they had just come,
+could be seen eight or ten yards away.
+
+Jack’s face was pale, his lips set. Frank was trembling with excitement
+and fear—not for himself, if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad
+was not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was holding off the
+main attack alone.
+
+“Steady, Frank,” whispered Jack. “Bob’s life depends on us. This is no
+time for false compunctions. You’ll have to shoot to kill.”
+
+“All right, Jack.”
+
+Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the runners stumbled, flung
+out their arms to save themselves, and pitched forward. The others spun
+about towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but a second time
+Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, fell.
+
+“No time to see how badly they were hit,” said Jack. “Come on. Old Bob’s
+still alive and shooting.”
+
+Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, however, to keep wary
+watch as they ran. No more of the enemy were seen, however. There was a
+sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of astonishment,
+stupefaction, even a note of fear, went up from several throats. Above
+all was a bull-like roar that they readily identified as coming from
+Bob’s throat.
+
+Frank’s heart gave an exultant leap. He knew that yell. It came only
+when Bob went berserk, and fought with his hands. He had heard it when
+they fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long
+Island and Incas in the Andes. He knew well what it meant.
+
+Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the
+knoll, and came to a dead halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to
+the spot.
+
+But only for a moment. Then they started tearing up the hillside, among
+the scattered trees. For at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as
+if caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it portended.
+Somewhere in the center of the group was big Bob, at close grips with
+the enemy, and not caring how many they numbered.
+
+Would they be in time? Could they help Bob before some half-breed
+succeeded in sticking a knife into him?
+
+But Bob proved that he could handle his own affairs, for while they were
+still several yards away, first one and then another half-breed was
+spewed from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with
+several men clinging to his legs and another on his back, attempting
+apparently to throttle him. The big fellow’s hands went up and back.
+They settled under the other’s armpits. There was a sudden mighty heave
+and wrench, and then the man on Bob’s back came flying through the air,
+straight for Bob’s two comrades. He had been tossed from Bob’s
+shoulders, as a strong man would toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack
+leaped aside, and the man struck the ground, rolled over and over and
+then lay still, crumpled up against the trunk of a spruce.
+
+Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank leaped forward. But their
+intervention was unnecessary. Standing like a young Colossus, legs
+apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent down. One big hand
+seized each by the neck. Then the two heads were bumped together once,
+twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on Bob’s legs relaxed, and
+he tossed them aside, and they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out.
+
+Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with a murderous look for the
+two boys.
+
+“More of you, hey?”
+
+They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp.
+
+“Bob, Bob, it’s us.”
+
+“What? What? Oh, you—”
+
+Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his eyes, and recognition
+dawning. It was followed by a wide grin.
+
+“Oh, it’s you.”
+
+“Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in history,” cried Frank,
+hysterically, clapping his chum on the back.
+
+“Never saw the like,” said Jack, doing likewise. “Thank God, Bob, you’re
+alive.”
+
+“Never was more alive in my life,” said Bob. “Hey, they’re running
+away.”
+
+He darted away from his chums and sprang downhill. True enough. The two
+whom he had disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, had
+gained their feet and were running madly through the trees.
+
+Jack ran after Bob and restrained him.
+
+“Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are three others here we must
+tie up before they come to.”
+
+Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending over the man whom the
+big fellow had tossed over his head. The half-breed was recovering
+consciousness, and beginning to moan.
+
+“Broken arm, I think,” said Frank. “He’ll not bother us. How about the
+two whose heads you bumped together?”
+
+“They’re recovering consciousness, too,” said Jack. “Nothing much the
+matter with them. We had better tie them up, so they can’t cause us any
+trouble.”
+
+“Here, take the other fellow’s belt and tie his hands behind his back
+with it,” said Bob. At the same time, he suited action to word in the
+case of the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow’s belt and tied
+him with it.
+
+“Won’t they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to tie their legs, too?”
+
+“No, we’ll just keep an eye on them. Let’s take a look at the other. If
+his arm is broken we’ll have to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch
+him in the lake, though. He’s a villainous looking rascal. Tried to
+choke me, too, and darn near succeeded.”
+
+While Frank kept an eye on the two other prisoners, who had now
+recovered consciousness and were beginning to realize their situation
+but lay still under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack examined
+the third man.
+
+His senses were returning, and he moaned a good deal. Examinations
+revealed, however, that his arm had not been broken, merely badly
+wrenched.
+
+“I’m mighty glad of that,” said Jack. “We’d have been up against it to
+set a broken arm.”
+
+“Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary,” said Bob. “But I’m glad,
+too, that it isn’t necessary. But, say, Jack”—with sudden recollection,
+and an air of anxiety—“there were four more of these scoundrels. We’ll
+have to look out for them.”
+
+Jack’s voice shook a little as he replied.
+
+“I think not, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw them first. We ambushed
+them, practically. They didn’t have a chance.”
+
+“You don’t mean—”
+
+Jack’s gaze was steady but troubled.
+
+“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was our life or theirs. And
+yours, especially. When we heard your shout, and those first shots,
+Frank went wild with fear that you had been trapped while we were away
+enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt as bad as he did.”
+
+“Hey, fellows,” interrupted Frank, hailing them, “the two that got away
+must have been all that were left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are
+paddling like mad for the mainland.”
+
+“Can you see them?” called Jack, starting to the top of the knoll to
+join his chum.
+
+“How would I know what they were doing if I couldn’t?” rejoined Frank.
+“Yes, I can see them. Look there.”
+
+He pointed.
+
+“Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him walk up here to join his
+little playmates,” Jack called back.
+
+Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully recovered his
+senses, and he obeyed Bob’s order to move with an alacrity that showed
+he stood in abject fear of the husky young American.
+
+Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were nearing the mainland, and
+paddling with superhuman energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no
+less.
+
+“That accounts for all of them, I guess,” he said. “So we can sit down
+now, Bob, while you tell us how it happened.”
+
+“Not much to tell,” said Bob, sinking to a seated position against the
+tree trunk. “Except I went to sleep and was almost surprised, but not
+quite. My first intimation that the enemy was near was when I heard
+somebody talking in the trees at the foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear
+anybody? Was it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? I
+don’t rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a start and looking down
+through the trees saw a bunch of half-breeds making their way towards
+the other side of the island.
+
+“I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. Here I had promised to
+keep watch, and, instead, had fallen asleep. As a result, the
+half-breeds had landed on the island, and were heading for where you
+fellows were swimming. I had endangered your lives. What should I do?
+That was the question.
+
+“But I didn’t waste must time, puzzling over it. I knew I had to give
+you fellows warning or you would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to
+you as loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn’t seen me up till
+then. But when I yelled, they saw me quick enough, and several of them
+opened fire, and——”
+
+“Wait a minute, Bob,” Frank interrupted, his eyes shining. “They hadn’t
+seen you, and you could have let them pass without attracting their
+attention, but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white alley.
+That’s, that’s—”
+
+“Oh, forget it,” said Bob, uncomfortably. “You’d have done the same.
+Anyway,” he hurried on, “they split up into two groups, and one kept on
+going, while the other rushed me before I could do much shooting,
+and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he concluded, lamely.
+
+“I’ll say we do,” said Frank, gripping his big comrade’s shoulder. “Boy,
+I’ll never see the like of that fight again.”
+
+“But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead of trying to shoot you
+down,” said Jack.
+
+“Search me,” said Bob.
+
+“I’ll bet I know,” said Frank.
+
+“What?” asked both.
+
+“They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own.
+Probably, would have tried to take us alive, too, if they’d gotten the
+chance.”
+
+“Well, maybe so,” said Bob. “Anyhow, that’s that. Now what shall we do?”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.—MR. HAMPTON RECALLED.
+
+
+Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste and even horror in
+their eyes.
+
+“Has to be done, though,” said Jack, as if in answer to a remark of
+Frank’s.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+“I know.”
+
+“What are you two chumps talking about?” asked Bob.
+
+“Those four men we shot down, you know,” Frank explained.
+
+“Think you—”
+
+Bob’s question went uncompleted.
+
+“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We shot straight. It was your life and
+ours against theirs.”
+
+“Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect that’s the first thing
+to be attended to. If any of them is no more than wounded, it will be up
+to us to do what we can for him.”
+
+“Right, Bob,” said Jack.
+
+“Come on,” Frank said shortly, starting down the hillside, in the
+direction of their successful, though impromptu, ambuscade.
+
+“Go easy,” warned Bob. “If they’re able to shoot, they’ll take a crack
+at us.”
+
+Bob’s advice was followed, and the trio approached the spot warily. But
+precaution was needless, or, while still some distance away, they could
+see the four bodies outstretched motionless where they had fallen.
+Frank’s face went white, and he shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob,
+although he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip on
+himself, in order to force his laggard steps to continue. Though many
+were the affairs of danger in which they had been, the boys had never
+before shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to them.
+
+Frank stopped. He was trembling violently.
+
+“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped.
+
+Bob threw an arm over his shoulders.
+
+“You and Jack stay here,” he ordered, gruffly. “I had no hand in this.
+I’m the fellow to attend to it. Wait for me.”
+
+At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. But Bob shoved him
+back, kindly but firmly.
+
+“The pair of you have been through enough,” he said. “Do as I say. Wait
+here.”
+
+And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the task, he plunged on
+through the trees. For a moment or two both Frank and Jack watched him
+fascinatedly, then Frank sank down to a sitting position, elbows propped
+on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack faced about, and stared
+unseeing through the trees.
+
+Presently, Bob’s solid, crunching footsteps could be heard approaching,
+and they looked up. His face was grave, but unflinching.
+
+“Look here, fellows,” he said, firmly, “may as well face the facts. All
+four were killed instantly. Drilled through the—— But why discuss it?
+The fact is, they’re dead. They were rascals of the first water, and, as
+you say, it was their lives or ours. Self-preservation is the first law
+of Nature. Now, what are we going to do about it? We haven’t any tools
+to dig with.”
+
+Frank shook himself into alertness.
+
+“Let’s get the axes—our outfit has some—and cut off some spruce boughs
+and cover them over. Then we can roll some stones on top.”
+
+As quickly as possible, without speaking during the task, and working
+feverishly, the three carried out Frank’s idea. Then, back at camp, they
+sat down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding liquid steadied
+their shaken nerves.
+
+“Guess we better try to get in touch with your father, Jack,” suggested
+Bob, at length.
+
+“How long have they been gone?”
+
+Bob looked at his watch.
+
+“Three hours. Seems like a lifetime.”
+
+“Things have certainly happened fast,” said Frank. “Thank goodness, that
+party missed our radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have been out
+of luck.”
+
+“More luck than I deserve,” said Bob, savagely. “Think of going to sleep
+on the job. If I had been awake, they never would have been able to
+land.”
+
+“Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to reproach yourself with.”
+
+“Oh, that’s nonsense,” said the big fellow. “I’m always getting you into
+trouble.”
+
+Frank smiled.
+
+“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said.
+
+“Well, let’s try the radio, anyway,” suggested Jack. “They’ve been gone
+three hours. With the best of luck they can’t have made more than eight
+or ten miles, considering the detour they planned to take, and
+everything.”
+
+“Couldn’t have gotten that far away in a straight line,” said Frank.
+
+“No, I guess not. But what if they aren’t prepared for a call from us?”
+
+“Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your father will be
+proceeding fully equipped to hear from you,” said Frank. “He need only
+wear the headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving that he
+would keep it on most of the time.”
+
+Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, spoken of by Frank, had
+done away with the necessity for the umbrella aerial.
+
+“All right,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the
+message we ought to hear from him shortly, for he’ll at once unlimber
+the field transmitting set and call us back.”
+
+While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight and its outcome,
+Frank and Bob decided to steady their nerves by fishing and went down to
+the lakeside. They had reasonable success and had pulled out a number of
+fish when Jack joined them.
+
+“Send out your message, Jack?” Frank inquired.
+
+“Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too.”
+
+“What? Why, great guns, how long have we been here? Surely, you can’t
+have had time to hear from your father?”
+
+“But, I have,” affirmed Jack. “You’ve been here more than an hour.”
+
+Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that time, neither had spoken
+a word. They had just dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional
+fish. Frank laughed.
+
+“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,” he confessed. “Well, what
+did your father say?”
+
+“They made a long trek up the lake before crossing over, and are not
+very far away—somewhere up in that direction—on the other shore, there,”
+said Jack, pointing. “Dad was worried as the deuce at my story, and
+they’re coming back.”
+
+“Coming back? Why? It’s all over now.”
+
+“That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming back, anyway. They’re
+going to get back to the lake, and come straight down to the island.
+Ought to be here in a couple of hours or less.”
+
+“May as well wait dinner for them, in that case,” observed Bob. “Or what
+meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I’m sure I don’t know. This
+perpetual sunshine has me all turned around. I don’t know whether it’s
+day or night.”
+
+“Same here,” confessed Frank. “I do know, though, that I’m beginning to
+get up an appetite.” Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent
+daydreaming over the fishing lines had driven away for the time, crossed
+his mind, and he paled. “I don’t know though”—catching his
+breath—“whether I’ll ever want to eat again.”
+
+Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The big fellows noted with
+apprehension the twisted, stricken look on their slighter chum’s face,
+and the haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob’s keen eyes, moreover,
+two hectic spots glowing brightly in the dark tan of Frank’s cheeks were
+apparent.
+
+“Look here, old man,” said Bob, anxiously, “you want to quit thinking
+about that or you’ll be sick.”
+
+“Sick?” Frank tried to force a laugh. “I’m the healthiest invalid ever
+you saw.”
+
+“No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of your mind, or you will be
+sick. Why—”laying a hand on his brow—“you’ve got a fever right now.”
+
+Jack was worried, too.
+
+“Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob’s advice. What if you came down
+sick? We’d be in a pretty fix.”
+
+“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Frank, irritatedly. “I’m all
+right.”
+
+But Bob’s worry was not routed. He took his chum by an arm and started
+marching him toward camp.
+
+“I’m going to give you a dose of calomel and make you lie down,” he
+said. “Come on.”
+
+“Calomel? Have a heart.”
+
+“Yes, calomel,” said Bob, firmly. “That’s what you need, that and a
+nap.”
+
+Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the camp, despite Frank’s
+vehement protests, he was made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and
+then to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him the little tent
+belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide shade from the northern sun. Jack
+and Bob sat down, some distance away, and started cleaning the fish.
+They talked together in low tones. Presently, after several glances
+toward the motionless figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On his
+return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack.
+
+“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but overworked Nature was too
+much for him. I’m a little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock.
+But I guess he’ll be all right when he wakes up.”
+
+Then he glanced more keenly at Jack.
+
+“Look here, you’ve been through the same experience. I had a nap. Now
+you’re going to take one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We
+don’t want two sick ones on our hands.”
+
+Jack didn’t protest, but also turned in beside Frank, and in a few
+minutes was sound asleep. As Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her
+dues.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.—A REVELATION.
+
+
+This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, but at the first faint
+indication that somnolence was stealing upon him, arose and stamped
+about vigorously. Once, prompted by a humane inclination, he paused by
+the three prisoners who lay in the shade, hands and feet tied, and
+proffered them a drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness was
+totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the surprise in their eyes,
+although no words were exchanged, and they drank eagerly in great gulps.
+The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his head was in considerable
+pain because of his wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional
+writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by loosening his bonds. In
+addition, he rummaged their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment
+for sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the twisted member.
+
+“You good man,” whispered the other, gazing at him, as Bob bent to the
+task, and speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob’s ears, and
+certainly not to the other two men a short distance away. “I tell you
+something—not now—bimeby—when they not know.”
+
+Bob thought quickly.
+
+“All right,” he responded, in the same low tone. “I’ll fix it.”
+
+“Yes.” The other nodded. “You fix it.”
+
+“Now what in the world has he got to tell me?” Bob asked himself, as he
+moved away. “Probably, something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I
+can’t see what else it can be. Was grateful because I gentled him a
+little—after first maltreating him.” He smiled at the irony of this
+thought. “Well, Mr. Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there will
+be a chance to question him apart from his fellows.”
+
+And with that, he dismissed the matter from his mind. Jack now rolled
+over, sat up and came out from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued
+sunk in heavy slumber.
+
+“By George,” said Bob, looking at his watch, “two hours since you
+started to take your nap. Run down to the shore, will you, and take a
+look to see if there is any sign of your father. We left these fellows
+alone once”—nodding to their prisoners—“but I felt it wasn’t wise to try
+it too often. Something might happen. So I’ve been sticking close to
+camp.”
+
+Jack nodded.
+
+“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish for me to run down
+after you, but I just had to tell you about hearing from Father.”
+
+He set out for the shore.
+
+A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give a joyful shout. It was
+answered by a fainter hail from the water. Faint though it was, however,
+it was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching.
+
+Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, and the returning
+party came into view, Jack in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum,
+with MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. Jack was eagerly
+explaining what had occurred at camp since his father’s departure.
+
+“Hello, Bob,” said Mr. Hampton, coming up, and gripping the big fellow’s
+hand hard. “Had some excitement while we were gone?”
+
+“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was going to be a loafing
+assignment you left us on—nothing to do but hang around camp and swim
+and fish—and the minute you turn your backs something happens.”
+
+“How’s Frank?”
+
+“Jack told you, did he?”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“He’s still asleep,” said Bob. “The necessity of shooting to kill was a
+shock to his nerves. Nature took him in hand. See.” He indicated where
+Frank lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival of the
+returning party.
+
+“He’ll sleep for hours yet,” said Mr. Hampton, “if we don’t make too
+much noise. I’ll caution the others. Best medicine in the world for him.
+He’ll be all right when he wakes, I expect.”
+
+While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, Bob and Jack, in
+lowered voices, told the others all that had occurred. Bob repeated his
+condemnation of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted the enemy
+to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton rested a hand on his shoulder, and
+told him not to be foolish.
+
+“In the first place,” he said, “there seemed to be no reason why you
+should keep strict watch. It hardly seemed likely these fellows would
+boldly approach the island.”
+
+“Expect they saw us set out, after all,” suggested MacDonald, “and
+figured the whole party hadn’t gone, and that them left behind would be
+on ’tother side of the island, so’s they could land and surprise ’em.”
+
+Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most
+likely explanation. Over the puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by
+those attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely to make him
+prisoner, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than that earlier
+advanced by the boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take them
+alive.
+
+“Reckon Lupo thought he’d get some information from you,” said
+MacDonald.
+
+“But he wasn’t here,” Bob protested.
+
+“No, but you can bet they were actin’ on his orders.”
+
+Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had whispered that he had
+something to tell him. He explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought
+for a moment.
+
+“I have it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here and we’ll question
+them. At the same time, Bob, do you slip off and talk to your man. We’ll
+keep the pair occupied, so that they won’t be able to see. Tell your man
+that presently, then, we’ll call him up to be questioned, too, and that
+he’s to pretend sullen obstinacy and refuse—in the presence of his
+comrades—to answer any questions.”
+
+Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he slipped away in an opposite
+direction. Executing a flank movement through the trees, he presently
+arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got behind the tree,
+against which the man with the wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid
+whisper he communicated Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the other. The
+fellow comprehended, and then in a low tone, scarcely audible to Bob,
+who strained to hear, communicated surprising intelligence.
+
+Bob heard him out, then with a final word of caution, again slipped
+away, once more skirted camp through the trees, and approached the group
+from the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being grilled, but
+without success. At Bob’s approach, Mr. Hampton turned again to Art.
+
+“Bring that other fellow here,” he commanded. “See if he knows any more
+than these men.”
+
+The man was brought into the council, but, acting on instructions,
+maintained an obstinate silence.
+
+“Oh, take them away, and feed them,” said Mr. Hampton finally, as if
+despairing of obtaining any information. “We’ll talk to them later,
+after I’ve eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t fall to, and I’m
+too hungry to delay with these rascals.”
+
+The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, were returned to the other
+side of the camp and, with their hands untied, were permitted to eat
+under the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once more they were tied
+up.
+
+Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, as soon as the trio of
+prisoners was out of hearing.
+
+“Out with it, Bob,” he said. “I can see you’re dying to tell us. Must be
+important.”
+
+“It is,” said Bob, emphatically.
+
+“What did he say?”
+
+“Mr. Hampton, you think we’re alone in this wilderness except for Lupo’s
+gang?”
+
+“I don’t know who else would be here. This is country that white men
+never get into.”
+
+“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers of their party of ten
+are not more than two hundred miles away; perhaps less than that.”
+
+“What! Say that again.”
+
+Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his portion of fish into
+the fire.
+
+“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this fellow, Long Tom,
+declares. Long Tom—that’s his name.”
+
+“How does he know?”
+
+It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him.
+
+“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before
+he reached the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his
+men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp were killed, and
+Thorwaldsson’s supplies looted. He says a big band of Indians committed
+the outrage.”
+
+“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton.
+
+“Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They
+wanted the loot. What they didn’t understand, they destroyed.”
+
+“That’s why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton,
+“for his radio equipment must have been among ‘the things they didn’t
+understand.’ Go on, Bob.”
+
+“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter with the Eskimos up on
+the rim of the Arctic Ocean.”
+
+“Where has he been? What became of the Indians?”
+
+“They were a hunting party, as far as I could gather, who, after chasing
+Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered
+with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this Spring started
+out. Then he fell in with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him.”
+
+“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say
+Thorwaldsson is so close?”
+
+“Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who told of
+Thorwaldsson having wintered with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson
+was on his way out down the Coppermine—or up it, whichever you choose to
+call it. Though that was weeks ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be
+following watercourses that would put him about one hundred and fifty or
+two hundred miles to the northeast of us.”
+
+“Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot,” said Mr. Hampton. “Was that
+everything? Or did Long Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?”
+
+“He doesn’t know why Lupo is after us, except that it has something to
+do with Thorwaldsson. That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty
+indefinite, but it was the best I could do.”
+
+“Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something to go on, indeed.”
+
+“And to think that old Bob got it all just because he was kind to a
+fellow with a sore arm and put some liniment on it,” said Jack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.—MACDONALD TURNS BACK.
+
+
+Taking everything into consideration, Mr. Hampton decided that before
+any further steps were taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a
+good rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked and confessed
+to being shaky; even Bob was tired from the strain of the terrific fight
+through which he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours of
+exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done practically three
+days’ work with little or no rest in the short interval between.
+
+“Altogether,” said Mr. Hampton, summing up, “we are in no fit condition
+to set out in immediate pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men,
+nor even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be that the best plan
+would be not to pursue Lupo but to set off at once to try and find
+Thorwaldsson. I, for one, am too tired even to think straight. So I vote
+that we make camp, set watches and turn in for a good rest. I believe I
+could sleep the clock around.”
+
+“If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton,”
+muttered Bob, shamefacedly, “I’d like to have it. I’ll promise you not
+to go to sleep on the job again.”
+
+Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back in kindly fashion, as Bob
+leaned forward, seated on the ground beside him.
+
+“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing with which to reproach
+yourself. Certainly you can have the first watch, if you want it. I
+expect the rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity to turn
+in at once. As to there being any further danger, however, I very much
+doubt it. You boys have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men killed
+and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. If he had only twelve or
+fourteen, as we believe, his number now is less than ours. The
+consequence is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to attack
+us here on the island. However, a watch must be kept, so go to it.”
+
+Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took the first watch and the
+rest scattered around the camp, under the spruces, and soon were
+sleeping soundly. When the time to change watches came, with nothing
+alarming having broken the calm, Bob waked MacDonald, and himself turned
+in. After that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and was
+disturbed by nothing until awakened by being shaken. He looked up and
+found Frank bending above him, his face alight with merriment.
+
+“Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?” demanded Frank.
+
+Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once to the picture of Frank
+as he had last seen him. In his voice was a note of thankfulness at
+finding Frank thus carefree, as he said:
+
+“How do you feel, old man?”
+
+“Never better,” confessed Frank. “Sleep is certainly the right medicine,
+isn’t it?”
+
+“Don’t I know it!”
+
+Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes.
+
+“Come on, Bob, let’s take a plunge in the channel. Just got up myself.
+It’ll wake us up, make us feel good. Everybody’s up now, and Dick fixing
+to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum are talking things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out of
+the feathers, too. The three of us can have a fine swim.”
+
+Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they set out for the place
+where Frank and Jack had gone in for a plunge before. Without referring
+to the tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of the four
+half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, the boys, as if by common
+consent, lay their course through the trees so as to avoid passing near
+it.
+
+The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully invigorating, and
+refreshed and with the young blood tingling in their veins, after a long
+sleep and a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought voracious
+appetites with them, but fortunately the fishermen had pulled in a big
+haul of beauties, and these, together with flapjacks made by that
+skillful chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like none ever
+made in city restaurants, the whole having the tang of the outdoors and
+woodland smoke for sauce, made a delectable repast.
+
+“Now,” said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, “now for a discussion of
+what’s to be done.”
+
+Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. Lupo with five or six
+men at most was still at large. He might have turned back. He might be
+in hiding nearby. He might have gone on ahead in search of Thorwaldsson.
+In any case, Mr. Hampton declared, he felt it would be a waste of time
+to search for him in view of the fact that they had learned Thorwaldsson
+was somewhere to the north and east and their primary object was to join
+forces with that explorer. He wanted to know what the others had to say.
+
+Farnum, who had been talking matters over with Mr. Hampton, sat silent,
+nodding approval. The other was stating his own views. But MacDonald
+voiced a protest.
+
+“From your point of view, sir,” he said, “I reckon you’re right. But am
+I to let Lupo escape now that I come so close to gettin’ him? And what
+am I to do with three prisoners on my hands?”
+
+“I’ve been turning that phase of the situation over and over,” said Mr.
+Hampton. “I cannot see that we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo,
+now that we have pretty definite information through that fellow, Long
+Tom, of Thorwaldsson’s presence alive and with some of his men in this
+wilderness. I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the chase,
+but it can’t be helped. You have three prisoners, and can’t very well
+watch them and pursue Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member of
+the Mounted you must take them in. We can’t leave you to handle them
+alone, however, and——”
+
+He paused.
+
+“And what, sir,” prompted MacDonald.
+
+“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to leave one of our number
+with you. That will enable you to keep guard against surprise, watch
+over your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from your Post.
+We’ll wireless your Captain Jameson full details of all that has
+occurred, give him your position here, and then you can wait for
+relief.”
+
+MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent several minutes, while none
+spoke, but all watched him expectantly.
+
+“If you won’t help me try and round up Lupo, you won’t, and that’s all
+there is to it,” he said, finally. “Not as I blame you, neither. You got
+your job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With only a handful
+o’ men he may be in trouble, too. Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin
+you fellows sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he’d likely be
+after Thorwaldsson, too.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“That’s what I’m afraid of,” he said, “that Thorwaldsson may need our
+aid.”
+
+“Just so,” continued MacDonald. “Such bein’ the case, your best plan is
+to try and find him soon as you can.”
+
+“Then you agree to my plan?”
+
+“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me a man, hey?”
+
+“Yes.”
+
+“Who?”
+
+“Why—I——”
+
+“Give me this feller,” said MacDonald, laying a hand on Bob who sat
+beside him. “He’s a fighter.”
+
+“I couldn’t do that, MacDonald. The boys must come with me.”
+
+“All right. Only that fight he put up—that was a good one. Kind o’
+wished I could have him by me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin
+see he’s used to big woods and river country. He’d make a good Mounty.”
+
+This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his pipe at Dick.
+
+“What do you say, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton. “It’s up to you?”
+
+“I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, wouldn’t I?
+Probably have to winter there.”
+
+MacDonald nodded.
+
+“Get you a job on the Force,” he said.
+
+Dick’s eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, he was alone in life,
+loved the wilderness, and still thrilled to adventure.
+
+“That so?” he asked. “Need men?”
+
+“Always room for a good one.”
+
+“All right. It’s a go,” said Dick.
+
+MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then turned again to Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+“Such being the case,” he said, “when you talk to Captain Jameson over
+that there contraption, just tell him I’m on my way in.”
+
+“What?”
+
+“Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with three no-account breeds on
+our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No.
+We’ll take ’em in.”
+
+“But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners on your hands!”
+
+“Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. Never thought of
+calling for help except I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of
+his gang.”
+
+Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to Dick.
+
+“But how about you, Dick?”
+
+“If MacDonald says so, I’m game.”
+
+“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s settled. Now call Captain
+Jameson, and let’s get goin’. You want to be on your way, and we may as
+well be on ours.”
+
+“But, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton, trying one last protest, “suppose
+Lupo and the remainder of his gang see you start, and follow and attack
+you. What then?”
+
+“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes snapped. “Couldn’t ask for no better luck. I’d
+get a shot at him then.”
+
+Farnum interrupted at this stage.
+
+“It’s no use trying to stop him and Dick,” he said. “I know Dick and I
+know these men of the Mounted. They’re holy terrors. And the pair of
+them will get away with it, too.”
+
+Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and abandoned his protests. Captain
+Jameson once more was called by wireless, and given a full account of
+what had occurred. He approved MacDonald’s scheme and promised there
+would be a position on the Force for Dick when he arrived.
+
+“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements were made for
+departure, and he led him aside, “I’ve been pleased, indeed, with your
+ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to part company with
+you. Here is a check for the full sum I promised you for this Summer’s
+work. And here in addition is something to remember me by.”
+
+Into Dick’s unwilling hand he pressed a handsome gold watch which he
+himself had worn for some years.
+
+“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough fellow like me to carry,”
+protested Dick.
+
+“Now, now, nonsense,” said Mr. Hampton. “Nothing is too good for you,
+old man. I want you to keep that to remember me by.”
+
+“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” said Dick gruffly, sticking it
+in his pocket nevertheless.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.—REINDEER SIGHTED.
+
+
+The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured from the Indians was
+turned over to MacDonald. It was easily capable of transporting five—the
+three prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter in the bow and
+stern respectively, and the prisoners unarmed between, there was little
+danger so long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable watchfulness.
+Two of the half-breeds were cowed and broken in spirit, moreover, while
+Long Tom was _hors de combat_ on account of the injury to his arm, and
+would be for some time to come. MacDonald’s skin kayak was to be towed
+behind, containing his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners could
+carry the whole business alone at portages.
+
+MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable stream flowing into it
+from the southwest, and not the stream down which the Hampton party had
+come. He set out for this other stream before the others quit the
+island, with the intention of retracing his steps into the wilderness in
+large measure. This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the south,
+he said, was a large river which could be reached by a ten-mile portage,
+and down which they could travel for many miles.
+
+“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said to Bob, to whom he had
+taken a great fancy, “let me know. I’ll fix it for you.”
+
+Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered by the sincere
+compliment.
+
+“I may take you up on that some day,” he said. “Who knows?”
+
+Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes were said, and the craft
+shot away.
+
+“There go a couple of good men,” commented Farnum, as under the powerful
+strokes of the paddles the canoe drew swiftly down the lake.
+
+“One good man, anyhow,” said Art, who overheard the observation. “Ol’
+Dick an’ me had a li’l talk. I’m going to join up with the Mounted, too,
+when we git back. We been pals fifteen year.”
+
+“Fifteen years,” exclaimed Frank. “In the wilderness all that time?”
+
+Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating canoe.
+
+“Sure,” said Art. “It’s home to us. Ain’t no wilderness. Cities is the
+real wilderness. Dick an’ me’s been separated now and then, like now,
+but we always come together agin. I expect when we git to be old men
+like some prospectors I seen we’ll be together all the time, fightin’
+and jawin’ each other, but ready to tear the heart out o’ anybody that
+jumps one of us.”
+
+“It’s a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald like he did, in that case,”
+said Jack.
+
+“Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we’d meet agin.”
+
+Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself with the outfit.
+
+Presently everything was in readiness for departure and then the two
+remaining canoes, with the outfit distributed between them, the three
+boys in one and the three men in the other, started up the lake in the
+opposite direction from that taken by MacDonald and Dick. Previously,
+when in pursuit of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was of so
+considerable extent that, despite their hours of travel up the side,
+they had been unable to discern the farther end. In fact, the lake
+broadened out considerably some distance beyond the island. It was his
+intention, inasmuch as it followed the general northeastward direction
+they would pursue, to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there
+would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently large to float
+their canoes.
+
+In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours of steady paddling,
+they discerned the outlet of a stream of considerable width, quartered
+across the lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called to his
+father, in surprise:
+
+“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake; not into it. Do you
+notice?”
+
+The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached.
+
+“It certainly does, Jack,” said his father. “What do you make of it,
+Farnum?”
+
+The latter shook his head, puzzled.
+
+“I don’t know,” he said. “You must remember this is unexplored country.
+We’re liable to find anything here. But, maybe——”
+
+“What?”
+
+“I don’t know. We’re near the Coppermine, aren’t we, Art?”
+
+“Figure we must be.”
+
+“Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine.”
+
+“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art approved. “The waters of that lake empty into
+the Coppermine. Yes, sir; I’ll bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes
+travel easy for awhile, anyhow.”
+
+Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine incidents such as the
+occasional shooting of wild duck Or geese, brought the party at camping
+time at the end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy prairie
+between two low-wooded hills. Here it was decided to make camp.
+
+After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. Hampton, who was feeling
+out of sorts, retired to his little tent to try and sleep without taking
+part in the usual desultory conversation about the fire—which was kept
+going for the companionship and cheer it imparted and not from any need
+of warmth you may be sure—Jack arose and stretched.
+
+“My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe all day,” he said. “I
+want to stretch them a bit. Who’ll come with me to the top of that
+nearest hill? The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable
+view.”
+
+Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany him. Farnum sat, smoking his
+pipe and staring into the fire absently. He didn’t care to go. But Art
+arose and joined the party. It was not far to the top of the hill,
+although a stiff climb through the trees and brush. The crest, however,
+was bare of timber.
+
+Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to reach the top, stood
+struck with amazement. He turned to beckon the others forward with one
+hand, while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture enjoining
+silence.
+
+“For the love o’ Pete,” whispered Art, eyes bulging, as he stood beside
+Frank and peered down into the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with
+young willows.
+
+“Are they caribou?” asked Jack, low-voiced. “They don’t look like the
+caribou we’ve run across along the streams.”
+
+“They ain’t, neither,” said Art. “They’re reindeer.”
+
+“Must be Santy Claus’s,” chuckled Bob. “Always did believe there was
+something to that story about the old boy living up here near the North
+Pole, even though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now I
+know.”
+
+His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued:
+
+“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some o’ these are white,
+some brown, and some spotted. Then they ain’t the size o’ caribou.
+Besides, I know they’re reindeer. I see ’em often enough in Alaska to
+know.”
+
+“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?”
+
+Art nodded.
+
+“Look at ’em. They’re tame. Must’a winded us, but that don’t scare ’em
+none. They’re used to humans. No more scared o’ bein’ hunted than cattle
+are back in the States.”
+
+“Tame?” queried Frank. “What do you mean?”
+
+“Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, of this Far North, but
+the regular ones that come in touch with the white man, they keep herds
+o’ reindeer just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. Look at ’em.
+Must be two-three hundred there right now. They’re eight-ten hundred
+miles from home, too. Must ’a wandered away. Bet you there’s a desprit
+Eskimo lookin’ for ’em right now.”
+
+Jack looked thoughtful.
+
+“What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like that,” he said.
+
+“Yes, sir,” affirmed Art emphatically. “Must be six-seven thousand
+dollars worth o’ tame reindeer there. Pretty tough.”
+
+“We can’t do anything about it, though,” said Bob.
+
+“Seems a pity-like we can’t ride herd on ’em till some Eskimo shows up
+to claim ’em,” said Art. “But it can’t be done. Yore father, Jack, is
+all for pushin’ on fast as we kin.”
+
+After some further discussion, the party retraced its steps, with Art
+explaining to the boys the big difference existing between the
+semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of the
+wild Eskimos of the Arctic.
+
+“Folks think Alaska’s right up next to the North Pole,” he said.
+“Leastways folks in the States do. People comin’ to Nome from the States
+every so often give me that knowledge. But they’re shore mistaken.
+Alaska’s great country that’ll be settled up some day. Shore, we got
+hard Winters. But boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin’ all the
+time, everything grows just three times as fast as in the States. My Pap
+was a farmer back in York State, an’ I was raised on a farm. We had hard
+scratchin’ an’ our Winters was long an’ hard, too. An’ we didn’t have
+Summers like in Alaska to make up for ’em. I’ll bet if my Pap were
+livin’ today an’ farmin’ in Alaska he’d find life a lot easier than what
+we had it on the old farm.”
+
+“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?” asked Frank.
+
+“Oh, I don’t know. Hard to get to, for one thing. Ain’t developed up
+with railroads, neither. Some day, though, you’ll see ’em forced to come
+here, the way they’re a-crowdin’ up down in the States. Why, we got only
+60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she’s quarter as big as the States an’
+could darn near feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and
+farmed right.”
+
+“Art, why don’t you go to farming? I’d think that would be the thing for
+you to do.”
+
+“Mebbe I will some day,” said Art. “But I’m an old batch. Got no wife,
+an’ kind o’ like to feel free to knock around instead o’ bein’ tied to
+one place.”
+
+It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. They were young,
+with life ahead of them, and they wanted to see the world. In fact they
+had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have followed them
+through their various adventures, know. Of this they spoke as they made
+their way back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready to turn in,
+and merely awaiting their return before doing so. Since their first
+encounter with Lupo, and their discovery that they were not alone in the
+wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum had combatted sleepiness
+in order to keep guard until their return.
+
+“Art, you’ve got the first watch,” he said, when they appeared. “The
+rest of you better turn in, and not sit up talking. With luck we ought
+to make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then we’ll do some
+traveling. We’ve got to hit a fast pace from now on, for already we are
+having real twilight, and pretty soon we’ll be having short nights while
+the sun dips entirely below the horizon. That means the season is
+growing short, and we have not got much time left before we’ll have to
+start for the outside.”
+
+Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed Farnum’s example
+shortly, but Frank, who did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to
+talk, sat up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling him of
+some of their previous adventures.
+
+Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as not disturb the nearby
+sleepers, Frank noticed Art was not paying attention, and stopped.
+
+“Oh, well,” he said, half petulantly, “if I’m boring you——”
+
+Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm.
+
+“Sorry, Frank,” he said, in a whisper, “but I was a-listenin.’ I got a
+strange feelin’ like as if somebody had his eyes on the back a’ my head.
+I wasn’t payin’ no attention to you but a-listenin’ to see if I could
+hear anything.”
+
+He was so intense that he communicated some of his trepidation to Frank.
+Instinctively, the latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up to
+peer at their twilit surroundings. They were camped in a tiny grove of a
+half dozen spruces, like an islet in a midst of long, matted grass.
+
+As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering the stillness. He
+threw himself prone, dragging Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was
+poured in on them, seemingly from all sides.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.—SURPRISED.
+
+
+“Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind that nearest tree and let ’em
+have it. They’re in that long grass.”
+
+As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward to a position behind
+the trunk of one of the spruces, began firing rapidly.
+
+Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the long
+grass. He had an uncanny feeling, for he could see no forms at which to
+fire, and the preliminary volley poured into the camp was not repeated,
+so he had no index as to the enemy positions.
+
+Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened by the shots, but Frank
+called fiercely: “Keep down.”
+
+Realizing something of the situation, the three grabbed their rifles,
+laying by their sides, and, keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as
+they could see something at which to aim.
+
+Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping
+hard, and had not awakened instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull
+ache gripped his head, preventing him from thinking clearly and from
+comprehending instantly what was occurring. He lay a moment, wondering
+what had awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and Art had
+ceased firing to await some sign from the unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton
+decided to peer out and investigate what had disturbed him. He crawled
+from his dog tent and stood up.
+
+At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once more from the long grass
+surrounding the tiny grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made
+an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton fell heavily to the
+ground.
+
+A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication that the leader had
+been hit. Jack leaped up regardless of consequences and ran to his
+father, dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped around him.
+Bob ran to his assistance. To the hidden enemy it must have seemed as if
+their opponents were demoralized. At any rate, they grew more
+courageous, and started a rush.
+
+From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming men only
+partially seen as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But
+the long stems waving above them marked their paths, and there were
+three still on watch who would have to be dealt with.
+
+Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving grass indicated the enemy.
+Each guarded a side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the
+stream.
+
+“Wait’ll they’re close, fellows, then give it to ’em,” cautioned Farnum.
+“Ready. Let’s go.”
+
+The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from the long grass came
+howls and shrieks of pain and terror. What followed was brief but
+lively. Each of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and the
+bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as if sprayed from the
+throat of a machine gun. The return fire was heavy but high, whipping
+through the branches of the spruce trees overhead.
+
+Reinforcements added to the strength of the defenders, for Bob darted
+out of the tent, crouched over, and flung himself beside Frank,
+beginning to shoot even as he talked.
+
+“Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle,” he said. “Bullet creased his head
+and stunted him. He’ll be all right.”
+
+The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, feared to advance farther
+in the face of that fire. The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the
+attackers had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. The menace was
+still there.
+
+“Anybody hit?” Farnum called out.
+
+“Not me,” said Art.
+
+“Nor me,” answered Frank.
+
+“Thank our lucky stars for that,” answered Farnum.
+
+They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close
+enough to each other to make communication in ordinary tones possible.
+Relieved to discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets that
+had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired anxiously after Mr.
+Hampton, and Bob answered he had been only stunned.
+
+“I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang,” Farnum remarked. “But he
+must have had more men than we expected, or he wouldn’t be attacking us
+like this.”
+
+“What’ll we do?” growled Art. “Looks like they got us penned in.”
+
+“Oh, but we stopped their rush,” protested Frank.
+
+“Yes,” said Art, “but they ain’t beatin’ it as I can see. An’ when we
+want to up an’ leave camp, what’s goin’ to happen?”
+
+Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was beside him, pointed with his
+rifle toward the gap between the two hills, from the top of one of which
+they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next valley.
+
+“Look there, Frank,” he exclaimed excitedly. “What do you make of that?”
+
+“Where? I don’t——Oh, yes; now I see. Something moving.”
+
+“Sure is something moving,” Bob said.
+
+Already the short twilight was beginning to lighten, as the sun after
+its dip to the edge of the northern horizon now swung higher.
+
+“Bob.”
+
+“What?”
+
+“I believe that’s the reindeer herd.”
+
+“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up
+there on the hill top?”
+
+“Yes, sir.”
+
+“But how in the world?”
+
+“Why, I noticed that the other valley swung around between those two
+little hills. The reindeer are just grazing along, hunting new pasture.
+And, say, Bob!”
+
+“Well, what now?”
+
+“I’ve got a bully idea.”
+
+Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face Art on his right, who was
+keeping watch against surprise on his side of the little clump of trees
+sheltering them.
+
+“Art,” said he, “look over there, between those two little hills. Are
+those reindeer? The reindeer we saw from the hilltop?”
+
+“Reckon so,” said Art, after a critical inspection.
+
+“Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like cattle, I mean.”
+
+“Reckon so. Why?”
+
+“Well, I’m going to try it,” Frank declared in a determined tone. Still
+prone, he began to wriggle out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs,
+to unlace his boots and kick them off.
+
+“Are you crazy, Frank?” Bob demanded, puzzled, while Art and Farnum took
+their eyes from the coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment.
+
+“Crazy? No more than usual,” Frank replied, as he completed disrobing,
+and now lay naked under the spreading branches of the spruce. “But I’m
+going to slip into the water and float down to that hill, then get in
+behind the reindeer and stampede them. You see what’ll happen then,
+don’t you?”
+
+Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning comprehension crept into
+his eyes, and he began to smile. Then he chuckled.
+
+“You little hound,” he said, employing a pet expression among the boys,
+denoting admiration.
+
+“But, say, what’s the idea?” demanded Art sharply, from his position
+several yards away.
+
+Frank had started wriggling forward, and waited until he was close to
+Art and Farnum before replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he
+intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving herd of
+reindeer, when he would land and attempt to stampede them.
+
+“You see how it is,” he said. “You yourselves admit that we’re in a
+tight place. Lupo’s forces have cover in that long grass, and can wait
+us out. Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. The minute we
+get up and start to move around, we expose ourselves. Therefore, the
+best thing to do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn’t it?”
+
+“Sure,” said Art. “But how you going to do it with——”
+
+He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive their enemies from cover
+by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he paused.
+Dawning comprehension came into his eyes, too.
+
+“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you get my idea.”
+
+He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from the center, but who had
+overheard the conversation.
+
+“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer come dashing down,
+Lupo’s men will have to run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding
+herd isn’t anything to monkey with, I expect. Then you’ll have your
+chance. But the reindeer won’t dash in among these few close-set trees,
+so you’ll be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they’ll just head right on
+past here and try to get through the hills beyond.”
+
+Farnum’s glance approved.
+
+“A fine idea,” he said, but then he added in a tone of doubt: “I don’t
+know as I ought to let you go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn’t like it,
+maybe, putting yourself into danger like that.”
+
+“Oh, nonsense,” said Frank. “I can slip unseen into the water. And I can
+swim like a seal. Ask Bob.”
+
+And at once, to prevent any interruption of his plans, he resumed
+worming his way to the bank of the river.
+
+The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, and the clump of
+trees in which camp was situated stood so close to the water that the
+roots of several projected through the soil of the land. Frank had
+little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt sure that he
+accomplished the feat unseen by the enemy. He let himself into the
+stream, which was of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him
+to float downstream under the protection of the high bank, without the
+necessity of wading out to get to deeper water.
+
+“For God’s sake, be careful, boy,” whispered Farnum, as Frank
+disappeared.
+
+Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long knife. He had not figured
+out how he would set about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that
+to chance. What concerned him now was to get to a position behind the
+herd without discovery. He stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes
+roving along the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the enemy.
+
+None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it was hardly likely that
+any of the enemy lay in hiding here, as none of the shots fired at them
+had come from so close to the river. On the contrary, the enemy lay
+inland, showing they had come upon the camp from the landward side.
+Becoming bolder, therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming
+strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He felt for it several
+times, to reassure himself it was there and had not fallen out.
+
+Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was the one athletic sport at
+which he excelled both Bob and Jack, although they, too, were excellent
+swimmers. It did not take him long, therefore, aided by the current, to
+come abreast of the trees clothing the first of the two hills between
+which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly
+down to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how trees clothed it
+entirely, even dipping into the stream. When he had passed, as he
+believed, beyond a point at which there was any possibility of his being
+seen, he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself ashore.
+Then, after climbing a short distance up the hill, he began working his
+way around it through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside facing
+the valley where were his friends in the distant clump of trees, and the
+enemy hidden in the long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They
+were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward at the
+best pace he could command.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.—THE STAMPEDE.
+
+
+For the first time since starting on his wild project, a doubt as to its
+success entered Frank’s mind. But he put it resolutely aside as he sped
+forward, crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined to make
+the best speed possible. His companions were in a ticklish situation. He
+wanted to do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. As to
+his own danger, he gave it not a thought.
+
+What worried Frank was the possibility that he would be unable to
+stampede the reindeer herd. This was the thought which he put aside. But
+it kept recurring. And when he had come into position behind the herd,
+and saw them feeding quietly below him, not a stone’s throw away, at the
+foot of the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy plain
+began, he was still without an idea as to what to do.
+
+Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd might set them into
+motion and stampede them forward. But doubt as to the workability of
+that method had seized him as he first climbed from the water and, from
+among the trees, obtained his first view of the herd. The animals,
+grazing quietly, were so well spread out that he feared stoning them
+would not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede.
+
+“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered to himself.
+
+Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock lying about. Collecting
+a heap of these, he began pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown
+and white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the startled animal, struck
+on the flank, snorted, tossed her head and gave a little jump. She went
+forward only a step or two, however, and then settled down to grazing
+again.
+
+Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone caught her on the side
+of the neck. She tossed her head angrily, and sidled forward again. The
+movement brought her sharply into contact with another cow, and for a
+moment Frank was filled with hope that the pair would start fighting and
+alarm the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow sheered
+away from the other, and both resumed grazing.
+
+What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. He had already considered
+the possibility of startling the reindeer by shouting at them, but had
+given up that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy in the
+grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them to know nothing of the
+menace in their rear until the stampeded herd should sweep down upon
+them.
+
+“I wonder——” he said, muttering the words for the comfort of hearing his
+own voice.
+
+Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they were tame reindeer,
+accustomed to the presence of man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his
+natural state. And of Eskimos at that—men dressed a good deal
+differently from the way in which he ordinarily clothed himself. What
+would those reindeer think if they saw a naked, white body dash down
+upon them suddenly?
+
+“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And it will work, too, I’ll
+bet.”
+
+Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and selected a
+tough branch the thickness of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from
+it the projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip.
+
+Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming and determined,
+Frank made his way to the edge of the trees, and then stole out into the
+long grass, crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to see him until
+he was upon them, and as they were grazing away from him, this was not
+so difficult. In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of cows
+before one swung about and looked at him.
+
+The minute that occurred, Frank realized there was no longer any
+possibility of concealment, and that the time had come to strike. And
+strike he did. Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging his
+whip so that it sank through the air.
+
+Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the flank of the nearest
+reindeer, Frank swung it around on all sides. Every swing landed. The
+swish as the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded him oddly of
+the sound of a stick beating rugs at home. Many a time he had heard that
+same thud-thud from behind his house.
+
+Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, for he felt that if no
+sound indicating that he was human came from him, the consternation of
+the reindeer would be increased.
+
+And that he had not miscalculated became at once apparent, for the
+reindeer near him lifted up their sharp little hooves and sprang to get
+out of the vicinity of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, to
+escape him, there was only one way for them to go, and that was forward,
+so forward they went. Right into the main body of the herd they dashed,
+with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, with each leap bringing
+his whip down upon the flank of a laggard.
+
+Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, dashed by so close on his
+right as to brush Frank. He was not being charged. The animal was
+panicky, and merely seeking to escape. But he had to leap nimbly aside
+to avoid being bowled over. And as he leaped, the long knife clutched in
+his hand pricked the animal’s flank.
+
+The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken cry, and launched
+itself forward like a thunderbolt into the midst of the disturbed herd.
+That, apparently, was all that was needed to complete the impending
+panic. Frank’s inexperienced eye could not have told the composition of
+the herd, but Art, when they had first caught sight of the reindeer from
+the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were cows, and the bucks
+numbered only a handful. If any buck had a masculine curiosity to
+discover what this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like and
+yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the chance to gratify it. For
+the now thoroughly frightened cows started forward in a rush that would
+have overborne any animal foolish enough to try to stem it.
+
+And then Frank did what might have been considered a foolish thing.
+Carried away by the enthusiasm engendered by seeing his plan to stampede
+the herd work out successfully, he continued to bound along behind, at
+first able to whip the bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling
+hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward like the
+wind.
+
+Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering Frank’s friends dashed the
+reindeer. And an exultant throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy
+lay in the long grass between the herd and the trees, and inevitably,
+therefore, the stampeding animals would drive them out.
+
+Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued on his way, running
+as fast as the nature of the ground permitted. The herd beat the long
+grass flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had been pressed
+down on all, and the going was easier than he had looked for.
+
+Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a little wisp of smoke
+showed the young fellow the discharge came from the trees. His own
+friends were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill swept over him.
+He felt certain his friends were firing at the enemy, and that the
+stampeding herd was driving the latter ahead of it, although because of
+the presence of the animals between himself and the enemy he could not
+see whether such was the case.
+
+That Frank’s surmise was correct, however, was soon borne out. For the
+first shots fired from the trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that
+told him everybody was in action.
+
+Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed with shouts and
+cries, and Frank, pausing a moment to peer ahead and listen came to the
+conclusion that the enemy was desperately shooting at the reindeer in an
+effort to turn the herd aside. If that was the case, however, their
+efforts were unsuccessful, for the animals filled with the unreasoning
+spirit of panic did not swerve from their course.
+
+“By golly,” Frank exclaimed aloud, “I believe I can reach camp all
+right.”
+
+And once more he began to run forward. For it seemed to him that the
+herd, sweeping the enemy before it, would leave the ground free for him
+to reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends.
+
+On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the beaten down grass behind it.
+His eyes were strained towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as
+he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. Hampton’s tent. He paid
+no attention to his surroundings.
+
+Then a form rose up from the long grass beside the swathe beaten down by
+the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a
+buzzing in his ears, and lost consciousness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.—LUPO’S END.
+
+
+When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a blanket in camp and the
+sight of Bob and Jack bending anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him.
+
+“Hello,” he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a sharp stab of pain
+passed through his shoulder.
+
+“Don’t move, Frank, We’ll have you fixed up right in a minute,” said Mr.
+Hampton soothingly.
+
+“Is it bad, Dad,” Jack anxiously inquired.
+
+“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, putting the finishing touches
+to the bandage, and straightening up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be all
+right.”
+
+“What happened to me?” asked Frank, struggling to a sitting position,
+and finding his right arm bound across his chest.
+
+“Bullet through your shoulder brought you down,” said Mr. Hampton. “And
+your head struck a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out.”
+
+“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me? I was dashing along,
+yelling to attract your attention, and never knew what hit me.”
+
+“I guess you didn’t,” said Jack. “If it hadn’t been for Art, you might
+have been finished. But he shot down the fellow that winged you.”
+
+“Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn’t an enemy in sight and
+carried you in,” said Art, as he saw Frank about to thank him. “Give
+your gratitude to them.”
+
+Frank smiled.
+
+“I guess I owe it to you all,” he said.
+
+“You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank,” said
+Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. “Unarmed, too.”
+
+“Well, I was stampeding ’em, Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “I couldn’t do
+that, you know, without being there.”
+
+The older man shook his head.
+
+“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have let you take that chance,”
+he said. “No, Farnum,” he hastened to add, “I’m not criticizing you.
+When these boys take it in their heads to do something it’s hard to head
+them off. However, it all turned out for the best.”
+
+“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my scheme work out?”
+
+“Couldn’t have been better, old thing,” said Bob. “Lupo’s men ran like
+rabbits when those reindeer swept down on them. They tried a few shots
+in an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness of their
+efforts, turned and ran. We gave them a few shots to help them on their
+way. We counted nine.”
+
+“And they got away?”
+
+“All but the man Art shot,” said Jack. “The fellow who shot at you. And
+you haven’t heard who he was.”
+
+Jack’s eyes were bright. Frank looked at him questioningly.
+
+“Not——”
+
+“Yes,” said Jack. “It was Lupo himself. Art wounded him in the chest. He
+died before we could do anything for him. But Dad got some information
+from him first.”
+
+He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton’s face was both grim and sad.
+
+“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We learned who set these men on us, and who
+plotted against Thorwaldsson. But let us not discuss it now. It’s bad
+business all the way through.”
+
+Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with him, and the two fell into
+a low-toned discussion. Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume
+his clothing which still lay where he had discarded it before taking to
+the river. Art busied himself at packing up the camp equipment.
+
+Presently, the two older men called Art to them and, after a few words
+of discussion, rejoined the boys.
+
+“Boys,” said Mr. Hampton, “we want your opinions on this, too.”
+
+“On what, Dad?”
+
+“Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away from the reindeer, and we
+accounted for Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there
+were more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out there in the grass
+may be one or more badly wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time
+or another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there are any such, we
+can’t go off and leave them there to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like
+that.”
+
+“They’re not dogs,” muttered Farnum, bitterly. “They’re wolves.”
+
+“Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too great a risk,” Mr. Hampton
+continued. “He says that if we go out to search for wounded, we are
+likely to be shot for our pains.”
+
+“Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you were going to help,” protested
+Jack.
+
+“You don’t know them,” said Farnum.
+
+“Well, just the same,” said Jack, “I think Dad is right. It would be
+shameful for us to go away without investigating.”
+
+“I’d feel like a murderer,” said Bob. “Shooting ’em down in a fight is
+one thing. It was their lives or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die
+in the wilderness is something entirely different.”
+
+Farnum made a gesture of surrender.
+
+“I guess I seem hard-hearted,” he said. “But you don’t know what I’ve
+been through in the past. All right, we’ll make a search. But I warn you
+to be on guard.”
+
+“Hardly likely after all that there are any wounded out there,” remarked
+Frank, taking part in the discussion for the first time. “They must have
+been in hiding right in the path of the reindeer, and you can’t see any
+forms there now. If there were any too badly wounded to escape, they’d
+also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves to the side.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+“The grass is so beaten down, too,” he said, “that if there were anybody
+out there, we could see him. However, I cannot rest easy without making
+a search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and keep watch. The rest of
+us will take care of the search.”
+
+To this the boys made no objection. As a matter of fact, it was one time
+that exclusion from activity did not irritate them. They had no stomach
+for what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, thinking of
+the terrible affair on the island in the lake, kept silence. Bob
+protested, but more as a matter of form and because he considered
+manliness demanded it, than otherwise.
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It has to be done, however.
+But I certainly don’t want you boys along.”
+
+The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands for use in case of
+emergency, set out, while the boys watched from the trees. Keeping close
+together, they quartered the plain, going far beyond the beaten down
+stretch of grass left by the passing of the reindeer herd. Presently,
+the boys saw them return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said:
+
+“Well, thank goodness, that’s over.”
+
+Mr. Hampton’s spirits were considerably higher on his return, as the
+boys could see by his features.
+
+“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we made a thorough search, too.”
+
+“More thorough than there was need for,” said Farnum, grumpily.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where
+men are thrown into intimate contact every hour of the day and night,
+they get to know each other better than would be the case through a
+lifetime of association under ordinary circumstances. It was so here.
+Mr. Hampton had come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the
+latter’s bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the easterner knew there
+was some good reason. He sensed a tragedy in Farnum’s past, about which,
+perhaps, the other would some day speak in a moment of confidence. And
+he forgave the man’s seeming brutality accordingly.
+
+“All right, everybody,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. “Let’s pack up and be
+on our way.”
+
+Thanks to Art’s previous preparations, the business of breaking camp was
+speedily concluded, and the party embarked in the canoes and once more
+got under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, because of Frank’s
+wounded shoulder and his inability to paddle, Art should take his place
+in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum. But to this arrangement the boys protested vigorously, and Mr.
+Hampton settled the matter by supporting them.
+
+“Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists,” he said. “They have given plenty
+of evidence of that on this trip, and at home they are always in the
+water when they aren’t flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don’t
+like to be separated.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.—IN THE FOG.
+
+
+Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, corresponding in
+time to the passage of a day, although there was nothing to mark the
+lapse except the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension of
+the sun. Camp was pitched on an island in the stream which was small and
+compact and could be easily defended in case attack on them was renewed.
+
+Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton felt there was little
+danger. With Lupo gone, the rascals composing his party would no longer
+be held to their purpose, and start to make their way out of the
+wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts.
+
+When travel was resumed after an undisturbed camp, everybody felt rested
+and in a more cheerful frame of mind.
+
+“We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon,” Farnum exclaimed, as they
+set out.
+
+His words were prophetic, because at the end of two hours, on rounding a
+bend, they discerned not far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which
+emptied the stream they had been following.
+
+“The Coppermine beyond a doubt,” said Farnum.
+
+In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And, before long, all
+question of doubt was conclusively settled by the discovery of great
+rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper
+deposits from which the river took its name.
+
+“Sometime, when the transportation problem has been solved, this region
+will be supplying copper to the world,” Mr. Hampton observed.
+
+The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, as the older men had
+let their paddles swing idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with
+them.
+
+“Why can’t it be taken out now, Dad?” asked Jack.
+
+“Because,” explained Mr. Hampton, “the only method would be by ship
+through the Arctic, and even in the short Summer that is a passage often
+blocked by ice. No, development of the copper resources of this
+wilderness, as well as of the oil we hope to find, will have to wait on
+the building of a railroad.”
+
+“But ice and snow will block the railroad.”
+
+“Not nearly to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton said. “Throughout the
+Summer, such a road could be in continuous operation. Even in Winter,
+with properly designed equipment, the road could be kept open—perhaps.
+That, however, is doubtful, for of the continuous severity of Winter
+here you boys can have no conception.”
+
+“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll get some idea of it, all
+right,” said Farnum, grimly.
+
+“You mean we’ll be caught by Winter before we can get out?” asked Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+“When the old North Pole starts sliding south, she slides fast,” said
+Farnum, sententiously.
+
+As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, all dug their
+paddles into the stream with renewed vigor, and the two canoes swept on
+between the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour.
+
+That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness in the air to which
+the party was not accustomed. Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys
+worked at building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither he
+indicated.
+
+“The moon,” he said. “Sure sign the season’s getting late. That’s the
+first time you could see it real good.”
+
+“How late in the Summer is it, anyway?” asked Frank. “I, for one, have
+kept no track of time. And I don’t see how anybody else could with the
+continuous daylight we have had.”
+
+“Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four hours,” said
+Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.”
+
+Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained that from Long Tom, the
+Indian they had taken captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten
+directions as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson and his men to
+be. The explorer, according to Long Tom, was making his way along the
+Coppermine, in an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by the
+Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, Mr. Hampton’s party
+was still to the south of Thorwaldsson.
+
+“From now on, however,” said Mr. Hampton, “we must keep our eyes open as
+we proceed for any signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson
+already had passed, going south. Not that I consider that to be likely,
+however,” he added. “On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying, and I
+believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson should be close at hand,
+and we ought soon to encounter him.”
+
+Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys awoke in the morning they
+found a thick wet fog over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the
+rocks were wet, and the river which had lain spread out before them
+under the moonlight when they turned in for the night, now could not be
+seen. Only a gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines even
+of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood in anxious conversation.
+
+When the boys joined their elders, they found the question up for
+discussion was the question of whether to proceed or remain where they
+were until the fog lifted.
+
+“We’ve had unexampled good weather so far, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum.
+“But this fog may mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from now
+on.”
+
+“I realize all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience mute
+evidence to Jack, at least, that his Father was worried. “What I’d like
+to know now, is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts.”
+
+“Why not move on, Dad?” asked Jack.
+
+“Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if we travel in this fog we
+run the danger of being caught in rapids and sucked forward before being
+able to reach the bank. For another, we might—just might—pass
+Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without knowing it. He might be traveling,
+too.”
+
+After some further discussion, it was decided the party should remain
+until the fog lifted, and that all should be on guard to catch any sound
+of movement out of the fog which would indicate somebody, presumably
+Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following breakfast, in fact, all but Mr.
+Hampton, who remained in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered
+and lost their way in the fog, took up positions along the bank of the
+river, some twenty yards apart to maintain “listening posts.”
+
+An hour passed, and then another, with no indication that the fog was
+thinning out, and with no sound coming to straining ears except the lap
+of the water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying work in
+a way, to sit there for so long a period, isolated, as if entirely alone
+in an unpeopled world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the
+strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did Farnum or Art who were
+old hands at the wilderness game.
+
+In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had decided, because of the
+greater experience of the two older men, that they should take up their
+positions at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound along
+the Coppermine escaped the attention of the boys, Farnum and Art would
+be pretty likely to remedy the oversight.
+
+To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as he sat there, hunched
+up on a rock, staring out into that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt,
+if anything, more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, at least,
+had the consolation of knowing there was someone to either side. But,
+with none of his friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much
+alone, indeed.
+
+All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections that had no
+bearing whatsoever on the situation in which he found himself. He
+thought of sunny days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or
+zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He thought of one thing
+and another, classroom, Mexican mountains, that strange city of another
+world found immured in the Andes, and—of Marjorie. Ever since his first
+meeting with his sister’s friend, Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a
+position of growing importance in Bob’s scheme of things. Someday——
+
+“Some girl,” Bob said to himself. “I’ll have to see more of her.”
+
+He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, eyes staring into the
+fog. In reality, his thoughts, as can be seen, were far, far away. But
+presently, a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness and he
+sprang into instant alertness. He listened, holding his breath,
+straining to hear.
+
+It came again.
+
+Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first man to the south.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.—A WAILING CRY.
+
+
+“Jack, Jack,” he shouted, as he ran through the fog, blindly, but
+remembering to veer away from the river bank a little to avoid the
+danger of tumbling in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?”
+
+A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, enormous. A hand
+gripped his shoulder and brought him to a halt.
+
+“Here I am, Bob. What’s the matter?”
+
+Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes.
+
+“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing into the fog upon the
+river. “I guess I’d been asleep, or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn’t be
+sure I had heard anything. It came twice—that sound. Then there was
+silence. So I came down here to ask whether you had heard, too.”
+
+“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing.”
+
+“Jack, it was the sound of a baby’s cry.”
+
+Bob’s voice was solemn. A shiver ran through Jack, as if a breath of
+cold air had fanned him. In that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far
+northern wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was preposterous.
+More, it was uncanny.
+
+“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly were dreaming. A baby.
+Huh.”
+
+“Maybe so,” Bob said, reluctantly. “But, true as I live, Jack——”
+
+The other’s grip on his shoulder tightened.
+
+Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, but unmistakable. It
+was the cry of a baby, if ever there was such a thing.
+
+But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two
+listened, straining to hear, but the cry died away without being
+repeated. They looked at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them.
+
+“Jack, I’m afraid,” confessed Bob in a whisper. “I don’t know—there’s
+something strikes a chill into me—I—I——”
+
+He paused. Jack nodded.
+
+“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said, low-voiced. “What a pair of fools
+we are, though,” he added, brightening. “That must be some bird, or
+animal, perhaps.”
+
+Almost unconsciously, they had been making their way southward and now
+another figure rose up in the fog before them—that of Frank. He was
+about to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and this time it
+came from two quarters, from the river and from farther inland. The
+three stood, silent, speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of
+the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art materialized out of
+the fog.
+
+“Good, there you all are,” said Farnum, in a low, tense voice. “Follow
+me to camp.”
+
+And without a word of explanation he started at right angles away from
+the river, for they had taken their stations in such fashion that Frank,
+holding the middle position, would be directly opposite the camp. This
+was in order to enable them to reach it without losing their way in the
+fog.
+
+“What is it, Art?” asked Jack, his voice matching Farnum’s.
+
+“Indians,” answered Art, tersely. “Stick close together and don’t make
+no noise.”
+
+It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, and the three boys
+hurrying along in the wake of Farnum and Art could not be accused of
+cowardice for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. Often
+had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far northern Indians. Bitter
+had been their experiences with Lupo’s half-breeds, in whose veins
+flowed the blood of the Indians of the north.
+
+As they hurried along, there flashed through their minds some of the
+stories Farnum had told. Had they gotten so far, so near the end of
+their quest for the “Lost Expedition” only to be wiped out by Indians,
+on the very eve of success? Such thoughts raced through the mind of
+each. But they were determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger,
+used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was swept aside, and, by
+the time they tumbled into the little hollow in which camp had been
+pitched, and where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself well in
+hand.
+
+Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and a smile of grim
+approval was his greeting.
+
+“Indians, boys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I suspected as much. Now, we
+have no trees here for bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough.
+Let us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be pretty close
+together, and if any Indians stumble on us they’ll get a warm reception.
+Listen.” He spoke in a low voice. “There goes that cry again. Does it
+sound closer? Yes,” as the other nodded, “I thought so. Quick. Take your
+positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me.”
+
+There was a little tremor in his voice. That was all. But Jack
+understood. He clasped his father’s hand strongly, then threw himself
+prone beside him, while the others ranged themselves in a circle as
+commanded.
+
+Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. Once more it was
+answered in kind from the water. But to all it was apparent that the
+sounds were farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful silence
+with a whispered:
+
+“They’re moving on, moving away.”
+
+“Look, Dad,” Jack exclaimed excitedly. “I can see those rocks ahead
+where a minute ago was only the white fog. Why, the fog’s lifting. It’s
+lifting, Dad, sure enough.”
+
+“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied, low-voiced, but there was
+anxiety rather than jubilation in his tone. “That will make it bad for
+us. We’ll be exposed to sight.”
+
+Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As faint came the reply
+from the water. Both cries were to the north. Originally they had come
+from that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence they had come.
+What could it mean?
+
+The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the silence. At the same
+time a cold breeze blew across the crouching figures in the shallow pit
+and the fog began to shred out fast before it.
+
+Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The others also gained their
+feet. The shooting now was fast and furious.
+
+“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, in a puzzled tone.
+
+With an exclamation, Jack seized his father’s arm.
+
+“Dad,” he cried, “you said Thorwaldsson might be near.”
+
+“Yes, why—”
+
+“That’s it,” said Art, in a tone of conviction. Mr. Farnum turned
+towards him.
+
+“You mean?”
+
+“Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson’s being attacked.”
+
+Jack nodded.
+
+“That’s what I meant, Dad.”
+
+“You’re right, Jack,” said his father. “Come on. It can’t be anything
+else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson is in this wilderness. We must help him.
+Stick close together.”
+
+And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton started on the dead
+run towards the direction of the shooting, with the others at his heels.
+
+The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks of the copper ore were
+scattered around. On this account their view was restricted, but the
+sound of the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising them that
+they were nearing the scene of conflict. Suddenly Bob, who was in the
+lead, having out-distanced the others several yards, rounded a big rock
+and found himself on a bank above a narrow strip of beach.
+
+Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead or wounded. Two canoes were
+drawn up on the beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark,
+crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther down the beach were three
+other canoes grounded, and beside them several forms of wounded men, and
+five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender of the attacked
+position, creeping up on him.
+
+Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers mustered up
+courage for a rush, and with wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark,
+indeed, for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. Bob looked back to
+see how close were his companions, but they were not yet in sight. His
+dash had carried him farther than he had believed to be the case.
+
+It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way the land lay. The lone
+defender was the survivor of Thorwaldsson’s party, if the explorer’s
+party it was, of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white man. The
+others were half-breeds, and if Bob was not mistaken they were of the
+same gang which he had encountered before.
+
+It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing his rifle to his
+shoulder, he prepared to open fire on the crushing enemy. But as his
+finger pressed the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle had
+became jammed in some fashion. Desperately he worked to release the
+trigger, but to no avail.
+
+Then the light of battle came into big Bob’s eyes. The half-breeds were
+just below him now. Several of their number had fallen in the rush, shot
+down by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and they evidently
+were bent on polishing off their lone opponent. So absorbed were all in
+their own drama, they had not seen Bob.
+
+Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on the back of one of the
+attackers, and bore him to the ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who
+himself had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself together,
+regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell fit to
+“frighten a wolf pack,” as Frank later described it.
+
+The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on the shoulders of another
+of the half-breeds, felling him as if he had been struck by lightning.
+So tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from Bob’s grasp. But
+he leaped for another of the enemy, a fellow whose startled face was
+close to his, seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to be
+tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The fourth man was dropped by
+a shot from the defender of the canoe.
+
+“Attaboy, Bob,” came Frank’s voice, from the bluff above.
+
+One after the other, Bob’s friends leaped to the beach.
+
+As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and tried to grasp his hand,
+uttering enthusiastic praise the while, Bob looked around.
+
+“Say, where’s that chap? Why, he’s fainted.”
+
+Freeing himself from his companions’ clutches, Bob leaped over the
+up-ended canoe and bent above the recumbent body of the doughty
+defender.
+
+“Why, he’s badly wounded,” he cried.
+
+Mr. Hampton pushed him aside.
+
+“Here, let me look, Bob,” he said. “You fellows help Farnum and Art in
+looking after the others. The place is a shambles, with wounded men
+everywhere.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.—OUTWARD BOUND.
+
+
+It was a week before the wounded could be moved. At close range though
+the fight had been, none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in
+amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders.
+
+“More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their mark,” he said. “I’ve
+seen men, tough fellows, regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in
+Alaskan saloons in the old days without anybody being killed. When a man
+sees red, he don’t take no good aim.”
+
+The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital spots, but
+Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery at first
+was a matter of doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party to
+keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick of time.
+
+From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson’s five companions, however, the
+story of what had occurred had been obtained. They had been on their way
+down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken in the fog. They
+had landed in the little beach to wait for the fog to lift. There the
+half-breeds, survivor’s of Lupo’s gang, who had been dogging the trail
+of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come upon them.
+
+The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds had been looking for
+the Hampton party and not for Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked,
+the majority from the canoes, and three who had been scouting along
+shore, from the land. Surprised thus, Thorwaldsson’s party had put up a
+game fight, but one after the other had been shot down until only the
+leader was left. He, barricaded behind the canoes, had held off the rest
+of the attackers until the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival.
+
+As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening into short nights,
+Art and Farnum both grew increasingly anxious to be on their way for the
+outside. They knew their North, and they realized that the time
+remaining to them before Winter set in was narrowing down to a
+perilously small edge.
+
+“We’ll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton,” Farnum pleaded. “What
+with wounded on our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost
+hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we can’t afford to
+waste time. Can’t Thorwaldsson be moved? He’ll be all right in a canoe.”
+
+“As long as the traveling is easy, yes,” said Mr. Hampton. “He will be
+all right. But how about at the portages? He’s lost lot of blood
+already. He can’t afford to lose any more. However, I expect that with
+care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. We’ll start tomorrow.”
+
+Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was broken, and the party got
+under way. Frank’s shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once
+more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, and he took his
+place in the canoe with Bob and Jack. They had another passenger this
+time in Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a shot in the
+sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was taken in the canoe
+occupied by Mr. Hampton and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft
+with members of Thorwaldsson’s party. Several of the latter had been
+creased by rifle bullets and one shot through a leg, but all could wield
+paddles.
+
+And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds
+in three canoes, deprived of arms and closely watched by their captors
+in the four canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, it was
+felt, the prisoners could be controlled until they should near
+civilization. Without weapons they would be in a hopeless plight in the
+wilderness, unable to defend themselves against wild animals, unable to
+provide food for themselves. Therefore, no attempt on the part of their
+captives to escape was looked for by the others, until they should near
+the outlying settlements of the inhabited country.
+
+“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, “we must be on
+the lookout, for the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to
+get back their weapons and make a break for it. And I am determined to
+take them into civilization as witnesses to prove my statement of the
+murderous conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman in
+faraway New York.”
+
+Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had occurred and from the
+accounts, first of Long Tom and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell
+and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s party, he had pieced
+together the story of the conspiracy against them.
+
+To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme of which was that when
+Farrell had told his story to Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery
+of the oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson’s confidential
+secretary had gone to a New York financier and sold him the information.
+He had not been able to tell definitely, however, the location of the
+oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, that Farrell
+was not certain of it himself, his vicissitudes in getting out of the
+country having unsettled his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent
+his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson be tracked.
+
+“Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the mere tracking of
+Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton. “But I doubt it. The attacks on
+Thorwaldsson’s expedition, the disappearance of his ship and crew, all
+look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain Grimm’s ends at whatever
+cost in human life. And, on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who
+was paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson’s former secretary,
+acting as agent for Grimm, show the latter aimed to put us all out of
+the way.”
+
+“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to believe.”
+
+“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father. “The man who develops this
+Arctic oil region may become the richest in the world. Grimm is
+ambitious for that position. He’s got a lot of money so far, in one
+crooked way or another. But he’s not one of the big ones yet, not one of
+the richest. And he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached
+himself this time, for I’ve got the evidence, and I’ll see that we get
+more in Dawson and Seattle and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have
+the power or freedom to toy with men’s lives when I get through with
+him.”
+
+Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and could not be questioned,
+the full account of what had befallen his expedition since it set out
+from Seattle was learned from the others. First of all, they had
+succeeded in retracing Farrell’s earlier footsteps, and had found the
+oil region and the river running through it. A thorough survey of the
+country had been made, with maps showing the outlet by water to the
+Arctic Ocean.
+
+In fact, the party had made its way out the river into the Arctic Ocean
+and around the coast into the Coppermine. There they had encountered and
+made friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started down the
+Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north into the Arctic, but had
+been attacked, losing half the members of their party and a large part
+of their equipment, including the radio. It was after this that the
+aviator of the expedition had attempted to fly to the outside with news
+of Thorwaldsson’s plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through
+the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the
+Coppermine, to which they had put back. The death of the aviator, near
+the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until
+the news was imparted by the boys.
+
+The course followed as they struck southward was not that pursued by
+Farrell when he had made his way back to civilization. On that occasion
+he had frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it would be unwise
+to trust now to his guidance. Instead, Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to
+retrace their own trail back to the island in the lake where MacDonald
+had been encountered, and thence follow his course to the Fort of the
+Northwest Mounted Police.
+
+Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever growing longer and
+colder, with frost on the ground in the mornings. The honking of the
+wild geese overhead, as they made their way south, also was a warning
+that the mantle of Winter soon would settle down.
+
+“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter in this country not
+only means dreadful cold for which we ain’t prepared in the matter of
+clothing or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there ain’t no food
+to be had. Yes, there’s plenty of game now, geese and duck everywhere
+along the streams, caribou plentiful. But you notice they’re all going
+south. When Winter strikes, there’ll be nothing in this wilderness but
+rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s all right—if you can dig ’em out o’ their
+huts. But rabbit—huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.—LONG JIM APPEARS.
+
+
+Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they
+had planned to be when the cold should really set in. This was due to a
+variety of circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson’s recovery was
+one of the retarding influences, which prevented them making the desired
+speed. After weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, and
+Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected by a bullet that ploughed
+along the left side of his head. The other wounded, although quick to
+recover, also acted as a hindrance, especially at the first.
+
+Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived weeks ahead of the
+expected time. And daily, as the ice on stream and river thickened, it
+became increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes could not be
+abandoned, for, once snow began to fly, the travelers would have been
+helpless on land, without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could be
+constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes made, too, but neither
+would be worth much, and the manufacture of them would take a good deal
+of time.
+
+Two sentries were always posted at night now; one by a fire around which
+slumbered the prisoners, the other by a fire in the midst of a circle
+composed of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. It was Jack’s
+turn to keep guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall,
+which had caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had brought them,
+indeed, to the verge of despair. For they were insufficiently clad, even
+though the skins of many animals slain for food in the past weeks had
+been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, in addition, with the
+closing-in of Winter game had become so scarce that the camp was
+virtually on the verge of starvation.
+
+Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which lay his friends. One of
+the Thorwaldsson party, Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire.
+Looking across the little space which separated the two parties, Jack
+could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the
+fire, which Swenson fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost to
+be in it. Around him the members of his own party were similarly
+disposed.
+
+With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of wood and tossed it into
+the fire. The flames at once shot high and, as if that were a signal,
+out of the darkness beyond came a robust hail.
+
+“Hello, there. Keep ’er goin’, sonny.”
+
+Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a big fur-clad figure
+of a man on snowshoes. On his back was a pack which he dropped to the
+ground with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in the crook of
+an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, spread his hands to the
+blaze, working his fingers gratefully back and forth.
+
+“Cold an’ gittin’ colder,” he announced, casually. “Got a nice fire
+here.”
+
+Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find another wanderer in
+this wilderness which they believed unpeopled was exciting enough. But
+to have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing any explanation of
+his presence took Jack’s breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew
+enough of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is the first law
+of the wilds, and that questions distinctly would not be in order. He
+decided the best thing for him would be to wait for the other to take
+the lead in the conversation.
+
+This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning even as he eased his
+stiffened fingers in the warmth of the fire.
+
+“Didn’t know there was anybody else in this country,” he said. “Been
+around here long?”
+
+A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows accompanied the question.
+Jack had to smile to himself.
+
+“No; not long,” he said composedly. “And you?”
+
+“Oh, I been huntin’ an’ trappin’ ’round here,” the other said.
+
+To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, even a likeable, type,
+and yet that he was acting evasively. He decided it would be a good plan
+to get a more experienced head to help him deal with the situation. None
+of his party apparently was awake, all being worn out with the terrific
+strain of the day’s travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, his foot was
+not six inches from Jack.
+
+Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer’s attention, Jack
+moved his foot to a position where with his toe he could tap on Art’s
+ankles. It was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out of the
+tail of his eye Jack saw Art’s body stiffen and his head lift up
+slightly from the ground. For what followed, however, he was totally
+unprepared.
+
+Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began thumping the newcomer
+vigorously on the back.
+
+“Why, you ol’ son-of-a-gun,” he cried. “You ol’ son-of-a-gun.”
+
+“Li’l Artie, or I’m goin’ blind,” cried the other, seizing Art by the
+hand and pumping up and down.
+
+Jack turned in amazement to Art.
+
+“Why—why—you know each other!” he cried.
+
+“Know each other? Har, har, har,” roared the giant, in a guffaw that
+aroused the others about the campfire. “Know each other? That’s a good
+one.”
+
+Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell and several of the others
+gathered around, looking their questions, and Art turned to satisfy
+them.
+
+“Ever hear o’ Long Jim Golden?” he asked. “Well, this is him—the
+daggonedest trapper on the face o’ the earth. Ain’t seen him in years
+since he left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?”
+
+“Trappin’.” Jim looked around at the interested faces. “You tol’ who I
+am,” he said. “Now tell me who’s your friends, Artie.”
+
+“Sure,” said Art heartily, effecting introductions. “Here we all are,”
+he concluded, and then his face fell as he added: “but where we’ll be
+soon, I don’t know, nor what’s to become of us.”
+
+Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, then his eyes roved over
+the camp.
+
+“How come?” he asked. “No sleds nor dogs nor snowshoes nor nothin’. How
+come?”
+
+“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said Art. “The rest o’
+you, we won’t bother you none with loud voices. We’ll jest whisper-like.
+You’ll want to turn in and sleep, so go to it.”
+
+Nothing loath, the others with the exception of Jack, who moved to one
+side so as not to intrude on the two old acquaintances thus strangely
+reunited, turned in and soon were once more asleep.
+
+Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim the circumstances leading
+up to their present position. From across the fire, Jack watched them.
+He saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art’s narrative and that,
+indeed, it seemed to affect him strangely. For over his open, rugged
+features, not constructed to conceal their owner’s moods, swept doubt,
+uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man was going on a fight
+between two contending forces. Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be
+thinking of?
+
+Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a hand on the shoulder of
+his companion who remained seated but looking up at him. Jack
+unconsciously moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to speak.
+He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long Jim’s expression had puzzled him
+greatly. What could it mean?
+
+“Artie,” said Long Jim in a louder tone than that in which their
+whispered conversation had been carried on, and one that reached Jack’s
+ears, “Artie, my boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have them skunks with
+ye.”
+
+“Them breeds,” said Art, jerking a thumb back over a shoulder to
+indicate the prisoners sleeping about the other fire.
+
+“Them same,” said Long Jim. “Cause why, you asks me? Cause I got a
+paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the Winter lapped in
+comfort. An’ I don’t want to take no rascals like them half-breeds
+there. But——”
+
+Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with disbelief.
+
+“What? What you mean, Long Jim?”
+
+“Jest what I says,” answered the other emphatically. “A paradise, I
+calls it. An’ a paradise it is. An’ the quicker we git there the better,
+so wake up your friends an’ let me talk to ’em. If we have to take them
+skunks, why, we’ll take ’em.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.—A TALE OF PARADISE.
+
+
+At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who had been called to join
+the pair, speedily re-aroused their friends.
+
+“I ain’t no hand for talkin’,” Long Jim declared in answer to Art’s
+requests for further information. “I got to tell this. But onct oughter
+be enough. No use my tellin’ you an’ then tellin’ the rest o’ them all
+over agin.”
+
+Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was “no hand for talking,”
+yet his tongue wagged continually. However, his heart seemed in the
+right place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough of a haven not
+too far away to which they could go for refuge. What was it he called
+it? “Paradise.” Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on gentle
+methods in arousing the sleepers.
+
+“Lookit here,” said Long Jim, as the circle gathered around him. “Art’s
+been tellin’ me the trouble you folks is in. Looks to me like you
+moughtn’t be able to make it out o’ this country.”
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation.
+
+“Well, I know of a place that’s paradise,” said Long Jim, impressively.
+“An’ I’ll take ye all there, an’ ye can spend the Winter—warm, game,
+everything there. Only thing, like I tol’ Artie here, is I hate to have
+to take them skunks o’ half-breeds in there. They’ll be a-comin’ back
+later an’ ruin the country.”
+
+“But I don’t understand,” said Mr. Hampton. “What is it you are talking
+about?”
+
+“Don’t blame ye,” said Long Jim. “Think maybe the ol’ man’s crazy, don’t
+ye? Don’t blame ye for that, neither. But, look here, night’s dyin’ an’
+if ye stand up an’ look where I’m pointin’ ye’ll see somethin’.”
+
+Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others also stood up.
+
+“Thar,” said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the westward. “What d’ye
+see?”
+
+“Why—a great bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton, after gazing intently. “How
+strange. Fog in Winter. I don’t understand.”
+
+“An’ ye all think that’s fog, hey?” asked Long Jim, turning to the
+others.
+
+Nodding heads answered.
+
+“Well, it ain’t,” he said. “That’s the vapor from hot springs.”
+
+“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded frankly incredulous.
+
+“Wait’ll you see for yourself,” said Long Jim, tolerantly. “I wouldn’t
+believe it, neither, when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But
+bein’ as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I went to
+investigate. An’ I found paradise.”
+
+Then, under Mr. Hampton’s skillful questioning, Long Jim told his story.
+He declared he had lived in this region now these two years, and that
+since first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. Drawn by the
+seeming fog to investigate, he had come upon an almost tropical valley
+through which ran not only one but several rivers of water forever at
+the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, were fed by hundreds
+of hot springs, which bubbled out of the ground in all directions. It
+was the steam from these which, condensing as it rose above the valley
+and struck the cold Winter air, had formed the fog which first attracted
+his attention.
+
+“Once I were in South America,” said Long Jim. “Down clost to the
+Equator. Well, I’m tellin’ you, it were that hot all last Summer right
+in that valley. As for right now, ye’ll find it mighty pleasant an’
+warm, an’ when snow falls it’s only rain by the time it passes through
+the heat hangin’ over that valley all the time.”
+
+“Hurray,” cried Frank, exuberantly. “Let’s go. No snow fellows. Get
+that? I’ve had all the snow I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I
+can get along without any more for some time to come.”
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank’s jubilation, proceeded with
+his questioning. And Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he
+could talk all he pleased, after having been without companions for
+several years, continued unfolding new wonders.
+
+This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles long and 40 miles wide.
+They were now near its upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his
+way by slow travel and exploration during the two years since his
+arrival at the southern end.
+
+Game?
+
+At the question, Long Jim grew even more eloquent.
+
+He declared that, due to the heat generated by the hot springs and the
+boiling rivers, the fertility of the soil was amazing. The vegetation,
+in fact, achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew tall as trees,
+with stems as thick as a man’s forearm and so dense that it was
+impossible to force a way through them. Willows grew to the size of big
+trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk along them.
+
+“An’ birches,” added Long Jim, “git to be hunderds o’ feet tall, so
+tall, in fact, they can’t hold themselves up but bend over an’ touch the
+ground.
+
+“Likely you think I’m out o’ my head. Oh, I kin see it in your eyes. But
+I’m tellin’ you the God’s truth, men.” And Long Jim spoke with such
+honest sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. “In sich a place,”
+he continued, “it ain’t likely there wouldn’t be no game. Why, the
+animals there is thick as flees on a ol’ hound.
+
+“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, deer, wolves, foxes, oh,
+every wild animal o’ the whole North kin be found there—down in that
+valley an’ in the mountains enclosin’ of it. An’ I tell you the truth,”
+he concluded, his voice sinking for effect, “the moose git so fat
+they’re almost square an’ they’re so darn tame ye can almost touch ’em.”
+
+As Long Jim’s speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton turned and stared
+across the brightening landscape to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the
+short days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of the Arctic
+would arrive. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, all
+unprepared to face further travel as they were. Could it be possible
+that miracle had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the truth?
+
+Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was passing through the older
+man’s mind. Truth to tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went
+up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders.
+
+“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I believe Long Jim is telling the truth. And
+we better make the effort to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating
+a little, but certainly it looks like a promised land.”
+
+“That’s right, Jack,” said his father, shaking off his reverie, and his
+alert self once more. “We’ll have a hard enough struggle getting there,
+what with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow without
+snowshoes or sleds. Well, let’s see what can be done.”
+
+Eventually, the party got into motion. The canoes were cached, where
+they could be recovered in the Summer. There was little likelihood
+anybody else would pass that way, to appropriate them. Equipment was
+made into packs shouldered by everybody except Art and Bob. These two
+were to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised out of poles cut
+on the river bank, and blankets.
+
+Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which Long Jim was guiding them
+was distant not more than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the
+going was tremendously difficult because of the mass of new-fallen snow.
+Had it not been for Long Jim to break the way on his snowshoes,
+moreover, it is doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy laden as
+they were. But Long Jim worked patiently backward and forward, breaking
+down the snow, and packing it a second and even a third time with his
+webs.
+
+“How come you were out here, ol’ timer?” asked Art once, as Long Jim
+paused, and he caught up with him.
+
+“Well, I git lonesome a leetle,” said Long Jim. “I was prospectin’
+around in the mountains rimmin’ the valley yestiddy, an’ I saw you
+across the snow. Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I
+thought you were humans. I couldn’t hardly believe my eyes, but I come
+along investigatin’. An’ then when night come on, you lit your fires,
+an’——”
+
+“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain’t a-lyin’,” said Art.
+
+Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was prepared to stand on his
+dignity but then he smiled in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all
+around his blue eyes.
+
+“Don’t blame ye for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds like I were crazy,
+don’t it? But jest wait till you see.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.—VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS.
+
+
+But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley proved, indeed, to be more
+even than he described, for as the world now knows important mineral
+deposits were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron and
+oil. But of the development going on to bring not only this marvelous
+region but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world’s
+resources naught need be said now. Suffice it to say that such
+development is under way, for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great
+financiers, and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell and
+Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from their shares in the various
+projects.
+
+Here the party settled down, constructed huts, and prepared to await the
+coming of Spring when the snow should disappear from the vast wilderness
+separating them from the northern edge of the civilized lands and the
+ice in the rivers be unlocked.
+
+One of the first things done by the boys was to erect their radio plant,
+and they succeeded without much difficulty in opening communication with
+the little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the farthest rim of
+the settled country. MacDonald and Dick, with their prisoners, had
+arrived only a day or two before communication was opened, and the two
+parties exchanged the stories of their adventures by radio.
+
+To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of wonder as Long Jim’s
+valley was to the boys. He could never get over marveling at it, and
+every time that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were in the
+vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and open-mouthed astonishment
+while the boys operated the instruments.
+
+Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful valley, at the resources
+of which Mr. Hampton could never express sufficient astonishment.
+
+“It is a freak of nature, of course, boys,” he explained on one
+occasion.
+
+“How wonderful that it should have remained undiscovered for so long,”
+said Jack.
+
+“Not so marvelous,” said his father. “Few, indeed, are the people who
+ever have penetrated any distance into all this vast wilderness of
+northern Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, to be
+bleak and uninhabitable. You know from experience that the contrary is
+the case. It is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted
+that, if properly clothed and housed, he can stand any severity of
+Winter. Some day, I predict, all this vast wilderness through which we
+have been making our way will be settled. That day is far off, of
+course, but it is coming. The growth of world population will force the
+conquest of the sub-Arctic.”
+
+The one thing making their stay in this valley of marvels unpleasant was
+the constant rainfall. For in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping
+down from the North Pole in never-ending succession. And these storms
+which they knew were burying the land beyond the valley under a pall of
+ice and snow poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of the mountain
+ranges rimming the valley were buried under snow, gleaming wan in the
+occasional moonlight between the storms, for by now the long night had
+come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long Jim had foretold the snow as
+it passed through the temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers
+and springs was transformed into rain.
+
+Two events of importance marked their stay. One was the escape of their
+prisoners, together with some rifles which they succeeded in stealing.
+Pursuit in the darkness, and through the jungle-like reaches of the
+forest was almost hopeless and was quickly abandoned. Nor, although
+vigilant watch was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign of
+the half-breeds again.
+
+“It’s a big valley,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I doubt whether they will
+attempt to attack us. Rather, they will keep out of our way. They are
+poorly armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all come together.
+Their escape, I imagine, was incited by a fear of what awaited them if
+we succeeded in getting them back to civilization and the courts. Well,”
+he said, with a sigh, “I regret, of course, the loss of witnesses to
+substantiate the charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring against
+Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid of them.”
+
+It was a sentiment in which all concurred.
+
+The other event referred to was the opening by means of relayed messages
+via the Mounted Post and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr.
+Temple in faraway New York. When word reached Bob’s father that the
+Hampton party was safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he
+quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big business deal was
+clamoring for his attention, and sped by motor down to his Long Island
+home.
+
+Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library, staring spiritlessly
+out at the Winter landscape. Mr. Temple stole up behind her and,
+reaching over her shoulder, thrust the message from the radio
+corporation under her eyes.
+
+Della’s glance fell and she began to read the printed words. Then she
+leaped up, whirled around, her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms
+around her father’s neck.
+
+“Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee,” she screamed.
+
+He held her off at arm’s length and looked at her. Her eyes began to
+fill up with happy tears, and once more she threw herself into his arms.
+
+“Well, kiddy, cry all you want to,” he said, comfortingly, patting her
+on the back. “I guess that’s the medicine you needed. You’ll be all
+right now.”
+
+Mr. Temple’s words bore reference to the fact that for months Della’s
+health had been failing, and she had shown so little interest in her
+studies that it had been considered wiser to take her out of the
+boarding school which she attended, and bring her home.
+
+“Oh, yes, Dad-dee,” she sobbed, her face buried in his coat. “I’ll be
+all right now.”
+
+Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked anxiously:
+
+“It says they are all safe—_all_? Doesn’t it?”
+
+Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his eyes.
+
+“Yes, kiddy,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.”
+
+“Oh, Dad-dee, I didn’t mean that,” said Della, blushing furiously.
+
+“No need to fib to me, kiddy,” said her father. “Bob is only a brother;
+but Frank——”
+
+“No, you shan’t say it,” laughed Della, and she placed a hand over his
+mouth.
+
+Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that time on Della no longer
+moped and looked ill, but took an intense interest in all the daily
+affairs of life, even wanting to return at once to school.
+
+“Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things over with me,” she
+explained to her mother.
+
+“Why, dear, what do you mean?”
+
+“Well—you know—she’s sweet on Bob.”
+
+“Oh, you girls,” said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. “You’ll be the death of
+me. At your age——”
+
+“At our age you were engaged to Father,” said Della. “Now don’t deny it.
+Dad has even told me how you planned to elope, but were overheard by
+your mother who persuaded you to be conventional and have a wedding at
+home.”
+
+Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned
+shamelessly.
+
+“George, did you tell her that?”
+
+“Why not? It was the truth.”
+
+“Oh, George. Aren’t children nowadays hard enough to handle as it is,
+without letting them know how silly we older people were once?”
+
+“Now, Mother,” said Della, rising quickly and going to her mother’s
+side, and kissing her. “Don’t scold Father. Can’t you see he’s dreaming
+of that day again?”
+
+And dancing to her father’s side, Della dropped a kiss on the spot where
+his hair was thinning out, and then danced gaily from the dining-room.
+
+Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he sipped his coffee. Then
+putting down the cup, he leaned forward and said confidentially:
+
+“You do remember that time, don’t you, dear?”
+
+Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by way of reproof for his
+silliness, but a softened look came into her eyes as she stared back.
+The years that intervened since their youth seemed to slip away.
+
+“Why, George,” she said. “You look positively handsome.”
+
+As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, apprised the
+latter of the message from the Far North to the effect that the lost had
+been found. And Della soon followed her message in person. Thereafter
+the two girls were never tired of talking about the possible adventures
+that had befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob’s praises, Della
+sang Frank’s. Poor Jack, it is to be feared, was somewhat slighted in
+these discussions.
+
+“I’ll warrant you that Bob saved the day for them all,” Marjorie said on
+one occasion. “He’s so big and strong.”
+
+“Well,” flashed Della, “Bob’s my brother, and that’s all right. But if
+they ever got in a tight pinch, I’m _sure_ it was Frank that got them
+out. He’s got more brains than all the rest put together.”
+
+“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” cried Marjorie.
+
+“Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be always praising him?”
+demanded Della.
+
+For a moment the two girls positively glared at each other.
+
+Then the twinkle began to come, and they laughed.
+
+Then they were hugging each other.
+
+And then they were at it again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.—TREED BY WOLVES.
+
+
+One more adventure, and that a serious one, was to befall the boys as a
+final taste of life in the wilderness. One day towards the end of
+Winter, when the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, the
+three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters and had worn out
+even the amusement of listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or
+communicating with the Post of the Mounted, announced they were going
+hunting.
+
+The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, and additions to their
+larder would not be unwelcome. Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no
+objection to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long Jim
+accompany them.
+
+“I’d be no good,” said Long Jim. “Sence I did that fool trick o’ cuttin’
+my hand with the axe a couple-three days ago, I cain’t set finger to
+trigger. You better go, Art.”
+
+“All right, boys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch a leg, too.”
+
+The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding the spot where
+they had chosen to erect their huts, there was no longer any game, for
+the animals had come to learn that these strange creatures brought
+destruction and had decamped elsewhere. Finally, after they had
+proceeded some distance without sighting anything, Art suggested they
+strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain side. The huts had
+been erected near the foot of one of the ranges rimming the valley.
+
+“Maybe we’ll run into a mountain sheep or a goat,” he said. “Anyhow, we
+can see better from a higher lever, for this forest down here is so
+thick you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out an’ up there the
+trees is thinner.”
+
+With Art leading the way, the party began its upward climb. For some
+time they toiled upward until presently they reached a level unaffected
+by the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, as a
+consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across a bare shoulder of rock from
+which the wind had swept all but a trace of snow they made their way and
+then plunged into a thick woods beyond.
+
+Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle and bent over to adjust
+the clumsy lacing of a thick shoe pack of the kind they had made for
+themselves from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding along,
+head down, did not notice he had stopped, and kept on going. He spent
+more time at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally he
+straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were not in sight.
+
+Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure he would be able to
+trace them in the snow and would soon catch up with them. He set out at
+a brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where the wind had not had
+a chance to whisk it away, and the going was hard. He had proceeded some
+distance before he noticed that he had gotten off the trail left by his
+companions. Angry with himself for his carelessness, but still not
+worried, he halted to consider what was best for him to do.
+
+“Shucks,” he said aloud. “Guess I better go back over my steps till I
+find where I left their trail.”
+
+And with this intention, he turned to go back. Even as he did so, he saw
+a pack of long gray bodies racing through the trees in his direction. At
+the same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of wolves. They had
+scented him and were now lifting the cry which announced their prey was
+near.
+
+Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, but then he lowered
+it. The flitting forms were still yards away. And although moonlight
+sifted through the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently
+illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. He decided his best
+plan would be to seek refuge in a tree first of all, and then he could
+fire at the wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim that would
+not now be his. These thoughts or reflections flashed through his mind
+in an instant. The next moment he was putting his plan into execution,
+and climbing into a tall fir.
+
+He was not a moment too soon, either, for the baying came closer and
+closer and even as he struggled frantically to climb higher the leader
+of the wolf pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high into
+the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, and looked down into a
+yawning red cavern of a mouth.
+
+The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, and fell on the snout
+of the wolf who leaped aside in temporary panic. Then the rest of the
+pack arrived on the scene, jumping and snarling, their heads in the air,
+their wicked eyes agleam as they scented the prey they had treed but
+which temporarily had escaped them.
+
+Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself,
+for he was sick with vexation at his own carelessness in not having
+properly, secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close about the
+tree, looking up, and one big fellow even put his forefeet against the
+trunk and reared high till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then
+he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an expectant ring
+close about the foot of the tree.
+
+When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself to a serious
+consideration of his position. And at once he realized that he must try
+before it was too late and they got out of earshot to attract the
+attention of his comrades. Perhaps already they had gotten beyond reach.
+At that he had a moment of panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved
+away, he told himself, they would discover his absence presently and
+retrace their steps in search of him.
+
+He still had his revolver. At first he did not trust himself to handle
+it, because of the trembling of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand
+steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his companions’ attention
+first of all. And raising his voice, he sent call after call ringing
+through the forest.
+
+The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon the whole pack was
+snarling and yowling and making a terrific, demoniac din.
+
+The sound steadied him.
+
+“Good,” he thought, “the boys will know there are wolves, anyway.”
+
+Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting them. And once more
+they came up to the foot of the tree, rearing their forefeet against it
+and leaping upward. It was Frank’s chance, and he took it.
+
+With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he leaned forward and took
+careful aim at the biggest of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the
+wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It was his last. Frank’s
+bullet plunged down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow.
+
+His mates without a second’s hesitation deserted their attempts to get
+at Frank, and began snarling over the dead body. The sight sickened
+Frank, and he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred that,
+if he added several more corpses to the ghoulish feast, he might divert
+the attention of the rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be
+able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his way through the trees
+for a short distance before jumping to the ground.
+
+There was no need now for care in aiming, as the wolves were in a thick
+mass over the body of the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid
+succession into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, for two
+more wolves went down, and the tearing and crunching announced a renewal
+of the awful feast.
+
+Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if possible. He had heard no
+answering replies, and believed his companions must have gotten out of
+earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources to make his escape.
+He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which
+interlocked with those of the tree in which he had found refuge, when
+the thought occurred that, perhaps, he would be able to obtain his rifle
+undiscovered by the wolves.
+
+Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately on the snarling
+wolf pack several yards from the tree and on the limbs he must grip in
+his descent. He had almost reached the lowermost limb when his grip
+slipped and he fell.
+
+Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck the ground his hands
+closed on the coveted rifle, and he scrabbled to regain his feet,
+flinging the rifle to his shoulder as he did so.
+
+His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned aside from the
+outskirts of the pack, where he was not getting his share of the
+gruesome feast, and sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang out
+from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering at his feet.
+
+“Steady, Frank,” cried Art’s voice. “Give ’em all you’ve got.”
+
+Without looking around, mastering his trembling by a supreme effort,
+Frank brought the rifle to his shoulder and began firing into the pack,
+even as the three rifles of his companions also opened fire.
+
+At that close range every shot told and not a wolf escaped. Eleven
+bodies, including the mutilated remains of the three which Frank had
+slain with revolver shots, were stretched on the snow under the trees.
+
+When it was all over, his companions gathered about Frank and
+explanations followed. Then they made their way back to camp.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION.
+
+
+Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the party containing our
+friends and the Thorwaldsson party as well as Long Jim Golden, all
+bronzed and hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body and mind,
+swung around a bend in a river and came to the landing which marked the
+first outpost of civilization—the trading post where was also located
+the Fort of the Mounted.
+
+A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was first to see them, and
+whooping and shouting he ran up the bank towards the store. Out of the
+door of the trading post came a figure in uniform.
+
+“Dick.”
+
+“Art.”
+
+The two pals were reunited.
+
+And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for out of the store came
+Mr. Temple and Della. For ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on,
+while Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood to one side,
+their faces set in wide grins.
+
+“What in the world?” demanded Mr. Hampton, at length, holding his
+partner and neighbor at arm’s length. “What in the world brought you
+here?”
+
+“A motor boat,” said Mr. Temple. “That was a surprise for you. When we
+received your radio message via the post here, which relayed it to
+Edmonton—that first one, you know, announcing you were leaving for the
+outside—I decided I would have to be on hand to greet you. So I got into
+communication with Captain Jameson, and learned from him that I could
+reach one of his posts farther south by motor car, and then come up the
+river in a launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge of the
+wilderness.”
+
+He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still kept an arm, and smiled.
+
+“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug. “But what brought Della?”
+
+“Oh, the same means,” answered his father.
+
+“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her straying brother?”
+
+“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own opinion,” said Mr. Temple,
+eyes a-twinkle.
+
+Della who had been standing close to Frank, her hands clasped in his,
+looked calmly at Bob.
+
+“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,” she said. “But her mother
+wouldn’t let her. She sent you a message.”
+
+“Huh.”
+
+Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. Nevertheless, at the
+first opportunity he got his sister to one side, and, snatching the
+letter she tendered him, went off by himself to read it.
+
+There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the launch, and in a
+canoe towed behind, and so, after a short rest, a start downstream was
+made at once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them, but soon
+fell behind amid a gay waving of farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make
+arrangements for their reception at the next post and at Edmonton. The
+launch would be sent back for them when the post was reached.
+
+At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively few years of its
+existence has grown to the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got
+their first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them across the
+continent, reaching its height on their arrival in New York. For word of
+their coming had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them,
+representing the great newspapers and news-gathering syndicates of not
+only North America but of Europe, too.
+
+“You see, boys,” said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel rooms, when they
+protested to him at being besieged every minute of the day by reporters,
+“you are the center of the romantic interest of the world. You rescued
+the Lost Expedition and discovered strange new territory. You have had
+the wildest kind of adventures. How do you expect the world to take that
+calmly? It can’t be done. No, you may as well submit gracefully, and
+talk when questioned.”
+
+The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited by the newspapermen,
+and pictures began to appear throughout the country, showing the daring
+young explorer and his sweetheart. When they were taken, neither Frank
+nor Della knew, but the truth of the matter was that they were together
+so much of the time it was the easiest matter in the world for a
+photographer to snap them.
+
+In New York the same thing was gone through with again, only, if
+anything, worse. And this time, the reporters finding that Marjorie
+Faulkner appeared to greet the returned heroes, scented a new romance,
+and questioned the boys about it. Bob and Frank refused to answer, but
+Jack slyly tipped off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and Bob a
+real romance was, indeed, budding.
+
+In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, and gave the
+newspapermen a story to the effect that Jack was champing at the bit to
+be off to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who awaited him, none
+other, in fact, than the Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an
+old Don who had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support of the
+story they told the newspapermen of their adventures several years
+before on the Mexican border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton from
+captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love with the daughter of
+the Mexican leader responsible for Mr. Hampton’s capture.
+
+It all made good copy for the reporters, who had about exhausted the
+possibilities of the northern adventure, and who now plunged head first
+into this former adventure, of which nothing had been known at the time.
+
+Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire vengeance on Bob and
+Frank. But the latter pointed out that they had but turned the tables on
+him.
+
+“Well, anyway,” he said, finally, beginning to smile, “you haven’t got
+the best part of the story yet.”
+
+Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to tell what he meant.
+But he refused. Several days later he disappeared. When they asked Mr.
+Hampton what had become of him he finally surrendered and gave the
+secret away.
+
+“Well, boys,” he said, “when we returned I found a courteous note from
+Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business
+connected with the government, and asking me to call. I guess Jack has
+taken a train for Washington, and gone calling.”
+
+With which happy forecast of good luck to come to all three of the Radio
+Boys, we shall leave them for the present, secure in the belief that if
+at any future date they go adventuring they will be well able to take
+care of themselves, and also that they will get into adventures well
+worth reading about.
+
+
+                                THE END
+
+
+
+
+The Radio Boys Series
+
+BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages.
+
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER
+    THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY
+    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS
+    THE RADIO BOYS’ SEARCH FOR THE INCA’S TREASURE
+    THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+    THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA
+    THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS
+    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL
+    THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Golden Boys Series
+
+BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D.
+
+Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.
+
+A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School
+Age.
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Lakewood Boys Series
+
+By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D.
+
+A new series of copyright stories for boys of High School Age by the
+Author of “The Golden Boys Series.”
+
+Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Boy Scout Series
+
+By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON
+
+A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense through
+organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting an accurate
+description of Boy Scouts activities.
+
+ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL
+    THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP
+    THE BOY SCOUTS’ MOUNTAIN  CAMP
+    THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL
+    THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO
+    THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS
+    THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Border Boys Series
+
+By Fremont B. Deering
+
+Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+With Individual Jackets in Colors.
+
+Cloth Bound
+
+    BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL
+    BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER
+    BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS
+    BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS
+    BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES
+    BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Ranger Boys Series
+
+BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE
+
+A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 years telling of the
+adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE
+    THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT
+    THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS
+    THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES
+    THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Troopers Series
+
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+
+Author of the Famous “Boy Allies” Series.
+
+The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Copyrighted Titles.
+
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL
+    THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST
+    THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY
+    THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Frank Armstrong Series
+
+By MATTHEW M. COLTON
+
+Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing Athletics from Start
+to Finish. For Boys 10 to 15 Years.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+Cloth Bound
+
+With Attractive Jackets in Colors.
+
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG’S VACATION
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG’S SECOND TERM
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Allies
+
+(Registered in the United States Patent Office)
+
+With the Army
+
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Cloth Bound
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+Postage 10c extra.
+
+In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to
+leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the
+Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and
+escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every
+boy loves.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;
+    or, Through Lines of Steel.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;
+    or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;
+    or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;
+    or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;
+    or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;
+    or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;
+     or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;
+    or, Saving France from the Enemy.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;
+    or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;
+    or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;
+    or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;
+    or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Allies
+
+(Registered in the United States Patent Office)
+
+With the Navy
+
+BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Cloth Bound
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+Postage 10c Extra
+
+Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other
+in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place
+them on board the British cruiser, “The Sylph,” and from there on, they
+share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake,
+the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably
+the many exciting adventures of the two boys.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;
+    or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;
+    or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;
+    or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;
+    or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;
+    or, The Vanishing Submarine.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;
+    or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;
+    or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM’S CRUISERS;
+    or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;
+    or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;
+    or, The Fall of the German Navy.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Oakdale Academy Series
+
+BY MORGAN SCOTT
+
+A series of real boys’ stories at the Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the
+hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances and against great odds.
+
+Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports of academy
+life, with adventures, mysteries and clever descriptions.
+
+Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would like to read.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+JACKETS IN COLORS
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+    BEN STONE AT OAKDALE
+    BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY
+    RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE
+    OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP
+    THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY
+    THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Rex Kingdon Series
+
+By GORDON BRADDOCK
+
+A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, written in an
+interesting and instructive style.
+
+Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested in outdoor
+games, enters into the school sports with enthusiasm. A rattling good
+baseball story holds the interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood
+friends establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery,
+jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their interest
+and finally cement their friendship.
+
+Stories boys will want to read.
+
+CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS.
+
+Copyright Titles.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH
+    REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS
+    REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL
+    REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT
+    REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 36314-0.txt or 36314-0.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/36314-0.zip b/36314-0.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18a2cd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-0.zip
diff --git a/36314-h.zip b/36314-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72387e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-h.zip
diff --git a/36314-h/36314-h.htm b/36314-h/36314-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd1c724
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-h/36314-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,9721 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" >
+<head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
+    <meta content="The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition" name="DC.Title"/>
+    <meta content="Gerald Breckenridge" name="DC.Creator"/>
+    <meta content="en" name="DC.Language"/>
+    <meta content="1922" name="DC.Created"/>
+    <meta name="generator" content="ppgen (1.09) generated Jun 03, 2011 04:18 AM" />
+    <title>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+        body                    {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;}
+        p                       {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;}
+        div.center p            {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;}
+        .pagenum                {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0;
+                                 position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal;
+                                 font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none;
+                                 background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;}
+        .pncolor                {color:silver;}
+        h1                      {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;}
+        h2                      {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;}
+        h1                      {font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;}
+        h2                      {font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;}
+        hr.pb                   {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;}
+        .sc                     {font-variant: small-caps;}
+        .center                 {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;}
+        .larger                 {font-size:larger;}
+        .smaller                {font-size:smaller;}
+        .sc                     {font-variant:small-caps}
+        .caption                {font-size: 80%;}
+        .figcenter              {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+        div.center p            {margin: 0 auto; text-align:center;}
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+Author: Gerald Breckenridge
+
+Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'>
+<a name='i001' id='i001'></a>
+<img src='images/cover.jpg' alt='' title=''/><br />
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'>
+<a name='i002' id='i002'></a>
+<img src="images/illus-fpc.jpg" alt="“What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40" title=""/><br />
+<span class='caption'>“What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” <i>Page 40</i></span>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>THE RADIO BOYS</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>RESCUE THE</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span class='sc'>By</span> GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</p>
+</div>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>AUTHOR OF</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>“The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>Boys on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>Search for the Inca’s Treasure.”</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'>
+<a name='i003' id='i003'></a>
+<img src='images/illus-emb.png' alt='' title=''/><br />
+</div>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p>
+<p>Publishers—New York</p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>THE RADIO BOYS SERIES</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border</p>
+<p>The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty</p>
+<p>The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards</p>
+<p>The Radio Boys’ Search for the Inca’s Treasure</p>
+<p>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>Copyright, 1922</p>
+<p>By A. L. BURT COMPANY</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>Made in “U. S. A.”</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<h1><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_3'></a>3</span>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</h1>
+<h2><a name='chI' id='chI'></a>CHAPTER I.—THE LOST EXPEDITION.</h2>
+<p>
+“Strange that you boys should be talking about
+the ‘Lost Expedition.’”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Because I have just come from a conference
+with a man who knows all there is to know about
+it. And he was telling me——.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into
+the sitting room, and looked at the faces of the
+three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and
+the latter’s chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick,
+who together had gone through many adventures
+related in other books of “The Radio Boys” series.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle
+hotel. Here the four, arriving from South
+America, after finding and losing “The Enchanted
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_4'></a>4</span>
+City of the Incas” as told of in “The Radio Boys
+Search for the Incas’ Treasure,” were ensconced
+on their way to their Long Island homes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” added Frank
+“We’re curious.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’”
+countered Mr. Hampton. “I stood in the
+doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing
+it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday
+paper tells,” said big Bob, grumblingly, “And the
+fellow that wrote this yarn didn’t know very much.
+It’s mostly talk.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Speculation, I suppose,” he said. “Well, that’s
+the best the writer could do. The facts aren’t
+generally known. However, wait a minute until I
+get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable.
+It’s raining again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Raining again?” said Jack. “Doesn’t it ever
+stop here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, that’s just the Seattle Winter,” said his
+father. “The rains are necessary, and, really, they
+are so mild one doesn’t mind them after a time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these
+people would grow web feet.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here,” said Mr. Hampton, after getting into
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_5'></a>5</span>
+his smoking jacket and slippers. “What I learned
+today ought to interest you boys.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it,” said
+his father. “Then you’ll see.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then, while the three young fellows paid close
+attention, Mr. Hampton proceeded to relate the
+story of the “Lost Expedition” so-called, the expedition
+headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the
+Norwegian explorer, which had outfitted at Seattle
+the previous Spring, set out for an unnamed destination
+in the Far North, and had never been heard
+of since.
+</p>
+<p>
+A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had
+attended the departure of this expedition in its
+sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses
+and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers
+and among the hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront.
+Some said confidently that the expedition
+was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by
+airplane, for an airplane was carried dismantled on
+the schooner. Others declared the object sought
+was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors
+of vast gold fields found in the past by this or that
+old-time prospector who died without making his
+secret public, were brought to light and furbished
+up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to
+bear out the contention.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_6'></a>6</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr.
+Hampton, “was correct. The real object of the
+expedition never was made public, for the very
+good reason that none of those in the know—and
+their numbers are few—ever betrayed a word, or
+hint, of the secret.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And you know it?” asked Jack, with quickened
+interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” said Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with
+curiosity,” advised big Bob. “Show that boy a
+secret and he’s not content until he takes it apart.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How about yourself?” said Frank, indignantly.
+“I suppose you don’t care to hear, hey? Oh, no.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton interrupted.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself.
+I know all you boys are eager to know the
+answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’
+Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is——”
+</p>
+<p>
+He paused. Then added:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oil.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oil?”
+</p>
+<p>
+All three listeners asked the question as if in one
+breath. Big Bob was no less inquisitive than the
+others, despite his twigging of Frank for his
+curiosity.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_7'></a>7</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” he said. “Oil.”
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment he was silent, collecting his
+thoughts. Then he leaned forward, cleared his
+throat and continued:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you.
+The Northland for you, probably, is invested in a
+mysterious glamor. It means either men struggling
+through incalculable hardships to win their way to
+the North Pole, to the top of the world, or else
+fighting against all the mighty forces of Nature in
+a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden
+wealth from the bosom of the Earth.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I
+know how you feel. Whenever our preconceived
+and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense of disappointment.
+But, consider for a moment, the
+meaning of this matter. Here, far away in the
+Northland, in a remote district to which so far as
+known only two white men have ever penetrated,
+lies a mighty river flowing north into the Arctic
+Ocean, along the banks of which are such vast
+deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into
+the river to such an extent that the river in reality
+is a river of oil and never freezes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” said
+Jack. “Do you expect us to believe that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And flowing north, too?” said Frank, whose
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_8'></a>8</span>
+quick mind had seized upon that point of contrariety
+in Nature.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he
+said. “Yet that this river does flow north is undoubted.
+That it never freezes, however, is an
+exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots
+so much oil seeps into the water that soft spots are
+formed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hitherto,” he continued, “there have been only
+two rivers known that flow north into the Arctic
+in that region—the MacKenzie and the Coppermine,
+along the shores of which are vast deposits
+of copper that some day, undoubtedly, will be
+opened up to exploitation. However, this other
+northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil
+field must now be added to the list, if the word of
+the lone explorer is to believed, of the one man who
+has been there and lived to return with the tale.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But I thought you said this river was known to
+two white men, Dad?” objected Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So I did. So I did,” declared his father. “And
+two there were—Cameron and Farrell. But
+Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell
+alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally
+reach Edmonton with the tale. Now he, too, is
+gone—for he was a member of Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost
+Expedition.’
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_9'></a>9</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“When he reached Edmonton, a thriving
+Canadian city, Farrell, an adventurous fellow who
+at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil
+fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent
+operators which once employed me there as
+superintendent, realized the value of his discovery
+and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with
+Anderson, the big man of the syndicate. Anderson
+saw at once the importance of the find. But he
+also saw that Farrell’s marvelous oil field would
+virtually have to be rediscovered before steps to
+develop it could be taken. For, in struggling
+through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss
+of his compass, had been turned about in Winter
+fogs, had lain delirious for a long period in the
+igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic Circle
+and, in general, had suffered so many hardships
+that his mind was clouded and he had no clear idea
+of where lay this oil field.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell’s
+report that he decided to outfit an expedition
+to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and Cameron
+into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming
+upon the oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone
+in through Alaska, that was the way which Thorwaldsson’s
+expedition took.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing
+his father closely, now put a hand on his arm.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_10'></a>10</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“And now what, Dad?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after
+the ‘Lost Expedition’ and try to relocate the oil
+fields as well as find some trace of Thorwaldsson,”
+said Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thought so,” said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction.
+“When do we start?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We?” Mr. Hampton chuckled. “I like that. Just
+as cool as you please about it, too. We? Well, well.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do we leave at once?” asked Jack, imperturbably,
+not one whit disturbed by his father’s
+pleasantry.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Whether I take you at all is questionable,” he
+said. “Certainly, I have no intention of going at
+once. If I go at all, it will not be until the Arctic
+Summer begins.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Meantime, I suppose, I’m to return to Yale.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, you’ve missed a half year, thanks to our
+adventures in search of the Incas’ treasure in South
+America, but that is no reason why you should miss
+the balance of the term. I’ll tell you what,” he
+added, taking pity on the three, “if you fellows go
+back to college and study hard to make up for lost
+time until Summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’ is
+still lost at that time, why, I’ll see what can be
+done.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurray,” cried Jack. “That’s a promise.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_11'></a>11</span><a name='chII' id='chII'></a>CHAPTER II.—SETTING OUT FROM NOME.</h2>
+<p>
+“Well, boys, where do we go from here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat
+on a heap of luggage on the beach at Nome, with
+Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at the
+mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr.
+Hampton deep in conversation with a short sturdy
+figure of a man, clad in khaki breeches, high leather
+boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away.
+The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the
+independent oil interests at Nome.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the
+boys were beginning to realize meant hot weather,
+indeed. All had their coats off, and were perspiring.
+Only an hour before they had been put ashore
+by the steamer from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton
+had left them on the beach with their luggage while
+he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed
+to meet them at the landing as they had expected.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_12'></a>12</span>
+Frank’s question. “Well, if you ask me, almost
+any place would be better than Nome.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked with disfavor at the little town
+sprawling at the base of the mountain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not just what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard
+of Nome all my life, it seems, and now, just look at
+it. Why, it’s hardly a spot on the map.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But what a history it has had, Jack,” said Frank.
+“Don’t judge by appearances too much. Remember
+this town has seen the Gold Rush.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” said Jack,
+ignoring Frank’s remark.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Probably discussing how soon we can get away,”
+said big Bob, speaking for the first time. “At any
+rate,” he added, “I see your father and his companion
+pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for
+Mr. Hampton and his companion ended their conversation
+and approached the boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, boys, we’ll soon be under way,” said Mr.
+Hampton. Whereupon he introduced Farnum all
+around. The latter was a prepossessing man with
+a weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache,
+above which jutted a promontory of a nose between
+deep-set, wide, blue eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That is our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton
+continued, indicating the boat to which Bob earlier
+had drawn attention. “Mr. Farnum,” he added,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_13'></a>13</span>
+“has stated casually around Nome that he is taking
+a party of hunters up the MacKenzie. We’ll get
+away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a stay
+in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid
+inquiries into our aims. The story Farnum has
+told will do well enough.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just a white lie,” he said, grinning. “No use
+letting the curious know all your secrets.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end
+of which period the luggage was safely stowed
+aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw began
+to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and
+draw away from Nome, the boys leaned overside
+and watched the prospect dwindle in the distance
+until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside
+like a painted backdrop in the theater.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurray,” cried Bob, at last, “we’re off for the
+Great Unknown.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” agreed Frank, “I really feel that way, too.
+All the way up from Seattle, I felt as if I were
+nothing more than a tourist, traveling a beaten
+route. But this, well, this is different.”
+</p>
+<p>
+After that they were silent a long time, while the
+schooner shook and throbbed and steadily pushed
+its way up the coast, each boy busy with his thoughts.
+Yet those thoughts were much the same.
+</p>
+<p>
+Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_14'></a>14</span>
+their return from South America and their adventures
+there in The Enchanted City of the Incas, they
+had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up
+for lost time in the first half of the term. All three
+were clever and had the knack of concentrating at
+their tasks, and all as a consequence had succeeded
+in making up back work in classroom and lecture.
+As a result they had entered the succeeding term,
+or at least were prepared to do so, without conditions.
+This was a matter for congratulation, indeed,
+and deserving of especial reward.
+</p>
+<p>
+That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton
+and Mr. Temple both decided that their respective
+sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be
+permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip
+to attempt to find some trace of the “Lost Expedition”
+and of the reputed oil field in search of which
+Thorwaldsson had set out.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of
+the Northland,” Mr. Hampton had explained to
+Mr. Temple, “and, as a consequence, I do not consider
+that we will run any danger. Our greatest
+danger, of course, would be to become trapped in
+the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the
+rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For
+I do not intend to spend the Winter there. Instead,
+I hope to be back in civilization by the early Fall.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That,” he added, “will give us plenty of opportunity
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_15'></a>15</span>
+to seek traces of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I
+have been in communication with Farnum. His
+plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of
+its tributaries, and then strike eastward. We will
+leave the gasoline schooner to make its way back to
+Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our
+journey on rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding
+the River of Oil flowing north.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings
+of approaching Winter come, we will turn to
+the southeast and come out in northern Canada.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will
+be of inestimable value for them. It will make
+them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon
+themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to
+be youths of that sort already,” he added, smiling.
+“If you could have seen them in South America,
+George, it would have done your heart good.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know, I know,” said Mr. Temple, shaking his
+head slightly, and smiling. “Several years ago, that
+time when you were captive in Mexico and they set
+out to rescue you—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and did,” supplied Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And did,” agreed Mr. Temple. “Well, they
+showed the stuff that was in them then. And the
+very same Summer, when I took them to San
+Francisco on what I considered was going to be a
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_16'></a>16</span>
+little pleasure trip combining a bit of business with
+sight-seeing, and—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And you became involved with the Chinese
+smugglers, and imprisoned, and ended up by busting
+up their show—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” resumed Mr. Temple, “and ended up by
+bringing the whole outfit into the hands of Uncle
+Sam’s men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly
+showed their calibre.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“So, I reckon it will be all right to take them
+along on this trip,” said Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose so,” agreed Mr. Temple. “But innocent
+as it looks now, I have my doubts. I have
+my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found,
+there you can look for things to move fast. Trouble
+courts them, it seems to me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Accordingly, the boys had been told they would
+be taken on the trip into the Far North. And wildly
+excited they had gone about their preparations.
+Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing
+up radio field equipment of every sort right at
+home. But his father had dissuaded him, pointing
+out that Seattle was a large city and there everything
+necessary in the way of an outfit could be
+purchased, thus saving the trouble and expense of
+transporting overland to the Pacific port.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, Dad,” Jack had agreed. “But, remember,
+the selection of the radio equipment is to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_17'></a>17</span>
+be left to the fellows and me. We’ve had a lot of
+experience with the value of radio when in a tight
+place, especially in South America, and we want to
+put that experience to use and be prepared for every
+contingency this time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with
+the result that in Seattle the three boys had revelled
+in the radio equipment stores, which they found
+well stocked, as the use of radio had developed
+greatly on the Pacific.
+</p>
+<p>
+In consequence, their outfit included radio field
+equipment of the most powerful, yet most compact,
+designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully realized the
+value of having the very best yet he had issued a
+solemn warning that bulk must be considered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We will have to travel as lightly as consistent
+with safety and the purpose of our expedition,” he
+had said. “So don’t pile up anything too heavy or
+bulky, or it will have to be discarded.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack knew well that the distance which can be
+covered with a radiophone transmitter is only about
+one-fourth as great as that of a wireless telegraph
+transmitter having the same input of initial current.
+Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly
+for aid, over long distances, the wireless
+telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as equipment
+for it would be less bulky to transport than
+equipment for transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_18'></a>18</span>
+he was reluctant to place their sole dependence
+upon the wireless telegraph.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see, Dad,” he had pointed out to his father,
+when the outfit was being assembled, “to reach the
+outside we shall have to depend upon wireless telegraph.
+But we will also need the radiophone for
+this reason: that each one of us ought to have a
+means of calling the main party in case we become
+separated through going on scouting or hunting
+expeditions, or for any reason.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, that sounds sensible,” his father had
+agreed. “Go ahead with your plans, but, remember,
+hold down the bulk.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing
+five hundred miles was assembled, but also
+Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one for
+each of their party and for Farnum, which the user
+could pack in his clothing and which had a radius
+up to twenty-five miles. The instrument was Jack’s
+now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a
+setting only one inch by five-eighths of an inch.
+Formerly an umbrella as aerial had been employed
+but Jack had done entirely away with that in his
+improved set.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, fellows,” said Jack, at last, as Nome faded
+entirely from view, “I wonder what lies ahead. I
+wonder whether Thorwaldsson’s expedition was
+stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_19'></a>19</span>
+likely, as in that case surely somebody would have
+managed to get word to the outside by wireless or
+airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise
+attack by Indians at night, as I understand from
+Dad that Farnum believes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is that so,” said Frank, in surprise. “That’s the
+first I heard of that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad told me of it when we
+were coming aboard this schooner. He said it was
+the first intimation Farnum had given him that such
+might be the case, and also his first intimation that
+there were hostile Indians in this country into which
+we are going. If it weren’t too late, he told me, he
+would have turned back rather than imperil us, as
+it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear
+of the hostile Indian country.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Whew,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, hey,
+what?”
+</p>
+<p>
+His eyes began to shine.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Old Bob. Always ready for a fight,” said Frank.
+“Well, let’s give him one.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big
+fellow and a tussle followed that ended only when
+they almost fell overboard.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_20'></a>20</span><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a>CHAPTER III.—IN THE WILDERNESS.</h2>
+<p>
+“Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement
+over dinner which was eaten on deck. The
+boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian
+River, one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie.
+How long it was since they had left Nome none
+could tell, for in that land of perpetual daylight it
+was hard to keep track of time.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “when is tomorrow?”
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked at the sun which was still high, despite
+the lateness of the hour, and would make only an
+ineffectual attempt to dip below the horizon at midnight,
+before resuming its upward climb.
+</p>
+<p>
+Everybody laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What a topsy turvy land,” said Jack. “Well, I,
+for one, will be glad to go ashore and stretch my
+legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far, I’m
+eager to get started.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Same here,” agreed Frank.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_21'></a>21</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the
+monotony of the trip up the coast and along the
+northern edge of Alaska and the North American
+continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of
+course, occasional ice floes had been encountered and
+the little schooner had been compelled to make wide
+detours. But that was to be expected in that Far
+Northern latitude.
+</p>
+<p>
+In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of
+the MacKenzie, the ice was only recently dissipated
+from the great river. There, at a dock where a little
+sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in
+Summer was tied up for repairs, they had replenished
+their stock of gasoline and then continued the ascent,
+passing between willowed banks, where huddled
+occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages,
+with the snow-capped mountain peaks always
+in the distance.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare
+Indian River and soon had put beyond them all appearance
+of the presence of man.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This is the way Thorwaldsson’s party expected
+to go,” Farnum had said. “For it was this route
+which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors,
+followed on their way in. They were prospecting
+for gold, you know, had no idea of finding oil. It
+was their original intention to strike northeast
+across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_22'></a>22</span>
+Indian in search of gold. And Farrell reported,
+when he reached the outside, that he had found
+traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian
+a number of days until, in fact, the extra supplies of
+gasoline which had been taken aboard on leaving the
+MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became
+advisable for the party to go ashore in order that
+the schooner might turn about and have sufficient
+fuel to make its way downstream to the supply
+depot.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was a period of time that, in fact, however,
+could hardly be considered in terms of days. So far
+north had the party come that the sun shone perpetually.
+It was only at midnight, for a brief space,
+that it dipped to the horizon.
+</p>
+<p>
+And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for
+all concerned, but especially for the boys. As the
+powerful little schooner forged ahead, there was not
+a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise.
+Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer,
+probably an escape from some Eskimo herd, which
+would be surprised standing in the water, and breaking
+for the timber on the bank at their approach.
+Again brown bear would be seen on the bank, or
+beaver swimming strongly across the stream. As
+for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All
+Bob, Frank and Jack did for hours on end was to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_23'></a>23</span>
+lean overside with hooks baited with bacon rind
+dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled
+beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on
+wild duck or geese, picked off with a light rifle.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced
+that they would stay ashore on the morrow.
+And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they
+lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an
+awning shading them from the sun.
+</p>
+<p>
+Early the next morning they went ashore with their
+outfit, and then watched the gasoline schooner throb
+off downstream, around the last bend, and out of
+sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came
+to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation
+natural to their situation. The last settlement was
+two hundred miles behind them. They were going
+into the great unknown, into the regions marked
+“Unexplored” on the maps of that great northern
+rim of the North American continent.
+</p>
+<p>
+True, the weather was fine now and the country
+green and pleasant about them. But how long would
+that endure? What if they were beset by oncoming
+Winter before they could make their way to the outside?
+What if they were attacked by hostile Indians?
+What obscure fate had met the Thorwaldsson expedition,
+traces of which they sought?
+</p>
+<p>
+Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_24'></a>24</span>
+they stood in unwonted silence. Then Mr. Hampton
+called to them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his
+job.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted
+men. They hailed from Nome, but were old-timers
+who had been up and down Alaska for many years.
+Both were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who
+would be useful in helping distribute the burden of
+packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable value
+in keeping the party supplied with game as well as
+in almost any situation that might arise. They were
+grizzled, weather-beaten men of medium height, both
+with stout frames, and because of their long
+existence in the lonesome north little given to talking.
+Their names were Dick Fairwell and Art
+Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to each
+other and the other members of the party. The boys
+had taken a liking to both.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two light canoes had been brought along from
+Nome, lashed to the deck of the schooner, and in
+these the seven set out. The boys with Dick occupied
+one canoe, the other three men with a larger
+portion of the luggage the other.
+</p>
+<p>
+When everything was in readiness, following a
+light breakfast on the bank, the two canoes set out,
+that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and Art
+taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_25'></a>25</span>
+was encountered, and around this the first portage
+was made. Then once more they took to the water.
+</p>
+<p>
+Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed
+steadily forward, until almost a week had elapsed.
+On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a whoop of
+joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the
+stream at a little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had
+detected a small cairn of stones on the edge of the
+brush, and when the others came up with him and
+stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing
+the stones comprising the mound.
+</p>
+<p>
+“A marker,” was the only explanation he vouchsafed.
+“Must have been left by Thorwaldsson. Ah.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a
+small metal box in his hand. The lid was rusted on,
+and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a knife
+and gouged it off while the others crowded around
+him. Inside was a fold of oilskin, which he ripped
+open. A folded paper was revealed, which he opened.
+Then he read aloud the message thereon.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen,” he
+said, and read:
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+“Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland
+Block, Seattle, Wash., that I passed here July 2.
+Party intact with exception of crew sent as he ordered.
+Farrell says we are on right track.
+</p>
+<p style='text-align:right; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-right:2em;;'>“<span class='sc'>Thorwaldsson.</span>”</p>
+<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_26'></a>26</span></div>
+<p>
+“What does he mean by that reference to the
+crew?” asked Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton,
+“as your father knows, that is one of the unexplained
+and puzzling facts of the situation, that about the
+ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard
+the ship and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But
+of ship or crew, we have found no trace. Search for
+the ship was prosecuted at the first opportunity this
+Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the
+MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could
+gather was an occasional rumor at a trading post
+that a schooner had gone by, on its way out, at
+night. A ship that might have been the Viking,
+Thorwaldsson’s craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps,
+the skeleton crew feared to winter in the MacKenzie
+and started for the outside, and was caught
+in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to
+weather. Only three or four men were to be left
+aboard. That is the only explanation I could think
+of.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“As I said before,” he stated, “that seems a reasonable
+explanation. Three or four men, left alone,
+might have feared to face the Winter iced in, or
+might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason
+that appeared good enough to them, might have
+decided to violate orders and start out. As to the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_27'></a>27</span>
+disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned
+vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a
+trace.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, Dad, you’ve said nothing about this,”
+protested Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There are a lot of things which I know I have
+never told you, Jack,” he said. “If I really have
+neglected to speak of this, however, it has been
+through an oversight. I’ve had a lot of things on
+my mind. But, come. We know this is the way
+Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track.
+So let us push on. We have still four hours of
+travel to do before making camp.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_28'></a>28</span><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a>CHAPTER IV.—STRIKING GOLD.</h2>
+<p>
+Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the
+boys, during the weeks that followed. They were
+so far north that the sun shone constantly, and never
+a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to
+drive them to take shelter. When they camped it
+was usually in the dim cool recesses of a forest of
+firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found
+the only semblance of night.
+</p>
+<p>
+Never before had they known the delights of
+camp life, as they were now living it. It was like
+being on one continuous picnic. For a considerable
+period of time they found themselves in a mesh or
+network of streams and lakes, through which Tom
+Farnum guided them steadily northeastward, with
+never a sign of doubt as to the course to take.
+</p>
+<p>
+They wondered about this, asked why they took
+certain forks of river or stream, why avoided others.
+Tom answered readily enough. From Mr. Anderson
+he had received a minute report containing every
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_29'></a>29</span>
+scrap of data Farrell had been able to furnish as to
+the course taken by him and Cameron on going into
+the wild country.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So you see,” he added, “while I may not be following
+in the exact footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet
+I am going over the same general route. Sooner or
+later we will cover the same ground which he covered
+again, and then I expect we shall find some
+other record which he has left behind, just as in the
+case of that note on the Hare Indian.”
+</p>
+<p>
+This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their
+curiosity. They dismissed, or practically so, from
+their minds all worry as to the “Lost Expedition.”
+They were too busy enjoying life as they found it
+each waiting moment.
+</p>
+<p>
+Around each bend in a stream that their paddles
+took them, on the shore of each deep, silent lake,
+was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear
+grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a
+runaway from some Eskimo herd on Summer pasture
+as Farnum explained, standing in the stream,
+and starting with a snort into the timber at their
+approach. Occasionally a gray wolf could be seen
+loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver cut
+across stream.
+</p>
+<p>
+With their light rifles the boys occasionally were
+permitted to pick off some game, usually wild ducks
+or geese, of which there were numbers along the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_30'></a>30</span>
+watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly.
+Many a time, youthful fingers itched on the trigger,
+only to be restrained by the thought of the cruel
+uselessness of shooting merely for sport.
+</p>
+<p>
+Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness,
+none were encountered. And at this the boys
+marvelled. It was as if they had the world to themselves.
+They could not understand it. To them it
+was a paradise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait till you see this in Winter,” said Farnum
+grimly. “Or rather, pray that you never do. It is
+a land of perpetual night, and the temperature is so
+low that when you stop moving you must have a
+fire or you will freeze to death. And it isn’t every
+day that you can travel. For this isn’t a land of
+tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north
+comes storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity.
+Even the creatures of the wild cannot stand it, in
+many cases, and drift to the south.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how about the Eskimo?” asked Jack. “This
+is their country, isn’t it? How do they stand it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When
+the hunting is poor and famine stalks through the
+Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where do they live, anyway?” struck in Frank.
+“Why aren’t they around here? Why haven’t we seen
+any?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They may have seen us,” said Farnum, “and are
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_31'></a>31</span>
+avoiding us. They are a timorous people, know the
+white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo, the
+white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo
+of all this country north of us. Back along the coast
+of Alaska, of course, some sort of contact has been
+made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with
+the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer
+they range far and wide on the hunt. In the
+Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic Ocean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But why?” asked Bob, in surprise. “I should
+think that would be the very place for them to steer
+away from.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all game goes
+far to the south in Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the
+ocean because it is the home of the only game left—the
+seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and
+camps near the air holes of the seal, spearing them
+as they come up for air. Occasionally he slays a
+polar bear, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I confess I know very little about the Eskimo,”
+said Jack. “What are his weapons?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed
+spears, and wooden knives edged with
+copper,” said Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, a bear,” cried Bob, incredulously. “How
+could an Eskimo kill a great polar bear with such
+weapons?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Single-handed, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_32'></a>32</span>
+when the bear is hunted, the whole tribe of hunters
+go together. They attack in a circle. Their spears
+or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons
+sink into the body of the bear, the lines pull
+him this way and that as he charges on his tormenters.
+Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they
+have him so surrounded that he cannot move. Then
+one dashes in and administers the death blow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then necessity forces them to live in tribal
+groups?” asked Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging
+far, for they are great travelers. But in Winter, the
+hunters are all back with the tribe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And the Indians?” asked Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum’s face darkened.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There are not many,” he said. “I wish there were
+less. You may say all you please about the ‘noble
+red man.’ But all I ever heard about the Indians
+of the Far North doesn’t predispose me in their
+favor. They are cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually
+they hunt somewhat to the south of us, and make
+their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements
+as Winter approaches. Let’s hope we encounter
+none of them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys wondered as they went along whether
+this were gold-producing country into which they
+were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_33'></a>33</span>
+their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was
+usually, at every mention of gold his eyes brightened,
+and he became almost voluble.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never been this far north,” he said on one occasion,
+“no white man ever has been in here, reckon.
+But I’d like to stop at the foot o’ some of these rapids
+and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like
+to.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let’s do it the next rapids we come to,” suggested
+Frank, with eager interest. “It wouldn’t take
+long, would it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Orders is not to waste time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I’ll speak to father,” said Jack. “I’m sure
+he’d let us try it just once.”
+</p>
+<p>
+In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt
+happened to be at the foot of a rapids that would
+necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art reported the
+graveled bank showed signs of “color.” Even
+Farnum, his mind concentrated on the task of
+getting his party along and on the job in hand,
+showed interest when addressed on the subject.
+With pick and pan, therefore, the two men got busy,
+while the boys watched with breathless interest the
+process of rocking the pan and washing out the
+gravel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Whoopee,” cried Dick, suddenly. “Thar she is.
+Color in the pan.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_34'></a>34</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure as I’m born,” ejaculated his partner.
+“Strong, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+All the boys could discern, however, were some
+dully gleaming particles at the bottom of the pan,
+out of which most of the gravel had been washed
+with the water. They had half expected to spy
+nuggets. Farnum and Mr. Hampton, however, were
+as eagerly interested as the two old-timers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Try another pan, men,” suggested Mr. Hampton.
+“Let us go a little farther upstream.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more the process was repeated. This time
+the pan was rich in “pay” and the excitement of the
+four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing dull
+beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers
+especially.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a
+clump of rocks in the edge of the stream at the very
+foot of the rapids, standing in his boots almost knee-deep
+in the water. For several minutes he picked
+and pried and finally, with a shout of delight, turned
+to his audience behind him on the bank and, having
+plunged an arm into the water, held it up dripping.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look,” was all he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+They gazed, all eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well! Well!” cried Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick’s outstretched
+palm.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_35'></a>35</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What luck,” cried Jack. “You certainly looked
+in the right place.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bet there’s more gold around here,” cried Frank.
+“Maybe a bonanza. Who knows?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You ought to stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob.
+“I don’t know much about the process. But that’s
+the thing to do, isn’t it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “Belongs to you
+boys well as me. You thought of it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oughter work it,” spoke up Art. “Might take
+out a good poke this Summer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object
+of his expedition.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, no, men,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get
+bitten with the gold fever now. We’ve got work
+ahead of us, work that we contracted to do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right,” said Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+Art’s face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just the same,” said Farnum, softening, “there’s
+nothing to prevent you two from staking a claim.
+Some day you may come back to work it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Belongs to us no more’n the rest o’ you,” said
+Dick, sturdily. “The young fellers wanted us to
+make a try at it here just for luck, an’ we did.”
+</p>
+<p>
+A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they
+were not entitled to any part in the find. Finally
+Dick capitulated.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tell you what,” he said. “Art an’ me’ll stake
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_36'></a>36</span>
+this claim an’ file on it. But if we ever come back
+to work her an’ she pays, we’ll declare you in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition,”
+said Jack, turning for confirmation to his
+comrades. “Isn’t that right, fellows.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the
+discussion.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good enough,” he said. “Let it go at that. Now
+we must buckle into the job. Do you realize we’ve
+spent more than two hours here, when we should
+have stopped only a half hour? We’ve got to make
+this portage and push on. Come on. Everybody
+to his task.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_37'></a>37</span><a name='chV' id='chV'></a>CHAPTER V.—A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR</h2>
+<p>
+Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with
+Mr. Hampton and Tom Farnum it was a different
+matter. They were worried, that became increasingly
+plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely
+refrained from saying anything to disturb the
+boys, Jack took note of his father’s perturbation and
+questioned him about it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been weeks
+on the trail. We can’t proceed much farther, without
+being compelled to start out. And yet so far we
+have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson’s
+party. When we entered the MacKenzie, which
+flows north, we were going to the south. Going up
+the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into
+the streams, rivers and lakes we have been going
+east. Shortly we shall strike the Coppermine,
+Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by
+Farrell.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So far we have made good time. With luck, we
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_38'></a>38</span>
+shall be able to reach that territory before having to
+turn back or, rather, for we shall not retrace our
+steps, turn south. And we should have struck some
+other trace of Thorwaldsson’s party long ere this, if
+we are on the right track. However, you boys need
+not worry about this, so let’s talk of something else.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his
+rare periods when he wished to be alone with his
+meditations and did not welcome intrusion even from
+Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad’s plainly worried,” he said. And he explained
+the circumstances. “Wish I could find
+some way to make him forget his troubles,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music.
+We’re camping for the night. Although”—with a
+look at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there?
+Well, anyhow, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where
+that new broadcasting station was set up last Spring.
+Let’s rig up our radio and see if we can’t pick up
+their concert, just for luck. What do you say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I say, good,” declared Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Edmonton’s long way off,” objected Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s nothing,” said Jack. “I believe we can
+pick it up all right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“In this northern country we have no static problem,
+anyway,” said Frank. “We couldn’t send to
+Edmonton with our equipment, but I’ll bet we can
+catch.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_39'></a>39</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads
+together in low-whispered conversation, poring over
+a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched
+under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the
+three boys quietly got out the necessary equipment
+from among the luggage and set to work.
+</p>
+<p>
+“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I
+saw two firs taller than most, standing alone.
+They’re a pretty good distance apart, too. We can
+climb up those trees and string the aerial between
+them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They made their way to the trees noted by Frank,
+and found them exactly suited to the purpose. Jack
+and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns climbing
+the trees, and the wires were strung without any
+great difficulty. They worked busily, and when
+everything was all connected up, Bob looked at his
+watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Allowing for the difference in time,” he said,
+“they’re about ready to begin their concert. On
+what meter wave length does the Edmonton station
+send, Frank?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t recall. About three hundred and fifty, I
+suppose. We’ll tune up and try, anyway.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought
+of this before,” said Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never
+did interest me much, anyway. I like to do the sending
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_40'></a>40</span>
+myself, we’ve always been dog-tired when we
+made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly
+as Art and Dick. If it hadn’t been for your thought
+of bringing some relaxation and amusement to your
+father tonight, Jack, we’d have been asleep already.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess that’s right, old thing,” Jack replied.
+“You would have been asleep, anyway, even if the
+rest of us kept tossing. But what does she say,
+Frank? Any luck yet?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank, who had been manipulating the controls,
+looked up mirthfully.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you think of your musical program,
+Jack?” he replied. “Listen in a minute will you?
+They’re sending out a crop and weather report.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s face fell, then he, too, laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just a preliminary.
+The concert will follow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No,” answered Frank, who had resumed his
+headpiece, “now it’s a bulletin report on the day’s
+news events. Listen. Why, great—”
+</p>
+<p>
+His voice died. Over his face came an expression
+of surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces
+attached to the box. Over their features also
+spread amazement and even consternation. They
+listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore
+off the receivers and looked at each other.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_41'></a>41</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Whew, what do you know about that?” said Bob,
+in an awed tone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And on the very night that we decided to set up
+the radio, too,” said Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It seems like the hand of fate,” declared Jack.
+“Say, we must get father and Tom Farnum.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thorwaldsson’s airship found wrecked on land
+near the mouth of the MacKenzie,” said Bob. “And
+the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat it?” he
+ejaculated again.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hey, Jack, wait a minute,” cried Frank, running
+after his companion, who already had started for
+camp. “Discovered by Indians who were bringing
+out furs, did you get that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued
+to run. Frank fell in beside him, Bob pounding at
+his heels.
+</p>
+<p>
+In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the
+graveled beach by the river, where camp had been
+made for the night. Dick and Art lay outstretched
+in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton
+and Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and
+apparently had not even been aware of the absence
+of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as the
+latter approached.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it, Jack? What’s the matter?” demanded
+Mr. Hampton, rising to his feet in alarm, as he
+noted his son’s excitement.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_42'></a>42</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing
+their setting up of the radio, their picking-up of
+the Edmonton station’s nightly program, and their
+discovery that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been
+found far behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It was only a bulletin news report, Dad,” Jack
+explained, “yet I suppose it contains all the facts.
+Evidently the discovery of the airship had been made
+weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the
+MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But,
+of course, it took a long time for the news to reach
+civilization. It was just made public today. The
+very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio.
+It certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn’t it,
+Dad? If we had waited until tomorrow, or set up
+the radio yesterday, probably we would not have
+known of this discovery.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his
+mind was busy with the problem.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Did the report state any message or papers of
+any sort were found on the body of the aviator?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No. Only that the body had been there a long
+time, as nothing but the skeleton remained.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that was all?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That was all the definite information,” said
+Frank. “Of course, there was a word or two of
+speculation as to what had occurred. The theory
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_43'></a>43</span>
+was advanced that the aviator was flying to summon
+aid for Thorwaldsson, who was in some predicament,
+but that some accident occurred to his engine while
+flying, and he fell to his death.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“A plausible enough theory,” said Farnum. “But,
+in that case, I can’t understand why the aviator did
+not bear some message from Thorwaldsson. Can
+you, Mr. Hampton?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s not the only puzzling thing,” he said.
+“The disappearance from the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson’s
+ship, the death of the aviator, the lack of
+message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson
+and his party, Thorwaldsson’s failure to
+send any radio messages—all these need explaining.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We must face the fact,” he continued, “that some
+disaster of a totally unexpected nature has befallen
+Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And I mean by that a
+disaster of man’s agency. They were prepared for
+practically all eventualities in their grapple with
+nature. Although the Winter was severe, yet they
+were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the
+country, and were prepared in every way for a
+lengthy stay. Even if worst came to worst, and
+Winter proved too much for them, some would have
+survived and brought out word of what had befallen.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you think, Dad—”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_44'></a>44</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it is
+time to take you boys into our complete confidence,
+Farnum and I have been talking this matter over.
+We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or
+group of men has knowledge of Farrell’s discovery
+of the river of oil, and is working against us. How
+to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do not
+know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson’s
+employ, somebody high in his confidence, got some
+word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an unguarded
+moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you
+know, is a vital necessity of the world. Discovery
+of a vast new field would make great fortunes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery,
+would realize that the only way to come upon
+it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson expedition,
+dog its steps and, at the psychological moment,
+strike. In other words, when the field was rediscovered
+by Farrell, wipe out the Thorwaldsson expedition,
+and claim possession.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with
+this theory. The disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s
+ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it traveled
+only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading
+posts on the great river. It has never been heard of
+since. It might very easily have been scuttled and
+sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_45'></a>45</span>
+some little bay on that far northern coast of the
+Arctic. That would mean that the crew was bought
+up, but that is not an impossibility, for men I am
+sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship,
+the aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried,
+may have sought to make his escape to the outside
+when Thorwaldsson was captured—as I believe
+likely—and may have paid with his life for his
+devotion, through some unforeseen accident to his
+machine.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke
+silence.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, Dad, how terrible,” he said in a shocked
+tone. “To think of men being so unscrupulous.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not all men, Jack,” said his father. “Remember
+that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “What do you intend
+to do?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Frankly, I don’t know,” said the latter. “Now
+that we are within striking distance of our objective—the
+river of oil—I do not want to give up.
+If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it
+before necessity compels us to flee south to escape
+oncoming Winter. That will mean that we can map
+the route for future operation. I had at one time,
+too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some
+hope that we would be able to follow the river out
+into the Arctic and discover a route of approach by
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_46'></a>46</span>
+water. But we may not have time for that. However,
+once we do locate the river by land approach,
+we will have a pretty accurate idea of whether it can
+be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in
+Summer.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and
+the rest of us, in the light of what we suspect lies
+ahead, I do not know. We shall have to sleep over
+it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+After some further conversation, all returned to
+where the boys had rigged up the radio. Dick and
+Art were childishly delighted at the concert, the first
+in their experience. Farnum was almost equally
+stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot
+his worries in enjoyment of the music. As showmen,
+the boys were in the element.
+</p>
+<p>
+More than an hour passed, and the concert was
+still in progress, when Frank, who had been absent
+unnoted suddenly approached from the thick forest
+of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with
+a face so pale that Jack, who first caught sight of
+him, became alarmed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it, Frank?” he asked, seizing his comrade
+by an arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment Frank was speechless. He
+swallowed convulsively, but was unable to make a
+reply. The others looked at him in astonishment,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_47'></a>47</span>
+and all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing
+number of the concert, as they stared at him.
+</p>
+<p>
+With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards
+the point of land, making a bend in the stream,
+beyond which lay their camp.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_48'></a>48</span><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a>CHAPTER VI.—INDIANS!</h2>
+<p>
+“Indians.”
+</p>
+<p>
+That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over
+the faces of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and the two men,
+Dick and Art, came looks of alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“In camp,” asked Jack, a sudden thought striking
+him. “Maybe they’re just visitors.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But Farnum shook his head decisively, before
+Frank could reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The only Indians in this country hate the white
+man,” he said. “They have had some cause, goodness
+knows. But the point is, they hate us.” Turning
+abruptly to Frank, he said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do they know where we are? Were you seen?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was approaching our camp from this side,”
+said Frank, who had recovered his speech. “I was
+in search of a handkerchief, for I’ve got a little cold,
+and found I did not have one with me. Anyway,
+my feet made no sound on the pine needles, and I
+was screened from the camp by the trees. Suddenly,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_49'></a>49</span>
+as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians
+or more steal out of the trees on the other side of
+the clearing. They fell upon our belongings and
+started going through them. I hurried away to
+warn you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick,” said Farnum, “there is no time to lose.
+We are seven and all armed. They saw us depart
+and probably thought this was a grand chance to
+rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were
+coming back at once. I imagine they are just
+thieves. Well, we’ll give them a lesson. Come on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum’s
+arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Even if they are thieves,” he said. “We want
+no bloodshed. Shoot over their heads, if shooting
+is necessary.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum’s face fell.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, sir,” he said. “Just as you say. But
+we’ll have to hurry, or they’ll get away with everything
+and escape in our canoes. Then we would be
+out of luck, indeed.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With beating hearts, the party stole back through
+the trees, spread out with intervals of several yards
+between each. Dick and Art, who never stirred
+anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers
+who knew what it meant to be separated
+from their weapons in this wild land, were on the
+ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_50'></a>50</span>
+as had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had
+brought his, and held the middle position. The
+other four were armed with their revolvers.
+</p>
+<p>
+As they neared the fringe of trees forming the
+last rampart between them and camp, crouching
+behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could
+see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered
+luggage, which had been opened and tossed
+about near the fire. Another group was at the
+water’s edge, loading the canoes which had been
+drawn up on the sand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just in time,” thought Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure
+of a man emerging from the little tent which Mr.
+Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer from
+rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off
+night chills in case they were late in getting out of
+the country, but which at present frequently was
+not set up on their halts. The present occasion,
+however, a whim to sleep under canvas rather than
+the fir trees had possessed him, and the tent had
+been set up.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man who caught Jack’s attention differed
+little in dress from Dick and Art, but about his
+head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in
+piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased
+by his long, drooping black mustaches. Jack could
+see him clearly, and thought that seldom had he
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_51'></a>51</span>
+looked upon a more villainous countenance. The
+fellow held a piece of paper in his hand, and was
+reading it with evident satisfaction.
+</p>
+<p>
+A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on
+his left, drew Jack’s attention. He looked at the
+latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum’s eyes were
+ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it
+at the man before the tent. The next moment there
+was a report, the paper fell from the fellow’s hand,
+and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just the hand,” Jack overheard Farnum say in
+a tone of vexation, as he prepared to fire again. But
+the other, seizing his wounded hand in the unwounded
+one, did not wait for the attack. Running
+low and in zigzag fashion, he darted for the cover
+of the trees on the other side of the camp, at the
+same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his
+companions.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Fire,” shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot
+after the fleeing man, that kicked up the dirt at his
+heels. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to kill.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his
+father’s exhortation fired high. The volley was
+general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum
+came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from
+the four revolvers of the others poured a succession
+of shots. It sounded as if an army were opening
+fire from the woods.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_52'></a>52</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The Indians did not stay upon the order of their
+going. Those grouped about the luggage ran after
+the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo the
+Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed
+away along the graveled bank of the stream. One,
+however, sought to launch the canoes into the swift
+current before departing, but his first effort was ineffectual,
+and any further attempt was stopped by
+a bullet from Mr. Hampton’s revolver, which
+winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying after
+his fellows.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick, Art, here,” cried Farnum, peremptorily.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two ran to his side.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That was Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum explained
+rapidly, his voice betraying his excitement. “You
+can guess what that means?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others nodded, with compressed lips.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I want you to trail them. Don’t run into danger,
+but see if their camp is nearby.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen
+were off at the run, not crossing the open camp,
+but circling it amongst the trees. Then Farnum
+turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at
+his heels.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That wasn’t just an attack from Indian thieves,”
+he said. “Mr. Hampton”—and his voice took on
+a solemn tone—“that was a blow from the enemy.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you mean?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_53'></a>53</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“They were desperadoes under the personal leadership
+of Lupo the Wolf.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And he?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and
+the most notorious bad man in the north. He is
+known not only throughout the length and breadth
+of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada,
+too. From Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from
+Nome to Dawson, he has gambled, fought, knifed,
+murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah,
+you consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To
+a certain extent, the towns and mining camps have
+grown more orderly and there are sheriffs ‘north of
+54.’ But might still rules in the camps.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on
+his rifle. As it was evident, however, that he had
+not yet finished, the others did not interrupt.
+Presently he resumed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men
+of the lowest type come there in Summer, in droves,
+lured by the high wages. They form temporary
+alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall,
+they depart. You can guess what the children of
+such lawless unions are like. They are cross-breeds,
+inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics
+of the human race. It is from them Lupo
+recruits his following.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But why should they be away over here, in this
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_54'></a>54</span>
+unpeopled wilderness?” asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—”
+He paused and looked questioningly at
+Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you will
+let me finish for you, Lupo is on our trail. And
+that I believe to be the case. When Frank here first
+came with word of Indians in camp, I considered
+them merely raiders from some passing body of
+hunters. But when I found Lupo at their head, I
+knew better. The wonder to me is,” he said, growing
+thoughtful, “that he did not send men to trail
+us and kill us or take us prisoner.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton shrugged.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Even the cunningest slip up now and then,” he
+said. “Perhaps his men wanted to loot first. And,
+anyway, they had only been here a few moments
+when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise
+them. Well, thanks to our good angel, we came
+off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our canoes
+still here, nobody hurt.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ah,” said Farnum, darkly, “we’re not out of the
+woods yet. If Lupo the Wolf is after us, well—there
+is trouble ahead.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_55'></a>55</span><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a>CHAPTER VII.—A MAN OF THE “MOUNTED.”</h2>
+<p>
+While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to
+take inventory to discover what, if anything, had
+been stolen, the boys went back to take down and
+pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite
+direction from that taken by the Indians who, moreover,
+were being tracked by Dick and Art and could
+not double back without warning being given, it was
+considered safe for the boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+When they returned to camp, they found the two
+frontiersmen ahead of them. These reported the
+Indian camp pitched some two miles in their rear
+and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had
+packed up and taken canoe on the back track.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now what does that mean?” asked Farnum,
+thoughtfully. “It is probable that Lupo has been
+behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true,
+namely that they have been trailing us. But why
+should they be fleeing now?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They can’t have been close to us all the time,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_56'></a>56</span>
+Mr. Farnum,” said Bob, “or why weren’t we attacked
+before?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s true enough,” he said. “It may be that
+Lupo started late and has been all this time catching
+up with us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton
+said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable
+explanation. The other side, Farnum, probably has
+a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware. But the
+spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us
+into the wilderness to hunt may have deceived this
+spy. But then, later, word would reach him from
+Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly
+known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is
+trading on Farrell’s secret, my connection with
+Anderson would be suspected, especially as several
+years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in
+New Mexico. So words would reach Nome to
+watch me. Then someone would start out on our
+trail.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum.
+“A fine cutthroat.”
+</p>
+<p>
+An earnest discussion followed. What did this
+turning back of Lupo the Wolf mean? Did he intend
+to stick to their trail, but at a greater distance
+in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_57'></a>57</span>
+lie in ambush ahead? That his retreat was other
+than momentary, and meant he intended giving up
+their pursuit, nobody believed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, Dad,” said Jack, during the course
+of this discussion, “don’t you consider it quite likely
+that Lupo intends to take us by surprise and attack
+us, rather than to retreat?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I do, indeed, Jack,” he said. “A cutthroat such
+as Lupo would have brought his band of desperadoes
+here for only one purpose, and that is, to
+dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason
+of the fact that they came upon our camp first, and
+stopped to loot. But from now on we shall have to
+be continually on our guard.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the
+long Summer, when daylight never fails,” said
+Frank. “That makes it easier to guard against a
+surprise attack.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it
+easier. But from now on, we shall have to be on
+the watch continually.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he
+turned to the other members of the party, Farnum,
+Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as
+the boys, preparatory to the launching of the
+canoes, which were ready loaded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_58'></a>58</span>
+out of sight?” he asked. “Would it be better to set
+Dick and Art to watch them, and appoint a rendezvous
+where we can come together later?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however,
+showed approval of the plan. Farnum struck
+his forehead with clenched fist in a characteristic
+gesture.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just what I would have proposed myself, if I
+had been awake,” he confessed. “Dick, Art, do you
+think you could pick up their trail?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They won’t back track far,” said Dick. “Art
+an’ me can follow ’em afoot. That last portage is
+only four miles back, an’ we can catch up with ’em
+there. Now about where to meet up with you
+again?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“None of us know this country,” said Farnum,
+“and so it will be difficulty to appoint a rendezvous.
+But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly intends to continue
+our pursuit, and won’t let our trail go cold.
+Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best
+plan will be to report to us at every camp. One of
+you can keep watch on Lupo while the other brings
+in a report.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good enough,” said Dick, the more loquacious
+of the pair. “Look for us at tomorrow’s camp.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient
+for a meal or two, guns at the trail, the pair struck
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_59'></a>59</span>
+swiftly on the back trail, disappeared among the
+trees at the bend and were gone from sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, boys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get going.
+Can you manage your canoe all right by yourselves?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I think they can scrape along, Farnum,” he said.
+“Probably we’ll be asking one of them to help us
+before long. Well, come on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the
+canoes shot away, and, with Farnum leading to set
+the course, the boys fell in behind. In the leading
+canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a
+low-voiced conversation began that lasted a long
+time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum were saying
+could not be heard, for the gap between the two
+canoes, though not great, was considerable. Moreover,
+they spoke in low tones. But the boys sensed
+an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older
+men. As for themselves, however, they were not
+worried. On the contrary, the excitement of finding
+themselves trailed had brightened them wonderfully.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Old expedition was getting too monotonous,
+anyway,” said Bob presently.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I suppose you’ll want to challenge the best
+Indian wrestler now, won’t you?” said Jack, in a
+tone of mock seriousness.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_60'></a>60</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and
+Art and send in your challenge?” asked Frank, in
+the same jollying manner. “You know you haven’t
+been in a match with anybody for some time. Here
+was your chance, and you went and let it slip away
+from you. But, don’t worry, perhaps the Indians
+will return. Who knows? You may even have a
+chance to exchange courtesies with no less a personage
+than Lupo the Wolf himself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And
+so the two canoes swept on between the low banks
+of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the other
+filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not
+simpletons. They realized, indeed, that they were
+in a precarious situation. They were deep in the far
+northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers
+dogged their heels. In all that vast country,
+was none to whom they could look for help. But,
+for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It
+was not the first time in which they found themselves
+in a ticklish situation. They had come unscathed
+out of other perils, even winning some
+honor in the encounter. They would do the same
+again. Thus they put the matter to themselves.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hour after hour passed, during which period
+they twice encountered slight rapids, up which they
+waded with the canoes instead of portaging. All
+were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_61'></a>61</span>
+reduced by the absence of Dick and Art, and the
+work made correspondingly heavy, but in addition
+they were traveling now on reserve strength, as
+prior to making the last camp they already had
+done a big day’s work.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end
+of four hours of travel they came to the shore of a
+small lake. Here, in a secluded cove, convenient to
+the stream on which they had been traveling, they
+were about to make camp, when Frank approached
+Mr. Hampton and Farnum and indicated an island
+a half mile away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes
+confirmed Frank’s observation. Mr. Hampton put
+up the field glasses which he always carried strapped
+to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something
+more—a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of
+the island.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hard to tell from that what sort of man is
+camping out there,” said Farnum, when informed
+of the kayak. “Everybody uses ’em in this country—Indian,
+Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That
+smoke doesn’t indicate a big fire. Must be only one
+man, or maybe, two. Let’s investigate. If we decide
+to make camp out there, well, that island would be
+a good place and it would be hard to surprise us
+there if we kept guard.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_62'></a>62</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more, paddles were plied, and the two
+canoes cut diagonally across the waters of the lake
+towards the island. As they approached, Farnum
+raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an
+answering shout came back. Then a figure stepped
+from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon which
+the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their
+approach, hand shading eyes against the glare of
+the sun, head bare.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” exclaimed Farnum in
+a low voice, turning his head slightly to address
+Mr. Hampton, “it’s a policeman.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian
+Mounted Police.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s he doing here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know. But we’ll soon find out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Welcome, strangers,” said the other, a tall
+bronzed man, as they approached. “Just in time for
+a snack.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He advanced to the water’s edge, and stood ready
+to help. Farnum’s appraising eye took in the approach.
+Shoal water and a sandy beach! He decided
+to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping
+his paddle, he leaped from the bow into the water,
+as the forefoot of the canoe grated lightly. Relieved
+of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at
+the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_63'></a>63</span>
+Farnum ran it up on the beach, the uniformed man
+lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was in
+the bow of the boy’s canoe, repeated the maneuver.
+The two craft were drawn up side by side.
+</p>
+<p>
+“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian
+simply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Know Arkell of Dawson?” asked Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Know him well,” said the other. “One o’ the
+best on the Force.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Friend of mine,” said Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum
+introduced Mr. Hampton and the boys. MacDonald
+led the way to a sheltered spot among the
+trees, where a fire burned.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just about to broil some fish,” he said. “Lucky
+there’s plenty. I’m crazy about fishing,” he continued,
+“and when they bit here I pulled out mor’n
+I could use. Was wonderin’ what to do with ’em
+when I heard your hail. Guess I don’t need to
+worry about that any longer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As he spoke he busied himself about preparations
+for dinner, and soon an appetizing odor of frying
+fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of the hungry
+boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Suppose I get another pan and help, sir,”
+proffered Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+His comrades laughed, for the big fellow’s appetite
+was proverbial among them. MacDonald nodded with a
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_64'></a>64</span>
+grin of understanding. Bob tore back to
+the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand.
+In a short time the fish were fried, and all hands fell
+to right heartily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Long way off your beat, aren’t you?” asked
+Farnum, of MacDonald, as they ate.
+</p>
+<p>
+The other nodded. Then he regarded them
+sharply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Same to you,” he said. “First white men I’ve
+seen in many days.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight
+blue eyes under the grizzled brows, and met it
+promptly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and I’ll tell you why we are here,” he said.
+“I think our meeting with you was providential. If
+you have been in this country long, you may have
+heard something that will help us. At any rate,
+here’s our story.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for
+their presence. He made a clean breast of it, keeping
+back nothing, telling MacDonald of the alleged
+oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s
+death, Farrell’s return as guide to Thorwaldsson’s
+expedition, and their presence now in an attempt to
+trace the missing men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So that’s that,” said MacDonald. “So that’s the
+reason for Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ And
+it was into this country he come! Well, well.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_65'></a>65</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent
+adventure with Lupo the Wolf. MacDonald manifested
+keen interest. His hand, as he poured
+tobacco into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a
+little of the precious tobacco.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You ain’t heard of it likely,” he said. “You
+wouldn’t. But this Lupo killed my partner on the
+Force, an’ I asked the Inspector to let me go after
+him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an’
+lost his trail several days ago. Now, well—”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked
+down towards the lake shore, and the others
+respected his evident desire to be alone and did not
+follow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Out after Lupo single-handed,” whispered
+Frank. “And the desperado surrounded by all his
+men, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That means nothing to the Mounted,” said he.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_66'></a>66</span><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a>CHAPTER VIII.—FIRST BLOOD.</h2>
+<p>
+So tired were all members of the party after their
+unexpected exertions of moving camp and trekking
+on, coming at the end of a day filled with fatiguing
+labor, that now a haven had been reached and they
+had relaxed from their tension, they were ready to
+go to sleep at once. First, however, preparations
+had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep
+watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter
+did not know definitely, of course, where they were
+encamped, yet it would not be difficult for them to
+follow the trail at least to the shore of the lake.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here,” said MacDonald, returning to join
+the conference, “I’m not near as tired as the rest of
+you. I’ll keep watch for your friends for a couple
+of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” said Farnum, gratefully, “that is, if
+you promise to wake me at the end of two hours.
+I can use a little sleep right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Turn in, then,” said MacDonald. “These
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_67'></a>67</span>
+spruces give you enough shade. And, anyway, I
+guess you don’t need much inducement to go to
+sleep.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I could sleep right out in the open sun with my
+face turned up to the sky,” said big Bob, yawning.
+“Well, nighty night, folks.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Nothing occurred during MacDonald’s watch,
+and at the end of the two-hour period he awakened
+Farnum, in keeping with the agreement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thought some of letting you sleep on,” he said.
+“But, to tell you the truth, I been travelin’ hard myself,
+and need a little sleep, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right,” said Farnum. “I’d have been peeved if
+you hadn’t waked me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil
+among the bushes by the lake shore, descried a
+canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down
+which they, too, had come and swing into the lake.
+At first, as only the bow of the canoe appeared, he
+was startled, believing Lupo’s Indians already were
+on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and
+yet surprise to see them there, he made out the two
+figures in the boat as those of Dick and Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+The pair rested on their paddles a moment,
+scanning the shore and also, Farnum noted, apparently
+casting anxious glances behind them. He
+was too far away, however, to see whether that
+were really the case. Farnum realized that, with
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_68'></a>68</span>
+the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn
+safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their
+own canoes, Dick and Art would not have the same
+indications pointing to the island that had he on
+arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and
+was just about to set his cupped hand to his mouth
+and call when the unexpected occurred.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles
+into the water again and were making a wide swing
+with the evident intention of bringing the canoe
+parallel to the shore but some distance out, when
+Farnum’s startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive
+at the mouth of the stream behind them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art
+evidently had managed to obtain one of Lupo’s
+canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely,
+moreover, apparently they did not know. He must
+warn them, not only of his presence and of help
+close at hand, but also of the danger behind them.
+The course they were taking would bear them away
+from the island and, unless changed at once, would
+make it possible for Lupo to cut them off from their
+friends.
+</p>
+<p>
+Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he
+stumbled out with sleep filling his eyes and dulling
+his brain, Farnum had his automatic swinging in
+the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot
+three times in rapid succession.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_69'></a>69</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the
+island where Farnum, stepping into the open, was
+vigorously waving his hat to attract their attention.
+Lupo’s men also set up a shout, as they churned the
+water racing to cut off their quarry.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it?” cried Frank, first of the aroused
+camp to gain Farnum’s side.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then his glance took in the situation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, those fellows might pick off Art
+and Dick before they can gain safety, even if they
+don’t succeed in cutting them off,” he said. “Let’s
+get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot,
+but they’re coming closer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns,”
+said Farnum. “Tell you what, you boys run and
+get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch
+one of our canoes. We’ll go out to help Dick and
+Art, if those fellows keep closing in on them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but
+when they returned they found Farnum’s plan unnecessary.
+As the two canoes had swept along,
+Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown
+down his paddle, and taken up his rifle, while Art
+had swung the canoe about with one dexterous
+stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art
+had followed suit.
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards
+the shore. When they reached the sand
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_70'></a>70</span>
+they found Lupo’s men already had faced about and
+were hurrying towards the mainland. One of their
+number evidently was hit.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Main good shootin’ at long range a’ so quick
+after paddlin’,” commented MacDonald appreciatively.
+</p>
+<p>
+Content with having beaten off their enemies, the
+two desisted, resumed their paddles and soon were
+within hailing distance. Greetings and congratulations
+were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their
+canoe on shore. As soon as the first hubbub of
+exclamations died away, Mr. Hampton led the way
+to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the
+fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid
+Dick told their story.
+</p>
+<p>
+After leaving the previous camp, they had gone
+back to where they seen Lupo break camp and start
+on the back trail. The meaning of this move, they
+had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe
+Lupo was relinquishing the chase. They believed
+he would suspect Mr. Hampton and Farnum would
+spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them
+off guard by creating the impression that he was
+abandoning the chase. Therefore, they had gone
+warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal
+Lupo would call a halt and prepare to ’bout
+face.
+</p>
+<p>
+This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_71'></a>71</span>
+farther on they discerned the four canoes of the
+half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued
+their occupants.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he
+was a-sayin’,” explained Dick. “But we couldn’t
+get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near
+’em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest,
+quite a ways off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin’
+our ears but without any luck when suddenly somethin’
+happens. Most of ’em was on shore, listenin’
+to Lupo but in one canoe was one man a-huntin’
+around like he’d lost somethin’.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What it was we never did know. But suddenly,
+this fellow shoves off with a shout to Lupo. Lupo
+answers like he was agreein’. So then this fellow
+comes a-paddlin’ down stream like mad. As he
+goes by where we’re a-layin’ low, Art whispers to
+me: ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang around.
+That’s sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it
+back an’ warn our crowd. An’ my legs is tired.
+I’d like to let my arms work for me. Let’s go.’
+</p>
+<p>
+“I nods, and without any more words we backed
+out and started down stream after that canoe. The
+fellow is goin’ like mad, which means he ain’t intendin’
+to go far. He’s lost somethin’ or other and
+thinks it may be floatin’ on the water or, maybe is
+layin’ on shore where he touched. Anyway, that’s
+what we thought. We never did get to know. For
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_72'></a>72</span>
+after we’d made a bend in the stream and put some
+distance between Lupo and us, we decided it was
+no use runnin’ any farther.
+</p>
+<p>
+“‘Here goes,’ said Art. And he let fly over the
+Indian’s head. That fellow didn’t wait for more.
+He just jumped out of the canoe an’ started
+swimmin’ for the other shore. So then Art give me
+his rifle an’ he swims out and brings in the canoe.
+Last we seen of that Indian he was streaking it back
+on the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly
+interrupted:
+</p>
+<p>
+“How many men has Lupo got with him?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“A dozen.”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You know why I want him,” he said. “For
+murder. And then there’s this raid on you. There
+are eight of us, includin’ these husky young fellows
+of yours. Will you help me capture him an’ his
+gang?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them?
+We can’t turn aside from our own object long? We
+couldn’t help you guard them. And you couldn’t
+get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed,
+especially if any of them are wounded.”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald’s face fell.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_73'></a>73</span>
+o’ that skunk—murderin’ the best pal a man ever
+had—well, I see red, that’s all.” His head sank to
+his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring
+moodily at the ground between his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton,” said
+Farnum, slowly. “If we don’t do something, Lupo
+will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a
+constant danger.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know,” said Mr. Hampton. “Let me think.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the
+ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys had been listening with interest. Now
+Frank nudged Jack, with whom he was standing by
+the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack’s face
+brightened and he nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank turned to the ranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?”
+he inquired.
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered
+readily enough.
+</p>
+<p>
+“A good four hundred miles to the South.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted
+to know.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just a minute, sir, please,” begged Frank, once
+more turning to MacDonald. “And how many men
+are at the Post?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_74'></a>74</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain and five men.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, is that all?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank’s tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald
+smiled slightly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as many as
+an army,” he said. “Well, we keep this wilderness
+clean with a handful. O’ course, when necessary,
+too, we can swear in deputies.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have you got wireless at the Post?” asked
+Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain equipped us some time back,” he said.
+“All posts or forts, as we call them sometimes, have
+wireless now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good for you, Frank. I see what you’re driving
+at now,” said Mr. Hampton. “You—”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald
+capture Lupo and his gang, we could call
+his Post by wireless and have them send men to help
+him take his prisoners in.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_75'></a>75</span><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a>CHAPTER IX.—A CALL TO THE FORT.</h2>
+<p>
+“Now,” said Jack, “is the time that I wish I had
+my 20-kilowatt radio tube that I have been working
+on so long.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically.
+An enthusiast on radio, Jack had
+developed a number of new appliances. The latest
+of these was not yet completed. He had worked on
+it in the laboratories at Yale during the Winter and
+Spring. The lateness of his return to his classes,
+however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college
+until after Christmas, due to the delay occasioned
+by his adventures in South America in search of
+“The Enchanted City of the Incas,” compelled him
+to devote most his time to catching up in his studies.
+He did not, therefore, have as much time to devote
+to laboratory experiments as he desired. As a consequence,
+the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been perfected,
+when time came for him to depart for
+Alaska with his father.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_76'></a>76</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would
+be the most powerful in the world, and he expected,
+moreover, to construct others of greater kilo-wattage.
+A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England,
+it is true, but it had not been found practicable.
+Jack’s tube was to be steel-jacketed and equipped
+with a water-cooling device, due to the heat produced
+when in operation. His big dream was that
+this tube, when used as an amplifier in conjunction
+with an alternator, would make trans-atlantic telephonic
+communication as common as cabling or
+wireless telegraphing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now,”
+he mourned, “we would be able to talk not only with
+Mr. MacDonald’s Post but with Dawson or even
+Nome.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “it’s too bad. Just the
+same, let’s get busy. For, with our 50-watt oscillator
+tube set we will be able to communicate by
+telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only
+400 miles away, we can reach it easily.”
+</p>
+<p>
+For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they
+could use either three or four 5-watt oscillator tubes
+in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator tube. They had
+decided on the latter method, in making their preparations
+for departure in faraway Seattle. For one
+thing, and the biggest, transportation was the most
+important item. And the 50-watt tube set was the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_77'></a>77</span>
+more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton
+helping, they got out the various parts from their
+baggage and made the connections.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald,
+and Dick and Art, watched with puzzled interest
+and even awe as the four, working in unison, put
+together the aerial series condenser, the blocking
+condenser, the grid condenser, the telegraph key,
+the chopper, the choke coil in the key circuit, the
+filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the
+power circuit, the storage battery and the motor
+generator.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although
+Dick and Art were content to sit silent
+and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work
+progressed. Several times, too, Dick arose and
+went to the water’s edge to keep watch against surprise.
+That any would be attempted for the time
+being, nobody believed, as they figured the enemy
+would consider them on guard.
+</p>
+<p>
+As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of
+the others. His description of how the low voltage
+current from the storage battery flowed into one of
+the windings of the generator and drives it as a
+motor thus generating higher voltage in the other
+winding both puzzled and interested them. By the
+time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who was
+something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_78'></a>78</span>
+understanding of the set, but MacDonald, though
+interested, was bewildered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m fair beat,” he confessed. “Anyhow, just so
+you boys can make it work!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, we’ll make it work, all right,” Frank assured
+him. “Well, now, to try to call the Post. What’s its
+call, Mr. MacDonald?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I happen to remember,” said MacDonald. “We
+were all so interested when wireless was put in that
+Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it. He
+said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his
+name. We were to remember it, in case of need,
+when we were able to get to a wireless station.
+Well, this is a case of need.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll say it is,” said big Bob. “Well, come on,
+fellows, who’s going to call?”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was an honor or distinction that each was eager
+to have, yet each wanted to force it on the others.
+A friendly argument developed, to which Mr.
+Hampton, smiling, put an end.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose
+you draw straws for the privilege. You all know
+the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no
+question of ability involved. Here—” breaking
+three matchsticks into varying lengths and offering
+them—“take your choice. Longest wins.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank drew the winning stick. The others
+laughed, clapped him on the back, and without
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_79'></a>79</span>
+more ado he began pressing the key and sending
+out the signal.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless
+station, do you think, MacDonald?” asked Mr.
+Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Somebody there all the time,” the latter replied.
+“Captain Jameson has found wireless so useful in
+policing his vast district that he wonders how he
+ever got along without it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re
+answering.”
+</p>
+<p>
+To those who understood the code, the answer
+was plain:
+</p>
+<p>
+“JSN answering. Who are you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“MacDonald,” tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously.
+</p>
+<p>
+The receptor sounded almost angry.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quit your kidding.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald
+of the Mounted.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Prove it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’ll stump old Frank,” chuckled Bob, in an
+aside. But he was mistaken.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” replied Frank, confidently. “Do you
+know what my assignment is?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” answered JSN, impudently. “Do you?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_80'></a>80</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m after Lupo the Wolf,” tapped Frank. “Now
+call Captain Jameson.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because
+he doesn’t know the code. But you must be speaking
+for him, for that’s right about his assignment.
+I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” tapped Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who
+was itching to inquire what was occurring, but had
+restrained himself until he should be appealed to by
+Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men
+unfamiliar with telegraphy, whether wireless or by
+wire, he stood in awe of an operator, and believed
+it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior
+being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as
+well as on that of Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding
+behind him, and explained what had happened.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And you actually got the Post?” asked MacDonald,
+doubt in his voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of
+the weeks I spent toiling up here, and now you
+come along and talk across that distance without
+the loss of a minute’s time. Wonderful, well I
+reckon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“When Captain Jameson arrives,” said Frank,
+smiling, “I want you to stand close and I’ll translate
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_81'></a>81</span>
+what he says, and you help me with the replies,
+will you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Won’t I be interrupting you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, no,” smiled Frank. “You just come close
+and wait until I speak. It’ll be all right. Well”—as
+the receptor began to click—“I guess this is
+Captain Jameson now. Yes,” with a nod, “it’s he,
+all right. He’s asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and
+close on Lupo. Tell him about yourselves and the
+fight, and that we’re going to round up Lupo’s
+gang and ask him how soon he can send men to
+help me out with any prisoners we take, and if he
+can send any at all, and—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“One minute,” said Frank. “I understand. Just
+wait a bit now, while I telegraph.”
+</p>
+<p>
+To explain at length the details of that telegraphic
+conversation is unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that
+the situation was fully explained to Captain Jameson,
+and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen
+deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald’s aid, as
+soon as he should hear again as to the outcome of
+the expedition against Lupo.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’ll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald,”
+said Captain Jameson. “But with game
+plentiful and the season open, he can camp until
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_82'></a>82</span>
+they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners,
+providing he makes any. You people go ahead with
+your rounding up of Lupo’s gang, and then let me
+hear from you again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation,
+as there was nothing further to be said.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_83'></a>83</span><a name='chX' id='chX'></a>CHAPTER X.—THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND.</h2>
+<p>
+“MacDonald, I’ll agree to help you round up
+Lupo and his gang,” said Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+They were all sitting in conference, so to speak,
+about the camp fire, over which Dick was busy
+broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had
+just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor
+made the nostrils of the three hungry boys twitch
+with anticipatory delight.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s the way I
+like to hear you talk.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, “I’ve got
+a very good reason why we should cast in our lot
+and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and draws
+us off our course.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, it’s an easy enough one to guess. Lupo
+evidently is after us. That means that he is being
+paid by somebody to do us in, or at least thwart us
+in our search. I want to know who that somebody
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_84'></a>84</span>
+is. And the only way to find out is to make Lupo
+prisoner and question him. Moreover, it is possible
+we may be able to learn something about the mysterious
+fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded
+with satisfaction.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just what I was thinking myself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” said MacDonald.
+“But such being the case, we’ll have to be mighty
+careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, as then your
+prospective source of information would vanish.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“True enough, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton.
+“We’ll all have to be on guard against that misfortune,
+for misfortune it would be.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick
+and Art to him. Then he explained how matters
+stood.
+</p>
+<p>
+“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll
+start, and you must all be very careful not to shoot
+Lupo, if it comes to a battle.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke
+but always to the point, raised a question which had
+been puzzling him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?”
+he asked. “And with our radio transmitter,
+especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take all
+our outfit along?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_85'></a>85</span>
+our trouble in getting it erected,” said Mr. Hampton.
+“And to take all our outfit with us would be
+to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we
+can’t very well leave everything here, for some of
+Lupo’s men might slip away from the main body,
+in fact, they may already have done so, and they
+would put us in a terrible plight if they raided the
+camp, in our absence.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald
+spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can certainly travel faster without your outfit
+to hold us back,” he said, “especially if Lupo
+tries to run away. For then we could gain on him
+at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr.
+Hampton, this island is easily defended. We’ve
+been going to the shore to keep watch on the mainland
+against surprise. But just a little ways
+through the trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which
+you can see the waters all around the island. One
+man alone could keep guard here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But one man couldn’t keep off an attack in
+numbers,” objected Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” said MacDonald. “With them
+high-powered rifles of yours, it might be done.
+They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo’s
+Indians and breeds will have. Anyway, two men
+certainly could manage to hold this place against all
+comers.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_86'></a>86</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“And three,” added Farnum, with a significant
+look at Mr. Hampton, “could do it even better.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys again were at the fire some distance
+away, helping Dick broil more fish. Mr. Hampton
+looked at them. He understood the significance in
+Farnum’s tone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t think they would be in danger here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton,”
+said Farnum, lowering his voice as the other
+had done.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted
+by Farnum, namely, that the boys should be left at
+camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true
+that they would be in far less danger than if they
+accompanied him against Lupo. And that appealed
+to him, appealed powerfully. He was grateful to
+Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the
+boys’ welfare.
+</p>
+<p>
+On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful
+in an emergency, and good fighters. And since the
+idea that information might be obtained from
+Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession
+of his thoughts. Lupo must be captured. Would
+it not be folly to weaken their force by leaving
+three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was
+a fine rifle shot, behind?
+</p>
+<p>
+Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary,
+he could command and they would obey. But Mr.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_87'></a>87</span>
+Hampton was not one to exercise his authority
+dictatorially.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I confess I don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he
+said finally.
+</p>
+<p>
+At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys
+announced the completion of the second batch of
+food, and their imminent return.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Make it a post of honor and danger,” whispered
+Farnum, urgently. “Tell them the radio must be
+guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take these
+things along our movements will be so hampered
+that Lupo might escape. Tell them there is a big
+possibility, too, that some of Lupo’s gang may attempt
+to raid the camp while we are absent.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The boys were so close at hand that Farnum
+desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded. As they ate, he
+broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Three of us ought to stay behind,” he added.
+“That will give sufficient protection for each other,
+and provide a sure safeguard against surprise. Also,
+that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of
+us can go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without
+any baggage. It carried three of us, with baggage,
+so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So
+we can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the
+portages, if any are necessary.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?”
+asked Jack quietly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_88'></a>88</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton realized from his son’s tone that
+Jack understood his thoughts.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you three boys would be the natural ones
+to be selected,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I say,” protested Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” cried Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close
+association of the motherless boy with the older
+man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He
+understood how troubled his father was over the
+possibility of running them into danger. And he
+decided he would not add to his difficulties, but
+would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed
+at the prospect of “missing the fun.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see how it is, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton,
+and he proceeded to elaborate on the theme furnished
+him by Farnum. “It’s a post of honor and danger
+combined.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced.
+They started anew to protest But Jack silenced
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, fellows, let’s be sports,” he said. “If
+the older heads decide they don’t need us, we won’t
+force ourselves on them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, Jack,” cried Bob and Frank in chorus.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I mean it, fellows,” said Jack. “Come over
+here with me, and I’ll tell you something.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Drawing them out of earshot, he added:
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_89'></a>89</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t let us make it hard for Dad. He’s got
+troubles enough. He’ll feel a lot easier if we aren’t
+along. I know how you feel. I feel the same way
+about it. But let’s make it as easy for Dad as we
+can. Besides, there is something in what he said,
+after all. There is no guarantee that some of Lupo’s
+men won’t attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe
+some of them must be watching this island
+right now, and the minute they see the others safely
+out of sight, they’ll attack us. For they know our
+numbers, and they will realize the three of us are
+here alone.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Have it your own
+way, let’s get some more to eat. I haven’t filled up
+yet.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too,”
+agreed Frank. “And I used to be such a dainty
+eater. Why, I just pecked at my food.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob.
+“For a little guy, you’re the heftiest eater I ever
+saw.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Little guy, is it?” cried Frank. “I like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And without more ado, he made a flying tackle,
+his arms locking about Bob’s knees. The big fellow
+came down in the brush and Frank piled on top
+of him with a shout of glee.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on, Jack. We haven’t had a good rough-house
+for a long time.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_90'></a>90</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went
+rolling and threshing about the bushes like a trio
+of young bears.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the fireside, Mr. Hampton’s worried look relaxed,
+and he grinned with enjoyment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s all right, now,” he said contentedly. “They’ll
+take their disappointment out in a grand wrestling
+jamboree. Well, let’s pack up a little grub and get
+ready to go.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_91'></a>91</span><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a>CHAPTER XI.—BOB FALLS ASLEEP.</h2>
+<p>
+In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party
+were ready to set out. Of one thing they were
+reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets constructed
+along his own lines, the instrument of which
+was so small and compact it was contained in the
+panel of a ring.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Only trouble with these,” Jack said, “is that you
+can receive but can’t transmit. However—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“However,” his father interrupted, “that is all
+that will be necessary.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why?” asked Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into
+such a predicament that we shall fail to return,”
+explained Mr. Hampton. “But the boys may be
+attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a
+bad position. Then they can call for us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“At least we could send out a hurry up call over
+those sets,” said Jack. “As for your calling us, well,
+that will be a little more complicated, Dad, but it
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_92'></a>92</span>
+can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking
+that army field set. It came in mighty handy in
+South America. It is no great job to set it up.
+And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment,
+and you can afford to take it along. It won’t
+be in your way. Here it is, you see, all boxed up
+complete, handle on the box and everything.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right, Jack,” said his father. “Now we can
+communicate with each other easily enough.
+Well”—looking about him—“are we ready?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I propose that we
+bring our canoes back through the trees, cross the
+island and make for the mainland on the other side.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald,
+“and it will screen our departure on the other side,
+in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as a matter of
+fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo’s party has not
+shown itself since we beat off that canoe, and
+probably is somewhere back up that stream out of
+which your party came.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You think they cannot see the mainland on the
+other side of this island from there, Dad?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t believe so,” said Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Even if they do catch a glimpse of us,” suggested
+Farnum, “isn’t it probable they’ll believe we
+are pushing on? As a matter of fact, however, we’ll
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_93'></a>93</span>
+land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland
+and then up along the lake till we are out of sight,
+when we can cross again, I suppose that’s your idea,
+Mr. Hampton?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My idea exactly,” answered the other. “Well,
+let’s get the canoe and MacDonald’s kayak. They
+have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we
+can bring them across the island without detection
+easily enough.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait a minute, Dad,” said Jack, laying a detaining
+hand on his arm. “If they do see you crossing
+the channel to the mainland, on the other side of
+the island, they’ll know the whole party isn’t along,
+and will realize you aren’t leaving, but merely carrying
+out some maneuver.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe, that’s what they will think, Jack. On
+the other hand, they might figure some of the canoes
+got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the
+back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure.
+The channel to the mainland on the other side is only
+a narrow one, and the probabilities of our escaping
+detection are all in our favor.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald’s
+kayak were dragged back through the underbrush
+and carried across the island to be launched
+on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the
+compact field transmitting set in the canoe, as the
+party pushed off. Then, amid farewells from both
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_94'></a>94</span>
+sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the
+mainland.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with
+something of a sinking of the heart. The same
+feeling, he suspected, possessed his father. Neither,
+however, presented other than a brave and cheerful
+front. As for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over
+their disappointment at not being permitted to accompany
+the expedition, to a certain extent, and,
+cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on
+their own resources were beginning to enjoy the
+situation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“First thing, fellows,” said Frank, as the party
+reached the mainland, hauled up canoe and kayak
+and struck into the trees, “first thing is to go to this
+knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a
+view of the field.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s divide up into
+watches, so that the pair of us not drawn for the first
+watch can get some rest.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You certainly were born in the Land o’ Nod,
+Bob,” scoffed Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re as sleepy as
+all that, we’ll count you out right away. Frank and
+I will draw for the first watch, and you can hit the
+hay.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not so fast,” said Bob. “I’ll take my chance
+with the rest of you.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_95'></a>95</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered
+hill to which MacDonald had referred and
+now, reaching the top, found that, despite its low
+elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest
+of the island and than the shores of the lake as well,
+that they commanded a sweeping view not only of
+the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone
+but also of the farther one whence they had come.
+</p>
+<p>
+Not a sign of human occupation, however, was
+anywhere apparent. Eastward, although they
+knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not
+have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake
+shore were sufficiently dense to hide any sign of
+movement. Westward, toward the farther shore,
+was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the
+stream, thinning out farther along the shore in both
+directions. Neither among the trees nor on the
+glades, could they discern anybody although Jack,
+who had been thoughtful enough to bring along
+their field glasses, scanned the prospect through
+them a long time before passing them on to the
+others, who did likewise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, so far so good,” said Jack, with a sigh
+of relief. “Evidently, or so far as we can see, anyway,
+Dad and the rest got across undiscovered and
+now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther
+up undetected.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_96'></a>96</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe so,” said Frank. “Maybe, too, Lupo got
+discouraged and quit.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Retreated you mean?” asked Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, you fellows are full of prunes,” said Bob.
+“Why should he quit now, just because we have
+added one more man to our forces? He’s hung to
+our trail a long time. That means he’s not going
+to quit in a hurry. No, we’ve got to keep our eyes
+open.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s right,” said Jack, thoughtfully, “It won’t
+do to get overconfident and relax our guard.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just the same there’s no sign of trouble now,”
+said Frank. “And I’ve got a suggestion.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t lose the idea,” said Bob, anxiously. “Hold
+on to it. Ideas are rare.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“With some people yes,” said Frank, grinning.
+“Not with me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out
+of his grasp.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My idea,” he said, “is to take a plunge in the
+channel your father crossed, Jack. I’m hot and
+sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine just
+before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do
+you say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“So I’m to have the first watch, hey?” said Bob.
+“It’s been all decided, has it? Well, well. All right,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_97'></a>97</span>
+run along, Frankie, me lad. I’m not so anxious for
+a swim. I’ll just start my watch here and now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob, you’re a good sport,” said Frank, throwing
+an arm over the shoulders of his big chum, between
+whom and himself was a depth of feeling which
+seldom was expressed in words.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, run along and take your swim.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the
+hill. Laughing, they obeyed. As they disappeared
+among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the base of
+a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the
+glasses in his lap and his eyes on the westward shore
+of the lake, where Lupo’s half-breeds had last been
+seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was
+against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as
+comfortable as possible.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was a really comfortable position and, when
+one is tired and sitting idle, a comfortable position
+is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with Bob.
+He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He
+had worked hard. The air was warm and drowsy,
+as only the air of the short hot Summer of the north
+country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently
+his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in
+his ears as of the drowsy hum of bees. He caught
+himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his eyes
+vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back
+against the tree trunk again, and again began to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_98'></a>98</span>
+nod. This time, the jerk with which he awakened
+was longer in coming.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob got up and stretched.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mustn’t go to sleep,” he reflected. “Nothing in
+sight, though. Not much use to worry. Ho, hum.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes
+drifted shut. He sat through the transition period
+between sleeping and waking, unaware that he was
+yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of
+relaxed limbs and thoughts. Before he was aware
+his head nodded, his eyes closed, his chin touched
+his chest, and he slept.
+</p>
+<p>
+Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying
+their plunge. The water was warm, there
+was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to their
+heart’s content. Neither realized the passage of
+time until Frank, suddenly filled with compunction
+at their long absence, while Bob kept watch,
+scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out
+on top of his clothes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Great guns, Jack,” he announced, “we’ve been
+gone an hour. Good old Bob. He was mighty nice
+about sending us off to swim while he kept watch,
+but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll be thinking
+it’s a low trick on our part to stay so long.
+Maybe he’ll want to come and take a plunge himself,
+when one of us gets back to relieve him.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_99'></a>99</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way
+with most of us, attempted to make excuses.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He might just as well have come along,” he
+said. “Nothing’s going to happen.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They were pulling on their clothes.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly they heard Bob’s voice raised in a distant
+shout, calling their names. Then followed a
+brisk outbreak of rifle shots.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_100'></a>100</span><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a>CHAPTER XII.—THE SURPRISE ATTACK.</h2>
+<p>
+“An attack,” gasped Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” cried
+Frank, in an agony of apprehension. “Come on.
+Don’t stop to finish dressing.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced,
+Frank frantically buckled on his revolver and
+cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started on a dead
+run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they
+ran, they heard the shots continuing intermittently,
+and then once more—clearer and closer at hand, as
+they neared the knoll—came Bob’s voice:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Frank, Jack, they’re rushing me. Look out for
+yourselves.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a crashing in the brush ahead.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Down, Jack, some of them coming.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce
+whose low branches swept the ground. The sounds
+were off to their left. A moment later the forms of
+four men, hurrying towards the channel whence
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_101'></a>101</span>
+they had just come, could be seen eight or ten yards
+away.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s face was pale, his lips set. Frank was
+trembling with excitement and fear—not for himself,
+if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad was
+not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was
+holding off the main attack alone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Steady, Frank,” whispered Jack. “Bob’s life
+depends on us. This is no time for false compunctions.
+You’ll have to shoot to kill.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, Jack.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the
+runners stumbled, flung out their arms to save themselves,
+and pitched forward. The others spun about
+towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but
+a second time Frank and Jack fired, and they, too,
+fell.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No time to see how badly they were hit,” said
+Jack. “Come on. Old Bob’s still alive and
+shooting.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting,
+however, to keep wary watch as they ran. No more
+of the enemy were seen, however. There was a
+sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of
+astonishment, stupefaction, even a note of fear, went
+up from several throats. Above all was a bull-like
+roar that they readily identified as coming from
+Bob’s throat.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_102'></a>102</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank’s heart gave an exultant leap. He knew
+that yell. It came only when Bob went berserk, and
+fought with his hands. He had heard it when they
+fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum
+runners on Long Island and Incas in the Andes.
+He knew well what it meant.
+</p>
+<p>
+Almost at the same moment, they burst into the
+glade at the base of the knoll, and came to a dead
+halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to the spot.
+</p>
+<p>
+But only for a moment. Then they started tearing
+up the hillside, among the scattered trees. For
+at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as if
+caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it
+portended. Somewhere in the center of the group
+was big Bob, at close grips with the enemy, and
+not caring how many they numbered.
+</p>
+<p>
+Would they be in time? Could they help Bob
+before some half-breed succeeded in sticking a knife
+into him?
+</p>
+<p>
+But Bob proved that he could handle his own
+affairs, for while they were still several yards away,
+first one and then another half-breed was spewed
+from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could
+be seen with several men clinging to his legs and
+another on his back, attempting apparently to
+throttle him. The big fellow’s hands went up and
+back. They settled under the other’s armpits.
+There was a sudden mighty heave and wrench, and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_103'></a>103</span>
+then the man on Bob’s back came flying through the
+air, straight for Bob’s two comrades. He had been
+tossed from Bob’s shoulders, as a strong man would
+toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack leaped aside,
+and the man struck the ground, rolled over and
+over and then lay still, crumpled up against the
+trunk of a spruce.
+</p>
+<p>
+Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank
+leaped forward. But their intervention was unnecessary.
+Standing like a young Colossus, legs
+apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent
+down. One big hand seized each by the neck.
+Then the two heads were bumped together once,
+twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on
+Bob’s legs relaxed, and he tossed them aside, and
+they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with
+a murderous look for the two boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+“More of you, hey?”
+</p>
+<p>
+They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob, Bob, it’s us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What? What? Oh, you—”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his
+eyes, and recognition dawning. It was followed
+by a wide grin.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, it’s you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_104'></a>104</span>
+history,” cried Frank, hysterically, clapping his
+chum on the back.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never saw the like,” said Jack, doing likewise.
+“Thank God, Bob, you’re alive.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never was more alive in my life,” said Bob.
+“Hey, they’re running away.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He darted away from his chums and sprang
+downhill. True enough. The two whom he had
+disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight,
+had gained their feet and were running madly
+through the trees.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack ran after Bob and restrained him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are
+three others here we must tie up before they come
+to.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending
+over the man whom the big fellow had tossed
+over his head. The half-breed was recovering consciousness,
+and beginning to moan.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Broken arm, I think,” said Frank. “He’ll not
+bother us. How about the two whose heads you
+bumped together?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They’re recovering consciousness, too,” said
+Jack. “Nothing much the matter with them. We
+had better tie them up, so they can’t cause us any
+trouble.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here, take the other fellow’s belt and tie his
+hands behind his back with it,” said Bob. At the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_105'></a>105</span>
+same time, he suited action to word in the case of
+the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow’s belt
+and tied him with it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Won’t they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to
+tie their legs, too?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, we’ll just keep an eye on them. Let’s take
+a look at the other. If his arm is broken we’ll have
+to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch him in the
+lake, though. He’s a villainous looking rascal. Tried
+to choke me, too, and darn near succeeded.”
+</p>
+<p>
+While Frank kept an eye on the two other
+prisoners, who had now recovered consciousness and
+were beginning to realize their situation but lay still
+under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack
+examined the third man.
+</p>
+<p>
+His senses were returning, and he moaned a good
+deal. Examinations revealed, however, that his
+arm had not been broken, merely badly wrenched.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m mighty glad of that,” said Jack. “We’d
+have been up against it to set a broken arm.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary,” said
+Bob. “But I’m glad, too, that it isn’t necessary.
+But, say, Jack”—with sudden recollection, and an
+air of anxiety—“there were four more of these
+scoundrels. We’ll have to look out for them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s voice shook a little as he replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I think not, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_106'></a>106</span>
+them first. We ambushed them, practically. They
+didn’t have a chance.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t mean—”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s gaze was steady but troubled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was
+our life or theirs. And yours, especially. When we
+heard your shout, and those first shots, Frank went
+wild with fear that you had been trapped while we
+were away enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt
+as bad as he did.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hey, fellows,” interrupted Frank, hailing them,
+“the two that got away must have been all that were
+left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are paddling
+like mad for the mainland.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Can you see them?” called Jack, starting to the
+top of the knoll to join his chum.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How would I know what they were doing if I
+couldn’t?” rejoined Frank. “Yes, I can see them.
+Look there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He pointed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him
+walk up here to join his little playmates,” Jack called
+back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he
+had fully recovered his senses, and he obeyed Bob’s
+order to move with an alacrity that showed he stood
+in abject fear of the husky young American.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_107'></a>107</span>
+nearing the mainland, and paddling with superhuman
+energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no
+less.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That accounts for all of them, I guess,” he said.
+“So we can sit down now, Bob, while you tell us
+how it happened.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not much to tell,” said Bob, sinking to a seated
+position against the tree trunk. “Except I went
+to sleep and was almost surprised, but not quite.
+My first intimation that the enemy was near was
+when I heard somebody talking in the trees at the
+foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear anybody? Was
+it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger?
+I don’t rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a
+start and looking down through the trees saw a
+bunch of half-breeds making their way towards the
+other side of the island.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin.
+Here I had promised to keep watch, and, instead,
+had fallen asleep. As a result, the half-breeds had
+landed on the island, and were heading for where
+you fellows were swimming. I had endangered
+your lives. What should I do? That was the
+question.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But I didn’t waste must time, puzzling over it.
+I knew I had to give you fellows warning or you
+would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to you as
+loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn’t seen
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_108'></a>108</span>
+me up till then. But when I yelled, they saw me
+quick enough, and several of them opened fire, and——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait a minute, Bob,” Frank interrupted, his eyes
+shining. “They hadn’t seen you, and you could
+have let them pass without attracting their attention,
+but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white
+alley. That’s, that’s—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, forget it,” said Bob, uncomfortably. “You’d
+have done the same. Anyway,” he hurried on, “they
+split up into two groups, and one kept on going,
+while the other rushed me before I could do much
+shooting, and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he
+concluded, lamely.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll say we do,” said Frank, gripping his big
+comrade’s shoulder. “Boy, I’ll never see the like
+of that fight again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead
+of trying to shoot you down,” said Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Search me,” said Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll bet I know,” said Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What?” asked both.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some
+reason of their own. Probably, would have tried to
+take us alive, too, if they’d gotten the chance.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, maybe so,” said Bob. “Anyhow, that’s
+that. Now what shall we do?”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_109'></a>109</span><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a>CHAPTER XIII.—MR. HAMPTON RECALLED.</h2>
+<p>
+Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste
+and even horror in their eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Has to be done, though,” said Jack, as if in
+answer to a remark of Frank’s.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you two chumps talking about?” asked
+Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Those four men we shot down, you know,”
+Frank explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Think you—”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob’s question went uncompleted.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We shot
+straight. It was your life and ours against theirs.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect
+that’s the first thing to be attended to. If any
+of them is no more than wounded, it will be up to us
+to do what we can for him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right, Bob,” said Jack.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_110'></a>110</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on,” Frank said shortly, starting down
+the hillside, in the direction of their successful,
+though impromptu, ambuscade.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Go easy,” warned Bob. “If they’re able to shoot,
+they’ll take a crack at us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob’s advice was followed, and the trio approached
+the spot warily. But precaution was needless,
+or, while still some distance away, they could
+see the four bodies outstretched motionless where
+they had fallen. Frank’s face went white, and he
+shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob, although
+he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip
+on himself, in order to force his laggard steps to
+continue. Though many were the affairs of danger
+in which they had been, the boys had never before
+shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank stopped. He was trembling violently.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob threw an arm over his shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You and Jack stay here,” he ordered, gruffly. “I
+had no hand in this. I’m the fellow to attend to it.
+Wait for me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At that Frank protested, and started to proceed.
+But Bob shoved him back, kindly but firmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The pair of you have been through enough,” he
+said. “Do as I say. Wait here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_111'></a>111</span>
+task, he plunged on through the trees. For a moment
+or two both Frank and Jack watched him fascinatedly,
+then Frank sank down to a sitting position,
+elbows propped on his knees, his face in his hands.
+Jack faced about, and stared unseeing through the
+trees.
+</p>
+<p>
+Presently, Bob’s solid, crunching footsteps could
+be heard approaching, and they looked up. His face
+was grave, but unflinching.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, fellows,” he said, firmly, “may as
+well face the facts. All four were killed instantly.
+Drilled through the—— But why discuss it? The
+fact is, they’re dead. They were rascals of the first
+water, and, as you say, it was their lives or ours.
+Self-preservation is the first law of Nature. Now,
+what are we going to do about it? We haven’t any
+tools to dig with.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank shook himself into alertness.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let’s get the axes—our outfit has some—and cut
+off some spruce boughs and cover them over. Then
+we can roll some stones on top.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As quickly as possible, without speaking during
+the task, and working feverishly, the three carried
+out Frank’s idea. Then, back at camp, they sat
+down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding
+liquid steadied their shaken nerves.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Guess we better try to get in touch with your
+father, Jack,” suggested Bob, at length.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_112'></a>112</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“How long have they been gone?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob looked at his watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Three hours. Seems like a lifetime.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Things have certainly happened fast,” said
+Frank. “Thank goodness, that party missed our
+radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have
+been out of luck.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“More luck than I deserve,” said Bob, savagely.
+“Think of going to sleep on the job. If I had been
+awake, they never would have been able to land.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to
+reproach yourself with.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, that’s nonsense,” said the big fellow. “I’m
+always getting you into trouble.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, let’s try the radio, anyway,” suggested
+Jack. “They’ve been gone three hours. With the
+best of luck they can’t have made more than eight or
+ten miles, considering the detour they planned to
+take, and everything.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Couldn’t have gotten that far away in a straight
+line,” said Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I guess not. But what if they aren’t
+prepared for a call from us?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your
+father will be proceeding fully equipped to hear
+from you,” said Frank. “He need only wear the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_113'></a>113</span>
+headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving
+that he would keep it on most of the time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set,
+spoken of by Frank, had done away with the necessity
+for the umbrella aerial.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters.
+If he gets the message we ought to hear from him
+shortly, for he’ll at once unlimber the field transmitting
+set and call us back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight
+and its outcome, Frank and Bob decided to steady
+their nerves by fishing and went down to the lakeside.
+They had reasonable success and had pulled
+out a number of fish when Jack joined them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Send out your message, Jack?” Frank inquired.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What? Why, great guns, how long have we
+been here? Surely, you can’t have had time to hear
+from your father?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, I have,” affirmed Jack. “You’ve been here
+more than an hour.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that
+time, neither had spoken a word. They had just
+dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional fish.
+Frank laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,”
+he confessed. “Well, what did your father say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They made a long trek up the lake before crossing
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_114'></a>114</span>
+over, and are not very far away—somewhere up
+in that direction—on the other shore, there,” said
+Jack, pointing. “Dad was worried as the deuce at
+my story, and they’re coming back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Coming back? Why? It’s all over now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming
+back, anyway. They’re going to get back to the
+lake, and come straight down to the island. Ought
+to be here in a couple of hours or less.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“May as well wait dinner for them, in that case,”
+observed Bob. “Or what meal is it? Breakfast,
+lunch, or dinner? I’m sure I don’t know. This perpetual
+sunshine has me all turned around. I don’t
+know whether it’s day or night.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Same here,” confessed Frank. “I do know,
+though, that I’m beginning to get up an appetite.”
+Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent daydreaming
+over the fishing lines had driven away for
+the time, crossed his mind, and he paled. “I don’t
+know though”—catching his breath—“whether I’ll
+ever want to eat again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The
+big fellows noted with apprehension the twisted,
+stricken look on their slighter chum’s face, and the
+haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob’s keen
+eyes, moreover, two hectic spots glowing brightly
+in the dark tan of Frank’s cheeks were apparent.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, old man,” said Bob, anxiously, “you
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_115'></a>115</span>
+want to quit thinking about that or you’ll be sick.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sick?” Frank tried to force a laugh. “I’m the
+healthiest invalid ever you saw.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of
+your mind, or you will be sick. Why—”laying a
+hand on his brow—“you’ve got a fever right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack was worried, too.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob’s advice.
+What if you came down sick? We’d be in a pretty
+fix.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Frank, irritatedly.
+“I’m all right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But Bob’s worry was not routed. He took his
+chum by an arm and started marching him toward
+camp.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m going to give you a dose of calomel and
+make you lie down,” he said. “Come on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Calomel? Have a heart.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, calomel,” said Bob, firmly. “That’s what
+you need, that and a nap.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the
+camp, despite Frank’s vehement protests, he was
+made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and then
+to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him
+the little tent belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide
+shade from the northern sun. Jack and Bob sat
+down, some distance away, and started cleaning
+the fish. They talked together in low tones.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_116'></a>116</span>
+Presently, after several glances toward the motionless
+figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On
+his return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but
+overworked Nature was too much for him. I’m a
+little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock.
+But I guess he’ll be all right when he wakes up.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he glanced more keenly at Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look here, you’ve been through the same experience.
+I had a nap. Now you’re going to take
+one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We
+don’t want two sick ones on our hands.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack didn’t protest, but also turned in beside
+Frank, and in a few minutes was sound asleep. As
+Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her dues.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_117'></a>117</span><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a>CHAPTER XIV.—A REVELATION.</h2>
+<p>
+This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job,
+but at the first faint indication that somnolence was
+stealing upon him, arose and stamped about vigorously.
+Once, prompted by a humane inclination,
+he paused by the three prisoners who lay in the
+shade, hands and feet tied, and proffered them a
+drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness
+was totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the
+surprise in their eyes, although no words were exchanged,
+and they drank eagerly in great gulps.
+The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his
+head was in considerable pain because of his
+wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional
+writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by
+loosening his bonds. In addition, he rummaged
+their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment for
+sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the
+twisted member.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You good man,” whispered the other, gazing at
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_118'></a>118</span>
+him, as Bob bent to the task, and speaking in a
+voice barely audible to Bob’s ears, and certainly not
+to the other two men a short distance away. “I tell
+you something—not now—bimeby—when they not
+know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob thought quickly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” he responded, in the same low tone.
+“I’ll fix it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes.” The other nodded. “You fix it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now what in the world has he got to tell me?”
+Bob asked himself, as he moved away. “Probably,
+something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I
+can’t see what else it can be. Was grateful because
+I gentled him a little—after first maltreating him.”
+He smiled at the irony of this thought. “Well, Mr.
+Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there
+will be a chance to question him apart from his
+fellows.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And with that, he dismissed the matter from his
+mind. Jack now rolled over, sat up and came out
+from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued
+sunk in heavy slumber.
+</p>
+<p>
+“By George,” said Bob, looking at his watch,
+“two hours since you started to take your nap.
+Run down to the shore, will you, and take a look
+to see if there is any sign of your father. We
+left these fellows alone once”—nodding to their
+prisoners—“but I felt it wasn’t wise to try it too
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_119'></a>119</span>
+often. Something might happen. So I’ve been
+sticking close to camp.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish
+for me to run down after you, but I just had to tell
+you about hearing from Father.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He set out for the shore.
+</p>
+<p>
+A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give
+a joyful shout. It was answered by a fainter hail
+from the water. Faint though it was, however, it
+was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching.
+</p>
+<p>
+Presently there was a babble of voices approaching,
+and the returning party came into view, Jack
+in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum, with
+MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear.
+Jack was eagerly explaining what had occurred at
+camp since his father’s departure.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hello, Bob,” said Mr. Hampton, coming up,
+and gripping the big fellow’s hand hard. “Had
+some excitement while we were gone?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was
+going to be a loafing assignment you left us on—nothing
+to do but hang around camp and swim and
+fish—and the minute you turn your backs something
+happens.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How’s Frank?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jack told you, did he?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_120'></a>120</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s still asleep,” said Bob. “The necessity of
+shooting to kill was a shock to his nerves. Nature
+took him in hand. See.” He indicated where Frank
+lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival
+of the returning party.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’ll sleep for hours yet,” said Mr. Hampton,
+“if we don’t make too much noise. I’ll caution the
+others. Best medicine in the world for him. He’ll
+be all right when he wakes, I expect.”
+</p>
+<p>
+While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry,
+Bob and Jack, in lowered voices, told the others all
+that had occurred. Bob repeated his condemnation
+of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted
+the enemy to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton
+rested a hand on his shoulder, and told him not to
+be foolish.
+</p>
+<p>
+“In the first place,” he said, “there seemed to be
+no reason why you should keep strict watch. It
+hardly seemed likely these fellows would boldly approach
+the island.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Expect they saw us set out, after all,” suggested
+MacDonald, “and figured the whole party hadn’t
+gone, and that them left behind would be on ’tother
+side of the island, so’s they could land and surprise
+’em.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Nods of agreement followed this statement. It
+was, indeed, the most likely explanation. Over the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_121'></a>121</span>
+puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by those
+attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely
+to make him prisoner, nobody had any suggestion
+to offer other than that earlier advanced by the
+boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take
+them alive.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Reckon Lupo thought he’d get some information
+from you,” said MacDonald.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he wasn’t here,” Bob protested.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, but you can bet they were actin’ on his
+orders.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had
+whispered that he had something to tell him. He
+explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought for
+a moment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here
+and we’ll question them. At the same time, Bob,
+do you slip off and talk to your man. We’ll keep
+the pair occupied, so that they won’t be able to see.
+Tell your man that presently, then, we’ll call him
+up to be questioned, too, and that he’s to pretend
+sullen obstinacy and refuse—in the presence of
+his comrades—to answer any questions.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he
+slipped away in an opposite direction. Executing
+a flank movement through the trees, he presently
+arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got
+behind the tree, against which the man with the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_122'></a>122</span>
+wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid whisper
+he communicated Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the
+other. The fellow comprehended, and then in a low
+tone, scarcely audible to Bob, who strained to hear,
+communicated surprising intelligence.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob heard him out, then with a final word of
+caution, again slipped away, once more skirted camp
+through the trees, and approached the group from
+the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being
+grilled, but without success. At Bob’s approach,
+Mr. Hampton turned again to Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bring that other fellow here,” he commanded.
+“See if he knows any more than these men.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The man was brought into the council, but, acting
+on instructions, maintained an obstinate silence.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, take them away, and feed them,” said Mr.
+Hampton finally, as if despairing of obtaining any
+information. “We’ll talk to them later, after I’ve
+eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t fall to,
+and I’m too hungry to delay with these rascals.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed,
+were returned to the other side of the camp and,
+with their hands untied, were permitted to eat under
+the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once
+more they were tied up.
+</p>
+<p>
+Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob,
+as soon as the trio of prisoners was out of hearing.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_123'></a>123</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Out with it, Bob,” he said. “I can see you’re
+dying to tell us. Must be important.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is,” said Bob, emphatically.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What did he say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Hampton, you think we’re alone in this wilderness
+except for Lupo’s gang?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know who else would be here. This is
+country that white men never get into.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers
+of their party of ten are not more than two hundred
+miles away; perhaps less than that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What! Say that again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped
+his portion of fish into the fire.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this
+fellow, Long Tom, declares. Long Tom—that’s his
+name.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How does he know?”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was MacDonald who asked the question, and
+Bob turned to him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson
+had been attacked before he reached the oil
+country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his
+men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp
+were killed, and Thorwaldsson’s supplies looted.
+He says a big band of Indians committed the outrage.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_124'></a>124</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom.
+He was with them. They wanted the loot. What
+they didn’t understand, they destroyed.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson,”
+said Mr. Hampton, “for his radio equipment
+must have been among ‘the things they didn’t
+understand.’ Go on, Bob.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter
+with the Eskimos up on the rim of the Arctic
+Ocean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where has he been? What became of the Indians?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They were a hunting party, as far as I could
+gather, who, after chasing Thorwaldsson up to the
+Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered
+with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself,
+and this Spring started out. Then he fell in
+with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is
+now? Why does he say Thorwaldsson is so close?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way
+out, who told of Thorwaldsson having wintered
+with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson was on his
+way out down the Coppermine—or up it, whichever
+you choose to call it. Though that was weeks
+ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be following
+watercourses that would put him about one hundred and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_125'></a>125</span>
+fifty or two hundred miles to the northeast
+of us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot,” said Mr.
+Hampton. “Was that everything? Or did Long
+Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He doesn’t know why Lupo is after us, except
+that it has something to do with Thorwaldsson.
+That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty indefinite,
+but it was the best I could do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something
+to go on, indeed.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And to think that old Bob got it all just because
+he was kind to a fellow with a sore arm and put
+some liniment on it,” said Jack.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_126'></a>126</span><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a>CHAPTER XV.—MACDONALD TURNS BACK.</h2>
+<p>
+Taking everything into consideration, Mr.
+Hampton decided that before any further steps were
+taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a good
+rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked
+and confessed to being shaky; even Bob was tired
+from the strain of the terrific fight through which
+he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours
+of exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done
+practically three days’ work with little or no rest
+in the short interval between.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Altogether,” said Mr. Hampton, summing up,
+“we are in no fit condition to set out in immediate
+pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men, nor
+even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be
+that the best plan would be not to pursue Lupo but
+to set off at once to try and find Thorwaldsson. I,
+for one, am too tired even to think straight. So
+I vote that we make camp, set watches and turn in
+for a good rest. I believe I could sleep the clock
+around.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_127'></a>127</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“If you think you can trust me with the first
+watch, Mr. Hampton,” muttered Bob, shamefacedly,
+“I’d like to have it. I’ll promise you not to go
+to sleep on the job again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back
+in kindly fashion, as Bob leaned forward, seated on
+the ground beside him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing
+with which to reproach yourself. Certainly you can
+have the first watch, if you want it. I expect the
+rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity
+to turn in at once. As to there being any further
+danger, however, I very much doubt it. You boys
+have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men
+killed and three prisoners, he must be short-handed.
+If he had only twelve or fourteen, as we believe,
+his number now is less than ours. The consequence
+is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to
+attack us here on the island. However, a watch
+must be kept, so go to it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took
+the first watch and the rest scattered around the
+camp, under the spruces, and soon were sleeping
+soundly. When the time to change watches came,
+with nothing alarming having broken the calm, Bob
+waked MacDonald, and himself turned in. After
+that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and
+was disturbed by nothing until awakened by being
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_128'></a>128</span>
+shaken. He looked up and found Frank bending
+above him, his face alight with merriment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?” demanded
+Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once
+to the picture of Frank as he had last seen him.
+In his voice was a note of thankfulness at finding
+Frank thus carefree, as he said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“How do you feel, old man?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never better,” confessed Frank. “Sleep is certainly
+the right medicine, isn’t it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t I know it!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on, Bob, let’s take a plunge in the channel.
+Just got up myself. It’ll wake us up, make
+us feel good. Everybody’s up now, and Dick fixing
+to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are
+fishing. Mr. Hampton and Farnum are talking
+things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out
+of the feathers, too. The three of us can have a
+fine swim.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they
+set out for the place where Frank and Jack had gone
+in for a plunge before. Without referring to the
+tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of
+the four half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack,
+the boys, as if by common consent, lay their course
+through the trees so as to avoid passing near it.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_129'></a>129</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully
+invigorating, and refreshed and with the young
+blood tingling in their veins, after a long sleep and
+a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought
+voracious appetites with them, but fortunately the
+fishermen had pulled in a big haul of beauties, and
+these, together with flapjacks made by that skillful
+chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like
+none ever made in city restaurants, the whole having
+the tang of the outdoors and woodland smoke for
+sauce, made a delectable repast.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now,” said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion,
+“now for a discussion of what’s to be done.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation.
+Lupo with five or six men at most was still at large.
+He might have turned back. He might be in hiding
+nearby. He might have gone on ahead in
+search of Thorwaldsson. In any case, Mr. Hampton
+declared, he felt it would be a waste of time to
+search for him in view of the fact that they had
+learned Thorwaldsson was somewhere to the north
+and east and their primary object was to join forces
+with that explorer. He wanted to know what the
+others had to say.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum, who had been talking matters over with
+Mr. Hampton, sat silent, nodding approval. The
+other was stating his own views. But MacDonald
+voiced a protest.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_130'></a>130</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“From your point of view, sir,” he said, “I reckon
+you’re right. But am I to let Lupo escape now that
+I come so close to gettin’ him? And what am I to
+do with three prisoners on my hands?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ve been turning that phase of the situation over
+and over,” said Mr. Hampton. “I cannot see that
+we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo, now
+that we have pretty definite information through that
+fellow, Long Tom, of Thorwaldsson’s presence
+alive and with some of his men in this wilderness.
+I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the
+chase, but it can’t be helped. You have three prisoners,
+and can’t very well watch them and pursue
+Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member
+of the Mounted you must take them in. We can’t
+leave you to handle them alone, however, and——”
+</p>
+<p>
+He paused.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what, sir,” prompted MacDonald.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to
+leave one of our number with you. That will enable
+you to keep guard against surprise, watch over
+your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from
+your Post. We’ll wireless your Captain Jameson
+full details of all that has occurred, give him your
+position here, and then you can wait for relief.”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent
+several minutes, while none spoke, but all watched
+him expectantly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_131'></a>131</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“If you won’t help me try and round up Lupo,
+you won’t, and that’s all there is to it,” he said, finally.
+“Not as I blame you, neither. You got your
+job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With
+only a handful o’ men he may be in trouble, too.
+Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin you fellows
+sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he’d likely
+be after Thorwaldsson, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I’m afraid of,” he said, “that Thorwaldsson
+may need our aid.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just so,” continued MacDonald. “Such bein’
+the case, your best plan is to try and find him soon
+as you can.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you agree to my plan?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me
+a man, hey?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why—I——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Give me this feller,” said MacDonald, laying a
+hand on Bob who sat beside him. “He’s a fighter.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I couldn’t do that, MacDonald. The boys must
+come with me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right. Only that fight he put up—that was
+a good one. Kind o’ wished I could have him by
+me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin see
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_132'></a>132</span>
+he’s used to big woods and river country. He’d
+make a good Mounty.”
+</p>
+<p>
+This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his
+pipe at Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you say, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton.
+“It’s up to you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their
+Post, wouldn’t I? Probably have to winter there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Get you a job on the Force,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick’s eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was,
+he was alone in life, loved the wilderness, and still
+thrilled to adventure.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That so?” he asked. “Need men?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Always room for a good one.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right. It’s a go,” said Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then
+turned again to Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Such being the case,” he said, “when you talk
+to Captain Jameson over that there contraption, just
+tell him I’m on my way in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with
+three no-account breeds on our hands and wait for
+help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No.
+We’ll take ’em in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners
+on your hands!”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_133'></a>133</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed.
+Never thought of calling for help except
+I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of his
+gang.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to
+Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how about you, Dick?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“If MacDonald says so, I’m game.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s
+settled. Now call Captain Jameson, and let’s get
+goin’. You want to be on your way, and we may
+as well be on ours.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton, trying one
+last protest, “suppose Lupo and the remainder of
+his gang see you start, and follow and attack you.
+What then?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes snapped. “Couldn’t
+ask for no better luck. I’d get a shot at him then.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum interrupted at this stage.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s no use trying to stop him and Dick,” he
+said. “I know Dick and I know these men of the
+Mounted. They’re holy terrors. And the pair of
+them will get away with it, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and
+abandoned his protests. Captain Jameson once more
+was called by wireless, and given a full account of
+what had occurred. He approved MacDonald’s
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_134'></a>134</span>
+scheme and promised there would be a position on
+the Force for Dick when he arrived.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements
+were made for departure, and he led
+him aside, “I’ve been pleased, indeed, with your
+ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to
+part company with you. Here is a check for the
+full sum I promised you for this Summer’s work.
+And here in addition is something to remember
+me by.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Into Dick’s unwilling hand he pressed a handsome
+gold watch which he himself had worn for
+some years.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough
+fellow like me to carry,” protested Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now, now, nonsense,” said Mr. Hampton.
+“Nothing is too good for you, old man. I want you
+to keep that to remember me by.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” said Dick
+gruffly, sticking it in his pocket nevertheless.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_135'></a>135</span><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a>CHAPTER XVI.—REINDEER SIGHTED.</h2>
+<p>
+The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured
+from the Indians was turned over to MacDonald.
+It was easily capable of transporting five—the three
+prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter
+in the bow and stern respectively, and the prisoners
+unarmed between, there was little danger so
+long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable
+watchfulness. Two of the half-breeds were cowed
+and broken in spirit, moreover, while Long Tom
+was <em>hors de combat</em> on account of the injury to his
+arm, and would be for some time to come. MacDonald’s
+skin kayak was to be towed behind, containing
+his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners
+could carry the whole business alone at portages.
+</p>
+<p>
+MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable
+stream flowing into it from the southwest, and
+not the stream down which the Hampton party had
+come. He set out for this other stream before the
+others quit the island, with the intention of retracing
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_136'></a>136</span>
+his steps into the wilderness in large measure.
+This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the
+south, he said, was a large river which could be
+reached by a ten-mile portage, and down which
+they could travel for many miles.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said
+to Bob, to whom he had taken a great fancy, “let
+me know. I’ll fix it for you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered
+by the sincere compliment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I may take you up on that some day,” he said.
+“Who knows?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes
+were said, and the craft shot away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There go a couple of good men,” commented
+Farnum, as under the powerful strokes of the paddles
+the canoe drew swiftly down the lake.
+</p>
+<p>
+“One good man, anyhow,” said Art, who overheard
+the observation. “Ol’ Dick an’ me had a li’l
+talk. I’m going to join up with the Mounted, too,
+when we git back. We been pals fifteen year.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Fifteen years,” exclaimed Frank. “In the wilderness
+all that time?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating
+canoe.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure,” said Art. “It’s home to us. Ain’t no
+wilderness. Cities is the real wilderness. Dick an’
+me’s been separated now and then, like now, but we
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_137'></a>137</span>
+always come together agin. I expect when we git
+to be old men like some prospectors I seen we’ll be
+together all the time, fightin’ and jawin’ each other,
+but ready to tear the heart out o’ anybody that
+jumps one of us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald
+like he did, in that case,” said Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we’d
+meet agin.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself
+with the outfit.
+</p>
+<p>
+Presently everything was in readiness for departure
+and then the two remaining canoes, with the
+outfit distributed between them, the three boys in
+one and the three men in the other, started up the
+lake in the opposite direction from that taken by
+MacDonald and Dick. Previously, when in pursuit
+of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was
+of so considerable extent that, despite their hours
+of travel up the side, they had been unable to discern
+the farther end. In fact, the lake broadened
+out considerably some distance beyond the island.
+It was his intention, inasmuch as it followed the
+general northeastward direction they would pursue,
+to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there
+would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently
+large to float their canoes.
+</p>
+<p>
+In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_138'></a>138</span>
+of steady paddling, they discerned the outlet of a
+stream of considerable width, quartered across the
+lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called
+to his father, in surprise:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the
+lake; not into it. Do you notice?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It certainly does, Jack,” said his father. “What
+do you make of it, Farnum?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter shook his head, puzzled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” he said. “You must remember
+this is unexplored country. We’re liable to find
+anything here. But, maybe——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know. We’re near the Coppermine,
+aren’t we, Art?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Figure we must be.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art approved. “The waters
+of that lake empty into the Coppermine. Yes, sir;
+I’ll bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes travel
+easy for awhile, anyhow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine
+incidents such as the occasional shooting of wild duck
+Or geese, brought the party at camping time at the
+end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_139'></a>139</span>
+prairie between two low-wooded hills. Here it was
+decided to make camp.
+</p>
+<p>
+After the evening meal was over, and while Mr.
+Hampton, who was feeling out of sorts, retired to
+his little tent to try and sleep without taking part
+in the usual desultory conversation about the fire—which
+was kept going for the companionship and
+cheer it imparted and not from any need of warmth
+you may be sure—Jack arose and stretched.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe
+all day,” he said. “I want to stretch them a bit.
+Who’ll come with me to the top of that nearest hill?
+The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable
+view.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany
+him. Farnum sat, smoking his pipe and staring into
+the fire absently. He didn’t care to go. But Art
+arose and joined the party. It was not far to the
+top of the hill, although a stiff climb through the
+trees and brush. The crest, however, was bare of
+timber.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to
+reach the top, stood struck with amazement. He
+turned to beckon the others forward with one hand,
+while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture
+enjoining silence.
+</p>
+<p>
+“For the love o’ Pete,” whispered Art, eyes bulging,
+as he stood beside Frank and peered down into
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_140'></a>140</span>
+the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with young
+willows.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are they caribou?” asked Jack, low-voiced.
+“They don’t look like the caribou we’ve run across
+along the streams.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They ain’t, neither,” said Art. “They’re reindeer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Must be Santy Claus’s,” chuckled Bob. “Always
+did believe there was something to that story about
+the old boy living up here near the North Pole, even
+though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now
+I know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown.
+Some o’ these are white, some brown, and some
+spotted. Then they ain’t the size o’ caribou. Besides,
+I know they’re reindeer. I see ’em often
+enough in Alaska to know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Art nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look at ’em. They’re tame. Must’a winded us,
+but that don’t scare ’em none. They’re used to
+humans. No more scared o’ bein’ hunted than cattle
+are back in the States.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tame?” queried Frank. “What do you mean?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one,
+of this Far North, but the regular ones that come
+in touch with the white man, they keep herds o’ reindeer
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_141'></a>141</span>
+just like a farmer in the States keeps cows.
+Look at ’em. Must be two-three hundred there
+right now. They’re eight-ten hundred miles from
+home, too. Must ’a wandered away. Bet you there’s
+a desprit Eskimo lookin’ for ’em right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack looked thoughtful.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like
+that,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir,” affirmed Art emphatically. “Must be
+six-seven thousand dollars worth o’ tame reindeer
+there. Pretty tough.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can’t do anything about it, though,” said
+Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Seems a pity-like we can’t ride herd on ’em till
+some Eskimo shows up to claim ’em,” said Art. “But
+it can’t be done. Yore father, Jack, is all for pushin’
+on fast as we kin.”
+</p>
+<p>
+After some further discussion, the party retraced
+its steps, with Art explaining to the boys the big
+difference existing between the semi-civilized
+Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of
+the wild Eskimos of the Arctic.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Folks think Alaska’s right up next to the North
+Pole,” he said. “Leastways folks in the States do.
+People comin’ to Nome from the States every so
+often give me that knowledge. But they’re shore
+mistaken. Alaska’s great country that’ll be settled
+up some day. Shore, we got hard Winters. But
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_142'></a>142</span>
+boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin’ all the
+time, everything grows just three times as fast as
+in the States. My Pap was a farmer back in York
+State, an’ I was raised on a farm. We had hard
+scratchin’ an’ our Winters was long an’ hard, too.
+An’ we didn’t have Summers like in Alaska to
+make up for ’em. I’ll bet if my Pap were livin’
+today an’ farmin’ in Alaska he’d find life a lot easier
+than what we had it on the old farm.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?”
+asked Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I don’t know. Hard to get to, for one thing.
+Ain’t developed up with railroads, neither. Some
+day, though, you’ll see ’em forced to come here, the
+way they’re a-crowdin’ up down in the States. Why,
+we got only 60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she’s
+quarter as big as the States an’ could darn near
+feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and
+farmed right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Art, why don’t you go to farming? I’d think
+that would be the thing for you to do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mebbe I will some day,” said Art. “But I’m
+an old batch. Got no wife, an’ kind o’ like to feel
+free to knock around instead o’ bein’ tied to one
+place.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize.
+They were young, with life ahead of them,
+and they wanted to see the world. In fact they
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_143'></a>143</span>
+had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have
+followed them through their various adventures,
+know. Of this they spoke as they made their way
+back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready
+to turn in, and merely awaiting their return before
+doing so. Since their first encounter with Lupo,
+and their discovery that they were not alone in the
+wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum
+had combatted sleepiness in order to keep guard
+until their return.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Art, you’ve got the first watch,” he said, when
+they appeared. “The rest of you better turn in,
+and not sit up talking. With luck we ought to
+make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then
+we’ll do some traveling. We’ve got to hit a fast
+pace from now on, for already we are having real
+twilight, and pretty soon we’ll be having short
+nights while the sun dips entirely below the horizon.
+That means the season is growing short, and we
+have not got much time left before we’ll have to
+start for the outside.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed
+Farnum’s example shortly, but Frank, who
+did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to talk, sat
+up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling
+him of some of their previous adventures.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_144'></a>144</span>
+not disturb the nearby sleepers, Frank noticed Art
+was not paying attention, and stopped.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, well,” he said, half petulantly, “if I’m boring
+you——”
+</p>
+<p>
+Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sorry, Frank,” he said, in a whisper, “but I was
+a-listenin.’ I got a strange feelin’ like as if somebody
+had his eyes on the back a’ my head. I
+wasn’t payin’ no attention to you but a-listenin’ to
+see if I could hear anything.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He was so intense that he communicated some
+of his trepidation to Frank. Instinctively, the
+latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up
+to peer at their twilit surroundings. They were
+camped in a tiny grove of a half dozen spruces, like
+an islet in a midst of long, matted grass.
+</p>
+<p>
+As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering
+the stillness. He threw himself prone, dragging
+Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was
+poured in on them, seemingly from all sides.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_145'></a>145</span><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a>CHAPTER XVII.—SURPRISED.</h2>
+<p>
+“Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind
+that nearest tree and let ’em have it. They’re in
+that long grass.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward
+to a position behind the trunk of one of the
+spruces, began firing rapidly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots
+into the long grass. He had an uncanny feeling,
+for he could see no forms at which to fire, and the
+preliminary volley poured into the camp was not
+repeated, so he had no index as to the enemy
+positions.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened
+by the shots, but Frank called fiercely: “Keep
+down.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Realizing something of the situation, the three
+grabbed their rifles, laying by their sides, and,
+keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as they could
+see something at which to aim.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_146'></a>146</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later.
+He had been sleeping hard, and had not awakened
+instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull ache
+gripped his head, preventing him from thinking
+clearly and from comprehending instantly what was
+occurring. He lay a moment, wondering what had
+awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and
+Art had ceased firing to await some sign from the
+unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton decided to peer out
+and investigate what had disturbed him. He
+crawled from his dog tent and stood up.
+</p>
+<p>
+At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once
+more from the long grass surrounding the tiny
+grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made
+an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton
+fell heavily to the ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication
+that the leader had been hit. Jack leaped up regardless
+of consequences and ran to his father,
+dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped
+around him. Bob ran to his assistance. To the
+hidden enemy it must have seemed as if their opponents
+were demoralized. At any rate, they grew
+more courageous, and started a rush.
+</p>
+<p>
+From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming
+men only partially seen as they crouched
+low and darted through the grass. But the long
+stems waving above them marked their paths, and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_147'></a>147</span>
+there were three still on watch who would have to
+be dealt with.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving
+grass indicated the enemy. Each guarded a
+side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the
+stream.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait’ll they’re close, fellows, then give it to ’em,”
+cautioned Farnum. “Ready. Let’s go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from
+the long grass came howls and shrieks of pain and
+terror. What followed was brief but lively. Each
+of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and
+the bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as
+if sprayed from the throat of a machine gun. The
+return fire was heavy but high, whipping through
+the branches of the spruce trees overhead.
+</p>
+<p>
+Reinforcements added to the strength of the
+defenders, for Bob darted out of the tent, crouched
+over, and flung himself beside Frank, beginning to
+shoot even as he talked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle,” he said.
+“Bullet creased his head and stunted him. He’ll be
+all right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass,
+feared to advance farther in the face of that fire.
+The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the attackers
+had come to a halt. But they did not retreat.
+The menace was still there.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_148'></a>148</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Anybody hit?” Farnum called out.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not me,” said Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor me,” answered Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank our lucky stars for that,” answered
+Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions,
+but close enough to each other to make communication
+in ordinary tones possible. Relieved to
+discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets
+that had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired
+anxiously after Mr. Hampton, and Bob answered he
+had been only stunned.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang,”
+Farnum remarked. “But he must have had more
+men than we expected, or he wouldn’t be attacking
+us like this.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’ll we do?” growled Art. “Looks like they
+got us penned in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, but we stopped their rush,” protested Frank.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Art, “but they ain’t beatin’ it as I
+can see. An’ when we want to up an’ leave camp,
+what’s goin’ to happen?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was
+beside him, pointed with his rifle toward the gap
+between the two hills, from the top of one of which
+they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next
+valley.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_149'></a>149</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look there, Frank,” he exclaimed excitedly.
+“What do you make of that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where? I don’t——Oh, yes; now I see. Something
+moving.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure is something moving,” Bob said.
+</p>
+<p>
+Already the short twilight was beginning to
+lighten, as the sun after its dip to the edge of the
+northern horizon now swung higher.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I believe that’s the reindeer herd.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we
+saw when we were up there on the hill top?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how in the world?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, I noticed that the other valley swung
+around between those two little hills. The reindeer
+are just grazing along, hunting new pasture. And,
+say, Bob!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, what now?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ve got a bully idea.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face
+Art on his right, who was keeping watch against
+surprise on his side of the little clump of trees
+sheltering them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Art,” said he, “look over there, between those
+two little hills. Are those reindeer? The reindeer
+we saw from the hilltop?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_150'></a>150</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Reckon so,” said Art, after a critical inspection.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like
+cattle, I mean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Reckon so. Why?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I’m going to try it,” Frank declared in a
+determined tone. Still prone, he began to wriggle
+out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs, to unlace
+his boots and kick them off.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you crazy, Frank?” Bob demanded, puzzled,
+while Art and Farnum took their eyes from the
+coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Crazy? No more than usual,” Frank replied, as
+he completed disrobing, and now lay naked under
+the spreading branches of the spruce. “But I’m
+going to slip into the water and float down to that
+hill, then get in behind the reindeer and stampede
+them. You see what’ll happen then, don’t you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning
+comprehension crept into his eyes, and he began
+to smile. Then he chuckled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You little hound,” he said, employing a pet expression
+among the boys, denoting admiration.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, say, what’s the idea?” demanded Art
+sharply, from his position several yards away.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank had started wriggling forward, and
+waited until he was close to Art and Farnum before
+replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he
+intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_151'></a>151</span>
+herd of reindeer, when he would land and
+attempt to stampede them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see how it is,” he said. “You yourselves
+admit that we’re in a tight place. Lupo’s forces
+have cover in that long grass, and can wait us out.
+Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us.
+The minute we get up and start to move around,
+we expose ourselves. Therefore, the best thing to
+do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn’t it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure,” said Art. “But how you going to do it
+with——”
+</p>
+<p>
+He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive
+their enemies from cover by stampeding the reindeer,
+but Frank grinned at him, and he paused. Dawning
+comprehension came into his eyes, too.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you get my idea.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from
+the center, but who had overheard the conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer
+come dashing down, Lupo’s men will have to
+run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding
+herd isn’t anything to monkey with, I expect. Then
+you’ll have your chance. But the reindeer won’t
+dash in among these few close-set trees, so you’ll
+be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they’ll just head
+right on past here and try to get through the hills
+beyond.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_152'></a>152</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum’s glance approved.
+</p>
+<p>
+“A fine idea,” he said, but then he added in a
+tone of doubt: “I don’t know as I ought to let you
+go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn’t like it, maybe,
+putting yourself into danger like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, nonsense,” said Frank. “I can slip unseen
+into the water. And I can swim like a seal. Ask
+Bob.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And at once, to prevent any interruption of his
+plans, he resumed worming his way to the bank
+of the river.
+</p>
+<p>
+The river ran at this point between six-foot banks,
+and the clump of trees in which camp was situated
+stood so close to the water that the roots of several
+projected through the soil of the land. Frank had
+little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt
+sure that he accomplished the feat unseen by the
+enemy. He let himself into the stream, which was
+of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him
+to float downstream under the protection of the high
+bank, without the necessity of wading out to get to
+deeper water.
+</p>
+<p>
+“For God’s sake, be careful, boy,” whispered Farnum,
+as Frank disappeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long
+knife. He had not figured out how he would set
+about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that
+to chance. What concerned him now was to get to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_153'></a>153</span>
+a position behind the herd without discovery. He
+stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes roving along
+the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the
+enemy.
+</p>
+<p>
+None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it
+was hardly likely that any of the enemy lay in hiding
+here, as none of the shots fired at them had come
+from so close to the river. On the contrary, the
+enemy lay inland, showing they had come upon the
+camp from the landward side. Becoming bolder,
+therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming
+strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He
+felt for it several times, to reassure himself it was
+there and had not fallen out.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was
+the one athletic sport at which he excelled both Bob
+and Jack, although they, too, were excellent swimmers.
+It did not take him long, therefore, aided by
+the current, to come abreast of the trees clothing the
+first of the two hills between which the reindeer had
+entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly down
+to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how
+trees clothed it entirely, even dipping into the stream.
+When he had passed, as he believed, beyond a point
+at which there was any possibility of his being seen,
+he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself
+ashore. Then, after climbing a short distance
+up the hill, he began working his way around it
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_154'></a>154</span>
+through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside
+facing the valley where were his friends in the
+distant clump of trees, and the enemy hidden in the
+long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They
+were only a short distance from him, and Frank
+hurried forward at the best pace he could command.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_155'></a>155</span><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XVIII.—THE STAMPEDE.</h2>
+<p>
+For the first time since starting on his wild project,
+a doubt as to its success entered Frank’s mind. But
+he put it resolutely aside as he sped forward,
+crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined
+to make the best speed possible. His companions
+were in a ticklish situation. He wanted to
+do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible.
+As to his own danger, he gave it not a thought.
+</p>
+<p>
+What worried Frank was the possibility that he
+would be unable to stampede the reindeer herd.
+This was the thought which he put aside. But it
+kept recurring. And when he had come into position
+behind the herd, and saw them feeding quietly
+below him, not a stone’s throw away, at the foot of
+the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy
+plain began, he was still without an idea as to
+what to do.
+</p>
+<p>
+Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_156'></a>156</span>
+might set them into motion and stampede them forward.
+But doubt as to the workability of that method
+had seized him as he first climbed from the water
+and, from among the trees, obtained his first view
+of the herd. The animals, grazing quietly, were
+so well spread out that he feared stoning them would
+not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered
+to himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock
+lying about. Collecting a heap of these, he began
+pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown and
+white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the
+startled animal, struck on the flank, snorted, tossed
+her head and gave a little jump. She went forward
+only a step or two, however, and then settled down
+to grazing again.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone
+caught her on the side of the neck. She tossed her
+head angrily, and sidled forward again. The movement
+brought her sharply into contact with another
+cow, and for a moment Frank was filled with hope
+that the pair would start fighting and alarm the rest
+of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow
+sheered away from the other, and both resumed
+grazing.
+</p>
+<p>
+What should he do now? Frank was perplexed.
+He had already considered the possibility of startling
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_157'></a>157</span>
+the reindeer by shouting at them, but had given up
+that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy
+in the grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them
+to know nothing of the menace in their rear until
+the stampeded herd should sweep down upon them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wonder——” he said, muttering the words for
+the comfort of hearing his own voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they
+were tame reindeer, accustomed to the presence of
+man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his natural
+state. And of Eskimos at that—men dressed a
+good deal differently from the way in which he ordinarily
+clothed himself. What would those reindeer
+think if they saw a naked, white body dash down
+upon them suddenly?
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And
+it will work, too, I’ll bet.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked
+around and selected a tough branch the thickness
+of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from it the
+projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip.
+</p>
+<p>
+Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming
+and determined, Frank made his way to the edge
+of the trees, and then stole out into the long grass,
+crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to
+see him until he was upon them, and as they were
+grazing away from him, this was not so difficult.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_158'></a>158</span>
+In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of
+cows before one swung about and looked at him.
+</p>
+<p>
+The minute that occurred, Frank realized there
+was no longer any possibility of concealment, and
+that the time had come to strike. And strike he did.
+Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging
+his whip so that it sank through the air.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the
+flank of the nearest reindeer, Frank swung it around
+on all sides. Every swing landed. The swish as
+the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded
+him oddly of the sound of a stick beating rugs at
+home. Many a time he had heard that same thud-thud
+from behind his house.
+</p>
+<p>
+Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him,
+for he felt that if no sound indicating that he was
+human came from him, the consternation of the reindeer
+would be increased.
+</p>
+<p>
+And that he had not miscalculated became at once
+apparent, for the reindeer near him lifted up their
+sharp little hooves and sprang to get out of the vicinity
+of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally,
+to escape him, there was only one way for them to
+go, and that was forward, so forward they went.
+Right into the main body of the herd they dashed,
+with Frank prancing and bounding behind them,
+with each leap bringing his whip down upon the
+flank of a laggard.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_159'></a>159</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest,
+dashed by so close on his right as to brush Frank.
+He was not being charged. The animal was panicky,
+and merely seeking to escape. But he had to
+leap nimbly aside to avoid being bowled over. And
+as he leaped, the long knife clutched in his hand
+pricked the animal’s flank.
+</p>
+<p>
+The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken
+cry, and launched itself forward like a thunderbolt
+into the midst of the disturbed herd. That, apparently,
+was all that was needed to complete the
+impending panic. Frank’s inexperienced eye could
+not have told the composition of the herd, but Art,
+when they had first caught sight of the reindeer
+from the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were
+cows, and the bucks numbered only a handful. If
+any buck had a masculine curiosity to discover what
+this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like
+and yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the
+chance to gratify it. For the now thoroughly
+frightened cows started forward in a rush that
+would have overborne any animal foolish enough to
+try to stem it.
+</p>
+<p>
+And then Frank did what might have been considered
+a foolish thing. Carried away by the enthusiasm
+engendered by seeing his plan to stampede
+the herd work out successfully, he continued to
+bound along behind, at first able to whip the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_160'></a>160</span>
+bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling hopelessly
+behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward
+like the wind.
+</p>
+<p>
+Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering
+Frank’s friends dashed the reindeer. And an exultant
+throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy
+lay in the long grass between the herd and the
+trees, and inevitably, therefore, the stampeding animals
+would drive them out.
+</p>
+<p>
+Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued
+on his way, running as fast as the nature of the
+ground permitted. The herd beat the long grass
+flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had
+been pressed down on all, and the going was easier
+than he had looked for.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a
+little wisp of smoke showed the young fellow the
+discharge came from the trees. His own friends
+were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill
+swept over him. He felt certain his friends were
+firing at the enemy, and that the stampeding herd
+was driving the latter ahead of it, although because
+of the presence of the animals between himself and
+the enemy he could not see whether such was the
+case.
+</p>
+<p>
+That Frank’s surmise was correct, however, was
+soon borne out. For the first shots fired from the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_161'></a>161</span>
+trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that told him
+everybody was in action.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed
+with shouts and cries, and Frank, pausing a
+moment to peer ahead and listen came to the conclusion
+that the enemy was desperately shooting at
+the reindeer in an effort to turn the herd aside. If
+that was the case, however, their efforts were unsuccessful,
+for the animals filled with the unreasoning
+spirit of panic did not swerve from their course.
+</p>
+<p>
+“By golly,” Frank exclaimed aloud, “I believe
+I can reach camp all right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And once more he began to run forward. For it
+seemed to him that the herd, sweeping the enemy
+before it, would leave the ground free for him to
+reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends.
+</p>
+<p>
+On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the
+beaten down grass behind it. His eyes were strained
+towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as
+he came closer and made out the outline of Mr.
+Hampton’s tent. He paid no attention to his surroundings.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then a form rose up from the long grass beside
+the swathe beaten down by the reindeer, there was
+a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a buzzing
+in his ears, and lost consciousness.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_162'></a>162</span><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a>CHAPTER XIX.—LUPO’S END.</h2>
+<p>
+When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a
+blanket in camp and the sight of Bob and Jack bending
+anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hello,” he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a
+sharp stab of pain passed through his shoulder.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t move, Frank, We’ll have you fixed up
+right in a minute,” said Mr. Hampton soothingly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is it bad, Dad,” Jack anxiously inquired.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, putting
+the finishing touches to the bandage, and
+straightening up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be all
+right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What happened to me?” asked Frank, struggling
+to a sitting position, and finding his right arm
+bound across his chest.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bullet through your shoulder brought you
+down,” said Mr. Hampton. “And your head struck
+a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked
+out.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_163'></a>163</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me?
+I was dashing along, yelling to attract your attention,
+and never knew what hit me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you didn’t,” said Jack. “If it hadn’t
+been for Art, you might have been finished. But
+he shot down the fellow that winged you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn’t
+an enemy in sight and carried you in,” said Art, as
+he saw Frank about to thank him. “Give your
+gratitude to them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess I owe it to you all,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd
+so closely, Frank,” said Mr. Hampton, reprovingly.
+“Unarmed, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I was stampeding ’em, Mr. Hampton,”
+said Frank. “I couldn’t do that, you know, without
+being there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The older man shook his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have
+let you take that chance,” he said. “No, Farnum,”
+he hastened to add, “I’m not criticizing you. When
+these boys take it in their heads to do something it’s
+hard to head them off. However, it all turned out
+for the best.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my
+scheme work out?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Couldn’t have been better, old thing,” said Bob.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_164'></a>164</span>
+“Lupo’s men ran like rabbits when those reindeer
+swept down on them. They tried a few shots in
+an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness
+of their efforts, turned and ran. We gave them
+a few shots to help them on their way. We counted
+nine.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And they got away?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All but the man Art shot,” said Jack. “The fellow
+who shot at you. And you haven’t heard who
+he was.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack’s eyes were bright. Frank looked at him
+questioningly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Jack. “It was Lupo himself. Art
+wounded him in the chest. He died before we
+could do anything for him. But Dad got some information
+from him first.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton’s face
+was both grim and sad.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We learned who set these
+men on us, and who plotted against Thorwaldsson.
+But let us not discuss it now. It’s bad business all
+the way through.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with
+him, and the two fell into a low-toned discussion.
+Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume
+his clothing which still lay where he had discarded
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_165'></a>165</span>
+it before taking to the river. Art busied himself at
+packing up the camp equipment.
+</p>
+<p>
+Presently, the two older men called Art to them
+and, after a few words of discussion, rejoined the
+boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Boys,” said Mr. Hampton, “we want your
+opinions on this, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“On what, Dad?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away
+from the reindeer, and we accounted for Lupo. That
+makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there were
+more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out
+there in the grass may be one or more badly
+wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time or
+another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there
+are any such, we can’t go off and leave them there
+to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They’re not dogs,” muttered Farnum, bitterly.
+“They’re wolves.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too
+great a risk,” Mr. Hampton continued. “He says
+that if we go out to search for wounded, we are
+likely to be shot for our pains.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you
+were going to help,” protested Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t know them,” said Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, just the same,” said Jack, “I think Dad is
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_166'></a>166</span>
+right. It would be shameful for us to go away without
+investigating.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’d feel like a murderer,” said Bob. “Shooting
+’em down in a fight is one thing. It was their lives
+or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die in the
+wilderness is something entirely different.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum made a gesture of surrender.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess I seem hard-hearted,” he said. “But you
+don’t know what I’ve been through in the past. All
+right, we’ll make a search. But I warn you to be
+on guard.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hardly likely after all that there are any
+wounded out there,” remarked Frank, taking part
+in the discussion for the first time. “They must
+have been in hiding right in the path of the
+reindeer, and you can’t see any forms there now. If
+there were any too badly wounded to escape, they’d
+also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves
+to the side.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The grass is so beaten down, too,” he said, “that
+if there were anybody out there, we could see him.
+However, I cannot rest easy without making a
+search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and
+keep watch. The rest of us will take care of the
+search.”
+</p>
+<p>
+To this the boys made no objection. As a matter
+of fact, it was one time that exclusion from activity
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_167'></a>167</span>
+did not irritate them. They had no stomach for
+what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially,
+thinking of the terrible affair on the island in the
+lake, kept silence. Bob protested, but more as a
+matter of form and because he considered manliness
+demanded it, than otherwise.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It
+has to be done, however. But I certainly don’t want
+you boys along.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands
+for use in case of emergency, set out, while the boys
+watched from the trees. Keeping close together,
+they quartered the plain, going far beyond the
+beaten down stretch of grass left by the passing of
+the reindeer herd. Presently, the boys saw them
+return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, thank goodness, that’s over.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton’s spirits were considerably higher
+on his return, as the boys could see by his features.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we made
+a thorough search, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“More thorough than there was need for,” said
+Farnum, grumpily.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into
+the wilderness, where men are thrown into intimate
+contact every hour of the day and night, they get to
+know each other better than would be the case
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_168'></a>168</span>
+through a lifetime of association under ordinary
+circumstances. It was so here. Mr. Hampton had
+come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the
+latter’s bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the
+easterner knew there was some good reason. He
+sensed a tragedy in Farnum’s past, about which, perhaps,
+the other would some day speak in a moment
+of confidence. And he forgave the man’s seeming
+brutality accordingly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, everybody,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerily.
+“Let’s pack up and be on our way.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Thanks to Art’s previous preparations, the business
+of breaking camp was speedily concluded, and
+the party embarked in the canoes and once more got
+under way. Farnum and Art both considered that,
+because of Frank’s wounded shoulder and his inability
+to paddle, Art should take his place in the
+canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr.
+Hampton and Farnum. But to this arrangement the
+boys protested vigorously, and Mr. Hampton settled
+the matter by supporting them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists,” he said.
+“They have given plenty of evidence of that on this
+trip, and at home they are always in the water when
+they aren’t flying. No, let Frank stay with them.
+They don’t like to be separated.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_169'></a>169</span><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a>CHAPTER XX.—IN THE FOG.</h2>
+<p>
+Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed,
+corresponding in time to the passage of a day,
+although there was nothing to mark the lapse except
+the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension
+of the sun. Camp was pitched on an
+island in the stream which was small and compact
+and could be easily defended in case attack on them
+was renewed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton
+felt there was little danger. With Lupo gone, the
+rascals composing his party would no longer be held
+to their purpose, and start to make their way out of
+the wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts.
+</p>
+<p>
+When travel was resumed after an undisturbed
+camp, everybody felt rested and in a more cheerful
+frame of mind.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon,”
+Farnum exclaimed, as they set out.
+</p>
+<p>
+His words were prophetic, because at the end of
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_170'></a>170</span>
+two hours, on rounding a bend, they discerned not
+far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which
+emptied the stream they had been following.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The Coppermine beyond a doubt,” said Farnum.
+</p>
+<p>
+In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed.
+And, before long, all question of doubt was conclusively
+settled by the discovery of great rocks of
+a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were
+the copper deposits from which the river took its
+name.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sometime, when the transportation problem has
+been solved, this region will be supplying copper to
+the world,” Mr. Hampton observed.
+</p>
+<p>
+The canoe containing the boys was close alongside,
+as the older men had let their paddles swing
+idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why can’t it be taken out now, Dad?” asked
+Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Because,” explained Mr. Hampton, “the only
+method would be by ship through the Arctic, and
+even in the short Summer that is a passage often
+blocked by ice. No, development of the copper
+resources of this wilderness, as well as of the oil we
+hope to find, will have to wait on the building of a
+railroad.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But ice and snow will block the railroad.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not nearly to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton
+said. “Throughout the Summer, such a road could
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_171'></a>171</span>
+be in continuous operation. Even in Winter, with
+properly designed equipment, the road could be kept
+open—perhaps. That, however, is doubtful, for of
+the continuous severity of Winter here you boys
+can have no conception.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll get some
+idea of it, all right,” said Farnum, grimly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean we’ll be caught by Winter before we
+can get out?” asked Mr. Hampton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“When the old North Pole starts sliding south,
+she slides fast,” said Farnum, sententiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter,
+all dug their paddles into the stream with renewed
+vigor, and the two canoes swept on between
+the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour.
+</p>
+<p>
+That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness
+in the air to which the party was not accustomed.
+Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys worked at
+building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither
+he indicated.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The moon,” he said. “Sure sign the season’s
+getting late. That’s the first time you could see it
+real good.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How late in the Summer is it, anyway?” asked
+Frank. “I, for one, have kept no track of time. And
+I don’t see how anybody else could with the continuous
+daylight we have had.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_172'></a>172</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four
+hours,” said Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained
+that from Long Tom, the Indian they had taken
+captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten directions
+as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson
+and his men to be. The explorer, according to Long
+Tom, was making his way along the Coppermine, in
+an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by
+the Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood,
+Mr. Hampton’s party was still to the south of
+Thorwaldsson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“From now on, however,” said Mr. Hampton,
+“we must keep our eyes open as we proceed for any
+signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson
+already had passed, going south. Not that
+I consider that to be likely, however,” he added.
+“On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying, and I
+believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson
+should be close at hand, and we ought soon to encounter
+him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys
+awoke in the morning they found a thick wet fog
+over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the rocks
+were wet, and the river which had lain spread out
+before them under the moonlight when they turned
+in for the night, now could not be seen. Only a
+gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_173'></a>173</span>
+even of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood
+in anxious conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+When the boys joined their elders, they found the
+question up for discussion was the question of
+whether to proceed or remain where they were until
+the fog lifted.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ve had unexampled good weather so far,
+Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum. “But this fog may
+mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from
+now on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I realize all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight
+impatience mute evidence to Jack, at least, that his
+Father was worried. “What I’d like to know now,
+is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why not move on, Dad?” asked Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if
+we travel in this fog we run the danger of being
+caught in rapids and sucked forward before being
+able to reach the bank. For another, we might—just
+might—pass Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without
+knowing it. He might be traveling, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+After some further discussion, it was decided the
+party should remain until the fog lifted, and that
+all should be on guard to catch any sound of movement
+out of the fog which would indicate somebody,
+presumably Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following
+breakfast, in fact, all but Mr. Hampton, who remained
+in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_174'></a>174</span>
+lost their way in the fog, took up positions
+along the bank of the river, some twenty yards apart
+to maintain “listening posts.”
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour passed, and then another, with no indication
+that the fog was thinning out, and with no
+sound coming to straining ears except the lap of the
+water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying
+work in a way, to sit there for so long a
+period, isolated, as if entirely alone in an unpeopled
+world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the
+strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did
+Farnum or Art who were old hands at the wilderness
+game.
+</p>
+<p>
+In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had
+decided, because of the greater experience of the two
+older men, that they should take up their positions
+at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound
+along the Coppermine escaped the attention of
+the boys, Farnum and Art would be pretty likely to
+remedy the oversight.
+</p>
+<p>
+To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as
+he sat there, hunched up on a rock, staring out into
+that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt, if anything,
+more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank,
+at least, had the consolation of knowing there was
+someone to either side. But, with none of his
+friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much
+alone, indeed.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_175'></a>175</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections
+that had no bearing whatsoever on the situation
+in which he found himself. He thought of sunny
+days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or
+zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He
+thought of one thing and another, classroom, Mexican
+mountains, that strange city of another world
+found immured in the Andes, and—of Marjorie.
+Ever since his first meeting with his sister’s friend,
+Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a position of growing
+importance in Bob’s scheme of things. Someday——
+</p>
+<p>
+“Some girl,” Bob said to himself. “I’ll have to
+see more of her.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees,
+eyes staring into the fog. In reality, his thoughts,
+as can be seen, were far, far away. But presently,
+a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness
+and he sprang into instant alertness. He listened,
+holding his breath, straining to hear.
+</p>
+<p>
+It came again.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first
+man to the south.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_176'></a>176</span><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a>CHAPTER XXI.—A WAILING CRY.</h2>
+<p>
+“Jack, Jack,” he shouted, as he ran through the
+fog, blindly, but remembering to veer away from the
+river bank a little to avoid the danger of tumbling
+in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big,
+enormous. A hand gripped his shoulder and
+brought him to a halt.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here I am, Bob. What’s the matter?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing
+into the fog upon the river. “I guess I’d been asleep,
+or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn’t be sure I had
+heard anything. It came twice—that sound. Then
+there was silence. So I came down here to ask
+whether you had heard, too.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I
+heard nothing.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jack, it was the sound of a baby’s cry.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob’s voice was solemn. A shiver ran through
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_177'></a>177</span>
+Jack, as if a breath of cold air had fanned him. In
+that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far northern
+wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was
+preposterous. More, it was uncanny.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly
+were dreaming. A baby. Huh.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe so,” Bob said, reluctantly. “But, true
+as I live, Jack——”
+</p>
+<p>
+The other’s grip on his shoulder tightened.
+</p>
+<p>
+Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin,
+but unmistakable. It was the cry of a baby, if ever
+there was such a thing.
+</p>
+<p>
+But this time it came not from the river, but from
+inland. The two listened, straining to hear, but the
+cry died away without being repeated. They looked
+at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jack, I’m afraid,” confessed Bob in a whisper.
+“I don’t know—there’s something strikes a chill into
+me—I—I——”
+</p>
+<p>
+He paused. Jack nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said, low-voiced.
+“What a pair of fools we are, though,” he added,
+brightening. “That must be some bird, or animal,
+perhaps.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Almost unconsciously, they had been making their
+way southward and now another figure rose up in
+the fog before them—that of Frank. He was about
+to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_178'></a>178</span>
+this time it came from two quarters, from the river
+and from farther inland. The three stood, silent,
+speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of
+the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art
+materialized out of the fog.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good, there you all are,” said Farnum, in a low,
+tense voice. “Follow me to camp.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And without a word of explanation he started
+at right angles away from the river, for they had
+taken their stations in such fashion that Frank, holding
+the middle position, would be directly opposite
+the camp. This was in order to enable them to reach
+it without losing their way in the fog.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it, Art?” asked Jack, his voice matching
+Farnum’s.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indians,” answered Art, tersely. “Stick close
+together and don’t make no noise.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest,
+and the three boys hurrying along in the wake of
+Farnum and Art could not be accused of cowardice
+for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead.
+Often had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far
+northern Indians. Bitter had been their experiences
+with Lupo’s half-breeds, in whose veins flowed the
+blood of the Indians of the north.
+</p>
+<p>
+As they hurried along, there flashed through their
+minds some of the stories Farnum had told. Had
+they gotten so far, so near the end of their quest for
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_179'></a>179</span>
+the “Lost Expedition” only to be wiped out by
+Indians, on the very eve of success? Such thoughts
+raced through the mind of each. But they were
+determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger,
+used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was
+swept aside, and, by the time they tumbled into the
+little hollow in which camp had been pitched, and
+where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself
+well in hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces,
+and a smile of grim approval was his greeting.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indians, boys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I
+suspected as much. Now, we have no trees here for
+bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough. Let
+us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be
+pretty close together, and if any Indians stumble on
+us they’ll get a warm reception. Listen.” He spoke
+in a low voice. “There goes that cry again. Does
+it sound closer? Yes,” as the other nodded, “I
+thought so. Quick. Take your positions. Jack,
+my boy, you stay beside me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a little tremor in his voice. That was
+all. But Jack understood. He clasped his father’s
+hand strongly, then threw himself prone beside him,
+while the others ranged themselves in a circle as
+commanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more came the wailing cry from the inland.
+Once more it was answered in kind from the water.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_180'></a>180</span>
+But to all it was apparent that the sounds were
+farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful
+silence with a whispered:
+</p>
+<p>
+“They’re moving on, moving away.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look, Dad,” Jack exclaimed excitedly. “I can
+see those rocks ahead where a minute ago was only
+the white fog. Why, the fog’s lifting. It’s lifting,
+Dad, sure enough.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied, low-voiced,
+but there was anxiety rather than jubilation
+in his tone. “That will make it bad for us. We’ll
+be exposed to sight.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As
+faint came the reply from the water. Both cries
+were to the north. Originally they had come from
+that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence
+they had come. What could it mean?
+</p>
+<p>
+The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the
+silence. At the same time a cold breeze blew across
+the crouching figures in the shallow pit and the fog
+began to shred out fast before it.
+</p>
+<p>
+Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The
+others also gained their feet. The shooting now
+was fast and furious.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, in a puzzled
+tone.
+</p>
+<p>
+With an exclamation, Jack seized his father’s
+arm.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_181'></a>181</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad,” he cried, “you said Thorwaldsson might
+be near.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, why—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s it,” said Art, in a tone of conviction.
+Mr. Farnum turned towards him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson’s being attacked.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I meant, Dad.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’re right, Jack,” said his father. “Come on.
+It can’t be anything else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson
+is in this wilderness. We must help him. Stick
+close together.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr.
+Hampton started on the dead run towards the direction
+of the shooting, with the others at his heels.
+</p>
+<p>
+The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks
+of the copper ore were scattered around. On this
+account their view was restricted, but the sound of
+the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising
+them that they were nearing the scene of conflict.
+Suddenly Bob, who was in the lead, having out-distanced
+the others several yards, rounded a big
+rock and found himself on a bank above a narrow
+strip of beach.
+</p>
+<p>
+Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead
+or wounded. Two canoes were drawn up on the
+beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_182'></a>182</span>
+crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther
+down the beach were three other canoes grounded,
+and beside them several forms of wounded men, and
+five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender
+of the attacked position, creeping up on him.
+</p>
+<p>
+Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the
+attackers mustered up courage for a rush, and with
+wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark, indeed,
+for the lone defender of the upturned canoes.
+Bob looked back to see how close were his companions,
+but they were not yet in sight. His dash
+had carried him farther than he had believed to be
+the case.
+</p>
+<p>
+It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way
+the land lay. The lone defender was the survivor of
+Thorwaldsson’s party, if the explorer’s party it was,
+of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white
+man. The others were half-breeds, and if Bob was
+not mistaken they were of the same gang which he
+had encountered before.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing
+his rifle to his shoulder, he prepared to open fire
+on the crushing enemy. But as his finger pressed
+the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle
+had became jammed in some fashion. Desperately
+he worked to release the trigger, but to no avail.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then the light of battle came into big Bob’s eyes.
+The half-breeds were just below him now. Several
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_183'></a>183</span>
+of their number had fallen in the rush, shot down
+by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and
+they evidently were bent on polishing off their lone
+opponent. So absorbed were all in their own drama,
+they had not seen Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on
+the back of one of the attackers, and bore him to the
+ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who himself
+had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself
+together, regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed
+rifle, let out a yell fit to “frighten a wolf pack,” as
+Frank later described it.
+</p>
+<p>
+The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on
+the shoulders of another of the half-breeds, felling
+him as if he had been struck by lightning. So
+tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from
+Bob’s grasp. But he leaped for another of the
+enemy, a fellow whose startled face was close to his,
+seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to
+be tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The
+fourth man was dropped by a shot from the defender
+of the canoe.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Attaboy, Bob,” came Frank’s voice, from the
+bluff above.
+</p>
+<p>
+One after the other, Bob’s friends leaped to the
+beach.
+</p>
+<p>
+As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_184'></a>184</span>
+tried to grasp his hand, uttering enthusiastic praise
+the while, Bob looked around.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Say, where’s that chap? Why, he’s fainted.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Freeing himself from his companions’ clutches,
+Bob leaped over the up-ended canoe and bent above
+the recumbent body of the doughty defender.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, he’s badly wounded,” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton pushed him aside.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here, let me look, Bob,” he said. “You fellows
+help Farnum and Art in looking after the others.
+The place is a shambles, with wounded men everywhere.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_185'></a>185</span><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a>CHAPTER XXII.—OUTWARD BOUND.</h2>
+<p>
+It was a week before the wounded could be
+moved. At close range though the fight had been,
+none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in
+amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their
+mark,” he said. “I’ve seen men, tough fellows,
+regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in Alaskan
+saloons in the old days without anybody being
+killed. When a man sees red, he don’t take no good
+aim.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital
+spots, but Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many
+places that his recovery at first was a matter of
+doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party
+to keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick
+of time.
+</p>
+<p>
+From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson’s five
+companions, however, the story of what had occurred
+had been obtained. They had been on their way
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_186'></a>186</span>
+down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken
+in the fog. They had landed in the little beach
+to wait for the fog to lift. There the half-breeds,
+survivor’s of Lupo’s gang, who had been dogging
+the trail of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come
+upon them.
+</p>
+<p>
+The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds
+had been looking for the Hampton party and not for
+Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked, the
+majority from the canoes, and three who had been
+scouting along shore, from the land. Surprised thus,
+Thorwaldsson’s party had put up a game fight, but
+one after the other had been shot down until only
+the leader was left. He, barricaded behind the
+canoes, had held off the rest of the attackers until
+the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening
+into short nights, Art and Farnum both grew
+increasingly anxious to be on their way for the outside.
+They knew their North, and they realized
+that the time remaining to them before Winter set
+in was narrowing down to a perilously small edge.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton,”
+Farnum pleaded. “What with wounded on
+our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost
+hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we
+can’t afford to waste time. Can’t Thorwaldsson be
+moved? He’ll be all right in a canoe.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_187'></a>187</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“As long as the traveling is easy, yes,” said Mr.
+Hampton. “He will be all right. But how about
+at the portages? He’s lost lot of blood already. He
+can’t afford to lose any more. However, I expect
+that with care we can prevent his wounds from reopening.
+We’ll start tomorrow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was
+broken, and the party got under way. Frank’s
+shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once
+more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff,
+and he took his place in the canoe with Bob and
+Jack. They had another passenger this time in Farrell,
+whose right arm had been broken by a shot in
+the sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson
+was taken in the canoe occupied by Mr. Hampton
+and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft
+with members of Thorwaldsson’s party. Several
+of the latter had been creased by rifle bullets and
+one shot through a leg, but all could wield paddles.
+</p>
+<p>
+And so the long trip out of the wilderness began,
+with the half-breeds in three canoes, deprived of
+arms and closely watched by their captors in the four
+canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care,
+it was felt, the prisoners could be controlled until
+they should near civilization. Without weapons they
+would be in a hopeless plight in the wilderness, unable
+to defend themselves against wild animals, unable
+to provide food for themselves. Therefore, no
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_188'></a>188</span>
+attempt on the part of their captives to escape was
+looked for by the others, until they should near the
+outlying settlements of the inhabited country.
+</p>
+<p>
+“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had
+warned the boys, “we must be on the lookout, for
+the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to
+get back their weapons and make a break for it. And
+I am determined to take them into civilization as
+witnesses to prove my statement of the murderous
+conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman
+in faraway New York.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had
+occurred and from the accounts, first of Long Tom
+and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell and the
+surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s party, he had
+pieced together the story of the conspiracy against
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme
+of which was that when Farrell had told his story to
+Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery of the
+oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson’s
+confidential secretary had gone to a New York financier
+and sold him the information. He had not been
+able to tell definitely, however, the location of the
+oil region, for the very good reason, as before related,
+that Farrell was not certain of it himself, his
+vicissitudes in getting out of the country having unsettled
+his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_189'></a>189</span>
+his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson
+be tracked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the
+mere tracking of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton.
+“But I doubt it. The attacks on Thorwaldsson’s
+expedition, the disappearance of his ship and
+crew, all look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain
+Grimm’s ends at whatever cost in human life. And,
+on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who was
+paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson’s
+former secretary, acting as agent for Grimm,
+show the latter aimed to put us all out of the way.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to
+believe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father.
+“The man who develops this Arctic oil region may
+become the richest in the world. Grimm is ambitious
+for that position. He’s got a lot of money so
+far, in one crooked way or another. But he’s not
+one of the big ones yet, not one of the richest. And
+he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached
+himself this time, for I’ve got the evidence,
+and I’ll see that we get more in Dawson and Seattle
+and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have
+the power or freedom to toy with men’s lives when
+I get through with him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and
+could not be questioned, the full account of what had
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_190'></a>190</span>
+befallen his expedition since it set out from Seattle
+was learned from the others. First of all, they had
+succeeded in retracing Farrell’s earlier footsteps,
+and had found the oil region and the river running
+through it. A thorough survey of the country had
+been made, with maps showing the outlet by water
+to the Arctic Ocean.
+</p>
+<p>
+In fact, the party had made its way out the river
+into the Arctic Ocean and around the coast into the
+Coppermine. There they had encountered and made
+friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started
+down the Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north
+into the Arctic, but had been attacked, losing half
+the members of their party and a large part of their
+equipment, including the radio. It was after this
+that the aviator of the expedition had attempted to
+fly to the outside with news of Thorwaldsson’s
+plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through
+the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the
+mouth of the Coppermine, to which they had put
+back. The death of the aviator, near the MacKenzie,
+of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson
+party until the news was imparted by the boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+The course followed as they struck southward was
+not that pursued by Farrell when he had made his
+way back to civilization. On that occasion he had
+frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it
+would be unwise to trust now to his guidance. Instead,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_191'></a>191</span>
+Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to retrace
+their own trail back to the island in the lake where
+MacDonald had been encountered, and thence follow
+his course to the Fort of the Northwest Mounted
+Police.
+</p>
+<p>
+Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever
+growing longer and colder, with frost on the ground
+in the mornings. The honking of the wild geese
+overhead, as they made their way south, also was a
+warning that the mantle of Winter soon would settle
+down.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter
+in this country not only means dreadful cold for
+which we ain’t prepared in the matter of clothing
+or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there
+ain’t no food to be had. Yes, there’s plenty of game
+now, geese and duck everywhere along the streams,
+caribou plentiful. But you notice they’re all going
+south. When Winter strikes, there’ll be nothing in
+this wilderness but rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s all
+right—if you can dig ’em out o’ their huts. But
+rabbit—huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_192'></a>192</span><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a>CHAPTER XXIII.—LONG JIM APPEARS.</h2>
+<p>
+Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far
+north of where they had planned to be when the cold
+should really set in. This was due to a variety of
+circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson’s recovery
+was one of the retarding influences, which
+prevented them making the desired speed. After
+weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition,
+and Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected
+by a bullet that ploughed along the left side of his
+head. The other wounded, although quick to recover,
+also acted as a hindrance, especially at the
+first.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived
+weeks ahead of the expected time. And daily,
+as the ice on stream and river thickened, it became
+increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes
+could not be abandoned, for, once snow began to
+fly, the travelers would have been helpless on land,
+without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_193'></a>193</span>
+be constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes
+made, too, but neither would be worth much, and
+the manufacture of them would take a good deal of
+time.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two sentries were always posted at night now;
+one by a fire around which slumbered the prisoners,
+the other by a fire in the midst of a circle composed
+of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined.
+It was Jack’s turn to keep guard one cold
+but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, which had
+caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had
+brought them, indeed, to the verge of despair. For
+they were insufficiently clad, even though the skins
+of many animals slain for food in the past weeks
+had been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and,
+in addition, with the closing-in of Winter game had
+become so scarce that the camp was virtually on the
+verge of starvation.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which
+lay his friends. One of the Thorwaldsson party,
+Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire. Looking
+across the little space which separated the two
+parties, Jack could see the huddled figures of the
+half-breeds lying so close to the fire, which Swenson
+fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost
+to be in it. Around him the members of his
+own party were similarly disposed.
+</p>
+<p>
+With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_194'></a>194</span>
+wood and tossed it into the fire. The flames at once
+shot high and, as if that were a signal, out of the
+darkness beyond came a robust hail.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hello, there. Keep ’er goin’, sonny.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a
+big fur-clad figure of a man on snowshoes. On his
+back was a pack which he dropped to the ground
+with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in
+the crook of an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens,
+spread his hands to the blaze, working his fingers
+gratefully back and forth.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Cold an’ gittin’ colder,” he announced, casually.
+“Got a nice fire here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find
+another wanderer in this wilderness which they believed
+unpeopled was exciting enough. But to
+have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing
+any explanation of his presence took Jack’s
+breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew enough
+of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is
+the first law of the wilds, and that questions distinctly
+would not be in order. He decided the best
+thing for him would be to wait for the other to take
+the lead in the conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning
+even as he eased his stiffened fingers in the warmth
+of the fire.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_195'></a>195</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Didn’t know there was anybody else in this
+country,” he said. “Been around here long?”
+</p>
+<p>
+A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows
+accompanied the question. Jack had to smile to himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No; not long,” he said composedly. “And you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I been huntin’ an’ trappin’ ’round here,” the
+other said.
+</p>
+<p>
+To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough,
+even a likeable, type, and yet that he was acting
+evasively. He decided it would be a good plan to
+get a more experienced head to help him deal with
+the situation. None of his party apparently was
+awake, all being worn out with the terrific strain
+of the day’s travel. But Art lay near him. In fact,
+his foot was not six inches from Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer’s
+attention, Jack moved his foot to a position
+where with his toe he could tap on Art’s ankles. It
+was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out
+of the tail of his eye Jack saw Art’s body stiffen
+and his head lift up slightly from the ground. For
+what followed, however, he was totally unprepared.
+</p>
+<p>
+Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began
+thumping the newcomer vigorously on the back.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, you ol’ son-of-a-gun,” he cried. “You ol’
+son-of-a-gun.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_196'></a>196</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Li’l Artie, or I’m goin’ blind,” cried the other,
+seizing Art by the hand and pumping up and down.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack turned in amazement to Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why—why—you know each other!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Know each other? Har, har, har,” roared the
+giant, in a guffaw that aroused the others about the
+campfire. “Know each other? That’s a good one.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell
+and several of the others gathered around, looking
+their questions, and Art turned to satisfy them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ever hear o’ Long Jim Golden?” he asked.
+“Well, this is him—the daggonedest trapper on the
+face o’ the earth. Ain’t seen him in years since he
+left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Trappin’.” Jim looked around at the interested
+faces. “You tol’ who I am,” he said. “Now
+tell me who’s your friends, Artie.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure,” said Art heartily, effecting introductions.
+“Here we all are,” he concluded, and then his face
+fell as he added: “but where we’ll be soon, I don’t
+know, nor what’s to become of us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Long Jim looked first at one, then at another,
+then his eyes roved over the camp.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How come?” he asked. “No sleds nor dogs nor
+snowshoes nor nothin’. How come?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said
+Art. “The rest o’ you, we won’t bother you none
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_197'></a>197</span>
+with loud voices. We’ll jest whisper-like. You’ll
+want to turn in and sleep, so go to it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Nothing loath, the others with the exception of
+Jack, who moved to one side so as not to intrude
+on the two old acquaintances thus strangely reunited,
+turned in and soon were once more asleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim
+the circumstances leading up to their present position.
+From across the fire, Jack watched them. He
+saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art’s narrative
+and that, indeed, it seemed to affect him
+strangely. For over his open, rugged features, not
+constructed to conceal their owner’s moods, swept
+doubt, uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man
+was going on a fight between two contending forces.
+Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be thinking
+of?
+</p>
+<p>
+Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a
+hand on the shoulder of his companion who remained
+seated but looking up at him. Jack unconsciously
+moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to
+speak. He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long
+Jim’s expression had puzzled him greatly. What
+could it mean?
+</p>
+<p>
+“Artie,” said Long Jim in a louder tone than that
+in which their whispered conversation had been carried
+on, and one that reached Jack’s ears, “Artie, my
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_198'></a>198</span>
+boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have them skunks
+with ye.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Them breeds,” said Art, jerking a thumb back
+over a shoulder to indicate the prisoners sleeping
+about the other fire.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Them same,” said Long Jim. “Cause why, you
+asks me? Cause I got a paradise to take you all to,
+where you can spend the Winter lapped in comfort.
+An’ I don’t want to take no rascals like them half-breeds
+there. But——”
+</p>
+<p>
+Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with
+disbelief.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What? What you mean, Long Jim?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jest what I says,” answered the other emphatically.
+“A paradise, I calls it. An’ a paradise it
+is. An’ the quicker we git there the better, so wake
+up your friends an’ let me talk to ’em. If we have
+to take them skunks, why, we’ll take ’em.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_199'></a>199</span><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a>CHAPTER XXIV.—A TALE OF PARADISE.</h2>
+<p>
+At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who
+had been called to join the pair, speedily re-aroused
+their friends.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I ain’t no hand for talkin’,” Long Jim declared
+in answer to Art’s requests for further information.
+“I got to tell this. But onct oughter be enough.
+No use my tellin’ you an’ then tellin’ the rest o’
+them all over agin.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was
+“no hand for talking,” yet his tongue wagged continually.
+However, his heart seemed in the right
+place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough
+of a haven not too far away to which they could
+go for refuge. What was it he called it? “Paradise.”
+Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on
+gentle methods in arousing the sleepers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Lookit here,” said Long Jim, as the circle gathered
+around him. “Art’s been tellin’ me the trouble
+you folks is in. Looks to me like you moughtn’t
+be able to make it out o’ this country.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_200'></a>200</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I know of a place that’s paradise,” said
+Long Jim, impressively. “An’ I’ll take ye all there,
+an’ ye can spend the Winter—warm, game, everything
+there. Only thing, like I tol’ Artie here, is I
+hate to have to take them skunks o’ half-breeds in
+there. They’ll be a-comin’ back later an’ ruin the
+country.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But I don’t understand,” said Mr. Hampton.
+“What is it you are talking about?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t blame ye,” said Long Jim. “Think maybe
+the ol’ man’s crazy, don’t ye? Don’t blame ye for
+that, neither. But, look here, night’s dyin’ an’ if
+ye stand up an’ look where I’m pointin’ ye’ll see
+somethin’.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others
+also stood up.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thar,” said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the
+westward. “What d’ye see?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why—a great bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton,
+after gazing intently. “How strange. Fog in
+Winter. I don’t understand.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“An’ ye all think that’s fog, hey?” asked Long
+Jim, turning to the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+Nodding heads answered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, it ain’t,” he said. “That’s the vapor from
+hot springs.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_201'></a>201</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded frankly
+incredulous.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait’ll you see for yourself,” said Long Jim,
+tolerantly. “I wouldn’t believe it, neither, when I
+first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But bein’
+as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I
+went to investigate. An’ I found paradise.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then, under Mr. Hampton’s skillful questioning,
+Long Jim told his story. He declared he had lived
+in this region now these two years, and that since
+first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves.
+Drawn by the seeming fog to investigate, he had
+come upon an almost tropical valley through which
+ran not only one but several rivers of water forever
+at the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said,
+were fed by hundreds of hot springs, which bubbled
+out of the ground in all directions. It was the steam
+from these which, condensing as it rose above the
+valley and struck the cold Winter air, had formed
+the fog which first attracted his attention.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Once I were in South America,” said Long Jim.
+“Down clost to the Equator. Well, I’m tellin’ you,
+it were that hot all last Summer right in that valley.
+As for right now, ye’ll find it mighty pleasant an’
+warm, an’ when snow falls it’s only rain by the
+time it passes through the heat hangin’ over that
+valley all the time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurray,” cried Frank, exuberantly. “Let’s go.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_202'></a>202</span>
+No snow fellows. Get that? I’ve had all the snow
+I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I can get
+along without any more for some time to come.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank’s
+jubilation, proceeded with his questioning. And
+Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he
+could talk all he pleased, after having been without
+companions for several years, continued unfolding
+new wonders.
+</p>
+<p>
+This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles
+long and 40 miles wide. They were now near its
+upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his
+way by slow travel and exploration during the two
+years since his arrival at the southern end.
+</p>
+<p>
+Game?
+</p>
+<p>
+At the question, Long Jim grew even more
+eloquent.
+</p>
+<p>
+He declared that, due to the heat generated by
+the hot springs and the boiling rivers, the fertility
+of the soil was amazing. The vegetation, in fact,
+achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew
+tall as trees, with stems as thick as a man’s forearm
+and so dense that it was impossible to force a way
+through them. Willows grew to the size of big
+trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk
+along them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“An’ birches,” added Long Jim, “git to be hunderds
+o’ feet tall, so tall, in fact, they can’t hold
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_203'></a>203</span>
+themselves up but bend over an’ touch the ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Likely you think I’m out o’ my head. Oh, I kin
+see it in your eyes. But I’m tellin’ you the God’s
+truth, men.” And Long Jim spoke with such honest
+sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. “In
+sich a place,” he continued, “it ain’t likely there
+wouldn’t be no game. Why, the animals there is
+thick as flees on a ol’ hound.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear,
+deer, wolves, foxes, oh, every wild animal o’ the
+whole North kin be found there—down in that
+valley an’ in the mountains enclosin’ of it. An’ I tell
+you the truth,” he concluded, his voice sinking for
+effect, “the moose git so fat they’re almost square
+an’ they’re so darn tame ye can almost touch ’em.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As Long Jim’s speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton
+turned and stared across the brightening landscape
+to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the short
+days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of
+the Arctic would arrive. Only a miracle could save
+them from perishing, all unprepared to face further
+travel as they were. Could it be possible that miracle
+had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the
+truth?
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was
+passing through the older man’s mind. Truth to
+tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went
+up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_204'></a>204</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I believe Long Jim
+is telling the truth. And we better make the effort
+to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating a
+little, but certainly it looks like a promised land.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s right, Jack,” said his father, shaking off
+his reverie, and his alert self once more. “We’ll
+have a hard enough struggle getting there, what
+with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow
+without snowshoes or sleds. Well, let’s see what
+can be done.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Eventually, the party got into motion. The
+canoes were cached, where they could be recovered
+in the Summer. There was little likelihood anybody
+else would pass that way, to appropriate them.
+Equipment was made into packs shouldered by
+everybody except Art and Bob. These two were
+to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised
+out of poles cut on the river bank, and blankets.
+</p>
+<p>
+Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which
+Long Jim was guiding them was distant not more
+than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the
+going was tremendously difficult because of the mass
+of new-fallen snow. Had it not been for Long Jim
+to break the way on his snowshoes, moreover, it is
+doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy
+laden as they were. But Long Jim worked patiently
+backward and forward, breaking down the snow,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_205'></a>205</span>
+and packing it a second and even a third time with
+his webs.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How come you were out here, ol’ timer?” asked
+Art once, as Long Jim paused, and he caught up
+with him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I git lonesome a leetle,” said Long Jim.
+“I was prospectin’ around in the mountains rimmin’
+the valley yestiddy, an’ I saw you across the snow.
+Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I
+thought you were humans. I couldn’t hardly believe
+my eyes, but I come along investigatin’. An’ then
+when night come on, you lit your fires, an’——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain’t
+a-lyin’,” said Art.
+</p>
+<p>
+Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was
+prepared to stand on his dignity but then he smiled
+in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all around
+his blue eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t blame ye for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds
+like I were crazy, don’t it? But jest wait till you
+see.”
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_206'></a>206</span><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a>CHAPTER XXV.—VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS.</h2>
+<p>
+But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley
+proved, indeed, to be more even than he described,
+for as the world now knows important mineral deposits
+were discovered, including gold, silver, copper,
+coal, iron and oil. But of the development
+going on to bring not only this marvelous region
+but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into
+the world’s resources naught need be said now.
+Suffice it to say that such development is under way,
+for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great financiers,
+and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell
+and Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from
+their shares in the various projects.
+</p>
+<p>
+Here the party settled down, constructed huts,
+and prepared to await the coming of Spring when the
+snow should disappear from the vast wilderness
+separating them from the northern edge of the
+civilized lands and the ice in the rivers be unlocked.
+</p>
+<p>
+One of the first things done by the boys was to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_207'></a>207</span>
+erect their radio plant, and they succeeded without
+much difficulty in opening communication with the
+little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the
+farthest rim of the settled country. MacDonald and
+Dick, with their prisoners, had arrived only a day or
+two before communication was opened, and the two
+parties exchanged the stories of their adventures
+by radio.
+</p>
+<p>
+To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of
+wonder as Long Jim’s valley was to the boys. He
+could never get over marveling at it, and every time
+that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were
+in the vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and
+open-mouthed astonishment while the boys operated
+the instruments.
+</p>
+<p>
+Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful
+valley, at the resources of which Mr. Hampton
+could never express sufficient astonishment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is a freak of nature, of course, boys,” he explained
+on one occasion.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How wonderful that it should have remained
+undiscovered for so long,” said Jack.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not so marvelous,” said his father. “Few, indeed,
+are the people who ever have penetrated any
+distance into all this vast wilderness of northern
+Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed,
+to be bleak and uninhabitable. You know
+from experience that the contrary is the case. It
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_208'></a>208</span>
+is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted
+that, if properly clothed and housed, he can
+stand any severity of Winter. Some day, I predict,
+all this vast wilderness through which we have been
+making our way will be settled. That day is far off,
+of course, but it is coming. The growth of world
+population will force the conquest of the sub-Arctic.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The one thing making their stay in this valley of
+marvels unpleasant was the constant rainfall. For
+in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping down
+from the North Pole in never-ending succession.
+And these storms which they knew were burying the
+land beyond the valley under a pall of ice and snow
+poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of
+the mountain ranges rimming the valley were buried
+under snow, gleaming wan in the occasional moonlight
+between the storms, for by now the long night
+had come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long
+Jim had foretold the snow as it passed through the
+temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers and
+springs was transformed into rain.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two events of importance marked their stay.
+One was the escape of their prisoners, together with
+some rifles which they succeeded in stealing. Pursuit
+in the darkness, and through the jungle-like
+reaches of the forest was almost hopeless and was
+quickly abandoned. Nor, although vigilant watch
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_209'></a>209</span>
+was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign
+of the half-breeds again.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s a big valley,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I
+doubt whether they will attempt to attack us. Rather,
+they will keep out of our way. They are poorly
+armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all
+come together. Their escape, I imagine, was incited
+by a fear of what awaited them if we succeeded
+in getting them back to civilization and the
+courts. Well,” he said, with a sigh, “I regret, of
+course, the loss of witnesses to substantiate the
+charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring
+against Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid
+of them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was a sentiment in which all concurred.
+</p>
+<p>
+The other event referred to was the opening by
+means of relayed messages via the Mounted Post
+and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr.
+Temple in faraway New York. When word
+reached Bob’s father that the Hampton party was
+safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he
+quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big
+business deal was clamoring for his attention, and
+sped by motor down to his Long Island home.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library,
+staring spiritlessly out at the Winter landscape. Mr.
+Temple stole up behind her and, reaching over her
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_210'></a>210</span>
+shoulder, thrust the message from the radio corporation
+under her eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+Della’s glance fell and she began to read the
+printed words. Then she leaped up, whirled around,
+her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms around
+her father’s neck.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee,” she screamed.
+</p>
+<p>
+He held her off at arm’s length and looked at her.
+Her eyes began to fill up with happy tears, and once
+more she threw herself into his arms.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, kiddy, cry all you want to,” he said, comfortingly,
+patting her on the back. “I guess that’s
+the medicine you needed. You’ll be all right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Temple’s words bore reference to the fact
+that for months Della’s health had been failing, and
+she had shown so little interest in her studies that
+it had been considered wiser to take her out of the
+boarding school which she attended, and bring her
+home.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, yes, Dad-dee,” she sobbed, her face
+buried in his coat. “I’ll be all right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked
+anxiously:
+</p>
+<p>
+“It says they are all safe—<em>all</em>? Doesn’t it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his
+eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, kiddy,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_211'></a>211</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, Dad-dee, I didn’t mean that,” said Della,
+blushing furiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No need to fib to me, kiddy,” said her father.
+“Bob is only a brother; but Frank——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, you shan’t say it,” laughed Della, and she
+placed a hand over his mouth.
+</p>
+<p>
+Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that
+time on Della no longer moped and looked ill, but
+took an intense interest in all the daily affairs of
+life, even wanting to return at once to school.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things
+over with me,” she explained to her mother.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, dear, what do you mean?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well—you know—she’s sweet on Bob.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, you girls,” said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh.
+“You’ll be the death of me. At your age——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“At our age you were engaged to Father,” said
+Della. “Now don’t deny it. Dad has even told
+me how you planned to elope, but were overheard
+by your mother who persuaded you to be conventional
+and have a wedding at home.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his
+wife and grinned shamelessly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“George, did you tell her that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why not? It was the truth.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, George. Aren’t children nowadays hard
+enough to handle as it is, without letting them know
+how silly we older people were once?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_212'></a>212</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now, Mother,” said Della, rising quickly and
+going to her mother’s side, and kissing her. “Don’t
+scold Father. Can’t you see he’s dreaming of that
+day again?”
+</p>
+<p>
+And dancing to her father’s side, Della dropped
+a kiss on the spot where his hair was thinning out,
+and then danced gaily from the dining-room.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he
+sipped his coffee. Then putting down the cup, he
+leaned forward and said confidentially:
+</p>
+<p>
+“You do remember that time, don’t you, dear?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by
+way of reproof for his silliness, but a softened look
+came into her eyes as she stared back. The years
+that intervened since their youth seemed to slip
+away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, George,” she said. “You look positively
+handsome.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie
+Faulkner, apprised the latter of the message from
+the Far North to the effect that the lost had been
+found. And Della soon followed her message in
+person. Thereafter the two girls were never tired
+of talking about the possible adventures that had
+befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob’s
+praises, Della sang Frank’s. Poor Jack, it is to be
+feared, was somewhat slighted in these discussions.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_213'></a>213</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll warrant you that Bob saved the day for
+them all,” Marjorie said on one occasion. “He’s
+so big and strong.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” flashed Della, “Bob’s my brother, and
+that’s all right. But if they ever got in a tight
+pinch, I’m <em>sure</em> it was Frank that got them out.
+He’s got more brains than all the rest put together.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” cried Marjorie.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be
+always praising him?” demanded Della.
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment the two girls positively glared at
+each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then the twinkle began to come, and they
+laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then they were hugging each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+And then they were at it again.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_214'></a>214</span><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a>CHAPTER XXVI.—TREED BY WOLVES.</h2>
+<p>
+One more adventure, and that a serious one, was
+to befall the boys as a final taste of life in the wilderness.
+One day towards the end of Winter, when
+the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain,
+the three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters
+and had worn out even the amusement of listening
+to the Edmonton radio concerts or communicating
+with the Post of the Mounted, announced
+they were going hunting.
+</p>
+<p>
+The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low,
+and additions to their larder would not be unwelcome.
+Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no objection
+to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long
+Jim accompany them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’d be no good,” said Long Jim. “Sence I did
+that fool trick o’ cuttin’ my hand with the axe a
+couple-three days ago, I cain’t set finger to trigger.
+You better go, Art.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, boys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch
+a leg, too.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_215'></a>215</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding
+the spot where they had chosen to erect
+their huts, there was no longer any game, for the
+animals had come to learn that these strange creatures
+brought destruction and had decamped elsewhere.
+Finally, after they had proceeded some distance
+without sighting anything, Art suggested they
+strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain
+side. The huts had been erected near the foot of
+one of the ranges rimming the valley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe we’ll run into a mountain sheep or a
+goat,” he said. “Anyhow, we can see better from a
+higher lever, for this forest down here is so thick
+you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out
+an’ up there the trees is thinner.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With Art leading the way, the party began its
+upward climb. For some time they toiled upward
+until presently they reached a level unaffected by
+the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where,
+as a consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across
+a bare shoulder of rock from which the wind had
+swept all but a trace of snow they made their way
+and then plunged into a thick woods beyond.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle
+and bent over to adjust the clumsy lacing of a thick
+shoe pack of the kind they had made for themselves
+from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding
+along, head down, did not notice he had
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_216'></a>216</span>
+stopped, and kept on going. He spent more time
+at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally
+he straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were
+not in sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure
+he would be able to trace them in the snow and
+would soon catch up with them. He set out at a
+brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where
+the wind had not had a chance to whisk it away, and
+the going was hard. He had proceeded some distance
+before he noticed that he had gotten off the
+trail left by his companions. Angry with himself
+for his carelessness, but still not worried, he halted
+to consider what was best for him to do.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shucks,” he said aloud. “Guess I better go back
+over my steps till I find where I left their trail.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And with this intention, he turned to go back.
+Even as he did so, he saw a pack of long gray bodies
+racing through the trees in his direction. At the
+same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of
+wolves. They had scented him and were now lifting
+the cry which announced their prey was near.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder,
+but then he lowered it. The flitting forms were still
+yards away. And although moonlight sifted through
+the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently
+illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets.
+He decided his best plan would be to seek refuge
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_217'></a>217</span>
+in a tree first of all, and then he could fire at the
+wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim
+that would not now be his. These thoughts or reflections
+flashed through his mind in an instant. The
+next moment he was putting his plan into execution,
+and climbing into a tall fir.
+</p>
+<p>
+He was not a moment too soon, either, for the
+baying came closer and closer and even as he struggled
+frantically to climb higher the leader of the wolf
+pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high
+into the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws,
+and looked down into a yawning red cavern of a
+mouth.
+</p>
+<p>
+The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp,
+and fell on the snout of the wolf who leaped aside
+in temporary panic. Then the rest of the pack arrived
+on the scene, jumping and snarling, their
+heads in the air, their wicked eyes agleam as they
+scented the prey they had treed but which temporarily
+had escaped them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of
+the tree to steady himself, for he was sick with vexation
+at his own carelessness in not having properly,
+secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close
+about the tree, looking up, and one big fellow even
+put his forefeet against the trunk and reared high
+till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_218'></a>218</span>
+he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an
+expectant ring close about the foot of the tree.
+</p>
+<p>
+When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself
+to a serious consideration of his position. And at
+once he realized that he must try before it was too
+late and they got out of earshot to attract the attention
+of his comrades. Perhaps already they had
+gotten beyond reach. At that he had a moment of
+panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved
+away, he told himself, they would discover his absence
+presently and retrace their steps in search of
+him.
+</p>
+<p>
+He still had his revolver. At first he did not
+trust himself to handle it, because of the trembling
+of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand
+steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his
+companions’ attention first of all. And raising his
+voice, he sent call after call ringing through the
+forest.
+</p>
+<p>
+The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon
+the whole pack was snarling and yowling and making
+a terrific, demoniac din.
+</p>
+<p>
+The sound steadied him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good,” he thought, “the boys will know there
+are wolves, anyway.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting
+them. And once more they came up to the foot of
+the tree, rearing their forefeet against it and leaping
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_219'></a>219</span>
+upward. It was Frank’s chance, and he took
+it.
+</p>
+<p>
+With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he
+leaned forward and took careful aim at the biggest
+of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the
+wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It
+was his last. Frank’s bullet plunged down his
+throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow.
+</p>
+<p>
+His mates without a second’s hesitation deserted
+their attempts to get at Frank, and began snarling
+over the dead body. The sight sickened Frank, and
+he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred
+that, if he added several more corpses to the
+ghoulish feast, he might divert the attention of the
+rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be
+able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his
+way through the trees for a short distance before
+jumping to the ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was no need now for care in aiming, as
+the wolves were in a thick mass over the body of
+the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid succession
+into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent,
+for two more wolves went down, and the
+tearing and crunching announced a renewal of the
+awful feast.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if
+possible. He had heard no answering replies, and
+believed his companions must have gotten out of
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_220'></a>220</span>
+earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources
+to make his escape. He was about to start
+swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which
+interlocked with those of the tree in which he had
+found refuge, when the thought occurred that, perhaps,
+he would be able to obtain his rifle undiscovered
+by the wolves.
+</p>
+<p>
+Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately
+on the snarling wolf pack several yards from
+the tree and on the limbs he must grip in his descent.
+He had almost reached the lowermost limb
+when his grip slipped and he fell.
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck
+the ground his hands closed on the coveted rifle, and
+he scrabbled to regain his feet, flinging the rifle to
+his shoulder as he did so.
+</p>
+<p>
+His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned
+aside from the outskirts of the pack, where he was
+not getting his share of the gruesome feast, and
+sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang
+out from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering
+at his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Steady, Frank,” cried Art’s voice. “Give ’em
+all you’ve got.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Without looking around, mastering his trembling
+by a supreme effort, Frank brought the rifle to his
+shoulder and began firing into the pack, even as the
+three rifles of his companions also opened fire.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_221'></a>221</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+At that close range every shot told and not a wolf
+escaped. Eleven bodies, including the mutilated remains
+of the three which Frank had slain with revolver
+shots, were stretched on the snow under the
+trees.
+</p>
+<p>
+When it was all over, his companions gathered
+about Frank and explanations followed. Then they
+made their way back to camp.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_222'></a>222</span><a name='chXXVII' id='chXXVII'></a>CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION.</h2>
+<p>
+Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the
+party containing our friends and the Thorwaldsson
+party as well as Long Jim Golden, all bronzed and
+hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body
+and mind, swung around a bend in a river and came
+to the landing which marked the first outpost of
+civilization—the trading post where was also located
+the Fort of the Mounted.
+</p>
+<p>
+A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was
+first to see them, and whooping and shouting he ran
+up the bank towards the store. Out of the door
+of the trading post came a figure in uniform.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Art.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two pals were reunited.
+</p>
+<p>
+And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for
+out of the store came Mr. Temple and Della. For
+ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on, while
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_223'></a>223</span>
+Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood
+to one side, their faces set in wide grins.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What in the world?” demanded Mr. Hampton,
+at length, holding his partner and neighbor at arm’s
+length. “What in the world brought you here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“A motor boat,” said Mr. Temple. “That was
+a surprise for you. When we received your radio
+message via the post here, which relayed it to Edmonton—that
+first one, you know, announcing you
+were leaving for the outside—I decided I would have
+to be on hand to greet you. So I got into communication
+with Captain Jameson, and learned
+from him that I could reach one of his posts farther
+south by motor car, and then come up the river in a
+launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge
+of the wilderness.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still
+kept an arm, and smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug.
+“But what brought Della?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, the same means,” answered his father.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it
+love for her straying brother?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own
+opinion,” said Mr. Temple, eyes a-twinkle.
+</p>
+<p>
+Della who had been standing close to Frank, her
+hands clasped in his, looked calmly at Bob.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_224'></a>224</span>
+she said. “But her mother wouldn’t let her. She
+sent you a message.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Huh.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop.
+Nevertheless, at the first opportunity he got his sister
+to one side, and, snatching the letter she tendered
+him, went off by himself to read it.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys
+on the launch, and in a canoe towed behind, and so,
+after a short rest, a start downstream was made at
+once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with
+them, but soon fell behind amid a gay waving of
+farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make arrangements
+for their reception at the next post and at
+Edmonton. The launch would be sent back for
+them when the post was reached.
+</p>
+<p>
+At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively
+few years of its existence has grown to
+the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got their
+first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them
+across the continent, reaching its height on their
+arrival in New York. For word of their coming
+had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them,
+representing the great newspapers and news-gathering
+syndicates of not only North America but of
+Europe, too.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You see, boys,” said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel
+rooms, when they protested to him at being besieged
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_225'></a>225</span>
+every minute of the day by reporters, “you
+are the center of the romantic interest of the world.
+You rescued the Lost Expedition and discovered
+strange new territory. You have had the wildest
+kind of adventures. How do you expect the world
+to take that calmly? It can’t be done. No, you
+may as well submit gracefully, and talk when questioned.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited
+by the newspapermen, and pictures began
+to appear throughout the country, showing the daring
+young explorer and his sweetheart. When they
+were taken, neither Frank nor Della knew, but the
+truth of the matter was that they were together so
+much of the time it was the easiest matter in the
+world for a photographer to snap them.
+</p>
+<p>
+In New York the same thing was gone through
+with again, only, if anything, worse. And this time,
+the reporters finding that Marjorie Faulkner appeared
+to greet the returned heroes, scented a new
+romance, and questioned the boys about it. Bob
+and Frank refused to answer, but Jack slyly tipped
+off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and
+Bob a real romance was, indeed, budding.
+</p>
+<p>
+In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together,
+and gave the newspapermen a story to the
+effect that Jack was champing at the bit to be off
+to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_226'></a>226</span>
+awaited him, none other, in fact, than the Senorita
+Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an old Don who
+had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support
+of the story they told the newspapermen of
+their adventures several years before on the Mexican
+border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton
+from captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love
+with the daughter of the Mexican leader responsible
+for Mr. Hampton’s capture.
+</p>
+<p>
+It all made good copy for the reporters, who had
+about exhausted the possibilities of the northern adventure,
+and who now plunged head first into this
+former adventure, of which nothing had been known
+at the time.
+</p>
+<p>
+Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire
+vengeance on Bob and Frank. But the latter pointed
+out that they had but turned the tables on him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, anyway,” he said, finally, beginning to
+smile, “you haven’t got the best part of the story
+yet.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to
+tell what he meant. But he refused. Several days
+later he disappeared. When they asked Mr. Hampton
+what had become of him he finally surrendered
+and gave the secret away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, boys,” he said, “when we returned I
+found a courteous note from Don Fernandez y
+Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_227'></a>227</span>
+connected with the government, and asking me
+to call. I guess Jack has taken a train for Washington,
+and gone calling.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With which happy forecast of good luck to come
+to all three of the Radio Boys, we shall leave them
+for the present, secure in the belief that if at any
+future date they go adventuring they will be well
+able to take care of themselves, and also that they
+will get into adventures well worth reading about.
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>THE END</p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Radio Boys Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+</p>
+<p>
+A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages.
+</p>
+<p>
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;MEXICAN&nbsp;BORDER<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;SECRET&nbsp;SERVICE&nbsp;DUTY<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;REVENUE&nbsp;GUARDS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS’&nbsp;SEARCH&nbsp;FOR&nbsp;THE&nbsp;INCA’S&nbsp;TREASURE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;RESCUE&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LOST&nbsp;ALASKA&nbsp;EXPEDITION<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;DARKEST&nbsp;AFRICA<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;SEEK&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LOST&nbsp;ATLANTIS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;PATROL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RADIO&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AS&nbsp;SOLDIERS&nbsp;OF&nbsp;FORTUNE<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Golden Boys Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.
+</p>
+<p>
+A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School Age.
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THEIR&nbsp;NEW&nbsp;ELECTRIC&nbsp;CELL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AT&nbsp;THE&nbsp;FORTRESS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;MAINE&nbsp;WOODS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LUMBER&nbsp;JACKS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;RESCUED&nbsp;BY&nbsp;RADIO<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ALONG&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RIVER&nbsp;ALLAGASH<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AT&nbsp;THE&nbsp;HAUNTED&nbsp;CAMP<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RIVER&nbsp;DRIVE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;SAVE&nbsp;THE&nbsp;CHAMBERLAIN&nbsp;DAM<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GOLDEN&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TRAIL<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Lakewood Boys Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D.
+</p>
+<p>
+A new series of copyright stories for boys of
+High School Age by the Author of “The Golden
+Boys Series.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAZY&nbsp;S<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LOST&nbsp;MINE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;FROZEN&nbsp;NORTH<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;POLO&nbsp;PONIES<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;SOUTH&nbsp;SEA&nbsp;ISLANDS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;MONTANA<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;LAKEWOOD&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;AFRICAN&nbsp;JUNGLE<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Boy Scout Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON
+</p>
+<p>
+A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense
+through organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting
+an accurate description of Boy Scouts activities.
+</p>
+<p>
+ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;OF&nbsp;THE&nbsp;EAGLE&nbsp;PATROL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;ARMY&nbsp;AIRSHIP<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS’&nbsp;MOUNTAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;CAMP<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;FOR&nbsp;UNCLE&nbsp;SAM<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;AT&nbsp;THE&nbsp;PANAMA&nbsp;CANAL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;UNDER&nbsp;FIRE&nbsp;IN&nbsp;MEXICO<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;BELGIAN&nbsp;BATTLEFIELDS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;IN&nbsp;FRANCE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;SCOUTS&nbsp;AT&nbsp;THE&nbsp;PANAMA-PACIFIC&nbsp;EXPOSITION<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Border Boys Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By Fremont B. Deering
+</p>
+<p>
+Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+With Individual Jackets in Colors.
+</p>
+<p>
+Cloth Bound
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TRAIL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ACROSS&nbsp;THE&nbsp;FRONTIER<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;MEXICAN&nbsp;RANGERS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TEXAS&nbsp;RANGERS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;CANADIAN&nbsp;ROCKIES<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;ALONG&nbsp;THE&nbsp;ST.&nbsp;LAWRENCE&nbsp;RIVER<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Ranger Boys Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE
+</p>
+<p>
+A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16
+years telling of the adventures of three boys with
+the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;TO&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RESCUE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;FIND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;HERMIT<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BORDER&nbsp;SMUGGLERS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;OUTWIT&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TIMBER&nbsp;THIEVES<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;RANGER&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;THEIR&nbsp;REWARD<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Troopers Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+</p>
+<p>
+Author of the Famous “Boy Allies” Series.
+</p>
+<p>
+The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.
+</p>
+<p>
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+</p>
+<p>
+All Copyrighted Titles.
+</p>
+<p>
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;TROOPERS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TRAIL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;TROOPERS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;NORTHWEST<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;TROOPERS&nbsp;ON&nbsp;STRIKE&nbsp;DUTY<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;TROOPERS&nbsp;AMONG&nbsp;THE&nbsp;WILD&nbsp;MOUNTAINEERS<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Frank Armstrong Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By MATTHEW M. COLTON
+</p>
+<p>
+Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing
+Athletics from Start to Finish. For Boys 10 to
+15 Years.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+Cloth Bound
+</p>
+<p>
+With Attractive Jackets in Colors.
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG’S&nbsp;VACATION<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG&nbsp;AT&nbsp;QUEENS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG’S&nbsp;SECOND&nbsp;TERM<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG,&nbsp;DROP&nbsp;KICKER<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG,&nbsp;CAPTAIN&nbsp;OF&nbsp;THE&nbsp;NINE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FRANK&nbsp;ARMSTRONG&nbsp;AT&nbsp;COLLEGE<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Allies</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:smaller;'>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>With the Army</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+</p>
+<p>
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+</p>
+<p>
+All Cloth Bound
+</p>
+<p>
+Copyright Titles
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+Postage 10c extra.
+</p>
+<p>
+In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads
+unable to leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the
+soldiers of the Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them.
+Their experiences and escapes are many, and furnish plenty
+of good, healthy action that every boy loves.
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;AT&nbsp;LIEGE;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Through&nbsp;Lines&nbsp;of&nbsp;Steel.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;FIRING&nbsp;LINE;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Twelve&nbsp;Days'&nbsp;Battle&nbsp;Along&nbsp;the&nbsp;Marne.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;COSSACKS;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;A&nbsp;Wild&nbsp;Dash&nbsp;Over&nbsp;the&nbsp;Carpathians.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TRENCHES;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Midst&nbsp;Shot&nbsp;and&nbsp;Shell&nbsp;Along&nbsp;the&nbsp;Aisne.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;IN&nbsp;GREAT&nbsp;PERIL;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;With&nbsp;the&nbsp;Italian&nbsp;Army&nbsp;in&nbsp;the&nbsp;Alps.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BALKAN&nbsp;CAMPAIGN;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Struggle&nbsp;to&nbsp;Save&nbsp;a&nbsp;Nation.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;SOMME;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Courage&nbsp;and&nbsp;Bravery&nbsp;Rewarded.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;AT&nbsp;VERDUN;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Saving&nbsp;France&nbsp;from&nbsp;the&nbsp;Enemy.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;UNDER&nbsp;THE&nbsp;STARS&nbsp;AND&nbsp;STRIPES;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Leading&nbsp;the&nbsp;American&nbsp;Troops&nbsp;to&nbsp;the&nbsp;Firing&nbsp;Line.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;HAIG&nbsp;IN&nbsp;FLANDERS;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Fighting&nbsp;Canadians&nbsp;of&nbsp;Vimy&nbsp;Ridge.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;PERSHING&nbsp;IN&nbsp;FRANCE;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Over&nbsp;the&nbsp;Top&nbsp;at&nbsp;Chateau&nbsp;Thierry.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;MARSHAL&nbsp;FOCH;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Closing&nbsp;Days&nbsp;of&nbsp;the&nbsp;Great&nbsp;World&nbsp;War.<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Allies</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:smaller;'>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>With the Navy</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE
+</p>
+<p>
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+</p>
+<p>
+All Cloth Bound
+</p>
+<p>
+Copyright Titles
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+Postage 10c Extra
+</p>
+<p>
+Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads,
+meet each other in an unusual way soon after the declaration
+of war. Circumstances place them on board the British cruiser,
+“The Sylph,” and from there on, they share adventures with
+the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, the author,
+is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably the
+many exciting adventures of the two boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;ON&nbsp;THE&nbsp;NORTH&nbsp;SEA&nbsp;PATROL;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Striking&nbsp;the&nbsp;First&nbsp;Blow&nbsp;at&nbsp;the&nbsp;German&nbsp;Fleet.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;UNDER&nbsp;TWO&nbsp;FLAGS;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Sweeping&nbsp;the&nbsp;Enemy&nbsp;from&nbsp;the&nbsp;Sea.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;FLYING&nbsp;SQUADRON;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Naval&nbsp;Raiders&nbsp;of&nbsp;the&nbsp;Great&nbsp;War.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;TERROR&nbsp;OF&nbsp;THE&nbsp;SEA;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Last&nbsp;Shot&nbsp;of&nbsp;Submarine&nbsp;D-16.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;UNDER&nbsp;THE&nbsp;SEA;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Vanishing&nbsp;Submarine.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BALTIC;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Through&nbsp;Fields&nbsp;of&nbsp;Ice&nbsp;to&nbsp;Aid&nbsp;the&nbsp;Czar.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;AT&nbsp;JUTLAND;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Greatest&nbsp;Naval&nbsp;Battle&nbsp;of&nbsp;History.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;UNCLE&nbsp;SAM’S&nbsp;CRUISERS;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;Convoying&nbsp;the&nbsp;American&nbsp;Army&nbsp;Across&nbsp;the&nbsp;Atlantic.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;SUBMARINE&nbsp;D-32;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Fall&nbsp;of&nbsp;the&nbsp;Russian&nbsp;Empire.<br />
+&#160;<br/>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BOY&nbsp;ALLIES&nbsp;WITH&nbsp;THE&nbsp;VICTORIOUS&nbsp;FLEETS;<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;or,&nbsp;The&nbsp;Fall&nbsp;of&nbsp;the&nbsp;German&nbsp;Navy.<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Oakdale Academy Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+BY MORGAN SCOTT
+</p>
+<p>
+A series of real boys’ stories at the Oakdale Academy.
+Ben Stone, the hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances
+and against great odds.
+</p>
+<p>
+Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and
+sports of academy life, with adventures, mysteries and
+clever descriptions.
+</p>
+<p>
+Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would
+like to read.
+</p>
+<p>
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+</p>
+<p>
+JACKETS IN COLORS
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+Copyright Titles
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BEN&nbsp;STONE&nbsp;AT&nbsp;OAKDALE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;OF&nbsp;OAKDALE&nbsp;ACADEMY<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;RIVAL&nbsp;PITCHERS&nbsp;OF&nbsp;OAKDALE<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;OAKDALE&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;IN&nbsp;CAMP<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;GREAT&nbsp;OAKDALE&nbsp;MYSTERY<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;THE&nbsp;NEW&nbsp;BOYS&nbsp;AT&nbsp;OAKDALE<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Rex Kingdon Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By GORDON BRADDOCK
+</p>
+<p>
+A fine series of stories for boys of High School age,
+written in an interesting and instructive style.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested
+in outdoor games, enters into the school sports with
+enthusiasm. A rattling good baseball story holds the
+interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood friends
+establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery,
+jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their
+interest and finally cement their friendship.
+</p>
+<p>
+Stories boys will want to read.
+</p>
+<p>
+CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS.
+</p>
+<p>
+Copyright Titles.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+</p>
+<p>
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+</p>
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;REX&nbsp;KINGDON&nbsp;OF&nbsp;RIDGEWOOD&nbsp;HIGH<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;REX&nbsp;KINGDON&nbsp;IN&nbsp;THE&nbsp;NORTH&nbsp;WOODS<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;REX&nbsp;KINGDON&nbsp;AT&nbsp;WALCOTT&nbsp;HALL<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;REX&nbsp;KINGDON&nbsp;BEHIND&nbsp;THE&nbsp;BAT<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;REX&nbsp;KINGDON&nbsp;ON&nbsp;STORM&nbsp;ISLAND<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 36314-h.htm or 36314-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/36314-h/images/cover.jpg b/36314-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ead531
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-h/images/cover.jpg
diff --git a/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png b/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9344809
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png
diff --git a/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09b6c76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
diff --git a/36314.txt b/36314.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4a7cca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6610 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+Author: Gerald Breckenridge
+
+Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?" Page 40]
+
+
+
+
+                             THE RADIO BOYS
+                               RESCUE THE
+                         LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+
+                         By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+                               AUTHOR OF
+
+           "The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border," "The Radio
+             Boys on Secret Service Duty," "The Radio Boys
+               with the Revenue Guards," "The Radio Boys'
+                    Search for the Inca's Treasure."
+
+
+                           A. L. BURT COMPANY
+                          Publishers--New York
+
+
+
+
+                         THE RADIO BOYS SERIES
+
+                A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages
+
+                         By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+                  The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border
+                 The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty
+                 The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards
+             The Radio Boys' Search for the Inca's Treasure
+            The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+                            Copyright, 1922
+                         By A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+            THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+
+                           Made in "U. S. A."
+
+
+
+
+The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.--THE LOST EXPEDITION.
+
+
+"Strange that you boys should be talking about the 'Lost Expedition.'"
+
+"Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?"
+
+"Because I have just come from a conference with a man who knows all
+there is to know about it. And he was telling me----."
+
+Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into the sitting room, and looked
+at the faces of the three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and the
+latter's chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who together had gone
+through many adventures related in other books of "The Radio Boys"
+series.
+
+It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here the four,
+arriving from South America, after finding and losing "The Enchanted
+City of the Incas" as told of in "The Radio Boys Search for the Incas'
+Treasure," were ensconced on their way to their Long Island homes.
+
+"Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?"
+
+"Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us," added Frank "We're curious."
+
+"What do you know about the 'Lost Expedition?'" countered Mr. Hampton.
+"I stood in the doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing
+it."
+
+"Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper tells," said big Bob,
+grumblingly, "And the fellow that wrote this yarn didn't know very much.
+It's mostly talk."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"Speculation, I suppose," he said. "Well, that's the best the writer
+could do. The facts aren't generally known. However, wait a minute until
+I get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. It's raining
+again."
+
+"Raining again?" said Jack. "Doesn't it ever stop here?"
+
+"Oh, that's just the Seattle Winter," said his father. "The rains are
+necessary, and, really, they are so mild one doesn't mind them after a
+time."
+
+"Huh," grumbled big Bob. "I'd think these people would grow web feet."
+
+"Look here," said Mr. Hampton, after getting into his smoking jacket and
+slippers. "What I learned today ought to interest you boys."
+
+"Why, Dad?" Jack leaned forward eagerly.
+
+"Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it," said his father. "Then
+you'll see."
+
+Then, while the three young fellows paid close attention, Mr. Hampton
+proceeded to relate the story of the "Lost Expedition" so-called, the
+expedition headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer,
+which had outfitted at Seattle the previous Spring, set out for an
+unnamed destination in the Far North, and had never been heard of since.
+
+A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had attended the departure of
+this expedition in its sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses
+and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers and among the
+hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. Some said confidently that the
+expedition was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by airplane, for
+an airplane was carried dismantled on the schooner. Others declared the
+object sought was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors of vast
+gold fields found in the past by this or that old-time prospector who
+died without making his secret public, were brought to light and
+furbished up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to bear out the
+contention.
+
+"But none of these assumptions," said Mr. Hampton, "was correct. The
+real object of the expedition never was made public, for the very good
+reason that none of those in the know--and their numbers are few--ever
+betrayed a word, or hint, of the secret."
+
+"And you know it?" asked Jack, with quickened interest.
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly.
+
+"Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us," said Frank.
+
+"You better, Mr. Hampton, or he'll burst with curiosity," advised big
+Bob. "Show that boy a secret and he's not content until he takes it
+apart."
+
+"How about yourself?" said Frank, indignantly. "I suppose you don't care
+to hear, hey? Oh, no."
+
+Mr. Hampton interrupted.
+
+"Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. I know all you boys
+are eager to know the answer to the mystery of the 'Lost Expedition.'
+Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is----"
+
+He paused. Then added:
+
+"Oil."
+
+"Oil?"
+
+All three listeners asked the question as if in one breath. Big Bob was
+no less inquisitive than the others, despite his twigging of Frank for
+his curiosity.
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"Yes," he said. "Oil."
+
+For a moment he was silent, collecting his thoughts. Then he leaned
+forward, cleared his throat and continued:
+
+"Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. The Northland for you,
+probably, is invested in a mysterious glamor. It means either men
+struggling through incalculable hardships to win their way to the North
+Pole, to the top of the world, or else fighting against all the mighty
+forces of Nature in a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden
+wealth from the bosom of the Earth.
+
+"Ah, yes," he continued, smiling slightly, "I know how you feel.
+Whenever our preconceived and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense
+of disappointment. But, consider for a moment, the meaning of this
+matter. Here, far away in the Northland, in a remote district to which
+so far as known only two white men have ever penetrated, lies a mighty
+river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean, along the banks of which are
+such vast deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into the
+river to such an extent that the river in reality is a river of oil and
+never freezes."
+
+"A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?" said Jack. "Do you expect us
+to believe that?"
+
+"And flowing north, too?" said Frank, whose quick mind had seized upon
+that point of contrariety in Nature.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled.
+
+"Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I'll admit," he said. "Yet that this
+river does flow north is undoubted. That it never freezes, however, is
+an exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots so much oil seeps
+into the water that soft spots are formed.
+
+"Hitherto," he continued, "there have been only two rivers known that
+flow north into the Arctic in that region--the MacKenzie and the
+Coppermine, along the shores of which are vast deposits of copper that
+some day, undoubtedly, will be opened up to exploitation. However, this
+other northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil field must now
+be added to the list, if the word of the lone explorer is to believed,
+of the one man who has been there and lived to return with the tale."
+
+"But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?"
+objected Jack.
+
+"So I did. So I did," declared his father. "And two there were--Cameron
+and Farrell. But Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell
+alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally reach Edmonton with
+the tale. Now he, too, is gone--for he was a member of Thorwaldsson's
+'Lost Expedition.'
+
+"When he reached Edmonton, a thriving Canadian city, Farrell, an
+adventurous fellow who at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil
+fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent operators which
+once employed me there as superintendent, realized the value of his
+discovery and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with Anderson,
+the big man of the syndicate. Anderson saw at once the importance of the
+find. But he also saw that Farrell's marvelous oil field would virtually
+have to be rediscovered before steps to develop it could be taken. For,
+in struggling through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss of
+his compass, had been turned about in Winter fogs, had lain delirious
+for a long period in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic
+Circle and, in general, had suffered so many hardships that his mind was
+clouded and he had no clear idea of where lay this oil field.
+
+"Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell's report that he
+decided to outfit an expedition to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and
+Cameron into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming upon the
+oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone in through Alaska, that was the way
+which Thorwaldsson's expedition took."
+
+Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing his father closely, now
+put a hand on his arm.
+
+"And now what, Dad?" he asked.
+
+"Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after the 'Lost Expedition' and
+try to relocate the oil fields as well as find some trace of
+Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton.
+
+"I thought so," said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. "When do we
+start?"
+
+"We?" Mr. Hampton chuckled. "I like that. Just as cool as you please
+about it, too. We? Well, well."
+
+"Do we leave at once?" asked Jack, imperturbably, not one whit disturbed
+by his father's pleasantry.
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+"Whether I take you at all is questionable," he said. "Certainly, I have
+no intention of going at once. If I go at all, it will not be until the
+Arctic Summer begins."
+
+"Meantime, I suppose, I'm to return to Yale."
+
+"Yes, you've missed a half year, thanks to our adventures in search of
+the Incas' treasure in South America, but that is no reason why you
+should miss the balance of the term. I'll tell you what," he added,
+taking pity on the three, "if you fellows go back to college and study
+hard to make up for lost time until Summer, and if the 'Lost Expedition'
+is still lost at that time, why, I'll see what can be done."
+
+"Hurray," cried Jack. "That's a promise."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.--SETTING OUT FROM NOME.
+
+
+"Well, boys, where do we go from here?"
+
+It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a heap of luggage on
+the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at
+the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. Hampton deep in
+conversation with a short sturdy figure of a man, clad in khaki
+breeches, high leather boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away.
+The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the independent oil
+interests at Nome.
+
+It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the boys were beginning to
+realize meant hot weather, indeed. All had their coats off, and were
+perspiring. Only an hour before they had been put ashore by the steamer
+from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their
+luggage while he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed to meet
+them at the landing as they had expected.
+
+"Where do we go from here?" Jack repeated Frank's question. "Well, if
+you ask me, almost any place would be better than Nome."
+
+He looked with disfavor at the little town sprawling at the base of the
+mountain.
+
+"Not just what I expected," he said. "I've heard of Nome all my life, it
+seems, and now, just look at it. Why, it's hardly a spot on the map."
+
+"But what a history it has had, Jack," said Frank. "Don't judge by
+appearances too much. Remember this town has seen the Gold Rush."
+
+"I wonder what Dad is talking about," said Jack, ignoring Frank's
+remark.
+
+"Probably discussing how soon we can get away," said big Bob, speaking
+for the first time. "At any rate," he added, "I see your father and his
+companion pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore."
+
+At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for Mr. Hampton and his
+companion ended their conversation and approached the boys.
+
+"Well, boys, we'll soon be under way," said Mr. Hampton. Whereupon he
+introduced Farnum all around. The latter was a prepossessing man with a
+weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, above which jutted a
+promontory of a nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes.
+
+"That is our schooner out there," Mr. Hampton continued, indicating the
+boat to which Bob earlier had drawn attention. "Mr. Farnum," he added,
+"has stated casually around Nome that he is taking a party of hunters up
+the MacKenzie. We'll get away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a
+stay in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid inquiries into our
+aims. The story Farnum has told will do well enough."
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+"Just a white lie," he said, grinning. "No use letting the curious know
+all your secrets."
+
+Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end of which period the
+luggage was safely stowed aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw
+began to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and draw away from
+Nome, the boys leaned overside and watched the prospect dwindle in the
+distance until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside like a
+painted backdrop in the theater.
+
+"Hurray," cried Bob, at last, "we're off for the Great Unknown."
+
+"Yes," agreed Frank, "I really feel that way, too. All the way up from
+Seattle, I felt as if I were nothing more than a tourist, traveling a
+beaten route. But this, well, this is different."
+
+After that they were silent a long time, while the schooner shook and
+throbbed and steadily pushed its way up the coast, each boy busy with
+his thoughts. Yet those thoughts were much the same.
+
+Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on their return from
+South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the
+Incas, they had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost
+time in the first half of the term. All three were clever and had the
+knack of concentrating at their tasks, and all as a consequence had
+succeeded in making up back work in classroom and lecture. As a result
+they had entered the succeeding term, or at least were prepared to do
+so, without conditions. This was a matter for congratulation, indeed,
+and deserving of especial reward.
+
+That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both decided
+that their respective sons and Frank, Mr. Temple's ward, should be
+permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip to attempt to find some
+trace of the "Lost Expedition" and of the reputed oil field in search of
+which Thorwaldsson had set out.
+
+"Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of the Northland," Mr. Hampton
+had explained to Mr. Temple, "and, as a consequence, I do not consider
+that we will run any danger. Our greatest danger, of course, would be to
+become trapped in the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the
+rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For I do not intend to
+spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by
+the early Fall.
+
+"That," he added, "will give us plenty of opportunity to seek traces of
+the 'Lost Expedition.' I have been in communication with Farnum. His
+plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and
+then strike eastward. We will leave the gasoline schooner to make its
+way back to Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our journey on
+rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding the River of Oil flowing north.
+
+"If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings of approaching
+Winter come, we will turn to the southeast and come out in northern
+Canada.
+
+"The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will be of inestimable value
+for them. It will make them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon
+themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to be youths of that
+sort already," he added, smiling. "If you could have seen them in South
+America, George, it would have done your heart good."
+
+"I know, I know," said Mr. Temple, shaking his head slightly, and
+smiling. "Several years ago, that time when you were captive in Mexico
+and they set out to rescue you--"
+
+"Yes, and did," supplied Mr. Hampton.
+
+"And did," agreed Mr. Temple. "Well, they showed the stuff that was in
+them then. And the very same Summer, when I took them to San Francisco
+on what I considered was going to be a little pleasure trip combining a
+bit of business with sight-seeing, and--"
+
+"And you became involved with the Chinese smugglers, and imprisoned, and
+ended up by busting up their show--"
+
+"Yes," resumed Mr. Temple, "and ended up by bringing the whole outfit
+into the hands of Uncle Sam's men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly
+showed their calibre."
+
+"So, I reckon it will be all right to take them along on this trip,"
+said Mr. Hampton.
+
+"I suppose so," agreed Mr. Temple. "But innocent as it looks now, I have
+my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, there
+you can look for things to move fast. Trouble courts them, it seems to
+me."
+
+Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on the trip into
+the Far North. And wildly excited they had gone about their
+preparations. Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing up
+radio field equipment of every sort right at home. But his father had
+dissuaded him, pointing out that Seattle was a large city and there
+everything necessary in the way of an outfit could be purchased, thus
+saving the trouble and expense of transporting overland to the Pacific
+port.
+
+"All right, Dad," Jack had agreed. "But, remember, the selection of the
+radio equipment is to be left to the fellows and me. We've had a lot of
+experience with the value of radio when in a tight place, especially in
+South America, and we want to put that experience to use and be prepared
+for every contingency this time."
+
+To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with the result that in Seattle
+the three boys had revelled in the radio equipment stores, which they
+found well stocked, as the use of radio had developed greatly on the
+Pacific.
+
+In consequence, their outfit included radio field equipment of the most
+powerful, yet most compact, designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully
+realized the value of having the very best yet he had issued a solemn
+warning that bulk must be considered.
+
+"We will have to travel as lightly as consistent with safety and the
+purpose of our expedition," he had said. "So don't pile up anything too
+heavy or bulky, or it will have to be discarded."
+
+Jack knew well that the distance which can be covered with a radiophone
+transmitter is only about one-fourth as great as that of a wireless
+telegraph transmitter having the same input of initial current.
+Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly for aid, over long
+distances, the wireless telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as
+equipment for it would be less bulky to transport than equipment for
+transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, he was reluctant to place
+their sole dependence upon the wireless telegraph.
+
+"You see, Dad," he had pointed out to his father, when the outfit was
+being assembled, "to reach the outside we shall have to depend upon
+wireless telegraph. But we will also need the radiophone for this
+reason: that each one of us ought to have a means of calling the main
+party in case we become separated through going on scouting or hunting
+expeditions, or for any reason."
+
+"Well, that sounds sensible," his father had agreed. "Go ahead with your
+plans, but, remember, hold down the bulk."
+
+The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing five hundred miles
+was assembled, but also Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one
+for each of their party and for Farnum, which the user could pack in his
+clothing and which had a radius up to twenty-five miles. The instrument
+was Jack's now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a setting
+only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Formerly an umbrella as aerial
+had been employed but Jack had done entirely away with that in his
+improved set.
+
+"Well, fellows," said Jack, at last, as Nome faded entirely from view,
+"I wonder what lies ahead. I wonder whether Thorwaldsson's expedition
+was stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly likely, as in that
+case surely somebody would have managed to get word to the outside by
+wireless or airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise attack by
+Indians at night, as I understand from Dad that Farnum believes."
+
+"Is that so," said Frank, in surprise. "That's the first I heard of
+that."
+
+"Yes," said Jack. "Dad told me of it when we were coming aboard this
+schooner. He said it was the first intimation Farnum had given him that
+such might be the case, and also his first intimation that there were
+hostile Indians in this country into which we are going. If it weren't
+too late, he told me, he would have turned back rather than imperil us,
+as it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear of the
+hostile Indian country."
+
+"Whew," said Bob, "this sounds interesting, hey, what?"
+
+His eyes began to shine.
+
+"Old Bob. Always ready for a fight," said Frank. "Well, let's give him
+one."
+
+And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big fellow and a tussle
+followed that ended only when they almost fell overboard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.--IN THE WILDERNESS.
+
+
+"Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner."
+
+It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner which was eaten
+on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River,
+one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. How long it was since
+they had left Nome none could tell, for in that land of perpetual
+daylight it was hard to keep track of time.
+
+"Tomorrow," said big Bob, "when is tomorrow?"
+
+He looked at the sun which was still high, despite the lateness of the
+hour, and would make only an ineffectual attempt to dip below the
+horizon at midnight, before resuming its upward climb.
+
+Everybody laughed.
+
+"What a topsy turvy land," said Jack. "Well, I, for one, will be glad to
+go ashore and stretch my legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far,
+I'm eager to get started."
+
+"Same here," agreed Frank.
+
+Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the monotony of the trip up
+the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American
+continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of course, occasional ice floes
+had been encountered and the little schooner had been compelled to make
+wide detours. But that was to be expected in that Far Northern latitude.
+
+In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice
+was only recently dissipated from the great river. There, at a dock
+where a little sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in Summer
+was tied up for repairs, they had replenished their stock of gasoline
+and then continued the ascent, passing between willowed banks, where
+huddled occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, with the
+snow-capped mountain peaks always in the distance.
+
+Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon had
+put beyond them all appearance of the presence of man.
+
+"This is the way Thorwaldsson's party expected to go," Farnum had said.
+"For it was this route which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors,
+followed on their way in. They were prospecting for gold, you know, had
+no idea of finding oil. It was their original intention to strike
+northeast across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare Indian in
+search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he reached the outside, that
+he had found traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold."
+
+Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian a number of days until, in
+fact, the extra supplies of gasoline which had been taken aboard on
+leaving the MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became advisable
+for the party to go ashore in order that the schooner might turn about
+and have sufficient fuel to make its way downstream to the supply depot.
+
+It was a period of time that, in fact, however, could hardly be
+considered in terms of days. So far north had the party come that the
+sun shone perpetually. It was only at midnight, for a brief space, that
+it dipped to the horizon.
+
+And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for all concerned, but
+especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner forged ahead,
+there was not a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise.
+Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, probably an escape from some
+Eskimo herd, which would be surprised standing in the water, and
+breaking for the timber on the bank at their approach. Again brown bear
+would be seen on the bank, or beaver swimming strongly across the
+stream. As for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All Bob, Frank
+and Jack did for hours on end was to lean overside with hooks baited
+with bacon rind dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled
+beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on wild duck or geese, picked
+off with a light rifle.
+
+Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay ashore
+on the morrow. And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they
+lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an awning shading them from
+the sun.
+
+Early the next morning they went ashore with their outfit, and then
+watched the gasoline schooner throb off downstream, around the last
+bend, and out of sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came
+to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation natural to their
+situation. The last settlement was two hundred miles behind them. They
+were going into the great unknown, into the regions marked "Unexplored"
+on the maps of that great northern rim of the North American continent.
+
+True, the weather was fine now and the country green and pleasant about
+them. But how long would that endure? What if they were beset by
+oncoming Winter before they could make their way to the outside? What if
+they were attacked by hostile Indians? What obscure fate had met the
+Thorwaldsson expedition, traces of which they sought?
+
+Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as they stood in unwonted
+silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them.
+
+"No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his job."
+
+With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted men. They hailed from Nome,
+but were old-timers who had been up and down Alaska for many years. Both
+were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who would be useful in helping
+distribute the burden of packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable
+value in keeping the party supplied with game as well as in almost any
+situation that might arise. They were grizzled, weather-beaten men of
+medium height, both with stout frames, and because of their long
+existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. Their names
+were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were "Dick" and "Art" to
+each other and the other members of the party. The boys had taken a
+liking to both.
+
+Two light canoes had been brought along from Nome, lashed to the deck of
+the schooner, and in these the seven set out. The boys with Dick
+occupied one canoe, the other three men with a larger portion of the
+luggage the other.
+
+When everything was in readiness, following a light breakfast on the
+bank, the two canoes set out, that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and
+Art taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids was encountered,
+and around this the first portage was made. Then once more they took to
+the water.
+
+Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed steadily forward,
+until almost a week had elapsed. On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a
+whoop of joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the stream at a
+little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had detected a small cairn of
+stones on the edge of the brush, and when the others came up with him
+and stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing the stones
+comprising the mound.
+
+"A marker," was the only explanation he vouchsafed. "Must have been left
+by Thorwaldsson. Ah."
+
+At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a small metal box in his
+hand. The lid was rusted on, and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a
+knife and gouged it off while the others crowded around him. Inside was
+a fold of oilskin, which he ripped open. A folded paper was revealed,
+which he opened. Then he read aloud the message thereon.
+
+"It's from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen," he said, and read:
+
+  "Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, Wash., that
+  I passed here July 2. Party intact with exception of crew sent as he
+  ordered. Farrell says we are on right track.
+
+                                                       "Thorwaldsson."
+
+"What does he mean by that reference to the crew?" asked Jack.
+
+"Well," said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, "as your father knows,
+that is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation, that
+about the ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard the ship
+and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But of ship or crew, we have
+found no trace. Search for the ship was prosecuted at the first
+opportunity this Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the
+MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could gather was an
+occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had gone by, on its
+way out, at night. A ship that might have been the Viking,
+Thorwaldsson's craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, the skeleton crew
+feared to winter in the MacKenzie and started for the outside, and was
+caught in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to weather. Only
+three or four men were to be left aboard. That is the only explanation I
+could think of."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"As I said before," he stated, "that seems a reasonable explanation.
+Three or four men, left alone, might have feared to face the Winter iced
+in, or might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason that
+appeared good enough to them, might have decided to violate orders and
+start out. As to the disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned
+vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a trace."
+
+"But, Dad, you've said nothing about this," protested Jack.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly.
+
+"There are a lot of things which I know I have never told you, Jack," he
+said. "If I really have neglected to speak of this, however, it has been
+through an oversight. I've had a lot of things on my mind. But, come. We
+know this is the way Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. So
+let us push on. We have still four hours of travel to do before making
+camp."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.--STRIKING GOLD.
+
+
+Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the boys, during the weeks
+that followed. They were so far north that the sun shone constantly, and
+never a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to drive them to
+take shelter. When they camped it was usually in the dim cool recesses
+of a forest of firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found the
+only semblance of night.
+
+Never before had they known the delights of camp life, as they were now
+living it. It was like being on one continuous picnic. For a
+considerable period of time they found themselves in a mesh or network
+of streams and lakes, through which Tom Farnum guided them steadily
+northeastward, with never a sign of doubt as to the course to take.
+
+They wondered about this, asked why they took certain forks of river or
+stream, why avoided others. Tom answered readily enough. From Mr.
+Anderson he had received a minute report containing every scrap of data
+Farrell had been able to furnish as to the course taken by him and
+Cameron on going into the wild country.
+
+"So you see," he added, "while I may not be following in the exact
+footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet I am going over the same general route.
+Sooner or later we will cover the same ground which he covered again,
+and then I expect we shall find some other record which he has left
+behind, just as in the case of that note on the Hare Indian."
+
+This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They
+dismissed, or practically so, from their minds all worry as to the "Lost
+Expedition." They were too busy enjoying life as they found it each
+waiting moment.
+
+Around each bend in a stream that their paddles took them, on the shore
+of each deep, silent lake, was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear
+grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a runaway from some Eskimo
+herd on Summer pasture as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, and
+starting with a snort into the timber at their approach. Occasionally a
+gray wolf could be seen loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver
+cut across stream.
+
+With their light rifles the boys occasionally were permitted to pick off
+some game, usually wild ducks or geese, of which there were numbers
+along the watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. Many a time,
+youthful fingers itched on the trigger, only to be restrained by the
+thought of the cruel uselessness of shooting merely for sport.
+
+Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, none were
+encountered. And at this the boys marvelled. It was as if they had the
+world to themselves. They could not understand it. To them it was a
+paradise.
+
+"Wait till you see this in Winter," said Farnum grimly. "Or rather, pray
+that you never do. It is a land of perpetual night, and the temperature
+is so low that when you stop moving you must have a fire or you will
+freeze to death. And it isn't every day that you can travel. For this
+isn't a land of tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north comes
+storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. Even the creatures of the
+wild cannot stand it, in many cases, and drift to the south."
+
+"But how about the Eskimo?" asked Jack. "This is their country, isn't
+it? How do they stand it?"
+
+"Sometimes they don't," said Farnum. "When the hunting is poor and
+famine stalks through the Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive."
+
+"Where do they live, anyway?" struck in Frank. "Why aren't they around
+here? Why haven't we seen any?"
+
+"They may have seen us," said Farnum, "and are avoiding us. They are a
+timorous people, know the white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo,
+the white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo of all this
+country north of us. Back along the coast of Alaska, of course, some
+sort of contact has been made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with
+the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer they range far and
+wide on the hunt. In the Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic
+Ocean."
+
+"But why?" asked Bob, in surprise. "I should think that would be the
+very place for them to steer away from."
+
+"Oh, no," said Farnum. "You see, all game goes far to the south in
+Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because it is the home of the
+only game left--the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps
+near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air.
+Occasionally he slays a polar bear, too."
+
+"I confess I know very little about the Eskimo," said Jack. "What are
+his weapons?"
+
+"Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and
+wooden knives edged with copper," said Farnum.
+
+"But, a bear," cried Bob, incredulously. "How could an Eskimo kill a
+great polar bear with such weapons?"
+
+"Single-handed, he couldn't," said Farnum. "But when the bear is hunted,
+the whole tribe of hunters go together. They attack in a circle. Their
+spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into
+the body of the bear, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges
+on his tormenters. Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they have him so
+surrounded that he cannot move. Then one dashes in and administers the
+death blow."
+
+"Then necessity forces them to live in tribal groups?" asked Jack.
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+"In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging far, for they are great
+travelers. But in Winter, the hunters are all back with the tribe."
+
+"And the Indians?" asked Frank.
+
+Farnum's face darkened.
+
+"There are not many," he said. "I wish there were less. You may say all
+you please about the 'noble red man.' But all I ever heard about the
+Indians of the Far North doesn't predispose me in their favor. They are
+cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually they hunt somewhat to the south
+of us, and make their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements
+as Winter approaches. Let's hope we encounter none of them."
+
+The boys wondered as they went along whether this were gold-producing
+country into which they were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick,
+their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was usually, at every
+mention of gold his eyes brightened, and he became almost voluble.
+
+"Never been this far north," he said on one occasion, "no white man ever
+has been in here, reckon. But I'd like to stop at the foot o' some of
+these rapids and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like to."
+
+"Let's do it the next rapids we come to," suggested Frank, with eager
+interest. "It wouldn't take long, would it?"
+
+"Orders is not to waste time."
+
+"Well, I'll speak to father," said Jack. "I'm sure he'd let us try it
+just once."
+
+In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt happened to be at the
+foot of a rapids that would necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art
+reported the graveled bank showed signs of "color." Even Farnum, his
+mind concentrated on the task of getting his party along and on the job
+in hand, showed interest when addressed on the subject. With pick and
+pan, therefore, the two men got busy, while the boys watched with
+breathless interest the process of rocking the pan and washing out the
+gravel.
+
+"Whoopee," cried Dick, suddenly. "Thar she is. Color in the pan."
+
+"Sure as I'm born," ejaculated his partner. "Strong, too."
+
+All the boys could discern, however, were some dully gleaming particles
+at the bottom of the pan, out of which most of the gravel had been
+washed with the water. They had half expected to spy nuggets. Farnum and
+Mr. Hampton, however, were as eagerly interested as the two old-timers.
+
+"Try another pan, men," suggested Mr. Hampton. "Let us go a little
+farther upstream."
+
+Once more the process was repeated. This time the pan was rich in "pay"
+and the excitement of the four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing
+dull beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers especially.
+
+Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a clump of rocks in the
+edge of the stream at the very foot of the rapids, standing in his boots
+almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried
+and finally, with a shout of delight, turned to his audience behind him
+on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up
+dripping.
+
+"Look," was all he said.
+
+They gazed, all eyes.
+
+"Well! Well!" cried Art.
+
+A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick's outstretched palm.
+
+"What luck," cried Jack. "You certainly looked in the right place."
+
+"Bet there's more gold around here," cried Frank. "Maybe a bonanza. Who
+knows?"
+
+"You ought to stake a claim, Dick," said big Bob. "I don't know much
+about the process. But that's the thing to do, isn't it?"
+
+"Huh," said Dick, generously. "Belongs to you boys well as me. You
+thought of it."
+
+"Oughter work it," spoke up Art. "Might take out a good poke this
+Summer."
+
+This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object of his expedition.
+
+"No, no, men," he said, sharply. "Don't get bitten with the gold fever
+now. We've got work ahead of us, work that we contracted to do."
+
+"Right," said Dick.
+
+Art's face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement.
+
+"Just the same," said Farnum, softening, "there's nothing to prevent you
+two from staking a claim. Some day you may come back to work it."
+
+"Belongs to us no more'n the rest o' you," said Dick, sturdily. "The
+young fellers wanted us to make a try at it here just for luck, an' we
+did."
+
+A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they were not entitled to
+any part in the find. Finally Dick capitulated.
+
+"Tell you what," he said. "Art an' me'll stake this claim an' file on
+it. But if we ever come back to work her an' she pays, we'll declare you
+in."
+
+"Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition," said Jack,
+turning for confirmation to his comrades. "Isn't that right, fellows."
+
+Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the discussion.
+
+"Good enough," he said. "Let it go at that. Now we must buckle into the
+job. Do you realize we've spent more than two hours here, when we should
+have stopped only a half hour? We've got to make this portage and push
+on. Come on. Everybody to his task."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.--A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR
+
+
+Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with Mr. Hampton and Tom
+Farnum it was a different matter. They were worried, that became
+increasingly plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely refrained
+from saying anything to disturb the boys, Jack took note of his father's
+perturbation and questioned him about it.
+
+"Well, Jack," said his father, "we've been weeks on the trail. We can't
+proceed much farther, without being compelled to start out. And yet so
+far we have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson's party. When we
+entered the MacKenzie, which flows north, we were going to the south.
+Going up the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into the streams,
+rivers and lakes we have been going east. Shortly we shall strike the
+Coppermine, Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by Farrell.
+
+"So far we have made good time. With luck, we shall be able to reach
+that territory before having to turn back or, rather, for we shall not
+retrace our steps, turn south. And we should have struck some other
+trace of Thorwaldsson's party long ere this, if we are on the right
+track. However, you boys need not worry about this, so let's talk of
+something else."
+
+Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his rare periods when he
+wished to be alone with his meditations and did not welcome intrusion
+even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades.
+
+"Dad's plainly worried," he said. And he explained the circumstances.
+"Wish I could find some way to make him forget his troubles," he said.
+
+"I know what," said Frank. "He loves music. We're camping for the night.
+Although"--with a look at the sun--"there isn't much night, is there?
+Well, anyhow, it's nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting
+station was set up last Spring. Let's rig up our radio and see if we
+can't pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you say?"
+
+"I say, good," declared Jack.
+
+"Edmonton's long way off," objected Bob.
+
+"That's nothing," said Jack. "I believe we can pick it up all right."
+
+"In this northern country we have no static problem, anyway," said
+Frank. "We couldn't send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I'll bet we
+can catch."
+
+While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads together in low-whispered
+conversation, poring over a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched
+under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the three boys quietly
+got out the necessary equipment from among the luggage and set to work.
+
+"A short distance up the stream," said Frank, "I saw two firs taller
+than most, standing alone. They're a pretty good distance apart, too. We
+can climb up those trees and string the aerial between them."
+
+They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, and found them exactly
+suited to the purpose. Jack and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns
+climbing the trees, and the wires were strung without any great
+difficulty. They worked busily, and when everything was all connected
+up, Bob looked at his watch.
+
+"Allowing for the difference in time," he said, "they're about ready to
+begin their concert. On what meter wave length does the Edmonton station
+send, Frank?"
+
+"I don't recall. About three hundred and fifty, I suppose. We'll tune up
+and try, anyway."
+
+"What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought of this before," said
+Jack.
+
+"Oh, well," said Bob, "broadcast concerts never did interest me much,
+anyway. I like to do the sending myself, we've always been dog-tired
+when we made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly as Art and
+Dick. If it hadn't been for your thought of bringing some relaxation and
+amusement to your father tonight, Jack, we'd have been asleep already."
+
+"I guess that's right, old thing," Jack replied. "You would have been
+asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she
+say, Frank? Any luck yet?"
+
+Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, looked up mirthfully.
+
+"What do you think of your musical program, Jack?" he replied. "Listen
+in a minute will you? They're sending out a crop and weather report."
+
+Jack's face fell, then he, too, laughed.
+
+"Oh, well," he said, "that's just a preliminary. The concert will
+follow."
+
+"No," answered Frank, who had resumed his headpiece, "now it's a
+bulletin report on the day's news events. Listen. Why, great--"
+
+His voice died. Over his face came an expression of surprise.
+
+Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces attached to the box.
+Over their features also spread amazement and even consternation. They
+listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore off the receivers
+and looked at each other.
+
+"Whew, what do you know about that?" said Bob, in an awed tone.
+
+"And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too," said
+Frank.
+
+"It seems like the hand of fate," declared Jack. "Say, we must get
+father and Tom Farnum."
+
+"Thorwaldsson's airship found wrecked on land near the mouth of the
+MacKenzie," said Bob. "And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat
+it?" he ejaculated again.
+
+"Hey, Jack, wait a minute," cried Frank, running after his companion,
+who already had started for camp. "Discovered by Indians who were
+bringing out furs, did you get that?"
+
+Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued to run. Frank fell in
+beside him, Bob pounding at his heels.
+
+In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the graveled beach by the
+river, where camp had been made for the night. Dick and Art lay
+outstretched in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and apparently had not even
+been aware of the absence of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as
+the latter approached.
+
+"What is it, Jack? What's the matter?" demanded Mr. Hampton, rising to
+his feet in alarm, as he noted his son's excitement.
+
+Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing their setting up of
+the radio, their picking-up of the Edmonton station's nightly program,
+and their discovery that Thorwaldsson's airship had been found far
+behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie.
+
+"It was only a bulletin news report, Dad," Jack explained, "yet I
+suppose it contains all the facts. Evidently the discovery of the
+airship had been made weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the
+MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, of course, it took a
+long time for the news to reach civilization. It was just made public
+today. The very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. It
+certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn't it, Dad? If we had waited
+until tomorrow, or set up the radio yesterday, probably we would not
+have known of this discovery."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his mind was busy with the
+problem.
+
+"Did the report state any message or papers of any sort were found on
+the body of the aviator?"
+
+"No. Only that the body had been there a long time, as nothing but the
+skeleton remained."
+
+"And that was all?"
+
+"That was all the definite information," said Frank. "Of course, there
+was a word or two of speculation as to what had occurred. The theory was
+advanced that the aviator was flying to summon aid for Thorwaldsson, who
+was in some predicament, but that some accident occurred to his engine
+while flying, and he fell to his death."
+
+"A plausible enough theory," said Farnum. "But, in that case, I can't
+understand why the aviator did not bear some message from Thorwaldsson.
+Can you, Mr. Hampton?"
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+"That's not the only puzzling thing," he said. "The disappearance from
+the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson's ship, the death of the aviator, the lack
+of message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson and his party,
+Thorwaldsson's failure to send any radio messages--all these need
+explaining.
+
+"We must face the fact," he continued, "that some disaster of a totally
+unexpected nature has befallen Thorwaldsson's expedition. And I mean by
+that a disaster of man's agency. They were prepared for practically all
+eventualities in their grapple with nature. Although the Winter was
+severe, yet they were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the
+country, and were prepared in every way for a lengthy stay. Even if
+worst came to worst, and Winter proved too much for them, some would
+have survived and brought out word of what had befallen."
+
+"Then you think, Dad--"
+
+Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed.
+
+"I think, Jack," said the latter firmly, "that it is time to take you
+boys into our complete confidence, Farnum and I have been talking this
+matter over. We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or group of
+men has knowledge of Farrell's discovery of the river of oil, and is
+working against us. How to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do
+not know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson's employ, somebody high
+in his confidence, got some word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an
+unguarded moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you know, is a
+vital necessity of the world. Discovery of a vast new field would make
+great fortunes.
+
+"Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell's discovery, would realize that
+the only way to come upon it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson
+expedition, dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, strike. In
+other words, when the field was rediscovered by Farrell, wipe out the
+Thorwaldsson expedition, and claim possession.
+
+"Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with this theory. The
+disappearance of Thorwaldsson's ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it
+traveled only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading posts on
+the great river. It has never been heard of since. It might very easily
+have been scuttled and sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in
+some little bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would
+mean that the crew was bought up, but that is not an impossibility, for
+men I am sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, the
+aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, may have sought to make
+his escape to the outside when Thorwaldsson was captured--as I believe
+likely--and may have paid with his life for his devotion, through some
+unforeseen accident to his machine."
+
+The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke silence.
+
+"But, Dad, how terrible," he said in a shocked tone. "To think of men
+being so unscrupulous."
+
+"Not all men, Jack," said his father. "Remember that."
+
+"Mr. Hampton," said Frank. "What do you intend to do?"
+
+"Frankly, I don't know," said the latter. "Now that we are within
+striking distance of our objective--the river of oil--I do not want to
+give up. If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it before
+necessity compels us to flee south to escape oncoming Winter. That will
+mean that we can map the route for future operation. I had at one time,
+too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some hope that we would
+be able to follow the river out into the Arctic and discover a route of
+approach by water. But we may not have time for that. However, once we
+do locate the river by land approach, we will have a pretty accurate
+idea of whether it can be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in
+Summer.
+
+"But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and the rest of us, in the
+light of what we suspect lies ahead, I do not know. We shall have to
+sleep over it."
+
+After some further conversation, all returned to where the boys had
+rigged up the radio. Dick and Art were childishly delighted at the
+concert, the first in their experience. Farnum was almost equally
+stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot his worries in
+enjoyment of the music. As showmen, the boys were in the element.
+
+More than an hour passed, and the concert was still in progress, when
+Frank, who had been absent unnoted suddenly approached from the thick
+forest of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with a face so
+pale that Jack, who first caught sight of him, became alarmed.
+
+"What is it, Frank?" he asked, seizing his comrade by an arm.
+
+For a moment Frank was speechless. He swallowed convulsively, but was
+unable to make a reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, and
+all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing number of the
+concert, as they stared at him.
+
+With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards the point of land, making a
+bend in the stream, beyond which lay their camp.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.--INDIANS!
+
+
+"Indians."
+
+That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over the faces of Mr.
+Hampton, Farnum and the two men, Dick and Art, came looks of alarm.
+
+"In camp," asked Jack, a sudden thought striking him. "Maybe they're
+just visitors."
+
+But Farnum shook his head decisively, before Frank could reply.
+
+"The only Indians in this country hate the white man," he said. "They
+have had some cause, goodness knows. But the point is, they hate us."
+Turning abruptly to Frank, he said:
+
+"Do they know where we are? Were you seen?"
+
+"I was approaching our camp from this side," said Frank, who had
+recovered his speech. "I was in search of a handkerchief, for I've got a
+little cold, and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, my feet made
+no sound on the pine needles, and I was screened from the camp by the
+trees. Suddenly, as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians or
+more steal out of the trees on the other side of the clearing. They fell
+upon our belongings and started going through them. I hurried away to
+warn you."
+
+"Quick," said Farnum, "there is no time to lose. We are seven and all
+armed. They saw us depart and probably thought this was a grand chance
+to rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were coming back at once.
+I imagine they are just thieves. Well, we'll give them a lesson. Come
+on."
+
+Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum's arm.
+
+"Even if they are thieves," he said. "We want no bloodshed. Shoot over
+their heads, if shooting is necessary."
+
+Farnum's face fell.
+
+"All right, sir," he said. "Just as you say. But we'll have to hurry, or
+they'll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we would
+be out of luck, indeed."
+
+With beating hearts, the party stole back through the trees, spread out
+with intervals of several yards between each. Dick and Art, who never
+stirred anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers who
+knew what it meant to be separated from their weapons in this wild land,
+were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, as
+had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his, and held the middle
+position. The other four were armed with their revolvers.
+
+As they neared the fringe of trees forming the last rampart between them
+and camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could
+see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered luggage, which
+had been opened and tossed about near the fire. Another group was at the
+water's edge, loading the canoes which had been drawn up on the sand.
+
+"Just in time," thought Jack.
+
+Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure of a man emerging from
+the little tent which Mr. Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer
+from rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off night chills in case
+they were late in getting out of the country, but which at present
+frequently was not set up on their halts. The present occasion, however,
+a whim to sleep under canvas rather than the fir trees had possessed
+him, and the tent had been set up.
+
+The man who caught Jack's attention differed little in dress from Dick
+and Art, but about his head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in
+piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased by his long,
+drooping black mustaches. Jack could see him clearly, and thought that
+seldom had he looked upon a more villainous countenance. The fellow held
+a piece of paper in his hand, and was reading it with evident
+satisfaction.
+
+A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on his left, drew Jack's
+attention. He looked at the latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum's
+eyes were ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it at the man
+before the tent. The next moment there was a report, the paper fell from
+the fellow's hand, and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain.
+
+"Just the hand," Jack overheard Farnum say in a tone of vexation, as he
+prepared to fire again. But the other, seizing his wounded hand in the
+unwounded one, did not wait for the attack. Running low and in zigzag
+fashion, he darted for the cover of the trees on the other side of the
+camp, at the same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his
+companions.
+
+"Fire," shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot after the fleeing man,
+that kicked up the dirt at his heels. "That's Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to
+kill."
+
+Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his father's exhortation fired
+high. The volley was general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum
+came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from the four revolvers of the
+others poured a succession of shots. It sounded as if an army were
+opening fire from the woods.
+
+The Indians did not stay upon the order of their going. Those grouped
+about the luggage ran after the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo
+the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed away along the
+graveled bank of the stream. One, however, sought to launch the canoes
+into the swift current before departing, but his first effort was
+ineffectual, and any further attempt was stopped by a bullet from Mr.
+Hampton's revolver, which winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying
+after his fellows.
+
+"Dick, Art, here," cried Farnum, peremptorily.
+
+The two ran to his side.
+
+"That was Lupo the Wolf," Farnum explained rapidly, his voice betraying
+his excitement. "You can guess what that means?"
+
+The others nodded, with compressed lips.
+
+"I want you to trail them. Don't run into danger, but see if their camp
+is nearby."
+
+With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen were off at the run,
+not crossing the open camp, but circling it amongst the trees. Then
+Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at his heels.
+
+"That wasn't just an attack from Indian thieves," he said. "Mr.
+Hampton"--and his voice took on a solemn tone--"that was a blow from the
+enemy."
+
+"What do you mean?"
+
+"They were desperadoes under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf."
+
+"And he?"
+
+"He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and the most notorious
+bad man in the north. He is known not only throughout the length and
+breadth of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, too. From
+Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he has gambled,
+fought, knifed, murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, you
+consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To a certain extent, the
+towns and mining camps have grown more orderly and there are sheriffs
+'north of 54.' But might still rules in the camps."
+
+Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on his rifle. As it was
+evident, however, that he had not yet finished, the others did not
+interrupt. Presently he resumed.
+
+"Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men of the lowest type come
+there in Summer, in droves, lured by the high wages. They form temporary
+alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, they depart. You can
+guess what the children of such lawless unions are like. They are
+cross-breeds, inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics of
+the human race. It is from them Lupo recruits his following."
+
+"But why should they be away over here, in this unpeopled wilderness?"
+asked Mr. Hampton. "Unless--" He paused and looked questioningly at
+Farnum.
+
+The latter nodded.
+
+"That's it," he said. "Why? Unless, if you will let me finish for you,
+Lupo is on our trail. And that I believe to be the case. When Frank here
+first came with word of Indians in camp, I considered them merely
+raiders from some passing body of hunters. But when I found Lupo at
+their head, I knew better. The wonder to me is," he said, growing
+thoughtful, "that he did not send men to trail us and kill us or take us
+prisoner."
+
+Mr. Hampton shrugged.
+
+"Even the cunningest slip up now and then," he said. "Perhaps his men
+wanted to loot first. And, anyway, they had only been here a few moments
+when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise them. Well, thanks to
+our good angel, we came off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our
+canoes still here, nobody hurt."
+
+"Ah," said Farnum, darkly, "we're not out of the woods yet. If Lupo the
+Wolf is after us, well--there is trouble ahead."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.--A MAN OF THE "MOUNTED."
+
+
+While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to take inventory to discover
+what, if anything, had been stolen, the boys went back to take down and
+pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite direction from that
+taken by the Indians who, moreover, were being tracked by Dick and Art
+and could not double back without warning being given, it was considered
+safe for the boys.
+
+When they returned to camp, they found the two frontiersmen ahead of
+them. These reported the Indian camp pitched some two miles in their
+rear and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken
+canoe on the back track.
+
+"Now what does that mean?" asked Farnum, thoughtfully. "It is probable
+that Lupo has been behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true,
+namely that they have been trailing us. But why should they be fleeing
+now?"
+
+"They can't have been close to us all the time, Mr. Farnum," said Bob,
+"or why weren't we attacked before?"
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+"That's true enough," he said. "It may be that Lupo started late and has
+been all this time catching up with us."
+
+Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said:
+
+"As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable explanation. The
+other side, Farnum, probably has a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware.
+But the spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us into the
+wilderness to hunt may have deceived this spy. But then, later, word
+would reach him from Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly
+known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is trading on Farrell's
+secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially as
+several years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in New Mexico. So
+words would reach Nome to watch me. Then someone would start out on our
+trail."
+
+"And that someone was Lupo," said Farnum. "A fine cutthroat."
+
+An earnest discussion followed. What did this turning back of Lupo the
+Wolf mean? Did he intend to stick to their trail, but at a greater
+distance in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and lie in ambush
+ahead? That his retreat was other than momentary, and meant he intended
+giving up their pursuit, nobody believed.
+
+"Look here, Dad," said Jack, during the course of this discussion,
+"don't you consider it quite likely that Lupo intends to take us by
+surprise and attack us, rather than to retreat?"
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"I do, indeed, Jack," he said. "A cutthroat such as Lupo would have
+brought his band of desperadoes here for only one purpose, and that is,
+to dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason of the fact that
+they came upon our camp first, and stopped to loot. But from now on we
+shall have to be continually on our guard."
+
+"It's a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when
+daylight never fails," said Frank. "That makes it easier to guard
+against a surprise attack."
+
+"Yes," Mr. Hampton agreed, "that makes it easier. But from now on, we
+shall have to be on the watch continually."
+
+He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of
+the party, Farnum, Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as the
+boys, preparatory to the launching of the canoes, which were ready
+loaded.
+
+"Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows out of sight?" he
+asked. "Would it be better to set Dick and Art to watch them, and
+appoint a rendezvous where we can come together later?"
+
+The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, showed approval of
+the plan. Farnum struck his forehead with clenched fist in a
+characteristic gesture.
+
+"Just what I would have proposed myself, if I had been awake," he
+confessed. "Dick, Art, do you think you could pick up their trail?"
+
+The two nodded.
+
+"They won't back track far," said Dick. "Art an' me can follow 'em
+afoot. That last portage is only four miles back, an' we can catch up
+with 'em there. Now about where to meet up with you again?"
+
+"None of us know this country," said Farnum, "and so it will be
+difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly
+intends to continue our pursuit, and won't let our trail go cold.
+Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best plan will be to
+report to us at every camp. One of you can keep watch on Lupo while the
+other brings in a report."
+
+"Good enough," said Dick, the more loquacious of the pair. "Look for us
+at tomorrow's camp."
+
+Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient for a meal or two,
+guns at the trail, the pair struck swiftly on the back trail,
+disappeared among the trees at the bend and were gone from sight.
+
+"All right, boys," said Farnum. "Let's get going. Can you manage your
+canoe all right by yourselves?"
+
+Mr. Hampton laughed.
+
+"I think they can scrape along, Farnum," he said. "Probably we'll be
+asking one of them to help us before long. Well, come on."
+
+Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the canoes shot away, and,
+with Farnum leading to set the course, the boys fell in behind. In the
+leading canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a low-voiced
+conversation began that lasted a long time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum
+were saying could not be heard, for the gap between the two canoes,
+though not great, was considerable. Moreover, they spoke in low tones.
+But the boys sensed an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older
+men. As for themselves, however, they were not worried. On the contrary,
+the excitement of finding themselves trailed had brightened them
+wonderfully.
+
+"Old expedition was getting too monotonous, anyway," said Bob presently.
+
+"Oh, I suppose you'll want to challenge the best Indian wrestler now,
+won't you?" said Jack, in a tone of mock seriousness.
+
+"Yes, Bob, why didn't you go back with Dick and Art and send in your
+challenge?" asked Frank, in the same jollying manner. "You know you
+haven't been in a match with anybody for some time. Here was your
+chance, and you went and let it slip away from you. But, don't worry,
+perhaps the Indians will return. Who knows? You may even have a chance
+to exchange courtesies with no less a personage than Lupo the Wolf
+himself."
+
+The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And so the two canoes swept
+on between the low banks of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the
+other filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not simpletons. They
+realized, indeed, that they were in a precarious situation. They were
+deep in the far northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers dogged
+their heels. In all that vast country, was none to whom they could look
+for help. But, for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It was not
+the first time in which they found themselves in a ticklish situation.
+They had come unscathed out of other perils, even winning some honor in
+the encounter. They would do the same again. Thus they put the matter to
+themselves.
+
+Hour after hour passed, during which period they twice encountered
+slight rapids, up which they waded with the canoes instead of portaging.
+All were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number reduced by the
+absence of Dick and Art, and the work made correspondingly heavy, but in
+addition they were traveling now on reserve strength, as prior to making
+the last camp they already had done a big day's work.
+
+Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end of four hours of travel
+they came to the shore of a small lake. Here, in a secluded cove,
+convenient to the stream on which they had been traveling, they were
+about to make camp, when Frank approached Mr. Hampton and Farnum and
+indicated an island a half mile away.
+
+"Isn't that smoke over there?" he asked, pointing.
+
+Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes confirmed Frank's
+observation. Mr. Hampton put up the field glasses which he always
+carried strapped to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something
+more--a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of the island.
+
+"Hard to tell from that what sort of man is camping out there," said
+Farnum, when informed of the kayak. "Everybody uses 'em in this
+country--Indian, Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That smoke
+doesn't indicate a big fire. Must be only one man, or maybe, two. Let's
+investigate. If we decide to make camp out there, well, that island
+would be a good place and it would be hard to surprise us there if we
+kept guard."
+
+Once more, paddles were plied, and the two canoes cut diagonally across
+the waters of the lake towards the island. As they approached, Farnum
+raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an answering shout came back.
+Then a figure stepped from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon
+which the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their approach, hand
+shading eyes against the glare of the sun, head bare.
+
+"Great Godfrey's ghost," exclaimed Farnum in a low voice, turning his
+head slightly to address Mr. Hampton, "it's a policeman."
+
+"What?"
+
+"A member of the Northwest--of the Canadian Mounted Police."
+
+"What's he doing here?"
+
+"I don't know. But we'll soon find out."
+
+"Welcome, strangers," said the other, a tall bronzed man, as they
+approached. "Just in time for a snack."
+
+He advanced to the water's edge, and stood ready to help. Farnum's
+appraising eye took in the approach. Shoal water and a sandy beach! He
+decided to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping his paddle, he
+leaped from the bow into the water, as the forefoot of the canoe grated
+lightly. Relieved of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at
+the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, Farnum ran it up on the
+beach, the uniformed man lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was
+in the bow of the boy's canoe, repeated the maneuver. The two craft were
+drawn up side by side.
+
+"MacDonald's my name," said the Canadian simply.
+
+"Know Arkell of Dawson?" asked Farnum.
+
+"Know him well," said the other. "One o' the best on the Force."
+
+"Friend of mine," said Farnum.
+
+The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the
+boys. MacDonald led the way to a sheltered spot among the trees, where a
+fire burned.
+
+"Just about to broil some fish," he said. "Lucky there's plenty. I'm
+crazy about fishing," he continued, "and when they bit here I pulled out
+mor'n I could use. Was wonderin' what to do with 'em when I heard your
+hail. Guess I don't need to worry about that any longer."
+
+As he spoke he busied himself about preparations for dinner, and soon an
+appetizing odor of frying fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of
+the hungry boys.
+
+"Suppose I get another pan and help, sir," proffered Bob.
+
+His comrades laughed, for the big fellow's appetite was proverbial among
+them. MacDonald nodded with a grin of understanding. Bob tore back to
+the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. In a short time the
+fish were fried, and all hands fell to right heartily.
+
+"Long way off your beat, aren't you?" asked Farnum, of MacDonald, as
+they ate.
+
+The other nodded. Then he regarded them sharply.
+
+"Same to you," he said. "First white men I've seen in many days."
+
+Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight blue eyes under the
+grizzled brows, and met it promptly.
+
+"Yes, and I'll tell you why we are here," he said. "I think our meeting
+with you was providential. If you have been in this country long, you
+may have heard something that will help us. At any rate, here's our
+story."
+
+Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for their presence. He made
+a clean breast of it, keeping back nothing, telling MacDonald of the
+alleged oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron's death, Farrell's
+return as guide to Thorwaldsson's expedition, and their presence now in
+an attempt to trace the missing men.
+
+"So that's that," said MacDonald. "So that's the reason for
+Thorwaldsson's 'Lost Expedition.' And it was into this country he come!
+Well, well."
+
+In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent adventure with Lupo the
+Wolf. MacDonald manifested keen interest. His hand, as he poured tobacco
+into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a little of the precious
+tobacco.
+
+"You ain't heard of it likely," he said. "You wouldn't. But this Lupo
+killed my partner on the Force, an' I asked the Inspector to let me go
+after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an' lost his trail
+several days ago. Now, well--"
+
+MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked down towards the lake shore,
+and the others respected his evident desire to be alone and did not
+follow.
+
+"Out after Lupo single-handed," whispered Frank. "And the desperado
+surrounded by all his men, too."
+
+Farnum nodded.
+
+"That means nothing to the Mounted," said he.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.--FIRST BLOOD.
+
+
+So tired were all members of the party after their unexpected exertions
+of moving camp and trekking on, coming at the end of a day filled with
+fatiguing labor, that now a haven had been reached and they had relaxed
+from their tension, they were ready to go to sleep at once. First,
+however, preparations had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep
+watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter did not know
+definitely, of course, where they were encamped, yet it would not be
+difficult for them to follow the trail at least to the shore of the
+lake.
+
+"Look here," said MacDonald, returning to join the conference, "I'm not
+near as tired as the rest of you. I'll keep watch for your friends for a
+couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep."
+
+"All right," said Farnum, gratefully, "that is, if you promise to wake
+me at the end of two hours. I can use a little sleep right now."
+
+"Turn in, then," said MacDonald. "These spruces give you enough shade.
+And, anyway, I guess you don't need much inducement to go to sleep."
+
+"I could sleep right out in the open sun with my face turned up to the
+sky," said big Bob, yawning. "Well, nighty night, folks."
+
+Nothing occurred during MacDonald's watch, and at the end of the
+two-hour period he awakened Farnum, in keeping with the agreement.
+
+"Thought some of letting you sleep on," he said. "But, to tell you the
+truth, I been travelin' hard myself, and need a little sleep, too."
+
+"Right," said Farnum. "I'd have been peeved if you hadn't waked me."
+
+Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil among the bushes by the
+lake shore, descried a canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down
+which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. At first, as only the
+bow of the canoe appeared, he was startled, believing Lupo's Indians
+already were on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and yet
+surprise to see them there, he made out the two figures in the boat as
+those of Dick and Art.
+
+The pair rested on their paddles a moment, scanning the shore and also,
+Farnum noted, apparently casting anxious glances behind them. He was too
+far away, however, to see whether that were really the case. Farnum
+realized that, with the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn
+safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their own canoes, Dick and
+Art would not have the same indications pointing to the island that had
+he on arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and was just about
+to set his cupped hand to his mouth and call when the unexpected
+occurred.
+
+Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles into the water again and
+were making a wide swing with the evident intention of bringing the
+canoe parallel to the shore but some distance out, when Farnum's
+startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive at the mouth of the stream
+behind them.
+
+Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art evidently had managed to
+obtain one of Lupo's canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely,
+moreover, apparently they did not know. He must warn them, not only of
+his presence and of help close at hand, but also of the danger behind
+them. The course they were taking would bear them away from the island
+and, unless changed at once, would make it possible for Lupo to cut them
+off from their friends.
+
+Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep
+filling his eyes and dulling his brain, Farnum had his automatic
+swinging in the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot three
+times in rapid succession.
+
+At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the island where Farnum,
+stepping into the open, was vigorously waving his hat to attract their
+attention. Lupo's men also set up a shout, as they churned the water
+racing to cut off their quarry.
+
+"What is it?" cried Frank, first of the aroused camp to gain Farnum's
+side.
+
+Then his glance took in the situation.
+
+"Look here, those fellows might pick off Art and Dick before they can
+gain safety, even if they don't succeed in cutting them off," he said.
+"Let's get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, but they're
+coming closer."
+
+"Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns," said Farnum. "Tell you
+what, you boys run and get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch
+one of our canoes. We'll go out to help Dick and Art, if those fellows
+keep closing in on them."
+
+The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but when they returned they
+found Farnum's plan unnecessary. As the two canoes had swept along,
+Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown down his paddle, and
+taken up his rifle, while Art had swung the canoe about with one
+dexterous stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art had followed
+suit.
+
+The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards the shore. When they
+reached the sand they found Lupo's men already had faced about and were
+hurrying towards the mainland. One of their number evidently was hit.
+
+"Main good shootin' at long range a' so quick after paddlin'," commented
+MacDonald appreciatively.
+
+Content with having beaten off their enemies, the two desisted, resumed
+their paddles and soon were within hailing distance. Greetings and
+congratulations were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their canoe on
+shore. As soon as the first hubbub of exclamations died away, Mr.
+Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the
+fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid Dick told their
+story.
+
+After leaving the previous camp, they had gone back to where they seen
+Lupo break camp and start on the back trail. The meaning of this move,
+they had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe Lupo was
+relinquishing the chase. They believed he would suspect Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum would spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them off guard
+by creating the impression that he was abandoning the chase. Therefore,
+they had gone warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal
+Lupo would call a halt and prepare to 'bout face.
+
+This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles farther on they discerned
+the four canoes of the half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued
+their occupants.
+
+"We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he was a-sayin'," explained
+Dick. "But we couldn't get close enough. There wasn't much cover near
+'em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, quite a ways
+off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin' our ears but without any luck when
+suddenly somethin' happens. Most of 'em was on shore, listenin' to Lupo
+but in one canoe was one man a-huntin' around like he'd lost somethin'.
+
+"What it was we never did know. But suddenly, this fellow shoves off
+with a shout to Lupo. Lupo answers like he was agreein'. So then this
+fellow comes a-paddlin' down stream like mad. As he goes by where we're
+a-layin' low, Art whispers to me: 'This is where Lupo turns his gang
+around. That's sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it back an' warn
+our crowd. An' my legs is tired. I'd like to let my arms work for me.
+Let's go.'
+
+"I nods, and without any more words we backed out and started down
+stream after that canoe. The fellow is goin' like mad, which means he
+ain't intendin' to go far. He's lost somethin' or other and thinks it
+may be floatin' on the water or, maybe is layin' on shore where he
+touched. Anyway, that's what we thought. We never did get to know. For
+after we'd made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo
+and us, we decided it was no use runnin' any farther.
+
+"'Here goes,' said Art. And he let fly over the Indian's head. That
+fellow didn't wait for more. He just jumped out of the canoe an' started
+swimmin' for the other shore. So then Art give me his rifle an' he swims
+out and brings in the canoe. Last we seen of that Indian he was
+streaking it back on the other bank. I got in and--well, here we are."
+
+MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly interrupted:
+
+"How many men has Lupo got with him?"
+
+"A dozen."
+
+MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton.
+
+"You know why I want him," he said. "For murder. And then there's this
+raid on you. There are eight of us, includin' these husky young fellows
+of yours. Will you help me capture him an' his gang?"
+
+Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful.
+
+"But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can't turn aside from
+our own object long? We couldn't help you guard them. And you couldn't
+get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, especially
+if any of them are wounded."
+
+MacDonald's face fell.
+
+"Guess you're right," he said. "But when I think o' that skunk--murderin'
+the best pal a man ever had--well, I see red, that's all." His head sank
+to his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring moodily at
+the ground between his feet.
+
+"Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum, slowly. "If we don't
+do something, Lupo will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a
+constant danger."
+
+"I know," said Mr. Hampton. "Let me think."
+
+He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the ground.
+
+The boys had been listening with interest. Now Frank nudged Jack, with
+whom he was standing by the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack's face
+brightened and he nodded.
+
+"I'll bet they have," he whispered. "Ask MacDonald."
+
+Frank turned to the ranger.
+
+"Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?" he inquired.
+
+MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered readily enough.
+
+"A good four hundred miles to the South."
+
+"Why do you ask, Frank?" Mr. Hampton wanted to know.
+
+"Just a minute, sir, please," begged Frank, once more turning to
+MacDonald. "And how many men are at the Post?"
+
+"Captain and five men."
+
+"Oh, is that all?"
+
+Frank's tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald smiled slightly.
+
+"People think the 'Mounties' must be as many as an army," he said.
+"Well, we keep this wilderness clean with a handful. O' course, when
+necessary, too, we can swear in deputies."
+
+"Have you got wireless at the Post?" asked Frank.
+
+MacDonald nodded.
+
+"Captain equipped us some time back," he said. "All posts or forts, as
+we call them sometimes, have wireless now."
+
+"Good for you, Frank. I see what you're driving at now," said Mr.
+Hampton. "You--"
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+"Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald capture Lupo and his
+gang, we could call his Post by wireless and have them send men to help
+him take his prisoners in."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.--A CALL TO THE FORT.
+
+
+"Now," said Jack, "is the time that I wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio
+tube that I have been working on so long."
+
+Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. An enthusiast on
+radio, Jack had developed a number of new appliances. The latest of
+these was not yet completed. He had worked on it in the laboratories at
+Yale during the Winter and Spring. The lateness of his return to his
+classes, however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college until after
+Christmas, due to the delay occasioned by his adventures in South
+America in search of "The Enchanted City of the Incas," compelled him to
+devote most his time to catching up in his studies. He did not,
+therefore, have as much time to devote to laboratory experiments as he
+desired. As a consequence, the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been
+perfected, when time came for him to depart for Alaska with his father.
+
+Jack's 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would be the most powerful in
+the world, and he expected, moreover, to construct others of greater
+kilo-wattage. A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, it is
+true, but it had not been found practicable. Jack's tube was to be
+steel-jacketed and equipped with a water-cooling device, due to the heat
+produced when in operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used
+as an amplifier in conjunction with an alternator, would make
+trans-atlantic telephonic communication as common as cabling or wireless
+telegraphing.
+
+"If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now," he mourned, "we would
+be able to talk not only with Mr. MacDonald's Post but with Dawson or
+even Nome."
+
+"Well, Jack," said Frank, "it's too bad. Just the same, let's get busy.
+For, with our 50-watt oscillator tube set we will be able to communicate
+by telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only 400 miles away,
+we can reach it easily."
+
+For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they could use either three
+or four 5-watt oscillator tubes in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator
+tube. They had decided on the latter method, in making their
+preparations for departure in faraway Seattle. For one thing, and the
+biggest, transportation was the most important item. And the 50-watt
+tube set was the more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton helping,
+they got out the various parts from their baggage and made the
+connections.
+
+Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched
+with puzzled interest and even awe as the four, working in unison, put
+together the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid
+condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key
+circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power
+circuit, the storage battery and the motor generator.
+
+Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although Dick and Art were content
+to sit silent and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work progressed.
+Several times, too, Dick arose and went to the water's edge to keep
+watch against surprise. That any would be attempted for the time being,
+nobody believed, as they figured the enemy would consider them on guard.
+
+As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of the others. His
+description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery
+flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drives it as a
+motor thus generating higher voltage in the other winding both puzzled
+and interested them. By the time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who
+was something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair understanding of
+the set, but MacDonald, though interested, was bewildered.
+
+"I'm fair beat," he confessed. "Anyhow, just so you boys can make it
+work!"
+
+"Oh, we'll make it work, all right," Frank assured him. "Well, now, to
+try to call the Post. What's its call, Mr. MacDonald?"
+
+"I happen to remember," said MacDonald. "We were all so interested when
+wireless was put in that Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it.
+He said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his name. We were to
+remember it, in case of need, when we were able to get to a wireless
+station. Well, this is a case of need."
+
+"I'll say it is," said big Bob. "Well, come on, fellows, who's going to
+call?"
+
+It was an honor or distinction that each was eager to have, yet each
+wanted to force it on the others. A friendly argument developed, to
+which Mr. Hampton, smiling, put an end.
+
+"Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose you draw straws for the
+privilege. You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no
+question of ability involved. Here--" breaking three matchsticks into
+varying lengths and offering them--"take your choice. Longest wins."
+
+Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, clapped him on the
+back, and without more ado he began pressing the key and sending out the
+signal.
+
+"Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless station, do you think,
+MacDonald?" asked Mr. Hampton.
+
+"Somebody there all the time," the latter replied. "Captain Jameson has
+found wireless so useful in policing his vast district that he wonders
+how he ever got along without it."
+
+"Hurray," shouted Frank, "listen. They're answering."
+
+To those who understood the code, the answer was plain:
+
+"JSN answering. Who are you?"
+
+"MacDonald," tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously.
+
+The receptor sounded almost angry.
+
+"Quit your kidding."
+
+"No, I mean it," replied Frank. "This is MacDonald of the Mounted."
+
+"Prove it."
+
+"That'll stump old Frank," chuckled Bob, in an aside. But he was
+mistaken.
+
+"All right," replied Frank, confidently. "Do you know what my assignment
+is?"
+
+"Yes," answered JSN, impudently. "Do you?"
+
+"I'm after Lupo the Wolf," tapped Frank. "Now call Captain Jameson."
+
+"You're not MacDonald," replied JSN, "because he doesn't know the code.
+But you must be speaking for him, for that's right about his assignment.
+I'll call Captain Jameson. You wait."
+
+"All right," tapped Frank.
+
+Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was itching to inquire what
+was occurring, but had restrained himself until he should be appealed to
+by Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with
+telegraphy, whether wireless or by wire, he stood in awe of an operator,
+and believed it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior
+being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as well as on that of
+Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding behind him, and explained what had
+happened.
+
+"And you actually got the Post?" asked MacDonald, doubt in his voice.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+"My God," said the big policeman. "Think of the weeks I spent toiling up
+here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without the
+loss of a minute's time. Wonderful, well I reckon."
+
+"When Captain Jameson arrives," said Frank, smiling, "I want you to
+stand close and I'll translate what he says, and you help me with the
+replies, will you?"
+
+"Won't I be interrupting you?"
+
+"Oh, no," smiled Frank. "You just come close and wait until I speak.
+It'll be all right. Well"--as the receptor began to click--"I guess this
+is Captain Jameson now. Yes," with a nod, "it's he, all right. He's
+asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald."
+
+"Tell him I'm four hundred miles away and close on Lupo. Tell him about
+yourselves and the fight, and that we're going to round up Lupo's gang
+and ask him how soon he can send men to help me out with any prisoners
+we take, and if he can send any at all, and--"
+
+"One minute," said Frank. "I understand. Just wait a bit now, while I
+telegraph."
+
+To explain at length the details of that telegraphic conversation is
+unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that the situation was fully explained
+to Captain Jameson, and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen
+deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald's aid, as soon as he should hear
+again as to the outcome of the expedition against Lupo.
+
+"It'll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald," said Captain
+Jameson. "But with game plentiful and the season open, he can camp until
+they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, providing he makes
+any. You people go ahead with your rounding up of Lupo's gang, and then
+let me hear from you again."
+
+On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, as there was
+nothing further to be said.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.--THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND.
+
+
+"MacDonald, I'll agree to help you round up Lupo and his gang," said Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, about the camp fire,
+over which Dick was busy broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had
+just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor made the nostrils of
+the three hungry boys twitch with anticipatory delight.
+
+"Fine," said the big ranger, "that's the way I like to hear you talk."
+
+"Yes," said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, "I've got a very good reason why
+we should cast in our lot and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and
+draws us off our course."
+
+"What's that?"
+
+"Well, it's an easy enough one to guess. Lupo evidently is after us.
+That means that he is being paid by somebody to do us in, or at least
+thwart us in our search. I want to know who that somebody is. And the
+only way to find out is to make Lupo prisoner and question him.
+Moreover, it is possible we may be able to learn something about the
+mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition."
+
+Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded with satisfaction.
+
+"Just what I was thinking myself."
+
+"You're right, Mr. Hampton," said MacDonald. "But such being the case,
+we'll have to be mighty careful that Lupo doesn't get shot, as then your
+prospective source of information would vanish."
+
+"True enough, MacDonald," said Mr. Hampton. "We'll all have to be on
+guard against that misfortune, for misfortune it would be."
+
+He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick and Art to him. Then he
+explained how matters stood.
+
+"As soon as we finish breakfast," he said, "we'll start, and you must
+all be very careful not to shoot Lupo, if it comes to a battle."
+
+As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke but always to the point,
+raised a question which had been puzzling him.
+
+"Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?" he asked. "And with
+our radio transmitter, especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take
+all our outfit along?"
+
+"It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after our trouble in getting
+it erected," said Mr. Hampton. "And to take all our outfit with us would
+be to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we can't very well leave
+everything here, for some of Lupo's men might slip away from the main
+body, in fact, they may already have done so, and they would put us in a
+terrible plight if they raided the camp, in our absence."
+
+There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke.
+
+"We can certainly travel faster without your outfit to hold us back," he
+said, "especially if Lupo tries to run away. For then we could gain on
+him at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. Hampton, this
+island is easily defended. We've been going to the shore to keep watch
+on the mainland against surprise. But just a little ways through the
+trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which you can see the waters all
+around the island. One man alone could keep guard here."
+
+"But one man couldn't keep off an attack in numbers," objected Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+"I don't know," said MacDonald. "With them high-powered rifles of yours,
+it might be done. They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo's Indians
+and breeds will have. Anyway, two men certainly could manage to hold
+this place against all comers."
+
+"And three," added Farnum, with a significant look at Mr. Hampton,
+"could do it even better."
+
+The boys again were at the fire some distance away, helping Dick broil
+more fish. Mr. Hampton looked at them. He understood the significance in
+Farnum's tone.
+
+"You don't think they would be in danger here?"
+
+"Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum, lowering
+his voice as the other had done.
+
+Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted by Farnum, namely, that the
+boys should be left at camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true
+that they would be in far less danger than if they accompanied him
+against Lupo. And that appealed to him, appealed powerfully. He was
+grateful to Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the boys'
+welfare.
+
+On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful in an emergency, and
+good fighters. And since the idea that information might be obtained
+from Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession of his thoughts.
+Lupo must be captured. Would it not be folly to weaken their force by
+leaving three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was a fine rifle
+shot, behind?
+
+Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, he could command and
+they would obey. But Mr. Hampton was not one to exercise his authority
+dictatorially.
+
+"I confess I don't know what to do, Farnum," he said finally.
+
+At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys announced the completion
+of the second batch of food, and their imminent return.
+
+"Make it a post of honor and danger," whispered Farnum, urgently. "Tell
+them the radio must be guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take
+these things along our movements will be so hampered that Lupo might
+escape. Tell them there is a big possibility, too, that some of Lupo's
+gang may attempt to raid the camp while we are absent."
+
+The boys were so close at hand that Farnum desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded.
+As they ate, he broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp.
+
+"Three of us ought to stay behind," he added. "That will give sufficient
+protection for each other, and provide a sure safeguard against
+surprise. Also, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can
+go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without any baggage. It carried
+three of us, with baggage, so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So we
+can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the portages, if any are
+necessary."
+
+"Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?" asked Jack quietly.
+
+Mr. Hampton realized from his son's tone that Jack understood his
+thoughts.
+
+"Well, you three boys would be the natural ones to be selected," he
+said.
+
+"Oh, I say," protested Bob.
+
+"That's not fair, Mr. Hampton," cried Frank.
+
+Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close association of the motherless
+boy with the older man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He
+understood how troubled his father was over the possibility of running
+them into danger. And he decided he would not add to his difficulties,
+but would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed at the prospect
+of "missing the fun."
+
+"You see how it is, fellows," said Mr. Hampton, and he proceeded to
+elaborate on the theme furnished him by Farnum. "It's a post of honor
+and danger combined."
+
+Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. They started anew to protest
+But Jack silenced them.
+
+"All right, fellows, let's be sports," he said. "If the older heads
+decide they don't need us, we won't force ourselves on them."
+
+"But, Jack," cried Bob and Frank in chorus.
+
+"No, I mean it, fellows," said Jack. "Come over here with me, and I'll
+tell you something."
+
+Drawing them out of earshot, he added:
+
+"Don't let us make it hard for Dad. He's got troubles enough. He'll feel
+a lot easier if we aren't along. I know how you feel. I feel the same
+way about it. But let's make it as easy for Dad as we can. Besides,
+there is something in what he said, after all. There is no guarantee
+that some of Lupo's men won't attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe
+some of them must be watching this island right now, and the minute they
+see the others safely out of sight, they'll attack us. For they know our
+numbers, and they will realize the three of us are here alone."
+
+"All right," grumbled Bob. "Have it your own way, let's get some more to
+eat. I haven't filled up yet."
+
+"This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too," agreed Frank. "And I used to
+be such a dainty eater. Why, I just pecked at my food."
+
+"You mean you ate food by the peck," said Bob. "For a little guy, you're
+the heftiest eater I ever saw."
+
+"Little guy, is it?" cried Frank. "I like that."
+
+And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, his arms locking about
+Bob's knees. The big fellow came down in the brush and Frank piled on
+top of him with a shout of glee.
+
+"Come on, Jack. We haven't had a good rough-house for a long time."
+
+Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went rolling and threshing about
+the bushes like a trio of young bears.
+
+At the fireside, Mr. Hampton's worried look relaxed, and he grinned with
+enjoyment.
+
+"It's all right, now," he said contentedly. "They'll take their
+disappointment out in a grand wrestling jamboree. Well, let's pack up a
+little grub and get ready to go."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.--BOB FALLS ASLEEP.
+
+
+In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party were ready to set out. Of
+one thing they were reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets
+constructed along his own lines, the instrument of which was so small
+and compact it was contained in the panel of a ring.
+
+"Only trouble with these," Jack said, "is that you can receive but can't
+transmit. However--"
+
+"However," his father interrupted, "that is all that will be necessary."
+
+"Why?" asked Farnum.
+
+"It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into such a
+predicament that we shall fail to return," explained Mr. Hampton. "But
+the boys may be attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a bad
+position. Then they can call for us."
+
+"At least we could send out a hurry up call over those sets," said Jack.
+"As for your calling us, well, that will be a little more complicated,
+Dad, but it can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking that army
+field set. It came in mighty handy in South America. It is no great job
+to set it up. And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment,
+and you can afford to take it along. It won't be in your way. Here it
+is, you see, all boxed up complete, handle on the box and everything."
+
+"Right, Jack," said his father. "Now we can communicate with each other
+easily enough. Well"--looking about him--"are we ready?"
+
+The others nodded.
+
+"Then," Mr. Hampton said, "I propose that we bring our canoes back
+through the trees, cross the island and make for the mainland on the
+other side."
+
+Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement.
+
+"This island is pretty long," said MacDonald, "and it will screen our
+departure on the other side, in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as
+a matter of fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo's party has not shown
+itself since we beat off that canoe, and probably is somewhere back up
+that stream out of which your party came."
+
+"You think they cannot see the mainland on the other side of this island
+from there, Dad?"
+
+"I don't believe so," said Mr. Hampton.
+
+"Even if they do catch a glimpse of us," suggested Farnum, "isn't it
+probable they'll believe we are pushing on? As a matter of fact,
+however, we'll land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland and
+then up along the lake till we are out of sight, when we can cross
+again, I suppose that's your idea, Mr. Hampton?"
+
+"My idea exactly," answered the other. "Well, let's get the canoe and
+MacDonald's kayak. They have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we
+can bring them across the island without detection easily enough."
+
+"Wait a minute, Dad," said Jack, laying a detaining hand on his arm. "If
+they do see you crossing the channel to the mainland, on the other side
+of the island, they'll know the whole party isn't along, and will
+realize you aren't leaving, but merely carrying out some maneuver."
+
+"Maybe, that's what they will think, Jack. On the other hand, they might
+figure some of the canoes got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the
+back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. The channel to
+the mainland on the other side is only a narrow one, and the
+probabilities of our escaping detection are all in our favor."
+
+The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald's kayak were dragged
+back through the underbrush and carried across the island to be launched
+on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the compact field
+transmitting set in the canoe, as the party pushed off. Then, amid
+farewells from both sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the
+mainland.
+
+Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with something of a sinking
+of the heart. The same feeling, he suspected, possessed his father.
+Neither, however, presented other than a brave and cheerful front. As
+for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over their disappointment at not
+being permitted to accompany the expedition, to a certain extent, and,
+cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on their own
+resources were beginning to enjoy the situation.
+
+"First thing, fellows," said Frank, as the party reached the mainland,
+hauled up canoe and kayak and struck into the trees, "first thing is to
+go to this knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a view of the
+field."
+
+"Yes," said big Bob, "then let's divide up into watches, so that the
+pair of us not drawn for the first watch can get some rest."
+
+"You certainly were born in the Land o' Nod, Bob," scoffed Frank.
+
+"Yes," said Jack, grinning, "if you're as sleepy as all that, we'll
+count you out right away. Frank and I will draw for the first watch, and
+you can hit the hay."
+
+"Not so fast," said Bob. "I'll take my chance with the rest of you."
+
+Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered hill to which
+MacDonald had referred and now, reaching the top, found that, despite
+its low elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest of the
+island and than the shores of the lake as well, that they commanded a
+sweeping view not only of the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone
+but also of the farther one whence they had come.
+
+Not a sign of human occupation, however, was anywhere apparent.
+Eastward, although they knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not
+have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake shore were
+sufficiently dense to hide any sign of movement. Westward, toward the
+farther shore, was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the stream,
+thinning out farther along the shore in both directions. Neither among
+the trees nor on the glades, could they discern anybody although Jack,
+who had been thoughtful enough to bring along their field glasses,
+scanned the prospect through them a long time before passing them on to
+the others, who did likewise.
+
+"Well, so far so good," said Jack, with a sigh of relief. "Evidently, or
+so far as we can see, anyway, Dad and the rest got across undiscovered
+and now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther up undetected."
+
+"Maybe so," said Frank. "Maybe, too, Lupo got discouraged and quit."
+
+"Retreated you mean?" asked Jack.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+"Oh, you fellows are full of prunes," said Bob. "Why should he quit now,
+just because we have added one more man to our forces? He's hung to our
+trail a long time. That means he's not going to quit in a hurry. No,
+we've got to keep our eyes open."
+
+"That's right," said Jack, thoughtfully, "It won't do to get
+overconfident and relax our guard."
+
+"Just the same there's no sign of trouble now," said Frank. "And I've
+got a suggestion."
+
+"Don't lose the idea," said Bob, anxiously. "Hold on to it. Ideas are
+rare."
+
+"With some people yes," said Frank, grinning. "Not with me."
+
+"Huh."
+
+Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out of his grasp.
+
+"My idea," he said, "is to take a plunge in the channel your father
+crossed, Jack. I'm hot and sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine
+just before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do you say?"
+
+"So I'm to have the first watch, hey?" said Bob. "It's been all decided,
+has it? Well, well. All right, run along, Frankie, me lad. I'm not so
+anxious for a swim. I'll just start my watch here and now."
+
+"Bob, you're a good sport," said Frank, throwing an arm over the
+shoulders of his big chum, between whom and himself was a depth of
+feeling which seldom was expressed in words.
+
+"Oh, run along and take your swim."
+
+Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the hill. Laughing, they
+obeyed. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the
+base of a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the glasses in
+his lap and his eyes on the westward shore of the lake, where Lupo's
+half-breeds had last been seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was
+against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as comfortable as
+possible.
+
+It was a really comfortable position and, when one is tired and sitting
+idle, a comfortable position is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with
+Bob. He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He had worked
+hard. The air was warm and drowsy, as only the air of the short hot
+Summer of the north country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently
+his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in his ears as of the
+drowsy hum of bees. He caught himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his
+eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree
+trunk again, and again began to nod. This time, the jerk with which he
+awakened was longer in coming.
+
+Bob got up and stretched.
+
+"Mustn't go to sleep," he reflected. "Nothing in sight, though. Not much
+use to worry. Ho, hum."
+
+He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes drifted shut. He sat
+through the transition period between sleeping and waking, unaware that
+he was yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of relaxed limbs
+and thoughts. Before he was aware his head nodded, his eyes closed, his
+chin touched his chest, and he slept.
+
+Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying their plunge. The
+water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to
+their heart's content. Neither realized the passage of time until Frank,
+suddenly filled with compunction at their long absence, while Bob kept
+watch, scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out on top of his
+clothes.
+
+"Great guns, Jack," he announced, "we've been gone an hour. Good old
+Bob. He was mighty nice about sending us off to swim while he kept
+watch, but you know he likes to swim, too. He'll be thinking it's a low
+trick on our part to stay so long. Maybe he'll want to come and take a
+plunge himself, when one of us gets back to relieve him."
+
+Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way with most of us,
+attempted to make excuses.
+
+"He might just as well have come along," he said. "Nothing's going to
+happen."
+
+They were pulling on their clothes.
+
+Suddenly they heard Bob's voice raised in a distant shout, calling their
+names. Then followed a brisk outbreak of rifle shots.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.--THE SURPRISE ATTACK.
+
+
+"An attack," gasped Jack.
+
+"And we're not there to help old Bob," cried Frank, in an agony of
+apprehension. "Come on. Don't stop to finish dressing."
+
+Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, Frank frantically
+buckled on his revolver and cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started
+on a dead run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they ran, they
+heard the shots continuing intermittently, and then once more--clearer
+and closer at hand, as they neared the knoll--came Bob's voice:
+
+"Frank, Jack, they're rushing me. Look out for yourselves."
+
+There was a crashing in the brush ahead.
+
+"Down, Jack, some of them coming."
+
+The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce whose low branches swept
+the ground. The sounds were off to their left. A moment later the forms
+of four men, hurrying towards the channel whence they had just come,
+could be seen eight or ten yards away.
+
+Jack's face was pale, his lips set. Frank was trembling with excitement
+and fear--not for himself, if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad
+was not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was holding off the
+main attack alone.
+
+"Steady, Frank," whispered Jack. "Bob's life depends on us. This is no
+time for false compunctions. You'll have to shoot to kill."
+
+"All right, Jack."
+
+Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the runners stumbled, flung
+out their arms to save themselves, and pitched forward. The others spun
+about towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but a second time
+Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, fell.
+
+"No time to see how badly they were hit," said Jack. "Come on. Old Bob's
+still alive and shooting."
+
+Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, however, to keep wary
+watch as they ran. No more of the enemy were seen, however. There was a
+sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of astonishment,
+stupefaction, even a note of fear, went up from several throats. Above
+all was a bull-like roar that they readily identified as coming from
+Bob's throat.
+
+Frank's heart gave an exultant leap. He knew that yell. It came only
+when Bob went berserk, and fought with his hands. He had heard it when
+they fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long
+Island and Incas in the Andes. He knew well what it meant.
+
+Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the
+knoll, and came to a dead halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to
+the spot.
+
+But only for a moment. Then they started tearing up the hillside, among
+the scattered trees. For at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as
+if caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it portended.
+Somewhere in the center of the group was big Bob, at close grips with
+the enemy, and not caring how many they numbered.
+
+Would they be in time? Could they help Bob before some half-breed
+succeeded in sticking a knife into him?
+
+But Bob proved that he could handle his own affairs, for while they were
+still several yards away, first one and then another half-breed was
+spewed from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with
+several men clinging to his legs and another on his back, attempting
+apparently to throttle him. The big fellow's hands went up and back.
+They settled under the other's armpits. There was a sudden mighty heave
+and wrench, and then the man on Bob's back came flying through the air,
+straight for Bob's two comrades. He had been tossed from Bob's
+shoulders, as a strong man would toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack
+leaped aside, and the man struck the ground, rolled over and over and
+then lay still, crumpled up against the trunk of a spruce.
+
+Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank leaped forward. But their
+intervention was unnecessary. Standing like a young Colossus, legs
+apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent down. One big hand
+seized each by the neck. Then the two heads were bumped together once,
+twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on Bob's legs relaxed, and
+he tossed them aside, and they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out.
+
+Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with a murderous look for the
+two boys.
+
+"More of you, hey?"
+
+They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp.
+
+"Bob, Bob, it's us."
+
+"What? What? Oh, you--"
+
+Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his eyes, and recognition
+dawning. It was followed by a wide grin.
+
+"Oh, it's you."
+
+"Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in history," cried Frank,
+hysterically, clapping his chum on the back.
+
+"Never saw the like," said Jack, doing likewise. "Thank God, Bob, you're
+alive."
+
+"Never was more alive in my life," said Bob. "Hey, they're running
+away."
+
+He darted away from his chums and sprang downhill. True enough. The two
+whom he had disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, had
+gained their feet and were running madly through the trees.
+
+Jack ran after Bob and restrained him.
+
+"Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are three others here we must
+tie up before they come to."
+
+Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending over the man whom the
+big fellow had tossed over his head. The half-breed was recovering
+consciousness, and beginning to moan.
+
+"Broken arm, I think," said Frank. "He'll not bother us. How about the
+two whose heads you bumped together?"
+
+"They're recovering consciousness, too," said Jack. "Nothing much the
+matter with them. We had better tie them up, so they can't cause us any
+trouble."
+
+"Here, take the other fellow's belt and tie his hands behind his back
+with it," said Bob. At the same time, he suited action to word in the
+case of the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow's belt and tied
+him with it.
+
+"Won't they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to tie their legs, too?"
+
+"No, we'll just keep an eye on them. Let's take a look at the other. If
+his arm is broken we'll have to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch
+him in the lake, though. He's a villainous looking rascal. Tried to
+choke me, too, and darn near succeeded."
+
+While Frank kept an eye on the two other prisoners, who had now
+recovered consciousness and were beginning to realize their situation
+but lay still under the threat of Frank's rifle, Bob and Jack examined
+the third man.
+
+His senses were returning, and he moaned a good deal. Examinations
+revealed, however, that his arm had not been broken, merely badly
+wrenched.
+
+"I'm mighty glad of that," said Jack. "We'd have been up against it to
+set a broken arm."
+
+"Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary," said Bob. "But I'm glad,
+too, that it isn't necessary. But, say, Jack"--with sudden recollection,
+and an air of anxiety--"there were four more of these scoundrels. We'll
+have to look out for them."
+
+Jack's voice shook a little as he replied.
+
+"I think not, Bob," he said. "Frank and I saw them first. We ambushed
+them, practically. They didn't have a chance."
+
+"You don't mean--"
+
+Jack's gaze was steady but troubled.
+
+"We had to do it, old man," he said. "It was our life or theirs. And
+yours, especially. When we heard your shout, and those first shots,
+Frank went wild with fear that you had been trapped while we were away
+enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt as bad as he did."
+
+"Hey, fellows," interrupted Frank, hailing them, "the two that got away
+must have been all that were left. They've jumped in a canoe and are
+paddling like mad for the mainland."
+
+"Can you see them?" called Jack, starting to the top of the knoll to
+join his chum.
+
+"How would I know what they were doing if I couldn't?" rejoined Frank.
+"Yes, I can see them. Look there."
+
+He pointed.
+
+"Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him walk up here to join his
+little playmates," Jack called back.
+
+Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully recovered his
+senses, and he obeyed Bob's order to move with an alacrity that showed
+he stood in abject fear of the husky young American.
+
+Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were nearing the mainland, and
+paddling with superhuman energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no
+less.
+
+"That accounts for all of them, I guess," he said. "So we can sit down
+now, Bob, while you tell us how it happened."
+
+"Not much to tell," said Bob, sinking to a seated position against the
+tree trunk. "Except I went to sleep and was almost surprised, but not
+quite. My first intimation that the enemy was near was when I heard
+somebody talking in the trees at the foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear
+anybody? Was it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? I
+don't rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a start and looking down
+through the trees saw a bunch of half-breeds making their way towards
+the other side of the island.
+
+"I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. Here I had promised to
+keep watch, and, instead, had fallen asleep. As a result, the
+half-breeds had landed on the island, and were heading for where you
+fellows were swimming. I had endangered your lives. What should I do?
+That was the question.
+
+"But I didn't waste must time, puzzling over it. I knew I had to give
+you fellows warning or you would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to
+you as loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn't seen me up till
+then. But when I yelled, they saw me quick enough, and several of them
+opened fire, and----"
+
+"Wait a minute, Bob," Frank interrupted, his eyes shining. "They hadn't
+seen you, and you could have let them pass without attracting their
+attention, but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white alley.
+That's, that's--"
+
+"Oh, forget it," said Bob, uncomfortably. "You'd have done the same.
+Anyway," he hurried on, "they split up into two groups, and one kept on
+going, while the other rushed me before I could do much shooting,
+and--well, I guess you know the rest," he concluded, lamely.
+
+"I'll say we do," said Frank, gripping his big comrade's shoulder. "Boy,
+I'll never see the like of that fight again."
+
+"But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead of trying to shoot you
+down," said Jack.
+
+"Search me," said Bob.
+
+"I'll bet I know," said Frank.
+
+"What?" asked both.
+
+"They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own.
+Probably, would have tried to take us alive, too, if they'd gotten the
+chance."
+
+"Well, maybe so," said Bob. "Anyhow, that's that. Now what shall we do?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.--MR. HAMPTON RECALLED.
+
+
+Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste and even horror in
+their eyes.
+
+"Has to be done, though," said Jack, as if in answer to a remark of
+Frank's.
+
+Frank nodded.
+
+"I know."
+
+"What are you two chumps talking about?" asked Bob.
+
+"Those four men we shot down, you know," Frank explained.
+
+"Think you--"
+
+Bob's question went uncompleted.
+
+"I don't know," Frank replied. "We shot straight. It was your life and
+ours against theirs."
+
+"Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect that's the first thing
+to be attended to. If any of them is no more than wounded, it will be up
+to us to do what we can for him."
+
+"Right, Bob," said Jack.
+
+"Come on," Frank said shortly, starting down the hillside, in the
+direction of their successful, though impromptu, ambuscade.
+
+"Go easy," warned Bob. "If they're able to shoot, they'll take a crack
+at us."
+
+Bob's advice was followed, and the trio approached the spot warily. But
+precaution was needless, or, while still some distance away, they could
+see the four bodies outstretched motionless where they had fallen.
+Frank's face went white, and he shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob,
+although he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip on
+himself, in order to force his laggard steps to continue. Though many
+were the affairs of danger in which they had been, the boys had never
+before shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to them.
+
+Frank stopped. He was trembling violently.
+
+"I--I can't look at them," he gasped.
+
+Bob threw an arm over his shoulders.
+
+"You and Jack stay here," he ordered, gruffly. "I had no hand in this.
+I'm the fellow to attend to it. Wait for me."
+
+At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. But Bob shoved him
+back, kindly but firmly.
+
+"The pair of you have been through enough," he said. "Do as I say. Wait
+here."
+
+And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the task, he plunged on
+through the trees. For a moment or two both Frank and Jack watched him
+fascinatedly, then Frank sank down to a sitting position, elbows propped
+on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack faced about, and stared
+unseeing through the trees.
+
+Presently, Bob's solid, crunching footsteps could be heard approaching,
+and they looked up. His face was grave, but unflinching.
+
+"Look here, fellows," he said, firmly, "may as well face the facts. All
+four were killed instantly. Drilled through the---- But why discuss it?
+The fact is, they're dead. They were rascals of the first water, and, as
+you say, it was their lives or ours. Self-preservation is the first law
+of Nature. Now, what are we going to do about it? We haven't any tools
+to dig with."
+
+Frank shook himself into alertness.
+
+"Let's get the axes--our outfit has some--and cut off some spruce boughs
+and cover them over. Then we can roll some stones on top."
+
+As quickly as possible, without speaking during the task, and working
+feverishly, the three carried out Frank's idea. Then, back at camp, they
+sat down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding liquid steadied
+their shaken nerves.
+
+"Guess we better try to get in touch with your father, Jack," suggested
+Bob, at length.
+
+"How long have they been gone?"
+
+Bob looked at his watch.
+
+"Three hours. Seems like a lifetime."
+
+"Things have certainly happened fast," said Frank. "Thank goodness, that
+party missed our radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have been out
+of luck."
+
+"More luck than I deserve," said Bob, savagely. "Think of going to sleep
+on the job. If I had been awake, they never would have been able to
+land."
+
+"Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to reproach yourself with."
+
+"Oh, that's nonsense," said the big fellow. "I'm always getting you into
+trouble."
+
+Frank smiled.
+
+"Yes, and then getting us out again," he said.
+
+"Well, let's try the radio, anyway," suggested Jack. "They've been gone
+three hours. With the best of luck they can't have made more than eight
+or ten miles, considering the detour they planned to take, and
+everything."
+
+"Couldn't have gotten that far away in a straight line," said Frank.
+
+"No, I guess not. But what if they aren't prepared for a call from us?"
+
+"Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your father will be
+proceeding fully equipped to hear from you," said Frank. "He need only
+wear the headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving that he
+would keep it on most of the time."
+
+Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, spoken of by Frank, had
+done away with the necessity for the umbrella aerial.
+
+"All right," he said. "I'll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the
+message we ought to hear from him shortly, for he'll at once unlimber
+the field transmitting set and call us back."
+
+While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight and its outcome,
+Frank and Bob decided to steady their nerves by fishing and went down to
+the lakeside. They had reasonable success and had pulled out a number of
+fish when Jack joined them.
+
+"Send out your message, Jack?" Frank inquired.
+
+"Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too."
+
+"What? Why, great guns, how long have we been here? Surely, you can't
+have had time to hear from your father?"
+
+"But, I have," affirmed Jack. "You've been here more than an hour."
+
+Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that time, neither had spoken
+a word. They had just dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional
+fish. Frank laughed.
+
+"I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open," he confessed. "Well, what
+did your father say?"
+
+"They made a long trek up the lake before crossing over, and are not
+very far away--somewhere up in that direction--on the other shore, there,"
+said Jack, pointing. "Dad was worried as the deuce at my story, and
+they're coming back."
+
+"Coming back? Why? It's all over now."
+
+"That's what I told him, Frank. But he's coming back, anyway. They're
+going to get back to the lake, and come straight down to the island.
+Ought to be here in a couple of hours or less."
+
+"May as well wait dinner for them, in that case," observed Bob. "Or what
+meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I'm sure I don't know. This
+perpetual sunshine has me all turned around. I don't know whether it's
+day or night."
+
+"Same here," confessed Frank. "I do know, though, that I'm beginning to
+get up an appetite." Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent
+daydreaming over the fishing lines had driven away for the time, crossed
+his mind, and he paled. "I don't know though"--catching his
+breath--"whether I'll ever want to eat again."
+
+Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The big fellows noted with
+apprehension the twisted, stricken look on their slighter chum's face,
+and the haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob's keen eyes, moreover,
+two hectic spots glowing brightly in the dark tan of Frank's cheeks were
+apparent.
+
+"Look here, old man," said Bob, anxiously, "you want to quit thinking
+about that or you'll be sick."
+
+"Sick?" Frank tried to force a laugh. "I'm the healthiest invalid ever
+you saw."
+
+"No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of your mind, or you will be
+sick. Why--"laying a hand on his brow--"you've got a fever right now."
+
+Jack was worried, too.
+
+"Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob's advice. What if you came down
+sick? We'd be in a pretty fix."
+
+"Oh, you fellows make me tired," said Frank, irritatedly. "I'm all
+right."
+
+But Bob's worry was not routed. He took his chum by an arm and started
+marching him toward camp.
+
+"I'm going to give you a dose of calomel and make you lie down," he
+said. "Come on."
+
+"Calomel? Have a heart."
+
+"Yes, calomel," said Bob, firmly. "That's what you need, that and a
+nap."
+
+Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the camp, despite Frank's
+vehement protests, he was made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and
+then to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him the little tent
+belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide shade from the northern sun. Jack
+and Bob sat down, some distance away, and started cleaning the fish.
+They talked together in low tones. Presently, after several glances
+toward the motionless figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On his
+return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack.
+
+"Asleep," he said. "Didn't want to do it, but overworked Nature was too
+much for him. I'm a little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock.
+But I guess he'll be all right when he wakes up."
+
+Then he glanced more keenly at Jack.
+
+"Look here, you've been through the same experience. I had a nap. Now
+you're going to take one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We
+don't want two sick ones on our hands."
+
+Jack didn't protest, but also turned in beside Frank, and in a few
+minutes was sound asleep. As Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her
+dues.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.--A REVELATION.
+
+
+This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, but at the first faint
+indication that somnolence was stealing upon him, arose and stamped
+about vigorously. Once, prompted by a humane inclination, he paused by
+the three prisoners who lay in the shade, hands and feet tied, and
+proffered them a drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness was
+totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the surprise in their eyes,
+although no words were exchanged, and they drank eagerly in great gulps.
+The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his head was in considerable
+pain because of his wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional
+writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by loosening his bonds. In
+addition, he rummaged their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment
+for sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the twisted member.
+
+"You good man," whispered the other, gazing at him, as Bob bent to the
+task, and speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob's ears, and
+certainly not to the other two men a short distance away. "I tell you
+something--not now--bimeby--when they not know."
+
+Bob thought quickly.
+
+"All right," he responded, in the same low tone. "I'll fix it."
+
+"Yes." The other nodded. "You fix it."
+
+"Now what in the world has he got to tell me?" Bob asked himself, as he
+moved away. "Probably, something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I
+can't see what else it can be. Was grateful because I gentled him a
+little--after first maltreating him." He smiled at the irony of this
+thought. "Well, Mr. Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there will
+be a chance to question him apart from his fellows."
+
+And with that, he dismissed the matter from his mind. Jack now rolled
+over, sat up and came out from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued
+sunk in heavy slumber.
+
+"By George," said Bob, looking at his watch, "two hours since you
+started to take your nap. Run down to the shore, will you, and take a
+look to see if there is any sign of your father. We left these fellows
+alone once"--nodding to their prisoners--"but I felt it wasn't wise to try
+it too often. Something might happen. So I've been sticking close to
+camp."
+
+Jack nodded.
+
+"Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish for me to run down
+after you, but I just had to tell you about hearing from Father."
+
+He set out for the shore.
+
+A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give a joyful shout. It was
+answered by a fainter hail from the water. Faint though it was, however,
+it was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching.
+
+Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, and the returning
+party came into view, Jack in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum,
+with MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. Jack was eagerly
+explaining what had occurred at camp since his father's departure.
+
+"Hello, Bob," said Mr. Hampton, coming up, and gripping the big fellow's
+hand hard. "Had some excitement while we were gone?"
+
+"Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was going to be a loafing
+assignment you left us on--nothing to do but hang around camp and swim
+and fish--and the minute you turn your backs something happens."
+
+"How's Frank?"
+
+"Jack told you, did he?"
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"He's still asleep," said Bob. "The necessity of shooting to kill was a
+shock to his nerves. Nature took him in hand. See." He indicated where
+Frank lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival of the
+returning party.
+
+"He'll sleep for hours yet," said Mr. Hampton, "if we don't make too
+much noise. I'll caution the others. Best medicine in the world for him.
+He'll be all right when he wakes, I expect."
+
+While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, Bob and Jack, in
+lowered voices, told the others all that had occurred. Bob repeated his
+condemnation of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted the enemy
+to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton rested a hand on his shoulder, and
+told him not to be foolish.
+
+"In the first place," he said, "there seemed to be no reason why you
+should keep strict watch. It hardly seemed likely these fellows would
+boldly approach the island."
+
+"Expect they saw us set out, after all," suggested MacDonald, "and
+figured the whole party hadn't gone, and that them left behind would be
+on 'tother side of the island, so's they could land and surprise 'em."
+
+Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most
+likely explanation. Over the puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by
+those attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely to make him
+prisoner, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than that earlier
+advanced by the boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take them
+alive.
+
+"Reckon Lupo thought he'd get some information from you," said
+MacDonald.
+
+"But he wasn't here," Bob protested.
+
+"No, but you can bet they were actin' on his orders."
+
+Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had whispered that he had
+something to tell him. He explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought
+for a moment.
+
+"I have it," he said. "Art, bring the others here and we'll question
+them. At the same time, Bob, do you slip off and talk to your man. We'll
+keep the pair occupied, so that they won't be able to see. Tell your man
+that presently, then, we'll call him up to be questioned, too, and that
+he's to pretend sullen obstinacy and refuse--in the presence of his
+comrades--to answer any questions."
+
+Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he slipped away in an opposite
+direction. Executing a flank movement through the trees, he presently
+arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got behind the tree,
+against which the man with the wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid
+whisper he communicated Mr. Hampton's instructions to the other. The
+fellow comprehended, and then in a low tone, scarcely audible to Bob,
+who strained to hear, communicated surprising intelligence.
+
+Bob heard him out, then with a final word of caution, again slipped
+away, once more skirted camp through the trees, and approached the group
+from the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being grilled, but
+without success. At Bob's approach, Mr. Hampton turned again to Art.
+
+"Bring that other fellow here," he commanded. "See if he knows any more
+than these men."
+
+The man was brought into the council, but, acting on instructions,
+maintained an obstinate silence.
+
+"Oh, take them away, and feed them," said Mr. Hampton finally, as if
+despairing of obtaining any information. "We'll talk to them later,
+after I've eaten. Dick's fish will get cold if we don't fall to, and I'm
+too hungry to delay with these rascals."
+
+The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, were returned to the other
+side of the camp and, with their hands untied, were permitted to eat
+under the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once more they were tied
+up.
+
+Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, as soon as the trio of
+prisoners was out of hearing.
+
+"Out with it, Bob," he said. "I can see you're dying to tell us. Must be
+important."
+
+"It is," said Bob, emphatically.
+
+"What did he say?"
+
+"Mr. Hampton, you think we're alone in this wilderness except for Lupo's
+gang?"
+
+"I don't know who else would be here. This is country that white men
+never get into."
+
+"Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers of their party of ten
+are not more than two hundred miles away; perhaps less than that."
+
+"What! Say that again."
+
+Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his portion of fish into
+the fire.
+
+"It's true," said Bob. "At least that's what this fellow, Long Tom,
+declares. Long Tom--that's his name."
+
+"How does he know?"
+
+It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him.
+
+"That's what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before
+he reached the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his
+men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp were killed, and
+Thorwaldsson's supplies looted. He says a big band of Indians committed
+the outrage."
+
+"At whose orders?" asked Mr. Hampton.
+
+"Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They
+wanted the loot. What they didn't understand, they destroyed."
+
+"That's why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton,
+"for his radio equipment must have been among 'the things they didn't
+understand.' Go on, Bob."
+
+"Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter with the Eskimos up on
+the rim of the Arctic Ocean."
+
+"Where has he been? What became of the Indians?"
+
+"They were a hunting party, as far as I could gather, who, after chasing
+Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered
+with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this Spring started
+out. Then he fell in with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him."
+
+"And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say
+Thorwaldsson is so close?"
+
+"Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who told of
+Thorwaldsson having wintered with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson
+was on his way out down the Coppermine--or up it, whichever you choose to
+call it. Though that was weeks ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be
+following watercourses that would put him about one hundred and fifty or
+two hundred miles to the northeast of us."
+
+"Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot," said Mr. Hampton. "Was that
+everything? Or did Long Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?"
+
+"He doesn't know why Lupo is after us, except that it has something to
+do with Thorwaldsson. That's all I could get out of him. Pretty
+indefinite, but it was the best I could do."
+
+"Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something to go on, indeed."
+
+"And to think that old Bob got it all just because he was kind to a
+fellow with a sore arm and put some liniment on it," said Jack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.--MACDONALD TURNS BACK.
+
+
+Taking everything into consideration, Mr. Hampton decided that before
+any further steps were taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a
+good rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked and confessed
+to being shaky; even Bob was tired from the strain of the terrific fight
+through which he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours of
+exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done practically three
+days' work with little or no rest in the short interval between.
+
+"Altogether," said Mr. Hampton, summing up, "we are in no fit condition
+to set out in immediate pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men,
+nor even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be that the best plan
+would be not to pursue Lupo but to set off at once to try and find
+Thorwaldsson. I, for one, am too tired even to think straight. So I vote
+that we make camp, set watches and turn in for a good rest. I believe I
+could sleep the clock around."
+
+"If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton,"
+muttered Bob, shamefacedly, "I'd like to have it. I'll promise you not
+to go to sleep on the job again."
+
+Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back in kindly fashion, as Bob
+leaned forward, seated on the ground beside him.
+
+"Forget it, Bob," he said. "You have nothing with which to reproach
+yourself. Certainly you can have the first watch, if you want it. I
+expect the rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity to turn
+in at once. As to there being any further danger, however, I very much
+doubt it. You boys have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men killed
+and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. If he had only twelve or
+fourteen, as we believe, his number now is less than ours. The
+consequence is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to attack
+us here on the island. However, a watch must be kept, so go to it."
+
+Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took the first watch and the
+rest scattered around the camp, under the spruces, and soon were
+sleeping soundly. When the time to change watches came, with nothing
+alarming having broken the calm, Bob waked MacDonald, and himself turned
+in. After that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and was
+disturbed by nothing until awakened by being shaken. He looked up and
+found Frank bending above him, his face alight with merriment.
+
+"Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?" demanded Frank.
+
+Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once to the picture of Frank
+as he had last seen him. In his voice was a note of thankfulness at
+finding Frank thus carefree, as he said:
+
+"How do you feel, old man?"
+
+"Never better," confessed Frank. "Sleep is certainly the right medicine,
+isn't it?"
+
+"Don't I know it!"
+
+Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes.
+
+"Come on, Bob, let's take a plunge in the channel. Just got up myself.
+It'll wake us up, make us feel good. Everybody's up now, and Dick fixing
+to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum are talking things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out of
+the feathers, too. The three of us can have a fine swim."
+
+Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they set out for the place
+where Frank and Jack had gone in for a plunge before. Without referring
+to the tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of the four
+half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, the boys, as if by common
+consent, lay their course through the trees so as to avoid passing near
+it.
+
+The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully invigorating, and
+refreshed and with the young blood tingling in their veins, after a long
+sleep and a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought voracious
+appetites with them, but fortunately the fishermen had pulled in a big
+haul of beauties, and these, together with flapjacks made by that
+skillful chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like none ever
+made in city restaurants, the whole having the tang of the outdoors and
+woodland smoke for sauce, made a delectable repast.
+
+"Now," said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, "now for a discussion of
+what's to be done."
+
+Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. Lupo with five or six
+men at most was still at large. He might have turned back. He might be
+in hiding nearby. He might have gone on ahead in search of Thorwaldsson.
+In any case, Mr. Hampton declared, he felt it would be a waste of time
+to search for him in view of the fact that they had learned Thorwaldsson
+was somewhere to the north and east and their primary object was to join
+forces with that explorer. He wanted to know what the others had to say.
+
+Farnum, who had been talking matters over with Mr. Hampton, sat silent,
+nodding approval. The other was stating his own views. But MacDonald
+voiced a protest.
+
+"From your point of view, sir," he said, "I reckon you're right. But am
+I to let Lupo escape now that I come so close to gettin' him? And what
+am I to do with three prisoners on my hands?"
+
+"I've been turning that phase of the situation over and over," said Mr.
+Hampton. "I cannot see that we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo,
+now that we have pretty definite information through that fellow, Long
+Tom, of Thorwaldsson's presence alive and with some of his men in this
+wilderness. I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the chase,
+but it can't be helped. You have three prisoners, and can't very well
+watch them and pursue Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member of
+the Mounted you must take them in. We can't leave you to handle them
+alone, however, and----"
+
+He paused.
+
+"And what, sir," prompted MacDonald.
+
+"Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to leave one of our number
+with you. That will enable you to keep guard against surprise, watch
+over your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from your Post.
+We'll wireless your Captain Jameson full details of all that has
+occurred, give him your position here, and then you can wait for
+relief."
+
+MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent several minutes, while none
+spoke, but all watched him expectantly.
+
+"If you won't help me try and round up Lupo, you won't, and that's all
+there is to it," he said, finally. "Not as I blame you, neither. You got
+your job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With only a handful
+o' men he may be in trouble, too. Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin
+you fellows sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he'd likely be
+after Thorwaldsson, too."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"That's what I'm afraid of," he said, "that Thorwaldsson may need our
+aid."
+
+"Just so," continued MacDonald. "Such bein' the case, your best plan is
+to try and find him soon as you can."
+
+"Then you agree to my plan?"
+
+"Not so fast," said MacDonald. "You'll give me a man, hey?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Who?"
+
+"Why--I----"
+
+"Give me this feller," said MacDonald, laying a hand on Bob who sat
+beside him. "He's a fighter."
+
+"I couldn't do that, MacDonald. The boys must come with me."
+
+"All right. Only that fight he put up--that was a good one. Kind o'
+wished I could have him by me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin
+see he's used to big woods and river country. He'd make a good Mounty."
+
+This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his pipe at Dick.
+
+"What do you say, Dick?" asked Mr. Hampton. "It's up to you?"
+
+"I'd have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, wouldn't I?
+Probably have to winter there."
+
+MacDonald nodded.
+
+"Get you a job on the Force," he said.
+
+Dick's eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, he was alone in life,
+loved the wilderness, and still thrilled to adventure.
+
+"That so?" he asked. "Need men?"
+
+"Always room for a good one."
+
+"All right. It's a go," said Dick.
+
+MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then turned again to Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+"Such being the case," he said, "when you talk to Captain Jameson over
+that there contraption, just tell him I'm on my way in."
+
+"What?"
+
+"Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with three no-account breeds on
+our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No.
+We'll take 'em in."
+
+"But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners on your hands!"
+
+"Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. Never thought of
+calling for help except I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of
+his gang."
+
+Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to Dick.
+
+"But how about you, Dick?"
+
+"If MacDonald says so, I'm game."
+
+"Knew you would be," said MacDonald. "That's settled. Now call Captain
+Jameson, and let's get goin'. You want to be on your way, and we may as
+well be on ours."
+
+"But, MacDonald," said Mr. Hampton, trying one last protest, "suppose
+Lupo and the remainder of his gang see you start, and follow and attack
+you. What then?"
+
+"Huh." MacDonald's eyes snapped. "Couldn't ask for no better luck. I'd
+get a shot at him then."
+
+Farnum interrupted at this stage.
+
+"It's no use trying to stop him and Dick," he said. "I know Dick and I
+know these men of the Mounted. They're holy terrors. And the pair of
+them will get away with it, too."
+
+Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and abandoned his protests. Captain
+Jameson once more was called by wireless, and given a full account of
+what had occurred. He approved MacDonald's scheme and promised there
+would be a position on the Force for Dick when he arrived.
+
+"Well, Dick," said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements were made for
+departure, and he led him aside, "I've been pleased, indeed, with your
+ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to part company with
+you. Here is a check for the full sum I promised you for this Summer's
+work. And here in addition is something to remember me by."
+
+Into Dick's unwilling hand he pressed a handsome gold watch which he
+himself had worn for some years.
+
+"Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough fellow like me to carry,"
+protested Dick.
+
+"Now, now, nonsense," said Mr. Hampton. "Nothing is too good for you,
+old man. I want you to keep that to remember me by."
+
+"I don't need the watch for that, sir," said Dick gruffly, sticking it
+in his pocket nevertheless.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.--REINDEER SIGHTED.
+
+
+The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured from the Indians was
+turned over to MacDonald. It was easily capable of transporting five--the
+three prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter in the bow and
+stern respectively, and the prisoners unarmed between, there was little
+danger so long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable watchfulness.
+Two of the half-breeds were cowed and broken in spirit, moreover, while
+Long Tom was _hors de combat_ on account of the injury to his arm, and
+would be for some time to come. MacDonald's skin kayak was to be towed
+behind, containing his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners could
+carry the whole business alone at portages.
+
+MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable stream flowing into it
+from the southwest, and not the stream down which the Hampton party had
+come. He set out for this other stream before the others quit the
+island, with the intention of retracing his steps into the wilderness in
+large measure. This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the south,
+he said, was a large river which could be reached by a ten-mile portage,
+and down which they could travel for many miles.
+
+"If you ever want to join the Mounted," he said to Bob, to whom he had
+taken a great fancy, "let me know. I'll fix it for you."
+
+Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered by the sincere
+compliment.
+
+"I may take you up on that some day," he said. "Who knows?"
+
+Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes were said, and the craft
+shot away.
+
+"There go a couple of good men," commented Farnum, as under the powerful
+strokes of the paddles the canoe drew swiftly down the lake.
+
+"One good man, anyhow," said Art, who overheard the observation. "Ol'
+Dick an' me had a li'l talk. I'm going to join up with the Mounted, too,
+when we git back. We been pals fifteen year."
+
+"Fifteen years," exclaimed Frank. "In the wilderness all that time?"
+
+Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating canoe.
+
+"Sure," said Art. "It's home to us. Ain't no wilderness. Cities is the
+real wilderness. Dick an' me's been separated now and then, like now,
+but we always come together agin. I expect when we git to be old men
+like some prospectors I seen we'll be together all the time, fightin'
+and jawin' each other, but ready to tear the heart out o' anybody that
+jumps one of us."
+
+"It's a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald like he did, in that case,"
+said Jack.
+
+"Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we'd meet agin."
+
+Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself with the outfit.
+
+Presently everything was in readiness for departure and then the two
+remaining canoes, with the outfit distributed between them, the three
+boys in one and the three men in the other, started up the lake in the
+opposite direction from that taken by MacDonald and Dick. Previously,
+when in pursuit of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was of so
+considerable extent that, despite their hours of travel up the side,
+they had been unable to discern the farther end. In fact, the lake
+broadened out considerably some distance beyond the island. It was his
+intention, inasmuch as it followed the general northeastward direction
+they would pursue, to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there
+would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently large to float
+their canoes.
+
+In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours of steady paddling,
+they discerned the outlet of a stream of considerable width, quartered
+across the lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called to his
+father, in surprise:
+
+"Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake; not into it. Do you
+notice?"
+
+The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached.
+
+"It certainly does, Jack," said his father. "What do you make of it,
+Farnum?"
+
+The latter shook his head, puzzled.
+
+"I don't know," he said. "You must remember this is unexplored country.
+We're liable to find anything here. But, maybe----"
+
+"What?"
+
+"I don't know. We're near the Coppermine, aren't we, Art?"
+
+"Figure we must be."
+
+"Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine."
+
+"I'll bet that's it," Art approved. "The waters of that lake empty into
+the Coppermine. Yes, sir; I'll bet that's what it is. Well, that makes
+travel easy for awhile, anyhow."
+
+Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine incidents such as the
+occasional shooting of wild duck Or geese, brought the party at camping
+time at the end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy prairie
+between two low-wooded hills. Here it was decided to make camp.
+
+After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. Hampton, who was feeling
+out of sorts, retired to his little tent to try and sleep without taking
+part in the usual desultory conversation about the fire--which was kept
+going for the companionship and cheer it imparted and not from any need
+of warmth you may be sure--Jack arose and stretched.
+
+"My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe all day," he said. "I
+want to stretch them a bit. Who'll come with me to the top of that
+nearest hill? The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable
+view."
+
+Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany him. Farnum sat, smoking his
+pipe and staring into the fire absently. He didn't care to go. But Art
+arose and joined the party. It was not far to the top of the hill,
+although a stiff climb through the trees and brush. The crest, however,
+was bare of timber.
+
+Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to reach the top, stood
+struck with amazement. He turned to beckon the others forward with one
+hand, while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture enjoining
+silence.
+
+"For the love o' Pete," whispered Art, eyes bulging, as he stood beside
+Frank and peered down into the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with
+young willows.
+
+"Are they caribou?" asked Jack, low-voiced. "They don't look like the
+caribou we've run across along the streams."
+
+"They ain't, neither," said Art. "They're reindeer."
+
+"Must be Santy Claus's," chuckled Bob. "Always did believe there was
+something to that story about the old boy living up here near the North
+Pole, even though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now I
+know."
+
+His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued:
+
+"Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some o' these are white,
+some brown, and some spotted. Then they ain't the size o' caribou.
+Besides, I know they're reindeer. I see 'em often enough in Alaska to
+know."
+
+"Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?"
+
+Art nodded.
+
+"Look at 'em. They're tame. Must'a winded us, but that don't scare 'em
+none. They're used to humans. No more scared o' bein' hunted than cattle
+are back in the States."
+
+"Tame?" queried Frank. "What do you mean?"
+
+"Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, of this Far North, but
+the regular ones that come in touch with the white man, they keep herds
+o' reindeer just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. Look at 'em.
+Must be two-three hundred there right now. They're eight-ten hundred
+miles from home, too. Must 'a wandered away. Bet you there's a desprit
+Eskimo lookin' for 'em right now."
+
+Jack looked thoughtful.
+
+"What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like that," he said.
+
+"Yes, sir," affirmed Art emphatically. "Must be six-seven thousand
+dollars worth o' tame reindeer there. Pretty tough."
+
+"We can't do anything about it, though," said Bob.
+
+"Seems a pity-like we can't ride herd on 'em till some Eskimo shows up
+to claim 'em," said Art. "But it can't be done. Yore father, Jack, is
+all for pushin' on fast as we kin."
+
+After some further discussion, the party retraced its steps, with Art
+explaining to the boys the big difference existing between the
+semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of the
+wild Eskimos of the Arctic.
+
+"Folks think Alaska's right up next to the North Pole," he said.
+"Leastways folks in the States do. People comin' to Nome from the States
+every so often give me that knowledge. But they're shore mistaken.
+Alaska's great country that'll be settled up some day. Shore, we got
+hard Winters. But boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin' all the
+time, everything grows just three times as fast as in the States. My Pap
+was a farmer back in York State, an' I was raised on a farm. We had hard
+scratchin' an' our Winters was long an' hard, too. An' we didn't have
+Summers like in Alaska to make up for 'em. I'll bet if my Pap were
+livin' today an' farmin' in Alaska he'd find life a lot easier than what
+we had it on the old farm."
+
+"But why don't more people live in Alaska, then?" asked Frank.
+
+"Oh, I don't know. Hard to get to, for one thing. Ain't developed up
+with railroads, neither. Some day, though, you'll see 'em forced to come
+here, the way they're a-crowdin' up down in the States. Why, we got only
+60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she's quarter as big as the States an'
+could darn near feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and
+farmed right."
+
+"Art, why don't you go to farming? I'd think that would be the thing for
+you to do."
+
+"Mebbe I will some day," said Art. "But I'm an old batch. Got no wife,
+an' kind o' like to feel free to knock around instead o' bein' tied to
+one place."
+
+It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. They were young,
+with life ahead of them, and they wanted to see the world. In fact they
+had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have followed them
+through their various adventures, know. Of this they spoke as they made
+their way back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready to turn in,
+and merely awaiting their return before doing so. Since their first
+encounter with Lupo, and their discovery that they were not alone in the
+wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum had combatted sleepiness
+in order to keep guard until their return.
+
+"Art, you've got the first watch," he said, when they appeared. "The
+rest of you better turn in, and not sit up talking. With luck we ought
+to make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then we'll do some
+traveling. We've got to hit a fast pace from now on, for already we are
+having real twilight, and pretty soon we'll be having short nights while
+the sun dips entirely below the horizon. That means the season is
+growing short, and we have not got much time left before we'll have to
+start for the outside."
+
+Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed Farnum's example
+shortly, but Frank, who did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to
+talk, sat up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling him of
+some of their previous adventures.
+
+Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as not disturb the nearby
+sleepers, Frank noticed Art was not paying attention, and stopped.
+
+"Oh, well," he said, half petulantly, "if I'm boring you----"
+
+Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm.
+
+"Sorry, Frank," he said, in a whisper, "but I was a-listenin.' I got a
+strange feelin' like as if somebody had his eyes on the back a' my head.
+I wasn't payin' no attention to you but a-listenin' to see if I could
+hear anything."
+
+He was so intense that he communicated some of his trepidation to Frank.
+Instinctively, the latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up to
+peer at their twilit surroundings. They were camped in a tiny grove of a
+half dozen spruces, like an islet in a midst of long, matted grass.
+
+As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering the stillness. He
+threw himself prone, dragging Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was
+poured in on them, seemingly from all sides.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.--SURPRISED.
+
+
+"Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind that nearest tree and let 'em
+have it. They're in that long grass."
+
+As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward to a position behind
+the trunk of one of the spruces, began firing rapidly.
+
+Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the long
+grass. He had an uncanny feeling, for he could see no forms at which to
+fire, and the preliminary volley poured into the camp was not repeated,
+so he had no index as to the enemy positions.
+
+Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened by the shots, but Frank
+called fiercely: "Keep down."
+
+Realizing something of the situation, the three grabbed their rifles,
+laying by their sides, and, keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as
+they could see something at which to aim.
+
+Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping
+hard, and had not awakened instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull
+ache gripped his head, preventing him from thinking clearly and from
+comprehending instantly what was occurring. He lay a moment, wondering
+what had awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and Art had
+ceased firing to await some sign from the unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton
+decided to peer out and investigate what had disturbed him. He crawled
+from his dog tent and stood up.
+
+At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once more from the long grass
+surrounding the tiny grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made
+an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton fell heavily to the
+ground.
+
+A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication that the leader had
+been hit. Jack leaped up regardless of consequences and ran to his
+father, dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped around him.
+Bob ran to his assistance. To the hidden enemy it must have seemed as if
+their opponents were demoralized. At any rate, they grew more
+courageous, and started a rush.
+
+From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming men only
+partially seen as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But
+the long stems waving above them marked their paths, and there were
+three still on watch who would have to be dealt with.
+
+Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving grass indicated the enemy.
+Each guarded a side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the
+stream.
+
+"Wait'll they're close, fellows, then give it to 'em," cautioned Farnum.
+"Ready. Let's go."
+
+The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from the long grass came
+howls and shrieks of pain and terror. What followed was brief but
+lively. Each of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and the
+bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as if sprayed from the
+throat of a machine gun. The return fire was heavy but high, whipping
+through the branches of the spruce trees overhead.
+
+Reinforcements added to the strength of the defenders, for Bob darted
+out of the tent, crouched over, and flung himself beside Frank,
+beginning to shoot even as he talked.
+
+"Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle," he said. "Bullet creased his head
+and stunted him. He'll be all right."
+
+The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, feared to advance farther
+in the face of that fire. The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the
+attackers had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. The menace was
+still there.
+
+"Anybody hit?" Farnum called out.
+
+"Not me," said Art.
+
+"Nor me," answered Frank.
+
+"Thank our lucky stars for that," answered Farnum.
+
+They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close
+enough to each other to make communication in ordinary tones possible.
+Relieved to discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets that
+had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired anxiously after Mr.
+Hampton, and Bob answered he had been only stunned.
+
+"I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang," Farnum remarked. "But he
+must have had more men than we expected, or he wouldn't be attacking us
+like this."
+
+"What'll we do?" growled Art. "Looks like they got us penned in."
+
+"Oh, but we stopped their rush," protested Frank.
+
+"Yes," said Art, "but they ain't beatin' it as I can see. An' when we
+want to up an' leave camp, what's goin' to happen?"
+
+Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was beside him, pointed with his
+rifle toward the gap between the two hills, from the top of one of which
+they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next valley.
+
+"Look there, Frank," he exclaimed excitedly. "What do you make of that?"
+
+"Where? I don't----Oh, yes; now I see. Something moving."
+
+"Sure is something moving," Bob said.
+
+Already the short twilight was beginning to lighten, as the sun after
+its dip to the edge of the northern horizon now swung higher.
+
+"Bob."
+
+"What?"
+
+"I believe that's the reindeer herd."
+
+"From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up
+there on the hill top?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"But how in the world?"
+
+"Why, I noticed that the other valley swung around between those two
+little hills. The reindeer are just grazing along, hunting new pasture.
+And, say, Bob!"
+
+"Well, what now?"
+
+"I've got a bully idea."
+
+Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face Art on his right, who was
+keeping watch against surprise on his side of the little clump of trees
+sheltering them.
+
+"Art," said he, "look over there, between those two little hills. Are
+those reindeer? The reindeer we saw from the hilltop?"
+
+"Reckon so," said Art, after a critical inspection.
+
+"Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like cattle, I mean."
+
+"Reckon so. Why?"
+
+"Well, I'm going to try it," Frank declared in a determined tone. Still
+prone, he began to wriggle out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs,
+to unlace his boots and kick them off.
+
+"Are you crazy, Frank?" Bob demanded, puzzled, while Art and Farnum took
+their eyes from the coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment.
+
+"Crazy? No more than usual," Frank replied, as he completed disrobing,
+and now lay naked under the spreading branches of the spruce. "But I'm
+going to slip into the water and float down to that hill, then get in
+behind the reindeer and stampede them. You see what'll happen then,
+don't you?"
+
+Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning comprehension crept into
+his eyes, and he began to smile. Then he chuckled.
+
+"You little hound," he said, employing a pet expression among the boys,
+denoting admiration.
+
+"But, say, what's the idea?" demanded Art sharply, from his position
+several yards away.
+
+Frank had started wriggling forward, and waited until he was close to
+Art and Farnum before replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he
+intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving herd of
+reindeer, when he would land and attempt to stampede them.
+
+"You see how it is," he said. "You yourselves admit that we're in a
+tight place. Lupo's forces have cover in that long grass, and can wait
+us out. Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. The minute we
+get up and start to move around, we expose ourselves. Therefore, the
+best thing to do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn't it?"
+
+"Sure," said Art. "But how you going to do it with----"
+
+He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive their enemies from cover
+by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he paused.
+Dawning comprehension came into his eyes, too.
+
+"That's it," Frank said. "I see you get my idea."
+
+He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from the center, but who had
+overheard the conversation.
+
+"You see, Mr. Farnum," he said, "when the reindeer come dashing down,
+Lupo's men will have to run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding
+herd isn't anything to monkey with, I expect. Then you'll have your
+chance. But the reindeer won't dash in among these few close-set trees,
+so you'll be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they'll just head right on
+past here and try to get through the hills beyond."
+
+Farnum's glance approved.
+
+"A fine idea," he said, but then he added in a tone of doubt: "I don't
+know as I ought to let you go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn't like it,
+maybe, putting yourself into danger like that."
+
+"Oh, nonsense," said Frank. "I can slip unseen into the water. And I can
+swim like a seal. Ask Bob."
+
+And at once, to prevent any interruption of his plans, he resumed
+worming his way to the bank of the river.
+
+The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, and the clump of
+trees in which camp was situated stood so close to the water that the
+roots of several projected through the soil of the land. Frank had
+little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt sure that he
+accomplished the feat unseen by the enemy. He let himself into the
+stream, which was of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him
+to float downstream under the protection of the high bank, without the
+necessity of wading out to get to deeper water.
+
+"For God's sake, be careful, boy," whispered Farnum, as Frank
+disappeared.
+
+Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long knife. He had not figured
+out how he would set about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that
+to chance. What concerned him now was to get to a position behind the
+herd without discovery. He stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes
+roving along the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the enemy.
+
+None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it was hardly likely that
+any of the enemy lay in hiding here, as none of the shots fired at them
+had come from so close to the river. On the contrary, the enemy lay
+inland, showing they had come upon the camp from the landward side.
+Becoming bolder, therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming
+strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He felt for it several
+times, to reassure himself it was there and had not fallen out.
+
+Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was the one athletic sport at
+which he excelled both Bob and Jack, although they, too, were excellent
+swimmers. It did not take him long, therefore, aided by the current, to
+come abreast of the trees clothing the first of the two hills between
+which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly
+down to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how trees clothed it
+entirely, even dipping into the stream. When he had passed, as he
+believed, beyond a point at which there was any possibility of his being
+seen, he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself ashore.
+Then, after climbing a short distance up the hill, he began working his
+way around it through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside facing
+the valley where were his friends in the distant clump of trees, and the
+enemy hidden in the long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They
+were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward at the
+best pace he could command.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.--THE STAMPEDE.
+
+
+For the first time since starting on his wild project, a doubt as to its
+success entered Frank's mind. But he put it resolutely aside as he sped
+forward, crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined to make
+the best speed possible. His companions were in a ticklish situation. He
+wanted to do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. As to
+his own danger, he gave it not a thought.
+
+What worried Frank was the possibility that he would be unable to
+stampede the reindeer herd. This was the thought which he put aside. But
+it kept recurring. And when he had come into position behind the herd,
+and saw them feeding quietly below him, not a stone's throw away, at the
+foot of the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy plain
+began, he was still without an idea as to what to do.
+
+Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd might set them into
+motion and stampede them forward. But doubt as to the workability of
+that method had seized him as he first climbed from the water and, from
+among the trees, obtained his first view of the herd. The animals,
+grazing quietly, were so well spread out that he feared stoning them
+would not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede.
+
+"Well, here goes for a try, anyway," he muttered to himself.
+
+Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock lying about. Collecting
+a heap of these, he began pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown
+and white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the startled animal, struck
+on the flank, snorted, tossed her head and gave a little jump. She went
+forward only a step or two, however, and then settled down to grazing
+again.
+
+Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone caught her on the side
+of the neck. She tossed her head angrily, and sidled forward again. The
+movement brought her sharply into contact with another cow, and for a
+moment Frank was filled with hope that the pair would start fighting and
+alarm the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow sheered
+away from the other, and both resumed grazing.
+
+What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. He had already considered
+the possibility of startling the reindeer by shouting at them, but had
+given up that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy in the
+grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them to know nothing of the
+menace in their rear until the stampeded herd should sweep down upon
+them.
+
+"I wonder----" he said, muttering the words for the comfort of hearing his
+own voice.
+
+Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they were tame reindeer,
+accustomed to the presence of man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his
+natural state. And of Eskimos at that--men dressed a good deal
+differently from the way in which he ordinarily clothed himself. What
+would those reindeer think if they saw a naked, white body dash down
+upon them suddenly?
+
+"I'll do it," he said. "That's the only way. And it will work, too, I'll
+bet."
+
+Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and selected a
+tough branch the thickness of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from
+it the projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip.
+
+Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming and determined,
+Frank made his way to the edge of the trees, and then stole out into the
+long grass, crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to see him until
+he was upon them, and as they were grazing away from him, this was not
+so difficult. In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of cows
+before one swung about and looked at him.
+
+The minute that occurred, Frank realized there was no longer any
+possibility of concealment, and that the time had come to strike. And
+strike he did. Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging his
+whip so that it sank through the air.
+
+Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the flank of the nearest
+reindeer, Frank swung it around on all sides. Every swing landed. The
+swish as the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded him oddly of
+the sound of a stick beating rugs at home. Many a time he had heard that
+same thud-thud from behind his house.
+
+Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, for he felt that if no
+sound indicating that he was human came from him, the consternation of
+the reindeer would be increased.
+
+And that he had not miscalculated became at once apparent, for the
+reindeer near him lifted up their sharp little hooves and sprang to get
+out of the vicinity of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, to
+escape him, there was only one way for them to go, and that was forward,
+so forward they went. Right into the main body of the herd they dashed,
+with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, with each leap bringing
+his whip down upon the flank of a laggard.
+
+Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, dashed by so close on his
+right as to brush Frank. He was not being charged. The animal was
+panicky, and merely seeking to escape. But he had to leap nimbly aside
+to avoid being bowled over. And as he leaped, the long knife clutched in
+his hand pricked the animal's flank.
+
+The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken cry, and launched
+itself forward like a thunderbolt into the midst of the disturbed herd.
+That, apparently, was all that was needed to complete the impending
+panic. Frank's inexperienced eye could not have told the composition of
+the herd, but Art, when they had first caught sight of the reindeer from
+the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were cows, and the bucks
+numbered only a handful. If any buck had a masculine curiosity to
+discover what this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like and
+yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the chance to gratify it. For
+the now thoroughly frightened cows started forward in a rush that would
+have overborne any animal foolish enough to try to stem it.
+
+And then Frank did what might have been considered a foolish thing.
+Carried away by the enthusiasm engendered by seeing his plan to stampede
+the herd work out successfully, he continued to bound along behind, at
+first able to whip the bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling
+hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward like the
+wind.
+
+Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering Frank's friends dashed the
+reindeer. And an exultant throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy
+lay in the long grass between the herd and the trees, and inevitably,
+therefore, the stampeding animals would drive them out.
+
+Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued on his way, running
+as fast as the nature of the ground permitted. The herd beat the long
+grass flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had been pressed
+down on all, and the going was easier than he had looked for.
+
+Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a little wisp of smoke
+showed the young fellow the discharge came from the trees. His own
+friends were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill swept over him.
+He felt certain his friends were firing at the enemy, and that the
+stampeding herd was driving the latter ahead of it, although because of
+the presence of the animals between himself and the enemy he could not
+see whether such was the case.
+
+That Frank's surmise was correct, however, was soon borne out. For the
+first shots fired from the trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that
+told him everybody was in action.
+
+Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed with shouts and
+cries, and Frank, pausing a moment to peer ahead and listen came to the
+conclusion that the enemy was desperately shooting at the reindeer in an
+effort to turn the herd aside. If that was the case, however, their
+efforts were unsuccessful, for the animals filled with the unreasoning
+spirit of panic did not swerve from their course.
+
+"By golly," Frank exclaimed aloud, "I believe I can reach camp all
+right."
+
+And once more he began to run forward. For it seemed to him that the
+herd, sweeping the enemy before it, would leave the ground free for him
+to reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends.
+
+On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the beaten down grass behind it.
+His eyes were strained towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as
+he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. Hampton's tent. He paid
+no attention to his surroundings.
+
+Then a form rose up from the long grass beside the swathe beaten down by
+the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a
+buzzing in his ears, and lost consciousness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.--LUPO'S END.
+
+
+When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a blanket in camp and the
+sight of Bob and Jack bending anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him.
+
+"Hello," he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a sharp stab of pain
+passed through his shoulder.
+
+"Don't move, Frank, We'll have you fixed up right in a minute," said Mr.
+Hampton soothingly.
+
+"Is it bad, Dad," Jack anxiously inquired.
+
+"Just grazed the bone," said Mr. Hampton, putting the finishing touches
+to the bandage, and straightening up. "There, Frank, now you'll be all
+right."
+
+"What happened to me?" asked Frank, struggling to a sitting position,
+and finding his right arm bound across his chest.
+
+"Bullet through your shoulder brought you down," said Mr. Hampton. "And
+your head struck a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out."
+
+"Good enough," said Frank, "but who shot me? I was dashing along,
+yelling to attract your attention, and never knew what hit me."
+
+"I guess you didn't," said Jack. "If it hadn't been for Art, you might
+have been finished. But he shot down the fellow that winged you."
+
+"Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn't an enemy in sight and
+carried you in," said Art, as he saw Frank about to thank him. "Give
+your gratitude to them."
+
+Frank smiled.
+
+"I guess I owe it to you all," he said.
+
+"You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank," said
+Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. "Unarmed, too."
+
+"Well, I was stampeding 'em, Mr. Hampton," said Frank. "I couldn't do
+that, you know, without being there."
+
+The older man shook his head.
+
+"If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn't have let you take that chance,"
+he said. "No, Farnum," he hastened to add, "I'm not criticizing you.
+When these boys take it in their heads to do something it's hard to head
+them off. However, it all turned out for the best."
+
+"Tell me about it," Frank said. "How did my scheme work out?"
+
+"Couldn't have been better, old thing," said Bob. "Lupo's men ran like
+rabbits when those reindeer swept down on them. They tried a few shots
+in an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness of their
+efforts, turned and ran. We gave them a few shots to help them on their
+way. We counted nine."
+
+"And they got away?"
+
+"All but the man Art shot," said Jack. "The fellow who shot at you. And
+you haven't heard who he was."
+
+Jack's eyes were bright. Frank looked at him questioningly.
+
+"Not----"
+
+"Yes," said Jack. "It was Lupo himself. Art wounded him in the chest. He
+died before we could do anything for him. But Dad got some information
+from him first."
+
+He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton's face was both grim and sad.
+
+"Yes, Frank," he said. "We learned who set these men on us, and who
+plotted against Thorwaldsson. But let us not discuss it now. It's bad
+business all the way through."
+
+Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with him, and the two fell into
+a low-toned discussion. Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume
+his clothing which still lay where he had discarded it before taking to
+the river. Art busied himself at packing up the camp equipment.
+
+Presently, the two older men called Art to them and, after a few words
+of discussion, rejoined the boys.
+
+"Boys," said Mr. Hampton, "we want your opinions on this, too."
+
+"On what, Dad?"
+
+"Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away from the reindeer, and we
+accounted for Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn't seem likely there
+were more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out there in the grass
+may be one or more badly wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time
+or another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there are any such, we
+can't go off and leave them there to die. I wouldn't treat a dog like
+that."
+
+"They're not dogs," muttered Farnum, bitterly. "They're wolves."
+
+"Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too great a risk," Mr. Hampton
+continued. "He says that if we go out to search for wounded, we are
+likely to be shot for our pains."
+
+"Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you were going to help," protested
+Jack.
+
+"You don't know them," said Farnum.
+
+"Well, just the same," said Jack, "I think Dad is right. It would be
+shameful for us to go away without investigating."
+
+"I'd feel like a murderer," said Bob. "Shooting 'em down in a fight is
+one thing. It was their lives or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die
+in the wilderness is something entirely different."
+
+Farnum made a gesture of surrender.
+
+"I guess I seem hard-hearted," he said. "But you don't know what I've
+been through in the past. All right, we'll make a search. But I warn you
+to be on guard."
+
+"Hardly likely after all that there are any wounded out there," remarked
+Frank, taking part in the discussion for the first time. "They must have
+been in hiding right in the path of the reindeer, and you can't see any
+forms there now. If there were any too badly wounded to escape, they'd
+also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves to the side."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded.
+
+"The grass is so beaten down, too," he said, "that if there were anybody
+out there, we could see him. However, I cannot rest easy without making
+a search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and keep watch. The rest of
+us will take care of the search."
+
+To this the boys made no objection. As a matter of fact, it was one time
+that exclusion from activity did not irritate them. They had no stomach
+for what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, thinking of
+the terrible affair on the island in the lake, kept silence. Bob
+protested, but more as a matter of form and because he considered
+manliness demanded it, than otherwise.
+
+Mr. Hampton shook his head.
+
+"None of us want to do this, Bob," he said. "It has to be done, however.
+But I certainly don't want you boys along."
+
+The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands for use in case of
+emergency, set out, while the boys watched from the trees. Keeping close
+together, they quartered the plain, going far beyond the beaten down
+stretch of grass left by the passing of the reindeer herd. Presently,
+the boys saw them return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said:
+
+"Well, thank goodness, that's over."
+
+Mr. Hampton's spirits were considerably higher on his return, as the
+boys could see by his features.
+
+"Nobody anywhere," he reported, "and we made a thorough search, too."
+
+"More thorough than there was need for," said Farnum, grumpily.
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where
+men are thrown into intimate contact every hour of the day and night,
+they get to know each other better than would be the case through a
+lifetime of association under ordinary circumstances. It was so here.
+Mr. Hampton had come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the
+latter's bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the easterner knew there
+was some good reason. He sensed a tragedy in Farnum's past, about which,
+perhaps, the other would some day speak in a moment of confidence. And
+he forgave the man's seeming brutality accordingly.
+
+"All right, everybody," said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. "Let's pack up and be
+on our way."
+
+Thanks to Art's previous preparations, the business of breaking camp was
+speedily concluded, and the party embarked in the canoes and once more
+got under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, because of Frank's
+wounded shoulder and his inability to paddle, Art should take his place
+in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and
+Farnum. But to this arrangement the boys protested vigorously, and Mr.
+Hampton settled the matter by supporting them.
+
+"Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists," he said. "They have given plenty
+of evidence of that on this trip, and at home they are always in the
+water when they aren't flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don't
+like to be separated."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.--IN THE FOG.
+
+
+Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, corresponding in
+time to the passage of a day, although there was nothing to mark the
+lapse except the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension of
+the sun. Camp was pitched on an island in the stream which was small and
+compact and could be easily defended in case attack on them was renewed.
+
+Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton felt there was little
+danger. With Lupo gone, the rascals composing his party would no longer
+be held to their purpose, and start to make their way out of the
+wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts.
+
+When travel was resumed after an undisturbed camp, everybody felt rested
+and in a more cheerful frame of mind.
+
+"We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon," Farnum exclaimed, as they
+set out.
+
+His words were prophetic, because at the end of two hours, on rounding a
+bend, they discerned not far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which
+emptied the stream they had been following.
+
+"The Coppermine beyond a doubt," said Farnum.
+
+In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And, before long, all
+question of doubt was conclusively settled by the discovery of great
+rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper
+deposits from which the river took its name.
+
+"Sometime, when the transportation problem has been solved, this region
+will be supplying copper to the world," Mr. Hampton observed.
+
+The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, as the older men had
+let their paddles swing idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with
+them.
+
+"Why can't it be taken out now, Dad?" asked Jack.
+
+"Because," explained Mr. Hampton, "the only method would be by ship
+through the Arctic, and even in the short Summer that is a passage often
+blocked by ice. No, development of the copper resources of this
+wilderness, as well as of the oil we hope to find, will have to wait on
+the building of a railroad."
+
+"But ice and snow will block the railroad."
+
+"Not nearly to the same extent," Mr. Hampton said. "Throughout the
+Summer, such a road could be in continuous operation. Even in Winter,
+with properly designed equipment, the road could be kept open--perhaps.
+That, however, is doubtful, for of the continuous severity of Winter
+here you boys can have no conception."
+
+"Well, if we don't turn back soon, they'll get some idea of it, all
+right," said Farnum, grimly.
+
+"You mean we'll be caught by Winter before we can get out?" asked Mr.
+Hampton.
+
+"When the old North Pole starts sliding south, she slides fast," said
+Farnum, sententiously.
+
+As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, all dug their
+paddles into the stream with renewed vigor, and the two canoes swept on
+between the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour.
+
+That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness in the air to which
+the party was not accustomed. Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys
+worked at building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither he
+indicated.
+
+"The moon," he said. "Sure sign the season's getting late. That's the
+first time you could see it real good."
+
+"How late in the Summer is it, anyway?" asked Frank. "I, for one, have
+kept no track of time. And I don't see how anybody else could with the
+continuous daylight we have had."
+
+"Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four hours," said
+Jack. "I've seen him do it."
+
+Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained that from Long Tom, the
+Indian they had taken captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten
+directions as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson and his men to
+be. The explorer, according to Long Tom, was making his way along the
+Coppermine, in an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by the
+Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, Mr. Hampton's party
+was still to the south of Thorwaldsson.
+
+"From now on, however," said Mr. Hampton, "we must keep our eyes open as
+we proceed for any signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson
+already had passed, going south. Not that I consider that to be likely,
+however," he added. "On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn't lying, and I
+believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson should be close at hand,
+and we ought soon to encounter him."
+
+Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys awoke in the morning they
+found a thick wet fog over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the
+rocks were wet, and the river which had lain spread out before them
+under the moonlight when they turned in for the night, now could not be
+seen. Only a gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines even
+of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood in anxious conversation.
+
+When the boys joined their elders, they found the question up for
+discussion was the question of whether to proceed or remain where they
+were until the fog lifted.
+
+"We've had unexampled good weather so far, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum.
+"But this fog may mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from now
+on."
+
+"I realize all that," Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience mute
+evidence to Jack, at least, that his Father was worried. "What I'd like
+to know now, is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts."
+
+"Why not move on, Dad?" asked Jack.
+
+"Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if we travel in this fog we
+run the danger of being caught in rapids and sucked forward before being
+able to reach the bank. For another, we might--just might--pass
+Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without knowing it. He might be traveling,
+too."
+
+After some further discussion, it was decided the party should remain
+until the fog lifted, and that all should be on guard to catch any sound
+of movement out of the fog which would indicate somebody, presumably
+Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following breakfast, in fact, all but Mr.
+Hampton, who remained in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered
+and lost their way in the fog, took up positions along the bank of the
+river, some twenty yards apart to maintain "listening posts."
+
+An hour passed, and then another, with no indication that the fog was
+thinning out, and with no sound coming to straining ears except the lap
+of the water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying work in
+a way, to sit there for so long a period, isolated, as if entirely alone
+in an unpeopled world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the
+strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did Farnum or Art who were
+old hands at the wilderness game.
+
+In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had decided, because of the
+greater experience of the two older men, that they should take up their
+positions at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound along
+the Coppermine escaped the attention of the boys, Farnum and Art would
+be pretty likely to remedy the oversight.
+
+To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as he sat there, hunched
+up on a rock, staring out into that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt,
+if anything, more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, at least,
+had the consolation of knowing there was someone to either side. But,
+with none of his friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much
+alone, indeed.
+
+All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections that had no
+bearing whatsoever on the situation in which he found himself. He
+thought of sunny days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or
+zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He thought of one thing
+and another, classroom, Mexican mountains, that strange city of another
+world found immured in the Andes, and--of Marjorie. Ever since his first
+meeting with his sister's friend, Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a
+position of growing importance in Bob's scheme of things. Someday----
+
+"Some girl," Bob said to himself. "I'll have to see more of her."
+
+He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, eyes staring into the
+fog. In reality, his thoughts, as can be seen, were far, far away. But
+presently, a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness and he
+sprang into instant alertness. He listened, holding his breath,
+straining to hear.
+
+It came again.
+
+Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first man to the south.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.--A WAILING CRY.
+
+
+"Jack, Jack," he shouted, as he ran through the fog, blindly, but
+remembering to veer away from the river bank a little to avoid the
+danger of tumbling in. "Jack, Jack, where are you?"
+
+A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, enormous. A hand
+gripped his shoulder and brought him to a halt.
+
+"Here I am, Bob. What's the matter?"
+
+Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes.
+
+"I heard something out there," he said, pointing into the fog upon the
+river. "I guess I'd been asleep, or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn't be
+sure I had heard anything. It came twice--that sound. Then there was
+silence. So I came down here to ask whether you had heard, too."
+
+"But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing."
+
+"Jack, it was the sound of a baby's cry."
+
+Bob's voice was solemn. A shiver ran through Jack, as if a breath of
+cold air had fanned him. In that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far
+northern wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was preposterous.
+More, it was uncanny.
+
+"Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly were dreaming. A baby.
+Huh."
+
+"Maybe so," Bob said, reluctantly. "But, true as I live, Jack----"
+
+The other's grip on his shoulder tightened.
+
+Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, but unmistakable. It
+was the cry of a baby, if ever there was such a thing.
+
+But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two
+listened, straining to hear, but the cry died away without being
+repeated. They looked at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them.
+
+"Jack, I'm afraid," confessed Bob in a whisper. "I don't know--there's
+something strikes a chill into me--I--I----"
+
+He paused. Jack nodded.
+
+"I feel the same way, Bob," he said, low-voiced. "What a pair of fools
+we are, though," he added, brightening. "That must be some bird, or
+animal, perhaps."
+
+Almost unconsciously, they had been making their way southward and now
+another figure rose up in the fog before them--that of Frank. He was
+about to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and this time it
+came from two quarters, from the river and from farther inland. The
+three stood, silent, speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of
+the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art materialized out of
+the fog.
+
+"Good, there you all are," said Farnum, in a low, tense voice. "Follow
+me to camp."
+
+And without a word of explanation he started at right angles away from
+the river, for they had taken their stations in such fashion that Frank,
+holding the middle position, would be directly opposite the camp. This
+was in order to enable them to reach it without losing their way in the
+fog.
+
+"What is it, Art?" asked Jack, his voice matching Farnum's.
+
+"Indians," answered Art, tersely. "Stick close together and don't make
+no noise."
+
+It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, and the three boys
+hurrying along in the wake of Farnum and Art could not be accused of
+cowardice for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. Often
+had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far northern Indians. Bitter
+had been their experiences with Lupo's half-breeds, in whose veins
+flowed the blood of the Indians of the north.
+
+As they hurried along, there flashed through their minds some of the
+stories Farnum had told. Had they gotten so far, so near the end of
+their quest for the "Lost Expedition" only to be wiped out by Indians,
+on the very eve of success? Such thoughts raced through the mind of
+each. But they were determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger,
+used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was swept aside, and, by
+the time they tumbled into the little hollow in which camp had been
+pitched, and where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself well in
+hand.
+
+Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and a smile of grim
+approval was his greeting.
+
+"Indians, boys," he said. "Farnum told me. I suspected as much. Now, we
+have no trees here for bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough.
+Let us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We'll be pretty close
+together, and if any Indians stumble on us they'll get a warm reception.
+Listen." He spoke in a low voice. "There goes that cry again. Does it
+sound closer? Yes," as the other nodded, "I thought so. Quick. Take your
+positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me."
+
+There was a little tremor in his voice. That was all. But Jack
+understood. He clasped his father's hand strongly, then threw himself
+prone beside him, while the others ranged themselves in a circle as
+commanded.
+
+Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. Once more it was
+answered in kind from the water. But to all it was apparent that the
+sounds were farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful silence
+with a whispered:
+
+"They're moving on, moving away."
+
+"Look, Dad," Jack exclaimed excitedly. "I can see those rocks ahead
+where a minute ago was only the white fog. Why, the fog's lifting. It's
+lifting, Dad, sure enough."
+
+"You're right, Jack," his father replied, low-voiced, but there was
+anxiety rather than jubilation in his tone. "That will make it bad for
+us. We'll be exposed to sight."
+
+Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As faint came the reply
+from the water. Both cries were to the north. Originally they had come
+from that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence they had come.
+What could it mean?
+
+The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the silence. At the same
+time a cold breeze blew across the crouching figures in the shallow pit
+and the fog began to shred out fast before it.
+
+Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The others also gained their
+feet. The shooting now was fast and furious.
+
+"I can't understand," said Farnum, in a puzzled tone.
+
+With an exclamation, Jack seized his father's arm.
+
+"Dad," he cried, "you said Thorwaldsson might be near."
+
+"Yes, why--"
+
+"That's it," said Art, in a tone of conviction. Mr. Farnum turned
+towards him.
+
+"You mean?"
+
+"Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson's being attacked."
+
+Jack nodded.
+
+"That's what I meant, Dad."
+
+"You're right, Jack," said his father. "Come on. It can't be anything
+else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson is in this wilderness. We must help him.
+Stick close together."
+
+And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton started on the dead
+run towards the direction of the shooting, with the others at his heels.
+
+The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks of the copper ore were
+scattered around. On this account their view was restricted, but the
+sound of the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising them that
+they were nearing the scene of conflict. Suddenly Bob, who was in the
+lead, having out-distanced the others several yards, rounded a big rock
+and found himself on a bank above a narrow strip of beach.
+
+Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead or wounded. Two canoes were
+drawn up on the beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark,
+crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther down the beach were three
+other canoes grounded, and beside them several forms of wounded men, and
+five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender of the attacked
+position, creeping up on him.
+
+Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers mustered up
+courage for a rush, and with wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark,
+indeed, for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. Bob looked back to
+see how close were his companions, but they were not yet in sight. His
+dash had carried him farther than he had believed to be the case.
+
+It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way the land lay. The lone
+defender was the survivor of Thorwaldsson's party, if the explorer's
+party it was, of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white man. The
+others were half-breeds, and if Bob was not mistaken they were of the
+same gang which he had encountered before.
+
+It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing his rifle to his
+shoulder, he prepared to open fire on the crushing enemy. But as his
+finger pressed the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle had
+became jammed in some fashion. Desperately he worked to release the
+trigger, but to no avail.
+
+Then the light of battle came into big Bob's eyes. The half-breeds were
+just below him now. Several of their number had fallen in the rush, shot
+down by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and they evidently
+were bent on polishing off their lone opponent. So absorbed were all in
+their own drama, they had not seen Bob.
+
+Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on the back of one of the
+attackers, and bore him to the ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who
+himself had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself together,
+regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell fit to
+"frighten a wolf pack," as Frank later described it.
+
+The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on the shoulders of another
+of the half-breeds, felling him as if he had been struck by lightning.
+So tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from Bob's grasp. But
+he leaped for another of the enemy, a fellow whose startled face was
+close to his, seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to be
+tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The fourth man was dropped by
+a shot from the defender of the canoe.
+
+"Attaboy, Bob," came Frank's voice, from the bluff above.
+
+One after the other, Bob's friends leaped to the beach.
+
+As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and tried to grasp his hand,
+uttering enthusiastic praise the while, Bob looked around.
+
+"Say, where's that chap? Why, he's fainted."
+
+Freeing himself from his companions' clutches, Bob leaped over the
+up-ended canoe and bent above the recumbent body of the doughty
+defender.
+
+"Why, he's badly wounded," he cried.
+
+Mr. Hampton pushed him aside.
+
+"Here, let me look, Bob," he said. "You fellows help Farnum and Art in
+looking after the others. The place is a shambles, with wounded men
+everywhere."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.--OUTWARD BOUND.
+
+
+It was a week before the wounded could be moved. At close range though
+the fight had been, none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in
+amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their mark," he said. "I've
+seen men, tough fellows, regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in
+Alaskan saloons in the old days without anybody being killed. When a man
+sees red, he don't take no good aim."
+
+The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital spots, but
+Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery at first
+was a matter of doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party to
+keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick of time.
+
+From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson's five companions, however, the
+story of what had occurred had been obtained. They had been on their way
+down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken in the fog. They
+had landed in the little beach to wait for the fog to lift. There the
+half-breeds, survivor's of Lupo's gang, who had been dogging the trail
+of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come upon them.
+
+The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds had been looking for
+the Hampton party and not for Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked,
+the majority from the canoes, and three who had been scouting along
+shore, from the land. Surprised thus, Thorwaldsson's party had put up a
+game fight, but one after the other had been shot down until only the
+leader was left. He, barricaded behind the canoes, had held off the rest
+of the attackers until the final rush and Bob's timely arrival.
+
+As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening into short nights,
+Art and Farnum both grew increasingly anxious to be on their way for the
+outside. They knew their North, and they realized that the time
+remaining to them before Winter set in was narrowing down to a
+perilously small edge.
+
+"We'll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton," Farnum pleaded. "What
+with wounded on our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost
+hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we can't afford to
+waste time. Can't Thorwaldsson be moved? He'll be all right in a canoe."
+
+"As long as the traveling is easy, yes," said Mr. Hampton. "He will be
+all right. But how about at the portages? He's lost lot of blood
+already. He can't afford to lose any more. However, I expect that with
+care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. We'll start tomorrow."
+
+Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was broken, and the party got
+under way. Frank's shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once
+more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, and he took his
+place in the canoe with Bob and Jack. They had another passenger this
+time in Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a shot in the
+sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was taken in the canoe
+occupied by Mr. Hampton and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft
+with members of Thorwaldsson's party. Several of the latter had been
+creased by rifle bullets and one shot through a leg, but all could wield
+paddles.
+
+And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds
+in three canoes, deprived of arms and closely watched by their captors
+in the four canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, it was
+felt, the prisoners could be controlled until they should near
+civilization. Without weapons they would be in a hopeless plight in the
+wilderness, unable to defend themselves against wild animals, unable to
+provide food for themselves. Therefore, no attempt on the part of their
+captives to escape was looked for by the others, until they should near
+the outlying settlements of the inhabited country.
+
+"When that time comes," Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, "we must be on
+the lookout, for the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to
+get back their weapons and make a break for it. And I am determined to
+take them into civilization as witnesses to prove my statement of the
+murderous conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman in
+faraway New York."
+
+Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had occurred and from the
+accounts, first of Long Tom and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell
+and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson's party, he had pieced
+together the story of the conspiracy against them.
+
+To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme of which was that when
+Farrell had told his story to Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery
+of the oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson's confidential
+secretary had gone to a New York financier and sold him the information.
+He had not been able to tell definitely, however, the location of the
+oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, that Farrell
+was not certain of it himself, his vicissitudes in getting out of the
+country having unsettled his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent
+his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson be tracked.
+
+"Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the mere tracking of
+Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton. "But I doubt it. The attacks on
+Thorwaldsson's expedition, the disappearance of his ship and crew, all
+look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain Grimm's ends at whatever
+cost in human life. And, on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who
+was paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson's former secretary,
+acting as agent for Grimm, show the latter aimed to put us all out of
+the way."
+
+"And all for money," said Jack. "It's hard to believe."
+
+"Ah, you don't know Grimm," said his father. "The man who develops this
+Arctic oil region may become the richest in the world. Grimm is
+ambitious for that position. He's got a lot of money so far, in one
+crooked way or another. But he's not one of the big ones yet, not one of
+the richest. And he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached
+himself this time, for I've got the evidence, and I'll see that we get
+more in Dawson and Seattle and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have
+the power or freedom to toy with men's lives when I get through with
+him."
+
+Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and could not be questioned,
+the full account of what had befallen his expedition since it set out
+from Seattle was learned from the others. First of all, they had
+succeeded in retracing Farrell's earlier footsteps, and had found the
+oil region and the river running through it. A thorough survey of the
+country had been made, with maps showing the outlet by water to the
+Arctic Ocean.
+
+In fact, the party had made its way out the river into the Arctic Ocean
+and around the coast into the Coppermine. There they had encountered and
+made friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started down the
+Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north into the Arctic, but had
+been attacked, losing half the members of their party and a large part
+of their equipment, including the radio. It was after this that the
+aviator of the expedition had attempted to fly to the outside with news
+of Thorwaldsson's plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through
+the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the
+Coppermine, to which they had put back. The death of the aviator, near
+the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until
+the news was imparted by the boys.
+
+The course followed as they struck southward was not that pursued by
+Farrell when he had made his way back to civilization. On that occasion
+he had frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it would be unwise
+to trust now to his guidance. Instead, Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to
+retrace their own trail back to the island in the lake where MacDonald
+had been encountered, and thence follow his course to the Fort of the
+Northwest Mounted Police.
+
+Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever growing longer and
+colder, with frost on the ground in the mornings. The honking of the
+wild geese overhead, as they made their way south, also was a warning
+that the mantle of Winter soon would settle down.
+
+"You see," Art said to the boys one day, "Winter in this country not
+only means dreadful cold for which we ain't prepared in the matter of
+clothing or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there ain't no food
+to be had. Yes, there's plenty of game now, geese and duck everywhere
+along the streams, caribou plentiful. But you notice they're all going
+south. When Winter strikes, there'll be nothing in this wilderness but
+rabbit and beaver. Beaver's all right--if you can dig 'em out o' their
+huts. But rabbit--huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.--LONG JIM APPEARS.
+
+
+Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they
+had planned to be when the cold should really set in. This was due to a
+variety of circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson's recovery was
+one of the retarding influences, which prevented them making the desired
+speed. After weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, and
+Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected by a bullet that ploughed
+along the left side of his head. The other wounded, although quick to
+recover, also acted as a hindrance, especially at the first.
+
+Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived weeks ahead of the
+expected time. And daily, as the ice on stream and river thickened, it
+became increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes could not be
+abandoned, for, once snow began to fly, the travelers would have been
+helpless on land, without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could be
+constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes made, too, but neither
+would be worth much, and the manufacture of them would take a good deal
+of time.
+
+Two sentries were always posted at night now; one by a fire around which
+slumbered the prisoners, the other by a fire in the midst of a circle
+composed of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. It was Jack's
+turn to keep guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall,
+which had caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had brought them,
+indeed, to the verge of despair. For they were insufficiently clad, even
+though the skins of many animals slain for food in the past weeks had
+been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, in addition, with the
+closing-in of Winter game had become so scarce that the camp was
+virtually on the verge of starvation.
+
+Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which lay his friends. One of
+the Thorwaldsson party, Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire.
+Looking across the little space which separated the two parties, Jack
+could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the
+fire, which Swenson fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost to
+be in it. Around him the members of his own party were similarly
+disposed.
+
+With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of wood and tossed it into
+the fire. The flames at once shot high and, as if that were a signal,
+out of the darkness beyond came a robust hail.
+
+"Hello, there. Keep 'er goin', sonny."
+
+Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a big fur-clad figure
+of a man on snowshoes. On his back was a pack which he dropped to the
+ground with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in the crook of
+an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, spread his hands to the
+blaze, working his fingers gratefully back and forth.
+
+"Cold an' gittin' colder," he announced, casually. "Got a nice fire
+here."
+
+Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find another wanderer in
+this wilderness which they believed unpeopled was exciting enough. But
+to have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing any explanation of
+his presence took Jack's breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew
+enough of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is the first law
+of the wilds, and that questions distinctly would not be in order. He
+decided the best thing for him would be to wait for the other to take
+the lead in the conversation.
+
+This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning even as he eased his
+stiffened fingers in the warmth of the fire.
+
+"Didn't know there was anybody else in this country," he said. "Been
+around here long?"
+
+A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows accompanied the question.
+Jack had to smile to himself.
+
+"No; not long," he said composedly. "And you?"
+
+"Oh, I been huntin' an' trappin' 'round here," the other said.
+
+To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, even a likeable, type,
+and yet that he was acting evasively. He decided it would be a good plan
+to get a more experienced head to help him deal with the situation. None
+of his party apparently was awake, all being worn out with the terrific
+strain of the day's travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, his foot was
+not six inches from Jack.
+
+Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer's attention, Jack
+moved his foot to a position where with his toe he could tap on Art's
+ankles. It was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out of the
+tail of his eye Jack saw Art's body stiffen and his head lift up
+slightly from the ground. For what followed, however, he was totally
+unprepared.
+
+Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began thumping the newcomer
+vigorously on the back.
+
+"Why, you ol' son-of-a-gun," he cried. "You ol' son-of-a-gun."
+
+"Li'l Artie, or I'm goin' blind," cried the other, seizing Art by the
+hand and pumping up and down.
+
+Jack turned in amazement to Art.
+
+"Why--why--you know each other!" he cried.
+
+"Know each other? Har, har, har," roared the giant, in a guffaw that
+aroused the others about the campfire. "Know each other? That's a good
+one."
+
+Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell and several of the others
+gathered around, looking their questions, and Art turned to satisfy
+them.
+
+"Ever hear o' Long Jim Golden?" he asked. "Well, this is him--the
+daggonedest trapper on the face o' the earth. Ain't seen him in years
+since he left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?"
+
+"Trappin'." Jim looked around at the interested faces. "You tol' who I
+am," he said. "Now tell me who's your friends, Artie."
+
+"Sure," said Art heartily, effecting introductions. "Here we all are,"
+he concluded, and then his face fell as he added: "but where we'll be
+soon, I don't know, nor what's to become of us."
+
+Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, then his eyes roved over
+the camp.
+
+"How come?" he asked. "No sleds nor dogs nor snowshoes nor nothin'. How
+come?"
+
+"Sit here by the fire and I'll tell you, Jim," said Art. "The rest o'
+you, we won't bother you none with loud voices. We'll jest whisper-like.
+You'll want to turn in and sleep, so go to it."
+
+Nothing loath, the others with the exception of Jack, who moved to one
+side so as not to intrude on the two old acquaintances thus strangely
+reunited, turned in and soon were once more asleep.
+
+Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim the circumstances leading
+up to their present position. From across the fire, Jack watched them.
+He saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art's narrative and that,
+indeed, it seemed to affect him strangely. For over his open, rugged
+features, not constructed to conceal their owner's moods, swept doubt,
+uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man was going on a fight
+between two contending forces. Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be
+thinking of?
+
+Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a hand on the shoulder of
+his companion who remained seated but looking up at him. Jack
+unconsciously moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to speak.
+He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long Jim's expression had puzzled him
+greatly. What could it mean?
+
+"Artie," said Long Jim in a louder tone than that in which their
+whispered conversation had been carried on, and one that reached Jack's
+ears, "Artie, my boy," he said, "I wish you didn't have them skunks with
+ye."
+
+"Them breeds," said Art, jerking a thumb back over a shoulder to
+indicate the prisoners sleeping about the other fire.
+
+"Them same," said Long Jim. "Cause why, you asks me? Cause I got a
+paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the Winter lapped in
+comfort. An' I don't want to take no rascals like them half-breeds
+there. But----"
+
+Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with disbelief.
+
+"What? What you mean, Long Jim?"
+
+"Jest what I says," answered the other emphatically. "A paradise, I
+calls it. An' a paradise it is. An' the quicker we git there the better,
+so wake up your friends an' let me talk to 'em. If we have to take them
+skunks, why, we'll take 'em."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.--A TALE OF PARADISE.
+
+
+At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who had been called to join
+the pair, speedily re-aroused their friends.
+
+"I ain't no hand for talkin'," Long Jim declared in answer to Art's
+requests for further information. "I got to tell this. But onct oughter
+be enough. No use my tellin' you an' then tellin' the rest o' them all
+over agin."
+
+Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was "no hand for talking,"
+yet his tongue wagged continually. However, his heart seemed in the
+right place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough of a haven not
+too far away to which they could go for refuge. What was it he called
+it? "Paradise." Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on gentle
+methods in arousing the sleepers.
+
+"Lookit here," said Long Jim, as the circle gathered around him. "Art's
+been tellin' me the trouble you folks is in. Looks to me like you
+moughtn't be able to make it out o' this country."
+
+Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation.
+
+"Well, I know of a place that's paradise," said Long Jim, impressively.
+"An' I'll take ye all there, an' ye can spend the Winter--warm, game,
+everything there. Only thing, like I tol' Artie here, is I hate to have
+to take them skunks o' half-breeds in there. They'll be a-comin' back
+later an' ruin the country."
+
+"But I don't understand," said Mr. Hampton. "What is it you are talking
+about?"
+
+"Don't blame ye," said Long Jim. "Think maybe the ol' man's crazy, don't
+ye? Don't blame ye for that, neither. But, look here, night's dyin' an'
+if ye stand up an' look where I'm pointin' ye'll see somethin'."
+
+Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others also stood up.
+
+"Thar," said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the westward. "What d'ye
+see?"
+
+"Why--a great bank of fog," said Mr. Hampton, after gazing intently. "How
+strange. Fog in Winter. I don't understand."
+
+"An' ye all think that's fog, hey?" asked Long Jim, turning to the
+others.
+
+Nodding heads answered.
+
+"Well, it ain't," he said. "That's the vapor from hot springs."
+
+"Hot springs?" Mr. Hampton sounded frankly incredulous.
+
+"Wait'll you see for yourself," said Long Jim, tolerantly. "I wouldn't
+believe it, neither, when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But
+bein' as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I went to
+investigate. An' I found paradise."
+
+Then, under Mr. Hampton's skillful questioning, Long Jim told his story.
+He declared he had lived in this region now these two years, and that
+since first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. Drawn by the
+seeming fog to investigate, he had come upon an almost tropical valley
+through which ran not only one but several rivers of water forever at
+the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, were fed by hundreds
+of hot springs, which bubbled out of the ground in all directions. It
+was the steam from these which, condensing as it rose above the valley
+and struck the cold Winter air, had formed the fog which first attracted
+his attention.
+
+"Once I were in South America," said Long Jim. "Down clost to the
+Equator. Well, I'm tellin' you, it were that hot all last Summer right
+in that valley. As for right now, ye'll find it mighty pleasant an'
+warm, an' when snow falls it's only rain by the time it passes through
+the heat hangin' over that valley all the time."
+
+"Hurray," cried Frank, exuberantly. "Let's go. No snow fellows. Get
+that? I've had all the snow I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I
+can get along without any more for some time to come."
+
+Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank's jubilation, proceeded with
+his questioning. And Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he
+could talk all he pleased, after having been without companions for
+several years, continued unfolding new wonders.
+
+This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles long and 40 miles wide.
+They were now near its upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his
+way by slow travel and exploration during the two years since his
+arrival at the southern end.
+
+Game?
+
+At the question, Long Jim grew even more eloquent.
+
+He declared that, due to the heat generated by the hot springs and the
+boiling rivers, the fertility of the soil was amazing. The vegetation,
+in fact, achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew tall as trees,
+with stems as thick as a man's forearm and so dense that it was
+impossible to force a way through them. Willows grew to the size of big
+trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk along them.
+
+"An' birches," added Long Jim, "git to be hunderds o' feet tall, so
+tall, in fact, they can't hold themselves up but bend over an' touch the
+ground.
+
+"Likely you think I'm out o' my head. Oh, I kin see it in your eyes. But
+I'm tellin' you the God's truth, men." And Long Jim spoke with such
+honest sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. "In sich a place,"
+he continued, "it ain't likely there wouldn't be no game. Why, the
+animals there is thick as flees on a ol' hound.
+
+"Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, deer, wolves, foxes, oh,
+every wild animal o' the whole North kin be found there--down in that
+valley an' in the mountains enclosin' of it. An' I tell you the truth,"
+he concluded, his voice sinking for effect, "the moose git so fat
+they're almost square an' they're so darn tame ye can almost touch 'em."
+
+As Long Jim's speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton turned and stared
+across the brightening landscape to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the
+short days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of the Arctic
+would arrive. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, all
+unprepared to face further travel as they were. Could it be possible
+that miracle had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the truth?
+
+Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was passing through the older
+man's mind. Truth to tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went
+up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders.
+
+"Come on, Dad," he said. "I believe Long Jim is telling the truth. And
+we better make the effort to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating
+a little, but certainly it looks like a promised land."
+
+"That's right, Jack," said his father, shaking off his reverie, and his
+alert self once more. "We'll have a hard enough struggle getting there,
+what with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow without
+snowshoes or sleds. Well, let's see what can be done."
+
+Eventually, the party got into motion. The canoes were cached, where
+they could be recovered in the Summer. There was little likelihood
+anybody else would pass that way, to appropriate them. Equipment was
+made into packs shouldered by everybody except Art and Bob. These two
+were to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised out of poles cut
+on the river bank, and blankets.
+
+Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which Long Jim was guiding them
+was distant not more than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the
+going was tremendously difficult because of the mass of new-fallen snow.
+Had it not been for Long Jim to break the way on his snowshoes,
+moreover, it is doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy laden as
+they were. But Long Jim worked patiently backward and forward, breaking
+down the snow, and packing it a second and even a third time with his
+webs.
+
+"How come you were out here, ol' timer?" asked Art once, as Long Jim
+paused, and he caught up with him.
+
+"Well, I git lonesome a leetle," said Long Jim. "I was prospectin'
+around in the mountains rimmin' the valley yestiddy, an' I saw you
+across the snow. Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I
+thought you were humans. I couldn't hardly believe my eyes, but I come
+along investigatin'. An' then when night come on, you lit your fires,
+an'----"
+
+"Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain't a-lyin'," said Art.
+
+Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was prepared to stand on his
+dignity but then he smiled in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all
+around his blue eyes.
+
+"Don't blame ye for that, Artie," he said. "Sounds like I were crazy,
+don't it? But jest wait till you see."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.--VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS.
+
+
+But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley proved, indeed, to be more
+even than he described, for as the world now knows important mineral
+deposits were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron and
+oil. But of the development going on to bring not only this marvelous
+region but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world's
+resources naught need be said now. Suffice it to say that such
+development is under way, for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great
+financiers, and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell and
+Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from their shares in the various
+projects.
+
+Here the party settled down, constructed huts, and prepared to await the
+coming of Spring when the snow should disappear from the vast wilderness
+separating them from the northern edge of the civilized lands and the
+ice in the rivers be unlocked.
+
+One of the first things done by the boys was to erect their radio plant,
+and they succeeded without much difficulty in opening communication with
+the little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the farthest rim of
+the settled country. MacDonald and Dick, with their prisoners, had
+arrived only a day or two before communication was opened, and the two
+parties exchanged the stories of their adventures by radio.
+
+To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of wonder as Long Jim's
+valley was to the boys. He could never get over marveling at it, and
+every time that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were in the
+vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and open-mouthed astonishment
+while the boys operated the instruments.
+
+Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful valley, at the resources
+of which Mr. Hampton could never express sufficient astonishment.
+
+"It is a freak of nature, of course, boys," he explained on one
+occasion.
+
+"How wonderful that it should have remained undiscovered for so long,"
+said Jack.
+
+"Not so marvelous," said his father. "Few, indeed, are the people who
+ever have penetrated any distance into all this vast wilderness of
+northern Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, to be
+bleak and uninhabitable. You know from experience that the contrary is
+the case. It is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted
+that, if properly clothed and housed, he can stand any severity of
+Winter. Some day, I predict, all this vast wilderness through which we
+have been making our way will be settled. That day is far off, of
+course, but it is coming. The growth of world population will force the
+conquest of the sub-Arctic."
+
+The one thing making their stay in this valley of marvels unpleasant was
+the constant rainfall. For in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping
+down from the North Pole in never-ending succession. And these storms
+which they knew were burying the land beyond the valley under a pall of
+ice and snow poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of the mountain
+ranges rimming the valley were buried under snow, gleaming wan in the
+occasional moonlight between the storms, for by now the long night had
+come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long Jim had foretold the snow as
+it passed through the temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers
+and springs was transformed into rain.
+
+Two events of importance marked their stay. One was the escape of their
+prisoners, together with some rifles which they succeeded in stealing.
+Pursuit in the darkness, and through the jungle-like reaches of the
+forest was almost hopeless and was quickly abandoned. Nor, although
+vigilant watch was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign of
+the half-breeds again.
+
+"It's a big valley," said Mr. Hampton, "and I doubt whether they will
+attempt to attack us. Rather, they will keep out of our way. They are
+poorly armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all come together.
+Their escape, I imagine, was incited by a fear of what awaited them if
+we succeeded in getting them back to civilization and the courts. Well,"
+he said, with a sigh, "I regret, of course, the loss of witnesses to
+substantiate the charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring against
+Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid of them."
+
+It was a sentiment in which all concurred.
+
+The other event referred to was the opening by means of relayed messages
+via the Mounted Post and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr.
+Temple in faraway New York. When word reached Bob's father that the
+Hampton party was safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he
+quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big business deal was
+clamoring for his attention, and sped by motor down to his Long Island
+home.
+
+Bob's sister, Della, was sitting in the library, staring spiritlessly
+out at the Winter landscape. Mr. Temple stole up behind her and,
+reaching over her shoulder, thrust the message from the radio
+corporation under her eyes.
+
+Della's glance fell and she began to read the printed words. Then she
+leaped up, whirled around, her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms
+around her father's neck.
+
+"Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee," she screamed.
+
+He held her off at arm's length and looked at her. Her eyes began to
+fill up with happy tears, and once more she threw herself into his arms.
+
+"Well, kiddy, cry all you want to," he said, comfortingly, patting her
+on the back. "I guess that's the medicine you needed. You'll be all
+right now."
+
+Mr. Temple's words bore reference to the fact that for months Della's
+health had been failing, and she had shown so little interest in her
+studies that it had been considered wiser to take her out of the
+boarding school which she attended, and bring her home.
+
+"Oh, yes, Dad-dee," she sobbed, her face buried in his coat. "I'll be
+all right now."
+
+Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked anxiously:
+
+"It says they are all safe--_all_? Doesn't it?"
+
+Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"Yes, kiddy," he said. "Frank's safe, too."
+
+"Oh, Dad-dee, I didn't mean that," said Della, blushing furiously.
+
+"No need to fib to me, kiddy," said her father. "Bob is only a brother;
+but Frank----"
+
+"No, you shan't say it," laughed Della, and she placed a hand over his
+mouth.
+
+Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that time on Della no longer
+moped and looked ill, but took an intense interest in all the daily
+affairs of life, even wanting to return at once to school.
+
+"Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things over with me," she
+explained to her mother.
+
+"Why, dear, what do you mean?"
+
+"Well--you know--she's sweet on Bob."
+
+"Oh, you girls," said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. "You'll be the death of
+me. At your age----"
+
+"At our age you were engaged to Father," said Della. "Now don't deny it.
+Dad has even told me how you planned to elope, but were overheard by
+your mother who persuaded you to be conventional and have a wedding at
+home."
+
+Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned
+shamelessly.
+
+"George, did you tell her that?"
+
+"Why not? It was the truth."
+
+"Oh, George. Aren't children nowadays hard enough to handle as it is,
+without letting them know how silly we older people were once?"
+
+"Now, Mother," said Della, rising quickly and going to her mother's
+side, and kissing her. "Don't scold Father. Can't you see he's dreaming
+of that day again?"
+
+And dancing to her father's side, Della dropped a kiss on the spot where
+his hair was thinning out, and then danced gaily from the dining-room.
+
+Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he sipped his coffee. Then
+putting down the cup, he leaned forward and said confidentially:
+
+"You do remember that time, don't you, dear?"
+
+Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by way of reproof for his
+silliness, but a softened look came into her eyes as she stared back.
+The years that intervened since their youth seemed to slip away.
+
+"Why, George," she said. "You look positively handsome."
+
+As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, apprised the
+latter of the message from the Far North to the effect that the lost had
+been found. And Della soon followed her message in person. Thereafter
+the two girls were never tired of talking about the possible adventures
+that had befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob's praises, Della
+sang Frank's. Poor Jack, it is to be feared, was somewhat slighted in
+these discussions.
+
+"I'll warrant you that Bob saved the day for them all," Marjorie said on
+one occasion. "He's so big and strong."
+
+"Well," flashed Della, "Bob's my brother, and that's all right. But if
+they ever got in a tight pinch, I'm _sure_ it was Frank that got them
+out. He's got more brains than all the rest put together."
+
+"Oh, Della, how can you say that?" cried Marjorie.
+
+"Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be always praising him?"
+demanded Della.
+
+For a moment the two girls positively glared at each other.
+
+Then the twinkle began to come, and they laughed.
+
+Then they were hugging each other.
+
+And then they were at it again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.--TREED BY WOLVES.
+
+
+One more adventure, and that a serious one, was to befall the boys as a
+final taste of life in the wilderness. One day towards the end of
+Winter, when the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, the
+three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters and had worn out
+even the amusement of listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or
+communicating with the Post of the Mounted, announced they were going
+hunting.
+
+The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, and additions to their
+larder would not be unwelcome. Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no
+objection to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long Jim
+accompany them.
+
+"I'd be no good," said Long Jim. "Sence I did that fool trick o' cuttin'
+my hand with the axe a couple-three days ago, I cain't set finger to
+trigger. You better go, Art."
+
+"All right, boys," said Art. "I'd like to stretch a leg, too."
+
+The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding the spot where
+they had chosen to erect their huts, there was no longer any game, for
+the animals had come to learn that these strange creatures brought
+destruction and had decamped elsewhere. Finally, after they had
+proceeded some distance without sighting anything, Art suggested they
+strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain side. The huts had
+been erected near the foot of one of the ranges rimming the valley.
+
+"Maybe we'll run into a mountain sheep or a goat," he said. "Anyhow, we
+can see better from a higher lever, for this forest down here is so
+thick you can hardly see a yard away. The moon's out an' up there the
+trees is thinner."
+
+With Art leading the way, the party began its upward climb. For some
+time they toiled upward until presently they reached a level unaffected
+by the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, as a
+consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across a bare shoulder of rock from
+which the wind had swept all but a trace of snow they made their way and
+then plunged into a thick woods beyond.
+
+Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle and bent over to adjust
+the clumsy lacing of a thick shoe pack of the kind they had made for
+themselves from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding along,
+head down, did not notice he had stopped, and kept on going. He spent
+more time at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally he
+straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were not in sight.
+
+Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure he would be able to
+trace them in the snow and would soon catch up with them. He set out at
+a brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where the wind had not had
+a chance to whisk it away, and the going was hard. He had proceeded some
+distance before he noticed that he had gotten off the trail left by his
+companions. Angry with himself for his carelessness, but still not
+worried, he halted to consider what was best for him to do.
+
+"Shucks," he said aloud. "Guess I better go back over my steps till I
+find where I left their trail."
+
+And with this intention, he turned to go back. Even as he did so, he saw
+a pack of long gray bodies racing through the trees in his direction. At
+the same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of wolves. They had
+scented him and were now lifting the cry which announced their prey was
+near.
+
+Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, but then he lowered
+it. The flitting forms were still yards away. And although moonlight
+sifted through the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently
+illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. He decided his best
+plan would be to seek refuge in a tree first of all, and then he could
+fire at the wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim that would
+not now be his. These thoughts or reflections flashed through his mind
+in an instant. The next moment he was putting his plan into execution,
+and climbing into a tall fir.
+
+He was not a moment too soon, either, for the baying came closer and
+closer and even as he struggled frantically to climb higher the leader
+of the wolf pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high into
+the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, and looked down into a
+yawning red cavern of a mouth.
+
+The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, and fell on the snout
+of the wolf who leaped aside in temporary panic. Then the rest of the
+pack arrived on the scene, jumping and snarling, their heads in the air,
+their wicked eyes agleam as they scented the prey they had treed but
+which temporarily had escaped them.
+
+Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself,
+for he was sick with vexation at his own carelessness in not having
+properly, secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close about the
+tree, looking up, and one big fellow even put his forefeet against the
+trunk and reared high till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then
+he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an expectant ring
+close about the foot of the tree.
+
+When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself to a serious
+consideration of his position. And at once he realized that he must try
+before it was too late and they got out of earshot to attract the
+attention of his comrades. Perhaps already they had gotten beyond reach.
+At that he had a moment of panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved
+away, he told himself, they would discover his absence presently and
+retrace their steps in search of him.
+
+He still had his revolver. At first he did not trust himself to handle
+it, because of the trembling of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand
+steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his companions' attention
+first of all. And raising his voice, he sent call after call ringing
+through the forest.
+
+The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon the whole pack was
+snarling and yowling and making a terrific, demoniac din.
+
+The sound steadied him.
+
+"Good," he thought, "the boys will know there are wolves, anyway."
+
+Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting them. And once more
+they came up to the foot of the tree, rearing their forefeet against it
+and leaping upward. It was Frank's chance, and he took it.
+
+With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he leaned forward and took
+careful aim at the biggest of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the
+wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It was his last. Frank's
+bullet plunged down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow.
+
+His mates without a second's hesitation deserted their attempts to get
+at Frank, and began snarling over the dead body. The sight sickened
+Frank, and he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred that,
+if he added several more corpses to the ghoulish feast, he might divert
+the attention of the rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be
+able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his way through the trees
+for a short distance before jumping to the ground.
+
+There was no need now for care in aiming, as the wolves were in a thick
+mass over the body of the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid
+succession into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, for two
+more wolves went down, and the tearing and crunching announced a renewal
+of the awful feast.
+
+Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if possible. He had heard no
+answering replies, and believed his companions must have gotten out of
+earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources to make his escape.
+He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which
+interlocked with those of the tree in which he had found refuge, when
+the thought occurred that, perhaps, he would be able to obtain his rifle
+undiscovered by the wolves.
+
+Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately on the snarling
+wolf pack several yards from the tree and on the limbs he must grip in
+his descent. He had almost reached the lowermost limb when his grip
+slipped and he fell.
+
+Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck the ground his hands
+closed on the coveted rifle, and he scrabbled to regain his feet,
+flinging the rifle to his shoulder as he did so.
+
+His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned aside from the
+outskirts of the pack, where he was not getting his share of the
+gruesome feast, and sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang out
+from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering at his feet.
+
+"Steady, Frank," cried Art's voice. "Give 'em all you've got."
+
+Without looking around, mastering his trembling by a supreme effort,
+Frank brought the rifle to his shoulder and began firing into the pack,
+even as the three rifles of his companions also opened fire.
+
+At that close range every shot told and not a wolf escaped. Eleven
+bodies, including the mutilated remains of the three which Frank had
+slain with revolver shots, were stretched on the snow under the trees.
+
+When it was all over, his companions gathered about Frank and
+explanations followed. Then they made their way back to camp.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION.
+
+
+Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the party containing our
+friends and the Thorwaldsson party as well as Long Jim Golden, all
+bronzed and hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body and mind,
+swung around a bend in a river and came to the landing which marked the
+first outpost of civilization--the trading post where was also located
+the Fort of the Mounted.
+
+A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was first to see them, and
+whooping and shouting he ran up the bank towards the store. Out of the
+door of the trading post came a figure in uniform.
+
+"Dick."
+
+"Art."
+
+The two pals were reunited.
+
+And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for out of the store came
+Mr. Temple and Della. For ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on,
+while Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood to one side,
+their faces set in wide grins.
+
+"What in the world?" demanded Mr. Hampton, at length, holding his
+partner and neighbor at arm's length. "What in the world brought you
+here?"
+
+"A motor boat," said Mr. Temple. "That was a surprise for you. When we
+received your radio message via the post here, which relayed it to
+Edmonton--that first one, you know, announcing you were leaving for the
+outside--I decided I would have to be on hand to greet you. So I got into
+communication with Captain Jameson, and learned from him that I could
+reach one of his posts farther south by motor car, and then come up the
+river in a launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge of the
+wilderness."
+
+He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still kept an arm, and smiled.
+
+"Good old Dad," said Bob, giving him a hug. "But what brought Della?"
+
+"Oh, the same means," answered his father.
+
+"No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her straying brother?"
+
+"Well, now, Bob, you'll have to form your own opinion," said Mr. Temple,
+eyes a-twinkle.
+
+Della who had been standing close to Frank, her hands clasped in his,
+looked calmly at Bob.
+
+"Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob," she said. "But her mother
+wouldn't let her. She sent you a message."
+
+"Huh."
+
+Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. Nevertheless, at the
+first opportunity he got his sister to one side, and, snatching the
+letter she tendered him, went off by himself to read it.
+
+There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the launch, and in a
+canoe towed behind, and so, after a short rest, a start downstream was
+made at once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them, but soon
+fell behind amid a gay waving of farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make
+arrangements for their reception at the next post and at Edmonton. The
+launch would be sent back for them when the post was reached.
+
+At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively few years of its
+existence has grown to the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got
+their first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them across the
+continent, reaching its height on their arrival in New York. For word of
+their coming had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them,
+representing the great newspapers and news-gathering syndicates of not
+only North America but of Europe, too.
+
+"You see, boys," said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel rooms, when they
+protested to him at being besieged every minute of the day by reporters,
+"you are the center of the romantic interest of the world. You rescued
+the Lost Expedition and discovered strange new territory. You have had
+the wildest kind of adventures. How do you expect the world to take that
+calmly? It can't be done. No, you may as well submit gracefully, and
+talk when questioned."
+
+The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited by the newspapermen,
+and pictures began to appear throughout the country, showing the daring
+young explorer and his sweetheart. When they were taken, neither Frank
+nor Della knew, but the truth of the matter was that they were together
+so much of the time it was the easiest matter in the world for a
+photographer to snap them.
+
+In New York the same thing was gone through with again, only, if
+anything, worse. And this time, the reporters finding that Marjorie
+Faulkner appeared to greet the returned heroes, scented a new romance,
+and questioned the boys about it. Bob and Frank refused to answer, but
+Jack slyly tipped off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and Bob a
+real romance was, indeed, budding.
+
+In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, and gave the
+newspapermen a story to the effect that Jack was champing at the bit to
+be off to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who awaited him, none
+other, in fact, than the Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an
+old Don who had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support of the
+story they told the newspapermen of their adventures several years
+before on the Mexican border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton from
+captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love with the daughter of
+the Mexican leader responsible for Mr. Hampton's capture.
+
+It all made good copy for the reporters, who had about exhausted the
+possibilities of the northern adventure, and who now plunged head first
+into this former adventure, of which nothing had been known at the time.
+
+Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire vengeance on Bob and
+Frank. But the latter pointed out that they had but turned the tables on
+him.
+
+"Well, anyway," he said, finally, beginning to smile, "you haven't got
+the best part of the story yet."
+
+Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to tell what he meant.
+But he refused. Several days later he disappeared. When they asked Mr.
+Hampton what had become of him he finally surrendered and gave the
+secret away.
+
+"Well, boys," he said, "when we returned I found a courteous note from
+Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business
+connected with the government, and asking me to call. I guess Jack has
+taken a train for Washington, and gone calling."
+
+With which happy forecast of good luck to come to all three of the Radio
+Boys, we shall leave them for the present, secure in the belief that if
+at any future date they go adventuring they will be well able to take
+care of themselves, and also that they will get into adventures well
+worth reading about.
+
+
+                                THE END
+
+
+
+
+The Radio Boys Series
+
+BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE
+
+A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages.
+
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER
+    THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY
+    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS
+    THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE
+    THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
+    THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA
+    THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS
+    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL
+    THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Golden Boys Series
+
+BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D.
+
+Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.
+
+A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School
+Age.
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM
+    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Lakewood Boys Series
+
+By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D.
+
+A new series of copyright stories for boys of High School Age by the
+Author of "The Golden Boys Series."
+
+Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA
+    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Boy Scout Series
+
+By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON
+
+A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense through
+organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting an accurate
+description of Boy Scouts activities.
+
+ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL
+    THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP
+    THE BOY SCOUTS' MOUNTAIN  CAMP
+    THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL
+    THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO
+    THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS
+    THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE
+    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Border Boys Series
+
+By Fremont B. Deering
+
+Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+With Individual Jackets in Colors.
+
+Cloth Bound
+
+    BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL
+    BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER
+    BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS
+    BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS
+    BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES
+    BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Ranger Boys Series
+
+BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE
+
+A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 years telling of the
+adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE
+    THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT
+    THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS
+    THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES
+    THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Troopers Series
+
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+
+Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series.
+
+The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Copyrighted Titles.
+
+Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL
+    THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST
+    THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY
+    THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+Frank Armstrong Series
+
+By MATTHEW M. COLTON
+
+Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing Athletics from Start
+to Finish. For Boys 10 to 15 Years.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+Cloth Bound
+
+With Attractive Jackets in Colors.
+
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG'S VACATION
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG'S SECOND TERM
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE
+    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Allies
+
+(Registered in the United States Patent Office)
+
+With the Army
+
+BY CLAIR W. HAYES
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Cloth Bound
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+Postage 10c extra.
+
+In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to
+leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the
+Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and
+escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every
+boy loves.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;
+    or, Through Lines of Steel.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;
+    or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;
+    or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;
+    or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;
+    or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;
+    or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;
+     or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;
+    or, Saving France from the Enemy.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;
+    or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;
+    or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;
+    or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;
+    or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Boy Allies
+
+(Registered in the United States Patent Office)
+
+With the Navy
+
+BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE
+
+For Boys 12 to 16 Years.
+
+All Cloth Bound
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+Postage 10c Extra
+
+Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other
+in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place
+them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they
+share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake,
+the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably
+the many exciting adventures of the two boys.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;
+    or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;
+    or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;
+    or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;
+    or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;
+    or, The Vanishing Submarine.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;
+    or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;
+    or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS;
+    or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;
+    or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.
+
+    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;
+    or, The Fall of the German Navy.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Oakdale Academy Series
+
+BY MORGAN SCOTT
+
+A series of real boys' stories at the Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the
+hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances and against great odds.
+
+Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports of academy
+life, with adventures, mysteries and clever descriptions.
+
+Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would like to read.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+JACKETS IN COLORS
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+Copyright Titles
+
+    BEN STONE AT OAKDALE
+    BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY
+    RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE
+    OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP
+    THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY
+    THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+The Rex Kingdon Series
+
+By GORDON BRADDOCK
+
+A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, written in an
+interesting and instructive style.
+
+Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested in outdoor
+games, enters into the school sports with enthusiasm. A rattling good
+baseball story holds the interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood
+friends establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery,
+jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their interest
+and finally cement their friendship.
+
+Stories boys will want to read.
+
+CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS.
+
+Copyright Titles.
+
+PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH
+
+POSTAGE 10c EXTRA
+
+    REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH
+    REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS
+    REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL
+    REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT
+    REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the
+Publishers
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska
+Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 36314-0.txt or 36314-0.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/36314.zip b/36314.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e88ad2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/36314.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b887448
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #36314 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/36314)